System Manual

1. Edition

sirius
Safety guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to pro-
tect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle
and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:

Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are
not taken.

Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Attention
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particu-
lar part of the documentation.

Qualified personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defi-
ned as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in
acc. with established safety practices and standards.

Correct usage
Note the following:

Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalogue or the techni-
cal descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have
been approved or recommended by Siemens.

This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly,
and operated and maintained as recommended.

Brands
SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI® and SIMATIC NET® are brands of SIEMENS AG.
Some other designations used in these documents are also brands; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by
third parties for their own purposes.

Copyright Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Disclaimer of liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its con- We have checked this manual to ensure that its contents are correct
tents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders and applicable in relation to the hardware and software it describes.
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by Despite all our endeavors, however, discrepancies cannot be wholly
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. excluded and so we cannot guarantee complete correctness and
applicability. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Sug-
gestions for improvement are welcomed.

Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 9131-7-43833 (8°° - 17°° CET) Fax: +49 (0) 9131-7-42899
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Technical Support: Telephone: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschäftsgebiet Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik  Siemens AG 2001
D-91050 Erlangen Technical data subject to change without notice.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Contents
1 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2 Overview: Range of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3 System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4 Components and combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5 Mounting methods and terminal systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.1 Mounting the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.2 Screw-type terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.5.3 Cage Clamp terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.5.4 Connection cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.6 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.6.1 Communication-capable low-voltage switching technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.6.2 Parameterization of PROFIBUS-DP and bus-capable low-voltage switching devices . 1-23
1.6.3 Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

2 3RV1 circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.3 Information on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3 Field of application/variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.1 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.2 Transformer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.3 Starter protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.4 Circuit breakers with overload relay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.5 Fuse monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.6 Switching direct current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.3.7 Main and emergency stop switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.4.1 Attachable accessories: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.4.2 Auxiliary switch, alarm switch, and auxiliary release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.4.3 Motorized remote-control mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.4.4 Disconnecting module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.4.5 Rotary switch extension for door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.4.6 Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508 . . . . . . 2-31
2.4.7 Housings and mounting accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.4.8 Busbar adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.4.9 Isolated 3-phase busbar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.5.3 Device circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.6 Dimensioned drawings (measurements in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.7 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
2.7.1 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
2.7.2 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
2.7.3 Limiter function with standard devices for 500 VAC and 690 VAC
in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b i
3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.1.1 Utilization categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2 Positively driven operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.3 Safe isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.4 Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.2.1 Actuating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.2.2 Short-circuit protection of the SIRIUS contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.2.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.2.3.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.2.3.2 Contact reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3 Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.1 3RT10 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.2 3RT1446 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching resistive loads (AC-1) . . . . 3-21
3.3.3 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors with 4 main contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.3.4 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors for switching capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.3.5 Contactors with an extended operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.3.5.1 Contactors with an extended operating range (3RH11...-0LA0/3RT10...-0LA0) . . . . . 3-27
3.3.5.2 Contactors with an extended operating range
(3RH1122-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4., 3RT102.-3K.40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.3.6 3RH1 auxiliary contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.3.7 3RT10 contactor relays for switching motors (interface) and 3RH11
contactor relays for switching auxiliary circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.3.8 Contactor combinations for reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.3.9 Star-delta combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.4.1 Attachable auxiliary switches for extending the auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.4.1.1 Terminal markings of the contactors (frame sizes S00 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.4.1.2 Terminal markings of the contactors and auxiliary contactors combined with
auxiliary switch blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.4.1.3 Auxiliary switches that can be attached to 3RH1 auxiliary contactors . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.4.2 Time-delay auxiliary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.4.2.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2E, -2F, -2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.4.2.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2E, -2F, -2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.4.3 Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.4.3.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2C, -2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.4.3.2 Frame size S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2C, -2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.4.4 Additional load module (3RT1916-1GA00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3.4.5 Coupling element for frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RH1924-1GP11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.4.6 Surge suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.4.7 Other accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.4.7.1 LED module for indicating contactor control (3RT1926-1QT00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.4.7.2 Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole (for frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.4.7.3 EMC module (3RT1916-1P..) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.4.7.4 Soldering pin connector for frame size S00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.4.7.5 Parallel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3.4.7.6 Covers for frame sizes S2 and S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.5.1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3.5.3 Changing the magnet coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3.5.4 Changing the contact piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97

SIRIUS System Manual

ii GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
3.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3.7 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110

4 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.1 Overload relays in motor feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.2 General device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3 Application and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.3.1 3RU11 thermal overload relay and 3RB10 electronic overload relay . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.3.2 3RB12 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.1 Electromechanical remote reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.2 Mechanical remote reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.5.1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.5.3 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.7 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.7.1 3RU11 thermal overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.7.2 3RB10 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.7.3 3RB12 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

5 3RA1 fuseless load feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2 Device descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Mounting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Mounting kits for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.3 Complete devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.1 Accessories for the individual devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.2 Accessories specifically for the SIRIUS 3RA fuseless load feeder . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.3 Instructions for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.5.3 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.7 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

6 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Specifications/regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.1 Relay coupling modules versus semiconductor coupling modules . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.2 Coupling links in two-tier and box terminal format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.3 Plug-in relay coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.4 Coupling links for direct attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.2.5 SIRIUS contactor relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.2.6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b iii
6.2.7 Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.2.8 Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3 Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.2 Criteria for selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4.1 Accessories for two-tier coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4.2 Accessories for LZX plug-in relay coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.5.1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.5.3 Device circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.7 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

7 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.1 Device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.2.3 Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.4 Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.5 Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3 Applications and uses (types of function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.1 Multifunction (3RP10 00 solid-state time relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.2 Multifunctional (3RP15 05 solid-state time relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.3.3 On-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.4 Off-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.3.5 Clock pulse generator (3RP15 55 solid-state time relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.3.6 Star-delta function (3RP15 74/76 solid-state time relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.3.7 Star-delta function with overtravel (3RP15 60 solid-state time relay) . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.4.1 Accessories for 3RP10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.4.2 Accessories for 3RP15 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.5.1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.5.3 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.7 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

8 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.1 Physical principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.2 General device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.3 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the
SIKOSTART 3RW22 and SIKOSTART 3RW34 motor control units . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.2.4 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter)
with the 3RA star-delta combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.2.5 Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.3 Application and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

SIRIUS System Manual

iv GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
8.3.1 Areas of application and criteria for selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.3.2 Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.3.3 Overview tables: correction factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.3.1 3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.3.2 3RW30/31 soft starters in combination with the 3RV1 circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.3.3.3 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RU1 thermal overload relay
and 3RW3 soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8.3.3.4 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RB10 electronic overload relay
and 3RW3 soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.3.4 Circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.3.5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.3.6 Event messages and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.3.7 Timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8.5.1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8.5.3 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8.7 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.7.1 Control electronics/power electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.7.2 Short-circuit protection and fuse coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8.7.3 Site altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.7.4 Specifications in acc. with IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
8.7.5 Specifications in acc. with NEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Index Index-1

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b v
Figures
Figure 1-1: SIRIUS system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-2: Circuit breaker, accessories (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-3: Circuit breakers, accessories (frame sizes S0, S2, and S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-4: Contactors, accessories (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-5: Contactors, accessories (frame sizes S0 to S3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1-6: Device combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Figure 1-7: Contactor combination for reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Figure 1-8: Cage Clamp terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 1-9: Conductor cross-sections £ 1 mm² . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Figure 1-10: Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Figure 2-1: 3RV1 circuit breakers (frame sizes S00 to S3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-2: Setting the current setting Ie (example: frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-3: Sealing the adjustment scale (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-4: Tripped position, 3RV (frame size S0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-5: Locking the toggle switch (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-6: Time-current characteristic, chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-7: Frequency sensitivity of the n-short-circuit releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-8: Circuit breaker with overload relay function (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-9: Circuit diagrams of circuit breakers for fuse monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-10: Mounting the transverse auxiliary switch (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Figure 2-11: Mounting/removing the lateral auxiliary switch/undervoltage release (frame size S00) 2-20
Figure 2-12: Mounting the disconnecting module (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Figure 2-13: Locking the disconnecting module (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-14: Locking the disconnecting module and mounting the cover (frame size S2) . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-15: Mounting the rotary switch extension for the door (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Figure 2-16: Operating the rotary switch extension for the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Figure 2-17: Locking the rotary switch extension for the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Figure 2-18: Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Figure 2-19: Molded-plastic surface casing (frame size S00). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Figure 2-20: Molded-plastic bay (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-21: Mounting the front plate (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Figure 2-22: Mounting the front plate (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Figure 2-23: Accessories for the housings and front plates (frame size S00). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Figure 2-24: Indicator light installation in a molded-plastic housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Figure 2-25: Mounting circuit breakers on busbar adapters (frame sizes S00 and S0) . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Figure 2-26: Mounting circuit breakers on busbar adapters (frame sizes S2 and S3) . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Figure 2-27: Accessories for busbar adapters (frame sizes S00 to S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Figure 2-28: 3-phase busbar system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Figure 2-29: Mounting the isolated 3-phase busbar system (frame sizes S00 to S0) . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Figure 2-30: Mounting the isolated 3-phase busbar system (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Figure 2-31: Mounting the circuit breakers onto the rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Figure 2-32: Screw-on mounting of the 3RV1 (example: frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Figure 2-33: Circuit breaker, soldering pin connector (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Figure 2-34: Device circuit diagram (frame size S00). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Figure 2-35: Device circuit diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Figure 2-36: Circuit breaker with relay function, device circuit diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . 2-48
Figure 2-37: 3RV10 11, 3RV16 (frame size S00), 3RV10 21 (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-38: 3RV10 31 (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-39: 3RV10 4 (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-40: 3RV11 21 (frame size S0), 3RV11 31 (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b vii
Figure 2-41: 3RV11 42 (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Figure 2-42: 3RV19 28-1A (for frame size S0), 3RV19 38-1A (for frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Figure 2-43: 3RV19 13-1. (for frame size S00). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Figure 2-44: 3RV19 23-1. (for frame size S0), 3RV19 33-1. (for frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Figure 2-45: 3RV19 13-2DA00 (frame size S00), 3RV19 23-2DA00/-2GA00 (frame size S0). . . . . . 2-52
Figure 2-46: 3RV19 13-4C (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Figure 2-47: 3RV19 23-4. (frame sizes S0, S2, S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Figure 2-48: 3RV19 18-5A/-5B (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Figure 2-49: 3RV19 26-0 (frame sizes S0, S2, S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Figure 2-50: 3RV19 28-1H (frame size S0) and 3RT19 46-4GA07 (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Figure 2-51: 3RV19. 6-3AP0 for circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Figure 2-52: 8US10.1-5DJ07, 8US1061-5FK08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-53: 8US1251-5DM07, 8US1261-5FM08, 8US1923-2AA00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-54: 3RV19 15-1. (frame sizes S00, S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-55: 3RV19 35-1 (for circuit breakers in frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Figure 2-56: 3RV19 35-3 (for circuit breakers in frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Figure 2-57: 3RV19 15-5A, 3RV19 15-5B, 3RV19 25-5AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Figure 2-58: 3RV19 35-5A, 3RV19 15-5D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Figure 3-1: Frame sizes of the 3RT1 contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-2: Contact areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-3: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S00) 3-17
Figure 3-4: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S0). 3-17
Figure 3-5: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S2). 3-18
Figure 3-6: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S3). 3-18
Figure 3-7: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-8: Capacitor-switching contactors (frame sizes S0 and S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Figure 3-9: Capacitor-switching contactors, circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Figure 3-10: Contactors with an extended operating range, circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Figure 3-11: Contactors with an extended operating range, terminal markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Figure 3-12: Contactors with an extended operating range, circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Figure 3-13: Contactor relays: voltage ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Figure 3-14: Fully assembled contactor combination for reversing (frame sizes S00 and S0) . . . . 3-32
Figure 3-15: Star-delta combination, locking device at the front (frame size S0). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3-16: Star-delta combination, locking devices at the front (frame sizes S2/S3) . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3-17: 4-pole contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Figure 3-18: 4-pole contactor combination for reversing (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Figure 3-19: NC contact interlock (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Figure 3-20: Contactor combination for reversing, main circuit (frame sizes S00 to S3) . . . . . . . . 3-40
Figure 3-21: Contactor combination for reversing, control circuit (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Figure 3-22: Contactor combination for reversing, control circuit (frame sizes S0 to S3). . . . . . . . 3-41
Figure 3-23: Star-delta combinations (frame sizes S00, S0, S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Figure 3-24: Star-delta combination (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Figure 3-25: Star-delta combination, main circuit (frame sizes S00 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Figure 3-26: Star-delta combination, control circuit (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Figure 3-27: Star-delta combination, control circuit (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Figure 3-28: Accessories for contactors of frame size S00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Figure 3-29: Accessories for auxiliary contactors/contactor relays of frame size S00. . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Figure 3-30: Accessories for contactors of frame size S00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Figure 3-31: Auxiliary switch at front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Figure 3-32: Auxiliary switch at side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Figure 3-33: Switching of the auxiliary contact elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Figure 3-34: Auxiliary contacts, contactors for switching motors (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

SIRIUS System Manual

viii GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
Figure 3-35: Auxiliary contacts, contactors for switching motors (frame sizes S0 to S3). . . . . . . . 3-59
Figure 3-36: Graphical symbols for auxiliary contact elements in acc. with EN 50 012 (excerpt). . . 3-60
Figure 3-37: Device circuit diagrams of the auxiliary switch blocks (DIN EN 50 012) . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Figure 3-38: Auxiliary contacts for auxiliary contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Figure 3-39: Graphical symbols for auxiliary contactors in acc. with EN 50 011 (excerpt) . . . . . . . 3-62
Figure 3-40: Device circuit diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Figure 3-41: Position diagrams of the auxiliary switches (frame sizes S0 to S3). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Figure 3-42: Time-delay auxiliary switch block (frame size S00). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Figure 3-43: Function diagrams of the time-delay auxiliary switches (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Figure 3-44: Time-delay auxiliary switch block (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Figure 3-45: Time-delay auxiliary switches, function diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Figure 3-46: Control of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Figure 3-47: Solid-state time relay block with semiconductor output, installation (frame size S00) . 3-68
Figure 3-48: Solid-state time relay block with semiconductor output,
function diagrams (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Figure 3-49: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, circuit diagrams (frame size S00) . . 3-69
Figure 3-50: Solid-state time relay with a semiconductor output, installation (frame size S00) . . . . 3-69
Figure 3-51: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Figure 3-52: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Figure 3-53: Coupling link (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Figure 3-54: Coupling link, circuit diagram (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Figure 3-55: Disconnecting an unused contactor coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Figure 3-56: Circuit with a varistor (AC/DC operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Figure 3-57: Circuit with an RC element (AC/DC operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Figure 3-58: Circuit with a diode (AC/DC operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Figure 3-59: Surge suppressors, installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Figure 3-60: RC element/varistor, circuit diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Figure 3-61: LED module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Figure 3-62: EMC suppression module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Figure 3-63: Soldering pin connection, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Figure 3-64: Mounting the soldering pin connection on a 4-pole auxiliary switch block . . . . . . . . 3-81
Figure 3-65: Removing the spring from the soldering pin connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Figure 3-66: Terminal covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Figure 3-67: 3RT: Screw-on attachment (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Figure 3-68: Snap-on attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Figure 3-69: Installation positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Figure 3-70: Cage Clamp terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Figure 3-71: Insulation stop with Cage Clamp terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Figure 3-72: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S0/AC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Figure 3-73: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S2/AC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Figure 3-74: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S2/DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Figure 3-75: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S3/AC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Figure 3-76: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S3/DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Figure 3-77: Replacing the contact piece (frame size S2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Figure 3-78: Replacing the contact piece (frame size S3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Figure 3-79: Contact pieces (frame sizes S2/S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Figure 3-80: 3RT1. 10 1/3RH11 contactors (frame size S00). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Figure 3-81: 3RT10 2 contactors, 3RT10 2 contactor relays (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Figure 3-82: 3RT10 3 (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Figure 3-83: 3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Figure 3-84: 3RT10 1 (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Figure 3-85: 3RT13 1, 3RT15 1 (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b ix
Figure 3-86: 3RT13 2, 3RT15 2 (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-101
Figure 3-87: 3RT133, 3RT153 (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-102
Figure 3-88: 3RT13 4 (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-102
Figure 3-89: 3RT1626 (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-103
Figure 3-90: 3RT1636 (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-103
Figure 3-91: 3RT1646 (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-103
Figure 3-92: 3RT10 17, 3RH 11 (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-104
Figure 3-93: 3RT10 2, view from right (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-104
Figure 3-94: 3RT103, view from right (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-104
Figure 3-95: 3RT104, view from right (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-104
Figure 3-96: 3RT1916-2E.., -2F.., -2G.. (frame size S00),
3RT19 26-2E.., -2F.., -2G.. (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-105
Figure 3-97: 3RT19 16-2 (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ..
3RT19 26-2 (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-105
Figure 3-98: 3RH19 11-1AA.., 3RH19 11-1BA.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-105
Figure 3-99: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-107
Figure 3-100: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-107
Figure 3-101: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-107
Figure 3-102: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-107
Figure 3-103: 3RA1924-2B (frame sizes S0 to S3)
3RA1924-1A (frame sizes S0 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-108
Figure 3-104: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S00 - S00 - S00) . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-108
Figure 3-105: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S0 - S0 - S0) . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-108
Figure 3-106: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S2 - S2 - S0) . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-108
Figure 3-107: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S2 - S2 - S2) . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-109
Figure 3-108: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S3 - S3 - S3) . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 3-109
Figure 4-1: 3RU11 overload relays (frame sizes S00 to S2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-6
Figure 4-2: 3RU11 overload relay (frame size S3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-6
Figure 4-3: 3RB12 electronic overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-7
Figure 4-4: 3RU11 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-15
Figure 4-5: Setting the rated current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-16
Figure 4-6: Sealing the adjustment scale (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-16
Figure 4-7: Manual/automatic switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-17
Figure 4-8: Time-current characteristic, chart for the 3RU11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-18
Figure 4-9: Time-current characteristics for class 10 and class 20, chart for the 3RB10 . .. .. .. 4-18
Figure 4-10: Front view of the 3RB12 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-19
Figure 4-11: Time-current characteristics, chart for the 3RB12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-21
Figure 4-12: Electronic overload relay with analog output, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-21
Figure 4-13: Electrical remote reset, installation/removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-23
Figure 4-14: Mechanical remote reset: resetting plunger, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-24
Figure 4-15: Mechanical remote reset: resetting plunger, removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-24
Figure 4-16: Mechanical remote reset: wire release, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-25
Figure 4-17: Mechanical remote reset: wire release, removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-25
Figure 4-18: Mounting onto the 3RT contactor/3RW3 soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-26
Figure 4-19: Stand-alone holder, example 3RU11 (frame size S00/S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-27
Figure 4-20: Stand-alone holder, example 3RU11 (frame size S2/S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-27
Figure 4-21: Snap-on mounting and removal with the 3RT contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-27
Figure 4-22: Permissible installation positions for the 3RU11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-28
Figure 4-23: Loop-through system, 3RB1246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-29
Figure 4-24: 3RU11: Cage Clamp terminal (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-30
Figure 4-25: 3RU11 circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-31
Figure 4-26: 3RU11 and 3RB10 device circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4-31

SIRIUS System Manual

x GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
Figure 4-27: Connection example for the 3RU11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-32
Figure 4-28: Connection example for the 3RU10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-32
Figure 4-29: Connection plants for 3RB12 single-phase motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-33
Figure 4-30: 3RU11 16-..B0, (frame size S00)
3RU11 16, 3RB10 16, (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-34
Figure 4-31: 3RU11 26-.B., 3RB10 26, (frame size S0)
3RU11 36-..B., 3RB10 36, (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-34
Figure 4-32: 3RU11 46-..B., 3RB10 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-34
Figure 4-33: 3RB12 46, 3RB12 5. / 3RB12 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-35
Figure 4-34: 3RU11 16-..C1 (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-35
Figure 4-35: 3RU11 26-..D0 (frame size S0), 3RU11 36-..D0 (frame size S2) . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-35
Figure 4-36: 3RU11 46-..D0 (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 4-36
Figure 5-1: Rail adapter/busbar adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-4
Figure 5-2: Self-assembly of a fuseless load feeder (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-5
Figure 5-3: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-9
Figure 5-4: Self-assembly, rail, direct starter (frame sizes S00 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-10
Figure 5-5: Self-assembly, rail, direct starter (frame size S00, Cage Clamp) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-11
Figure 5-6: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-12
Figure 5-7: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame sizes S2 and S3) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-13
Figure 5-8: Self-assembly, busbars, direct starters (frame sizes S00 and S2) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-14
Figure 5-9: Self-assembly, busbars, direct starters (frame size S00/S0, Cage Clamp) .. .. .. .. 5-15
Figure 5-10: Self-assembly, busbars, reversing operation (frame sizes S00 and S0) . . .. .. .. .. 5-16
Figure 5-11: Self-assembly, busbars, reversing operation (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-17
Figure 5-12: Screw-on attachment, fuseless load feeder (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-19
Figure 5-13: Busbar system, mounting/removal (frame sizes S00 to S2) . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-20
Figure 5-14: Circuit diagrams, direct starters (frame sizes S00 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-23
Figure 5-15: Circuit diagrams, reversing starters (frame sizes S00 to S3) . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-23
Figure 5-16: 3RA11 10-..A.. for direct-on-line starting
3RA12 10-..A.. for reversing operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-24
Figure 5-17: 3RA11 10-..C.., 3RA11 10-..D.. for direct-on-line starting
3RA12 10-..C.., 3RA12 10-..D.. for reversing operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-24
Figure 5-18: 3RA11 20-..A.. for direct-on-line starting
3RA12 20-..B.. for reversing operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-25
Figure 5-19: 3RA11 20-..C.., 3RA11 20-..D.. for direct-on-line starting
3RA1220-..C.., 3RA1120-..D.. for reversing operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-25
Figure 5-20: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S2)
3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-26
Figure 5-21: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S0)
3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-26
Figure 5-22: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S3)
3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 5-27
Figure 6-1: Output coupler, Input coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 6-5
Figure 6-2: Basic circuit diagram, line capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 6-8
Figure 6-3: Application example, coupling links in box terminal format. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 6-10
Figure 6-4: 24-pole connection lead for two-tier coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 6-12
Figure 6-5: 24-pole connection comb for two-tier coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 6-12
Figure 6-6: Cage Clamp terminals, coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 6-14
Figure 7-1: 3RP1000 solid-state time relay, multifunctional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 7-3
Figure 7-2: 3RP15 solid-state time relay, multifunctional with 2 changeover contacts .. .. .. .. 7-4
Figure 7-3: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 7-8
Figure 7-4: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) function setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 7-9
Figure 7-5: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 7-11

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b xi
Figure 7-6: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) function identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-7: 3RP10 function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-8: 3RP15 1. function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-9: 3RP15 25 function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-10: 3RP15 27 function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-11: 3RP15 3. function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-12: 3RP15 40 function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Figure 7-13: 3RP15 55 function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Figure 7-14: 3RP15 7. function diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Figure 7-15: Coding plug set (3RP10 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-16: Label set (3RP15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-17: Screw-on attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Figure 7-18: 3RP10: mounting on and removal from a 35 mm rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7-19: Rail mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7-20: Cage Clamp terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Figure 8-1: 3RW3 soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-1: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-2: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-3: Method of operation of a frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Figure 8-4: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the 3RW3 soft starter 8-9
Figure 8-5: Current and torque curves for a soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-6: Time ramp/timing diagram, 3RW30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Figure 8-7: Time ramp, 3RW31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Figure 8-8: Overview of soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Figure 8-9: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter . . 8-17
Figure 8-10: 3RW3 soft starter + 3RV1 circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-11: 3RT+3RU1+3RW3 combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Figure 8-12: 3RT+3RB10+3RW3 combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Figure 8-13: 3RT+3RW3+3RB10 combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Figure 8-14: Circuit example, 3RW3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Figure 8-15: Settings, 3RW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Figure 8-16: Position of the terminals and the potentiometers for adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Figure 8-17: Starting and coasting-down behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Figure 8-18: Supply interruption in the bypassed state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Figure 8-19: Accessories: attachment of the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Figure 8-20: Connection example with an RC element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Figure 8-21: Circuit diagrams, 3RW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Figure 8-22: Circuit diagrams, 3RW30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Figure 8-23: Circuit diagrams, 3RW31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Figure 8-24: Motor control with an electromechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Figure 8-25: Reductions as a function of site altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

SIRIUS System Manual

xii GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
Tables
Table 1-1: Components and combinations with accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-12
Table 1-2: Mounting methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-15
Table 1-3: Mounting the device on the rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-16
Table 1-4: Removing the device from the rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-16
Table 1-5: How to use a Cage Clamp terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-19
Table 1-6: Connection cross-section for frame size S00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-20
Table 1-7: Connection cross-section for frame size S0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-20
Table 1-8: Connection cross-section for frame size S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-21
Table 1-9: Connection cross-section for frame size S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-21
Table 2-1: Circuit breakers, frame sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-5
Table 2-2: Contact position indicators of the circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-9
Table 2-3: Testing overload tripping (example: frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-10
Table 2-4: Suggestions for switching direct current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-16
Table 2-5: Attachable accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-19
Table 2-6: Voltage ranges of the auxiliary releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-20
Table 2-7: Testing overload tripping (example: frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-21
Table 2-8: Alarm switch with tripped signal and short circuit signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-22
Table 2-9: Mounting the remote-control mechanism (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-25
Table 2-10: Opening a cubicle door using the rotary switch extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-29
Table 2-11: Mounting the extension shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-30
Table 2-12: Housings for circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-32
Table 2-13: Front plates for any housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-33
Table 2-14: Busbar systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-37
Table 2-15: Dimensions of the busbar adapters and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-37
Table 2-16: Link modules for connecting circuit breakers to contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-38
Table 2-17: Rated operational voltage/current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-41
Table 2-18: Types of 3-phase busbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-41
Table 2-19: Conductor cross-section of the 3-phase feed-in terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-42
Table 3-1: Utilization categories, test conditions for AC voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-4
Table 3-2: Utilization categories, test conditions for DC voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-5
Table 3-3: Utilization categories, test conditions for AC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) .. 3-5
Table 3-4: Utilization categories, test conditions for DC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) .. 3-6
Table 3-5: Safe isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-8
Table 3-6: Performance ranges of the 3RT10 contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-10
Table 3-7: Types of 3RT/3RH contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-11
Table 3-8: Actuating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-12
Table 3-9: Mechanical endurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-14
Table 3-10: Comparison between the 3RT1446 and 3RT1046 contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-21
Table 3-11: Applications of 4-pole contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-22
Table 3-12: 4-pole contactors and auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-22
Table 3-13: 4-pole reversing contactor combination with front interlock (frame size S0) . . . . .. 3-23

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b xv
Table 3-14: 4-pole reversing contactor combination with lateral interlock (frame size S0) . . . . . 3-24
Table 3-15: 4-pole reversing contactor combination (frame sizes S2 and S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Table 3-16: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Table 3-17: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0) . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Table 3-18: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame sizes S2/S3) . . . . . . . 3-37
Table 3-19: Configuration of the star-delta combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Table 3-20: Assembly of the star-delta combination in frame size S00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Table 3-21: Assembly of the star-delta combinations in frame sizes S0 to S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Table 3-22: Auxiliary switch blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Table 3-23: Expansion options for auxiliary switch blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Table 3-24: Possible auxiliary switch combinations (frame size S0/S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Table 3-25: Possible auxiliary switch combinations (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Table 3-26: Possible auxiliary switch combinations with 4-pole/capacitor-switching contactors . 3-56
Table 3-27: Auxiliary switches with make-before-break contacting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Table 3-28: Surge suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Table 3-29: How surge suppressors work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Table 3-30: Conductor cross-sections of 3-pole auxiliary connecting lead terminals
(for frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Table 3-31: Parallel links making and breaking capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Table 3-32: Parallel connections Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Table 3-33: Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Table 3-34: Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Table 3-35: Vertical installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Table 3-36: Conductor cross-sections (frame sizes S00 to S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Table 4-1: Tripping classes/tripping times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-2: Operating limits of time-delayed overload releases in the case of an all-pole load . . 4-2
Table 4-3: SIRIUS overload relays, configuration and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Table 4-4: Assignment of the overload relays to the contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4-5: 3RU11/3RB10 auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Table 4-6: Recovery time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Table 4-7: Failure of the control supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Table 5-1: Fuseless load feeder, accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Table 5-2: Self-assembly of the reversing starter for rail (frame size S00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Table 5-3: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S00/S0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Table 5-4: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Table 5-5: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Table 6-1: Regulations and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Table 6-2: 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links - overview of the device groups with
their distinguishing features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Table 6-3: Comparison: Relay coupling modules and semiconductor coupling modules . . . . . 6-4
Table 6-4: Selection criteria for the 3RH, 3TX, and LZX coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Table 6-5: Conductor cross-sections for the 3RH, 3TX, and LZX coupling links . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6-6: Technical specifications, 3TX70 relay coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Table 6-7: Technical specifications, 3TX7004/3TX7005 semiconductor coupling links . . . . . . 6-22

SIRIUS System Manual

xvi GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
Table 6-8: Technical specifications, 3TX7002/3TX7003 semiconductor coupling links . . . . . . 6-22
Table 6-9: Technical specifications, LZX: RT/PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Table 6-10: Technical specifications, LZX: MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Table 6-11: Technical specifications, 3RH1924/3TX7090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Table 7-1: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Table 7-2: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) circuit diagrams and function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Table 7-3: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Table 7-4: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) assignment of the identifying letters . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Table 7-5: Function diagrams and circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Table 7-6: Sealable cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Table 7-7: Permissible conductor cross-sections for control and load current connections: . . . 7-23
Table 7-8: Technical specifications for the time relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Table 8-1: Standards, certificates, and approvals, 3RW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-2: 3RW3, frame sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-3: Link modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Table 8-4: Comparison of 3RW3/3RA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Table 8-5: Stand-alone installation, minimum clearances at the side, 3RW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Table 8-6: Stand-alone installation, minimum clearances at the side, 3RW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Table 8-7: Correction factors, 3RW30/31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Table 8-8: Correction factors: 3RV1 circuit breaker + 3RW3 soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Table 8-9: 3RW3 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Table 8-10: Correction factors, 3RT contactor + 3RU therm. overload relay + 3RW soft starter . 8-25
Table 8-11: 3RT + 3RB10 + 3RW3 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/minimum lengths 8-26
Table 8-12: 3RT1 + 3RW30/31 + 3RB10 installation guidelines,
minimum clearances/minimum lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Table 8-13: Correction factors, 3RT contactor + 3RB10
electronic overload relay + 3RW soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 8-14: 3RW30/31 event messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Table 8-15: 3RW30/31 diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Table 8-16: Accessories, 3RW30/31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Table 8-17: Conductor cross-sections, 3RW30/31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Table 8-18: Fuse configurations (SITOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Table 8-19: Fuse configurations (SITOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Table 8-20: Motor feeder: fuseless configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Table 8-21: Motor feeder: fused configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Table 8-22: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 40° C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Table 8-23: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 50° C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Table 8-24: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 60° C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Table 8-25: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 40° C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Table 8-26: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 50° C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Table 8-27: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 60° C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b xvii
 1
System overview

Section Subject Page

1.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 1-3

1.2 Overview: Range of devices 1-5

1.3 System features 1-10

1.4 Components and combinations 1-11

1.5 Mounting methods and terminal systems 1-15

1.5.1 Mounting the equipment 1-15

1.5.2 Screw-type terminals 1-17

1.5.3 Cage Clamp terminals 1-18

1.5.4 Connection cross-sections 1-20

1.6 Communication 1-22

Communication-capable low-voltage switching

1.6.1 1-22
technology
Parameterization of PROFIBUS-DP and bus-capable
1.6.2 1-23
low-voltage switching devices

1.6.3 Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) 1-23

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-1
System overview

Introduction
Siemens is one of the leading manufacturers of switchgear. The product
range extends from devices that switch a few mA to circuit breakers used in
power distribution.

Throughout the continuing development of these products we have always

striven to ensure that requirements in terms of fundamental performance
features, electrical and mechanical service life, dimensions, and ease of
installation and maintenance are met or exceeded.

We have been able to meet the demands resulting from increased environ-
mental awareness, particularly in the last ten years or so, by developing and
using environment-friendly and recyclable materials. As a result, we have
developed modern industrial switching devices, particularly in the field of
low-voltage switchgear, that meet all the relevant demands in terms of envi-
ronment-friendliness.

Building on decades of experience, we have created a completely new gen-

eration of circuit breakers, contactors, auxiliary contactors, overload relays,
contactor relays, time relays, and 3RW3 semiconductor motor control
devices (referred to below as soft starters) under the name SIRIUS for the
large and continuously growing number of motor drives in the range up to
45 kW.

These new SIRIUS devices fulfill all the demands placed on them in practice
and can be used as stand-alone devices or modular components of com-
plete load feeders, or integrated in low-voltage distribution cabinets or low-
voltage switching stations.

SIRIUS System Manual

1-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

1.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals
Explosion protection Motor protection devices that protect a motor from overload in a hazardous
area must meet certain requirements. These requirements are defined in
the following standards:
DIN VDE 0660, DIN VDE 0165, EN 60947-1:1991..+A11:1994, EN 60947-4-1,
EN 50014:1994, EN 50019:1978+A1 to A5
Compliance with these standards has up until now been established by
means of a test. Compliance could be documented in two ways:
1. By a test certificate from the manufacturer
2. By a test certificate from an independent test laboratory (e.g. PTB, DMT,
KEMA, etc.).

EU directive Testing of explosion protection has been defined more precisely as a result
of the harmonization of the European Union. In addition to the above stan-
dards, tests will also carried out in acc. with the EU directive 94/9/EC or
ATEX 100a.
Two procedures are in operation during the transition period up until 2003:
Procedure 1
Test certificate from an independent test laboratory as usual (e.g. PTB, DMT,
KEMA, etc.).
Procedure 2
Special test certificate from certified test laboratories (in acc. with extended
European rules). The statutory basis for this is the Official Journal of the
European Union (no. 95/C2 15/02 of 19.08.1995).

Siemens SIRIUS switching devices are tested and certified twice:

Certificate 1 Test certificate from KEMA in the same way as before (valid until 2003) in
acc. with:
• DIN VDE 0660, DIN VDE 0165
• EN 60947-1:1991/A11
• EN 60947-4-1:1992, EN 50019:1978+A1 to A5

Certificate 2 Special test certificate from the DMT-BVS in acc. with:

• DIN VDE 0660, DIN VDE 0165
• EN 60947-1:1991..+A11:1994, EN 60947-4-1
• EN 50014:1994, EN 50019:1978 + A1 to A5
• EU directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 100a - EU directive)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-3
System overview

DMT-BVS The DMT-BVS is, like the PTB, a certified German testing organization in
compliance with the EU directive 76/117/EEC and EIExV. Like the PTB and
other testing institutes in Europe, the DMT-BVS tests and awards certifi-
cates in acc. with the explosion protection directive 94/9/EC and is accred-
ited accordingly.
Over 100 years ago, the DMT-BVS became the first testing station for explo-
sion protection in Germany, and it has been a testing station for electrical
equipment as well since 1912. DMT-BVS certificates are recognized through-
out the world. For support in export matters, the DMT-BVS works with the
chemical industry and is of course recognized by it.

KEMA KEMA, which is a testing institute that enjoys worldwide recognition, is a

certified European institute with many years of experience of testing for
explosion protection.
For support in export matters, KEMA also works with testing stations
throughout the world.

SIRIUS System Manual

1-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

1.2 Overview: Range of devices

SIRIUS system The SIRIUS product range consists of 3RV circuit breakers, 3RT contactors,
3RH/3RT auxiliary contactors and contactor relays, 3RU thermal overload
relays, 3RB10/3RB12 electronic overload relays, 3RP time relays, 3RW3
semiconductor motor control devices (referred to below as soft starters),
and combinations of these devices, which form the 3RA load feeders.

The individual devices are developed and built in such a way that it is very
easy to put them together to make load feeders. This is possible because
the devices are all built to work together on both an electrical and a mechan-
ical level.

NSB00296

Figure 1-1: SIRIUS system

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-5
System overview

Circuit breaker with a frame size of S00 and attachable accessories:

4
2

1
6.1
3

5 NSB00005c

Figure 1-2: Circuit breaker, accessories (frame size S00)

Circuit breakers with frame sizes of S0, S2, and S3 and attachable accessories:
8

2
4
7

1
6.2
3

5
NSB00006c

Figure 1-3: Circuit breakers, accessories (frame sizes S0, S2, and S3)

Attachable accessories for frame sizes S00, S0, S2, and S3:
1) Transverse auxiliary switch
2) Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts
3) Lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts
4) Shunt release
5) Undervoltage release
6.1)Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts (S00)
6.2)Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts (S0 to S3)
7) Alarm switch (S0 to S3)
8) Disconnecting module (S0 and S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

1-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

Contactors with a frame size of S00 and accessories:

3 17
18
4

5
12

1
6 19 13
20
7

2
8

10

11

14
15

16

NSB00448

Figure 1-4: Contactors, accessories (frame size S00)

1) Contactor
2) Contactor relay
3) Solid-state time relay block, on-delay
4) Solid-state time relay block, off-delay
5) Auxiliary switch block, time-delay
(on-delay or off-delay or star-delta function)
6) 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above
7) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above
8) 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below
9) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below
10) 4-pole auxiliary switch block
(terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 or DIN EN 50 005)
11) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard or electronic
type (terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 005)
12) Soldering pin adapter for contactors with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
13) Soldering pin adapter for contactors and contactor relays
14) Additional load module to increase the permissible residual current
15) Surge suppressor with LED
16) Surge suppressor without LED
17) 3-phase feed-in terminal
18) Parallel link (neutral bridge), 3-pole, without terminal
19) Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal
20) Parallel link, 4-pole, with terminal

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-7
System overview

Contactors with frame sizes of S0 to S3 with accessories:

4

5
17 20
11
18

10 21

16 2

12

1
14

1
6
9

15
7
19

8
16
20

13

21

22 3
23

NSB00449

Figure 1-5: Contactors, accessories (frame sizes S0 to S3)

1) Contactor, frame size S0

2) Contactor, frame size S2
3) Contactor, frame size S3
For frame sizes S0 to S3:
4) Solid-state time relay block, on-delay
5) Solid-state time relay block, off-delay
6) Auxiliary switch block, time-delay (on- or off-delay
or star-delta function)
7) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above
8) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below
9) 4-pole auxiliary switch block
(terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 or DIN EN 50 005)
10) Parallel link (neutral bridge), 3-pole, without terminal
11) Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal

SIRIUS System Manual

1-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

12) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, attachable on the right or left side
(terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 or DIN EN 50 005)
13) 1-pole auxiliary switch block (a maximum of 4 can be snapped on)
14) Mechanical interlock, attachable at the side
15) Mechanical interlock, attachable at the front
16) Wiring blocks above and below (reversing mode)
17) Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode combination),
attachable above or below (varies for S0 and S2/S3)
18) Coupling link for direct connection to the contactor coil
19) LED block to display contactor function
For frame sizes S2 and S3 only:
20) Terminal for contactor coil for setting up contactor combinations
21)Terminal cover for box terminals
For frame size S3 only:
22)Terminal cover for terminal end and bar connection
23)Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-9
System overview

1.3 System features

The entire SIRIUS range of devices is divided up into only four frame sizes
(S00 up to 5.5 kW, S0 up to 11 kW, S2 up to 22 kW, and S3 up to 45 kW)
with three different widths (45 mm for S00 and S0, 55 mm for S2, and
70 mm for S3) and has a uniform range of accessories for all frame sizes.

Modular system The individual components of the SIRIUS range are building blocks in a mod-
ular system that are harmonized in terms of both their frame size and their
technical specifications. This ensures that individual requirements can be
met quickly and cost-effectively.

Uniformity The devices are harmonized with regard to their ratings and their technical
specifications:
• The same width ensures rapid installation.
• The terminal systems are standardized, and devices with the same rated
current have the same terminals.

Performance capability All SIRIUS devices can be mounted side by side without derating in an ambi-
ent air temperature of up to 60 °C.

Accessories All accessories, such as the auxiliary switches and surge suppressors, can
be mounted and removed without tools.
You can use link modules that connect devices both mechanically and elec-
trically to put together combinations of devices and build fuseless load feed-
ers.

Communication Direct communication with a higher-level controller is possible using:

• The AS-Interface load feeder module
• The ET 200X distributed I/O devices on the PROFIBUS-DP bus system
• The ET 200S system

SIRIUS System Manual

1-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

1.4 Components and combinations

This section describes the components of the SIRIUS system and the
device combinations that are possible with these components.

Components of the SIRIUS system

The following table contains a list of the components of the SIRIUS system
together with the most important accessories:

Components Brief description/features Accessories

3RV1 circuit breakers - Switch and protect motors and other loads up - Auxiliary switches (transverse, lat-
to 100 A eral)
- Undervoltage releases
- Shunt releases
- Alarm switches
- Housing
- 3-phase busbar system

3RT10 motor contac- - Switch motors up to 4 kW and currents up to - Auxiliary switch blocks
tors 95 A - Surge suppressors
- Types: 3-pole for switching - Parallel links
- 4-pole, with 4 NO and 2 S + 2 NC contacts - Time relay blocks
- Soldering pin adapter - Link modules
- Capacitor switching contactor - Wiring blocks
- Reversing and star-delta combinations

3RH11 contactor relays - Same type of construction as the 3RT

- Basic version: 4-pole, expandable to 8 pins by
means of auxiliary switch blocks
- High contact stability (1 mA; 17 V)

3RT10/3RH11 contactor - Switch motors and auxiliary contactors with

relays an extended operating range (17 V to 30 V)

3RU11 overload relays - CLASS 10 - Remote RESET, electrical

- Phase loss sensitivity - Mechanical RESET
- Series auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC contact - Terminal bracket for stand-alone
- Frame size S00: repetition terminal for the installation
auxiliary contact and coil connection for
attachment to contactors
- Integrated, transparent and sealable cover for
the adjusting knob and test function

3RB10 overload relays - CLASS 10 and CLASS 20 - Remote RESET, electrical

- Rapid tripping operation in the event of phase - Mechanical RESET
loss (< 3 s) - Terminal bracket for stand-alone
- Series auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC installation
- Low power loss, energy-saving
- Wide adjustment ranges for simple configura-
tion, selection, and less storage
- Extremely low energy requirements, approx.
50 mW

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-11
System overview

Components Brief description/features Accessories

3RB12 overload relays - CLASS 5 to CLASS 30 can be set - Summation current transformer for
- Phase loss sensitivity external ground fault monitoring
- 2 outputs per 1 NO + 1 NC contact - DC adapter
- Integrated current transformers in all sizes - Terminal cover
- Motor protection due to the connection of a
thermistor sensor circuit
- Internal ground fault monitoring
- Overload warning
- Remote and automatic reset possible
- High tripping accuracy
- Wide adjustment ranges
- Self-monitoring

3RA1 load feeders - Fuseless load feeder consisting of a circuit - Accessories for the basic devices
breaker and contactor (contactors and circuit breakers)
- Simple assembly with link modules and wir- - Special accessories:
ing blocks Auxiliary switches connectable from
- Reversing combination (link modules) above or below
- Star-delta combination

3RP10/15 solid-state - 8 adjustable time ranges from 0.05 seconds - Coding plug sets
time relays to 10 hours - Locking device
- Constantly high repeatability
- Type with combination voltage (24 VDC and
110 to 240 VAC)
- 2 device types: on-delay and multifunctional
(7 functions)
- Long mechanical and electrical service life

3RW30/31 soft starters - Reduction of the starting current for a smooth - Fans
start
- Soft coasting down function
- Only 3 motor supply leads are required
- System adaptation using setting options:
starting time, starting voltage, coasting down
time

Load feeders with Complete load feeders - Supply modules

communication capa- - At the AS-Interface with the - Wiring
bility AS-Interface IP65 compact starter
AS-Interface IP20 load feeder module
- On the Profibus-DP through the following sys-
tems
ET 200X with IP65 protection
ET 200S with IP20 protection
Table 1-1: Components and combinations with accessories

SIRIUS System Manual

1-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

Device combinations The following diagrams show you the possible device combinations, using
the S00 frame size as an example:
Fuseless Fused
load feeder load feeder
3RV10 circuit
3RT10 contactor
breaker

3RA19 link
module

3RT10 contactor 3RU11 overload

relay

3RA13 reversing combination

3RA14 star-delta combination

Figure 1-6: Device combinations

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-13
System overview

Contactor combination for reversing the S00 frame size (with accessories):

1
14 14 13
2

NSB00459
14 14

14
16
13 6

Figure 1-7: Contactor combination for reversing

Individual parts:
1/2) Contactors
4/5/6) Kit
The kit includes:
4) Mechanical interlock
5) 2 connection clips for 2 contactors
6) Wiring blocks above and below to connect the main conducting paths with electrical interlock
(NC contact interlock - can be removed if required)

Attachable accessories:
13) Soldering pin adapter
14) Auxiliary switch block, on the front (only an auxiliary switch blocks that complies with
DIN EN 50 005 can be used)
16) Surge suppressor

SIRIUS System Manual

1-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

1.5 Mounting methods and terminal systems

1.5.1 Mounting the equipment

The method of mounting the equipment is uniform within each frame size.

Frame size Mounting Removal

S00 to S3 Screwed on Removed with a screwdriver

S00, S0 Snapped onto a Removed without a tool

35 mm rail (in acc. with
DIN EN 50 022)

S2 Snapped onto a The snap-on spring can be opened with a

35 mm rail (in acc. with screwdriver
DIN EN 50 022)

S3 Snapped onto a The snap-on spring can be opened with a

35 mm rail (in acc. with screwdriver
DIN EN 50 022)
Snapped onto a
75 mm rail
Table 1-2: Mounting methods

Screw-on mounting The SIRIUS switching devices can be screwed on to a flat surface.
Please note the following points with some of the devices:
• 3RV1 circuit breaker, frame sizes S00/S0: Push-in lugs are required for
screw-type mounting
• 3RP15 time relay: Push-in lugs are required for screw-type mounting
• Coupling links: No screw-type mounting
• Soft starters: No screw-type mounting

Snap-on mounting The SIRIUS switching devices are snapped onto 35 mm rails in acc. with
DIN EN 50 022 without a tool.
The devices with a frame size of S3 require a rail with an installation height
of 15 mm. Alternatively, they can also be snapped onto 75 mm rails.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-15
System overview

The following table shows you how to mount the device onto the rail:
Frame Procedure Illustration
size

S00/S0 Place the device on

the upper edge of the
rail, and press it down-
wards until it snaps
onto the lower edge
of the rail.

S2/S3 Place the device on

the upper edge of the
rail, and tilt it towards
1
the rail until it snaps
onto the lower edge
of the rail.

Table 1-3: Mounting the device on the rail

The following table shows you how to remove the device from the rail:
Frame Procedure Illustration
size

S00/S0 Push the device

downwards to release
the tension of the
mounting spring, and
remove the device by
tilting it.

S2/S3 Using a screwdriver,

push the clip on the
lower rear side of the
device downwards to
release the tension of
the mounting spring 2
(1), and remove the
device by tilting it (2). 1
1
Table 1-4: Removing the device from the rail

You will find notes on mounting the different devices on the rail in the rele-
vant parts of section n.5 on mounting methods and terminal systems.

SIRIUS System Manual

1-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

1.5.2 Screw-type terminals

The terminals used do not vary within a frame size. The current switched by
the different devices of a single frame size does not vary either. This means
you can use the same tool, torque, and conductor cross-section for the cir-
cuit breakers, contactors, and overload relays of a single frame size. The
stripped lengths are also the same. This is important in the case of prefabri-
cated wiring.

Screw-type terminals All the devices have screw-type terminals, either a terminal with a top
washer or a box terminal, depending on the frame size.
Devices with frame sizes S00 and S0 have terminals with captive screws
and terminal washers that enable you to connect 2 conductors, even if they
have different cross-sections.
The box terminals of frame size S2 and S3 can also take 2 conductors with
different cross-sections.

Connection tools Use the following tools to make the connection:

• Frame sizes S00 to S2: Screws are available for rated currents of up to
50 A for Pozidriv2 screwdrivers.
• Frame size S3: To obtain the required torques for the frame size for up to
100 A, the screws have a 4 mm hexagon socket.
The screwdriver guides allow screwdriving machines to be used.

Lugs and connecting You can remove the box terminals from the devices with a frame size of S3
bars to connect conductors with lugs or connecting bars. A terminal cover is
available as shock protection and to ensure that you comply with the
required creepages and clearances when the box terminals are removed.
You can find a detailed description in section n.4 on accessories.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-17
System overview

1.5.3 Cage Clamp terminals

The Cage Clamp terminal system is now available for circuit breakers, con-
tactors, overload relays, and time relays.
Cage-type clamping units, known as Cage Clamp terminals in the case of
SIRIUS products, facilitate quick and maintenance-free wiring.

Design The Cage Clamp terminal consists of two parts:

• A power rail for conducting current
• A sprung cage-type clamp for clamping strength
Clamp

Power rail

Single-core Finely stranded

Stranded Finely stranded with wire end ferrule

Figure 1-8: Cage Clamp terminal

Conductors The Cage Clamp terminal on the switching devices clamps all copper wires
(single-core, stranded and finely stranded) from 0.25 mm2 to 2.5 mm2. The
conductors can be clamped directly or with some protection for splicing. To
this end, wire end ferrules or pin-end connectors can be placed on the con-
ductor ends. The best solution is an ultrasonically condensed conductor.

SIRIUS System Manual

1-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

Safety The devices are equipped with a two-wire connection. In other words, there
are two independent connections for each conducting path.
Only one conductor is connected to each clamping unit.
The clamp presses the conductor against the power rail, which is curved at
this point. The high specific compressive load thus achieved is gas-tight.
The clamp presses its flat surface against the conductor, thus avoiding dam-
age to it. The spring force of the clamp is designed so that it automatically
adjusts to the radius of the conductor. This allows any deformation of the
conductor to be dealt with. It is not possible for the clamping unit to loosen
by itself.
This connection is vibration- and shock-proof. These types of stress do not
damage the conductor or cause any loss in contact.
Machines and systems in which this type of stress occurs, such as vibrators
and elevators, are particularly suitable applications for this connection.

Transfer The contact pressure between the conductor and power rail is optimal, mak-
accuracy ing this clamp terminal suitable for high-voltage installations and also for the
transfer of voltages and currents in the mV and mA ranges in measuring
technology and electronics.

Tool Screwdrivers can be obtained from the NSK (low-voltage switchgear) cata-
log for opening the Cage Clamp terminals.

Procedure The following table shows you how to use the Cage Clamp:
Step Procedure

1 Insert the screwdriver into

the rectangularopening
until it stops.
The screwdriver head auto-
matically keeps the clamp
NSJ 00001

open.

2 Insert the conductor into

the oval terminal opening.
NSJ 00002

3 Remove the screwdriver.

The terminal closes, and
the conductor is thus secu-
rely clamped.
NSJ 00003

Table 1-5: How to use a Cage Clamp terminal

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-19
System overview

Small conductor cross- With conductor cross-sections that are ≤ 1 mm2, you have to use an insula-
sections ting stop to ensure the conductors remain securely clamped.
The illustration below shows the procedure:
3RT1916-4JA02

≤ 1 mm²
Figure 1-9: Conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm²

1.5.4 Connection cross-sections

Because SIRIUS is a modular system, the connection cross-sections are the

same for all devices of a single frame size.
The following tables specify the permissible conductor cross-sections for
main and auxiliary conductor connections:

Frame size S00 Main and auxiliary conductors

0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Cage Clamp
∅ 5 to 6 mm/PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10
---- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²)

AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14)

Table 1-6: Connection cross-section for frame size S00

Frame size S0 Control conductor: A1/A2 Main conductor

Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC
Screw-type Cage Clamp L1 L2 L3
terminal terminal T1 T2 T3
0.8 1.2 Nm 2 to 2.5 Nm
----
∅ 5 to 6 mm/PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 18 to 22 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²)
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²)
10
---- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²) ----

AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10)

Table 1-7: Connection cross-section for frame size S0

SIRIUS System Manual

1-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

Frame size S2 Control conductor: A1/A2 Main conductor

Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC
Screw-type Cage Clamp L1 L2 L3
terminal terminal T1 T2 T3
0.8 to 1.2 Nm 3 to 4.5 Nm
----
∅ 5 to 6 mm/PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in ∅5 to 6 mm/PZ2 27 to 40 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 13
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
1 x (0.75 to 25 mm²)
13 2 x (0.75 to 25 mm²)
---- ---- ----
1 x (0.75 to 35 mm²)
2 x (18 to 3)
AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) AWG
1 x (18 to 2)
Table 1-8: Connection cross-section for frame size S2

Frame size S3 Control conductor: A1/A2 Main conductor

Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC
Screw-type Cage Clamp L1 L2 L3
terminal terminal T1 T2 T3
0.8 to 1.2 Nm min
22 4 to 6 Nm
---- 4
∅5 to 6 mm/PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 35 to 53 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 17
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 17 2 x (2.5 to 35 mm²)
2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
1 x (2.5 to 50 mm²)
10 17 2 x (10 to 50 mm²)
---- ----
1 x (10 to 70 mm²)
2 x (10 to 1/0)
AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) AWG
1 x (10 to 2/0)
Table 1-9: Connection cross-section for frame size S3

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-21
System overview

1.6 Communication

Distributed I/O device

HMI/Visualization ET 200S
SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 COROS/WIN CC

Interface
DP/3WN6 Motor protection and
Distributed and control device
SIMOVERT I/O device Circuit SIMOCODE-DP
PROFIBUS-DP MASTER DRIVES ET 200X breaker 3WN6 3UF50

CP 343-2
DP/AS-Interface
Link
S7-300

NT NT
Motor starter 3RA5
Safety
monitor M M M
3 3 3

Signal column
AS-Interface LOGO! NSA00001b

AS-Interface
digital analog pneumatisch Motor starter
Input/output modules
Input/output modules Proximity in IP 67
in IP 20 switch Command Membrane keyboard 3SB4 secure digital input modules
BERO devices M
SIGNUM 3

Figure 1-10: Communication

1.6.1 Communication-capable low-voltage switching technology

This uniform range of communication-capable Siemens switching devices

represents an innovative concept for effective cubicle automation. Commu-
nication with the higher-level control system via open, PROFIBUS-DP, and
AS-Interface connections.

Actuator-sensor inter- AS-Interface is a standardized, non-proprietary networking system

face (AS-Interface) (IEC 62026-2) for simple and usually binary actuators and sensors. It is pos-
sible to connect it to SIMATIC programmable logic controllers via different
master modules. A DP/AS-Interface link also ensures direct integration in a
PROFIBUS-DP system or connection to other field buses via couplers. Up to
248 sensors and 186 actuators can be connected to an AS-Interface network
over a maximum of 500 m. Safety-related signals can now also be net-
worked with AS-Interface, thus dispensing with the wiring of emergency
stop signals that was needed previously.

PROFIBUS PROFIBUS is a standardized, non-proprietary field bus system (IEC 61158)

to which most PLCs of leading manufacturers can be connected. Up to 125
nodes can be incorporated in one bus segment. Distances of up to 9.6 km
can be bridged with copper cables and up to 100 km with fiber-optic cables.

SIRIUS System Manual

1-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP (DP being a German abbreviation for distributed I/O) is used
for switching devices with higher communication requirements (e.g. the
transmission of analog actual values with extremely fast response times). It
is also used to link individual AS-Interface segments.

1.6.2 Parameterization of PROFIBUS-DP and bus-capable low-voltage switching devices

Before commissioning, PROFIBUS-DP must be configured, and the individ-

ual bus nodes must be parameterized. There are user-friendly tools available
to the user for configuration and parameter assignment.

Parameter assignment • For SIMATIC S7 masters, all the functions are integrated in the STEP 7
tools programming language.
• For SIMATIC S5 masters and various non-Siemens masters, the COM
PROFIBUS parameter assignment software is required.
• Manufacturers of non-Siemens masters offer other configuration and
parameter assignment programs.

Applications The above program packages make it easy to carry out the following for
PROFIBUS-DP and its nodes:
• Configuration
• Parameter assignment
• Documentation
• Commissioning
• Testing
• Diagnostics

For additional information on communication-capable low-voltage switching

devices, as well as system components and accessories, see the following
catalogs:
• ST 70 "S7, M7 and C7 Programmable Logic Controllers"
• IK PI "Industrial Communication and Field Devices"

1.6.3 Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface)

The actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) is a modular networking system

for sensors and actuators in the lowest field range.
It makes no difference to the program in the programmable controller
whether parallel wiring with input/output modules or AS-Interface is used. It
is therefore possible for existing systems to change to AS-Interface because
you can continue to use the same programs. The entire system can be oper-
ated without additional software. It is not necessary to be familiar with the
internal workings of AS-Interface.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-23
System overview

Replacement for the Process signals that occur in situ, are normally transferred to the open loop
cable harness control using extensive parallel wiring and input/output modules. This
means that each sensor or actuator in the field is connected to the input/
output modules with its own cable. AS-Interface makes it possible to
replace this cable harness with a simple two-wire cable for all sensors or
actuators.

Data and power on a The master communicates with the nodes via the AS-Interface cable. As
two-wire cable well as data, this cable also transfers the supply voltage for the electronic
components and sensors. The voltage is supplied to the AS-Interface cable
from a special AS-Interface power supply unit with a data link.

Setting up different The AS-Interface cable is laid in the same way as for an electrical installa-
structures tion. A new feeder can be inserted at any point. This makes it possible to set
up network structures (e.g. tree, star or line structures). No shielding or ter-
minating resistors are required. The wiring can be adapted individually to the
system or machine.

Detailed configuration and installation guidelines can be found in the instal-

Maximum system con- lation guideline "Montage des Vernetzungssystems AS-Interface" (on mount-
figuration ing the AS-Interface networking system).
Up to 62 nodes can be connected to the AS-Interface cable. A node is, for
example, an AS-Interface module (digital or analog) or a BERO (proximity
switch) with an integrated AS-Interface chip. A maximum of 4 binary stan-
dard sensors and/or 4 actuators can be connected to an AS-Interface mod-
ule.
This produces a maximum configuration of 248 sensors and 186 actuators
(62 nodes x 4 inputs and 3 outputs).

IP 67 degree of AS-Interface is a networking system for direct use on the machine. The AS-
protection Interface user compact modules have IP 67 protection. They can be used in
situ without being enclosed.
There are also AS-Interface modules for use with IP 20 protection in the
cubicles or distributed switchboxes.

SIRIUS System Manual

1-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

New installation All compact modules are placed on a mounting plate. The mounting plate
system takes the AS-Interface cable and keeps it in place. Polarity reversal is not
possible due to the profile of the cable. The compact modules are simply
hooked on at the top of the mounting plate and secured with just one screw.
When you secure the modules, contact is made with the AS-Interface cable.
You do not have to strip or screw on the cable.

Coding prevents errors All the modules are mechanically and electrically coded.
The coding system prevents errors occurring in the event of replacement. At
replacement, only one module of the same type can ever be mounted. This
stops digital or analog modules (or even inputs or outputs) getting mixed up.

Addressing To participate in data transfer with the master, each node must be assigned
an address before commissioning of the AS-Interface network. Addressing
devices are available for this.

Addressing an installed There is an additional feature which makes new Siemens modules even
module more user-friendly: the addressing socket.

Using this socket you can address a module after it has been installed. It is
not necessary to unscrew the module. Installation can be carried out in the
system by personnel who are not familiar with the AS-Interface. The com-
missioning engineer can address the modules easily when they are already
installed. For the first time, this type of addressing is also possible with
IP 67 protection.

Diagnostics at a glance The new generation of AS-Interface modules (compact modules, analog
modules, and SlimLine modules) has the new display system developed by
Siemens.

The status of a module is displayed by two LEDs lighting up continuously or

flashing.
This simple diagnostic feature directly on the module makes it possible for
the user to find the error quickly and efficiently. This in turn reduces down-
times.

Certificates of the AS- All Siemens AS-Interface products are tested in acc. with the relevant
Interface association testing regulations in an accredited test laboratory and certified by the AS-
Interface association.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-25
System overview

Digital compact mod- The AS-Interface modules in the compact range are characterized by opti-
ules with IP 67 mized operating features and improved user-friendliness.
protection This can reduce mounting and commissioning times for AS-Interface by up
to 40%. Additional LEDs provide information on the most important operat-
ing modes of the module, resulting in a considerable increase in system
availability.
The modules of the compact range consist of two components:
Mounting plate and compact module
The mounting plate mechanically fixes the AS-Interface profile cables, takes
the compact module, and serves as a template with drill holes.
The compact module contains the electronic components for communica-
tion and the M12 standard connections for inputs/outputs. Up to four sen-
sors and four actuators can be easily and reliably connected to the compact
module using the M12 standard connection.
The mounting plate and compact module are only connected to each other
by means of a single screw. Contact is established with the AS-Interface
cable by means of the proven insulation displacement method.
AS-Interface modules in the compact range that have an M12 connection
can have a protective conductor (PE) connected to them.
Using an addressing socket integrated in the compact module, you can also
allocate addresses when the module is in place.

Analog compact mod- The design of the analog modules has been adapted for the compact mod-
ules with IP 67 ules. The analog input and output modules each have two channels. You can
protection connect measuring sensors and analog actuators using standard M12 con-
nectors. The following groups of analog modules exist:
• Input module for two current sensors
• Input module for two voltage sensors
• Input module for two thermal resistors
• Output module for two current actuators
• Output module for two voltage actuators

All the measured values - except for the thermal resistance value of Pt 100
(not linear) - are available in linear form. In other words, the non-linear trans-
mission curve of the thermal resistor sensor is automatically linearized in
the analog module, and measured values can be processed directly in the
programmable controller.
The input and output channels are isolated. Two-wire and four-wire sensors
can be connected. Differential inputs produce considerable suppression of
common-mode interference. The integrating sigma-delta converter ensures
high measurement accuracy.

SIRIUS System Manual

1-26 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 System overview

Pneumatic compact The pneumatic compact module is a highly integrated AS-Interface slave. As
modules with IP 65 and an input/output module that is entirely suitable for field deployment, it has
IP 67 protection four electrical inputs and two pneumatic outputs. The electrical inputs
behave in the same way as the inputs of the digital input/output compact
modules.
Both integrated pneumatic outputs are implemented by means of two pre-
set 4/2-way valves (2 to 8 bar; 550 Nl/min) with a shared compressed-air
supply and separate exhaust air collection and can be operated manually
using separate slide valves. Two cylinders that work in tandem, for example,
can be connected to a module in this range.
Connections to AS-Interface are made via the standard mounting plate. The
AS-Interface cable is inserted into the corresponding cable guides, and the
upper part is secured to the mounting plate by means of a screw. The mod-
ule is ready for use.

Safety first - AS-Interface is the first system on the market that can transmit both stan-
emergency stop via dard signals and safety-related input signals (e.g. emergency stop) via the
AS-i same cable.
Only an additional safety monitor and safe modules are required to use AS-
Interface as a safety bus. This enables category 4 in acc. with EN 954-1 to
be achieved. A failsafe programmable controller or special master is not nec-
essary.
The concept and implementation of AS-Interface Safety at Work (AS-Inter-
face SaW) have been tested and certified by TÜV (technical testing associa-
tion).
This means that the system can be converted to the considerably more flex-
ible AS-Interface network, which is already available, thus obviating the
need for the complex, separately implemented emergency stop wiring that
has been necessary up to now.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 1-27
 2
3RV1 circuit breakers

Section Subject Page

2.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 2-3

2.2 Device description 2-5

2.2.1 General description 2-6

2.2.2 Operation 2-7

2.2.3 Information on configuration 2-10

2.3 Field of application/variants 2-13

2.3.1 Motor protection 2-13

2.3.2 Transformer protection 2-13

2.3.3 Starter protection 2-13

2.3.4 Circuit breaker with overload relay function 2-14

2.3.5 Fuse monitoring 2-14

2.3.6 Switching direct current 2-16

2.3.7 Main and emergency stop switches 2-17

2.4 Accessories 2-18

2.4.1 Attachable accessories: Overview 2-18

2.4.2 Auxiliary switch, alarm switch, and auxiliary release 2-19

2.4.3 Motorized remote-control mechanism 2-23

2.4.4 Disconnecting module 2-26

2.4.5 Rotary switch extension for door 2-28

2.4.6 Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. 2-31
with UL 508

2.4.7 Housing and mounting accessories 2-32

2.4.8 Busbar adapter 2-37

2.4.9 Isolated 3-phase busbar system 2-41

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-1
3RV1 circuit breakers

Section Subject Page

2.5 Mounting and connection 2-45

2.5.1 Mounting 2-45

2.5.2 Connection 2-46

2.5.3 Device circuit diagrams 2-48

2.6 Dimensioned drawings 2-49

2.7 Technical specifications 2-58

2.7.1 General specifications 2-58

2.7.2 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn in acc. with 2-63

IEC 60 947-2

2.7.3 Limiter function with standard devices for 500 VAC and 690 2-65
VAC in acc. with IEC 60 947-2

SIRIUS System Manual

2-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals
Standards • The 3RV1 circuit breakers comply with the specifications for circuit break-
ers in acc. with IEC 60947-2/DIN VDE 0660, Part 101.
• The circuit breakers for motor protection comply with the specifications in
acc. with IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660, Part 102.
• The auxiliary switches comply with IEC 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660
Part 200.

Approvals/ Confirmation of approvals, test certificates, and characteristics can be

test reports obtained on the Internet/intranet.

Terminal markings The terminal markings comply with DIN EN 50 011.

Utilization categories Circuit breaker in acc. with IEC 60947-2: A

Motor starter in acc. with IEC 60947-4-1: AC-3 (main conducting paths)
DC - 11 / AC - 15 (control and auxiliary conducting paths)

Main and emergency The specifications for the main and emergency switches comply with
stop switches IEC 60204/DIN VDE 0113 Part 1.

Disconnector Disconnector specifications comply with IEC 60947-3.

specifications

Shock protection 3RV1 circuit breakers are shockproof in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100,
even without accessories. You can find additional information on the subject
of shock protection in the "Switching, Protection and Distribution in Low-
Voltage Networks" manual, p. 37 ff.

Degree of protection The degree of protection of the 3RV1 circuit breaker is IP 20.
In the terminal area of frame sizes S2 and S3 the degree of protection is
IP 00.

Characteristics The time-current characteristics, the current limitation characteristics and

the I2t characteristics have been determined in acc. with IEC 60947 and
DIN VDE 0660.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-3
3RV1 circuit breakers

Conditions of Explosion-proof motors

application KEMA test report no. EX-97.Y.3236 in acc. with EN 50 019:1977 +A1 to A5
and DIN VDE 0165
DMT certificate in acc. with directive 94/9 EC (ATEX) in preparation

Nuclear power plants

KTA certificate

Railway vehicles
DIN EN 50 155

Ships and docks

Shipbuilding certificates of classes GL, LRS or DNV.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.2 Device description

3RV1 circuit breakers are used to switch and protect three-phase induction
motors of up to 45 kW at 400 VAC and for loads with rated currents of up to
100 A.
The 3RV1 circuit breakers have 3 poles. To achieve the highest degree of
flexibility, auxiliary switches, alarm switches, auxiliary releases, and other
accessories can be easily attached to the circuit breakers without tools, as
required.
3RV1 circuit breakers and 3RT1 contactors are built to work together on
both an electrical level and physically. This enables them to be easily and
quickly put together to make load feeders.

Frame sizes 3RV1 circuit breakers are available in 4 frame sizes (S00 to S3).

S00 S0 S2 S3

Figure 2-1: 3RV1 circuit breakers (frame sizes S00 to S3)

The following table shows you the frame sizes and the corresponding maxi-
mum rated operational current at a voltage of 400 VAC. The last column in
the table tells you which three-phase induction motor is suitable for which
particular size.

Output power of the

Max. rated
Frame size Width three-phase
operational current
induction motor

S00 45 mm 12 A 5.5 kW

S0 45 mm 25 A 11 kW

S2 55 mm 50 A 22 kW

S3 70 mm 100 A 45 kW

Table 2-1: Circuit breakers, frame sizes

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-5
3RV1 circuit breakers

2.2.1 General description

Fields of application The 3RV1 circuit breakers are suitable for:

• Motor and plant protection
• Transformer protection
• Starter protection (short-circuit protection)
The 3RV16 11-0BD10 circuit breaker, frame size S00, is used for fuse moni-
toring.

Releases 3RV1 circuit breakers have:

• Inverse-time delay, thermal overload releases
• Instantaneous short-circuit releases
The overload releases can be set to the load current.
The short-circuit releases are set permanently to 12 times the rated current,
which allows motors to start up without problems. Circuit breakers used for
transformer protection are set to 19 times the rated current to avoid being
tripped by the high inrush current.
When the circuit breakers are tripped, in the case of frame size S00 the tog-
gle switch goes into the tripped position, and in the case of frame sizes S0
to S3 the rotary switch switches to the tripped position. Before it is
switched on again, the rotary switch must be put in the 0 position manually
to avoid switching to the fault inadvertently.
In the case of circuit breakers with a rotary switch, the tripping operation
can also be reported electrically by means of an alarm switch.

Tripping classes In acc. with IEC 947-4-1:

• Frame sizes S00 to S3: class 10
• Frame sizes S2/S3: class 20

Auxiliary release The circuit breakers can also be equipped with one of the following auxiliary
releases:
• Shunt release
• Undervoltage release
• Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts

Auxiliary contact ele- The circuit breakers can be equipped with a transverse auxiliary switch, an
ments electronically optimized transverse auxiliary switch or a lateral auxiliary
switch (Section 2.4 Accessories).

Shock protection Shock protection can be improved by covering the terminals and connec-
tions. This can be achieved with the following accessories:
• Frame size S00, S0: protective caps for transverse auxiliary switches
• Frame size S2, S3: terminal covers for box terminals
• Terminal covers for lug and bar connection

SIRIUS System Manual

2-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Other accessories Other accessories for circuit breakers:

• Alarm switch
• Disconnecting module
• Isolated 3-phase busbar system
• Busbar adapter
• Rotary switches
• Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508
• Housing and front plates

2.2.2 Operation

Setting the values Using a screwdriver, set the load rated current (current setting) Ie on the
scale of the circuit breaker.
Note the two possible markings:
• Dash marking: marking for a circuit breaker in a stand-alone installation
• Triangle marking: marking for a circuit breaker in a side-by-side installation

Max. + 60 °C
A
Max. + 70 °C
RV-00222

Ie

360° o.k.

Figure 2-2: Setting the current setting Ie (example: frame size S00)

Warning
The adjusting knob can be turned 360° clockwise. You can only turn it coun-
terclockwise within the adjustment range.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-7
3RV1 circuit breakers

Sealing the You can prevent unauthorized adjustment of the current setting by placing a
adjustment scale transparent cover over it and sealing it.

3RV1908-0P

Figure 2-3: Sealing the adjustment scale (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Switches The state of the circuit breakers can be determined by the position of the
switches:
Frame size Switch STOP ON Tripped

S00 Toggle switch O I O

S0, S2, S3 Rotary switch OFF ON Tripped

Table 2-2: Contact position indicators of the circuit breakers

Figure 2-4: Tripped position, 3RV (frame size S0)

Locking the circuit You can prevent the circuit breaker from being switched on by unauthorized
breakers persons by securing the switch drive (toggle switch or rotary switch) with a
padlock (shackle diameter 3.5 to 4.5 mm).

Ø 3.5 to 4.5 mm

Figure 2-5: Locking the toggle switch (frame size S00)

Reclosing after a tripping operation

After the circuit breaker has been tripped, the switch goes into the tripped
position to indicate this. You use the switch to close the circuit again.
In the case of frame sizes S0 to S3, the rotary switch must be put in the
OFF position manually before it is switched on again to avoid switching to
the fault inadvertently.
In the case of frame sizes S2 and S3, it is possible to switch on and off using
a motorized remote-control mechanism (see Section 2.4, Accessories).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-9
3RV1 circuit breakers

Testing overload The following table shows you how overload tripping of the circuit breaker is
tripping tested:

Drawing Step Procedure

1 Switch the toggle switch/rotary

switch from 0 to 1.

2, 3 Put a screwdriver in the test

opening and push it to the left.

Overload tripping is in working

1 order when the toggle switch
switches from 1 to 0 (frame
3 size S00) or goes into the trip-
ped position (frame sizes S0 to
2 S3).

Table 2-3: Testing overload tripping (example: frame size S00)

2.2.3 Information on configuration

Short-circuit protection The short-circuit releases of the 3RV1 circuit breakers execute a three-phase
isolation of the faulty load feeder from the network and prevent any further
damage.
With a short-circuit breaking capacity of 50 kA or 100 kA and a voltage
of 400 VAC, the switches are considered to be short circuit-proof, since hig-
her short-circuit currents are not to be expected where the switches are
installed.
Backup fuses are only required if the short-circuit current at the point of
installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit
breakers.
You will find the short-circuit breaking capacity for other voltages and the
size of any required fuse listed in Section 2.6, Technical specifications.

Conditions of applica- 3RV1 circuit breakers are climate-proof. They are intended for use in closed
tion areas where there are no harzardous operating conditions such as dust, cor-
rosive fumes or destructive gases.
Appropriate housings are available as an accessory for use in dusty and
damp areas (see Section 2.4).

Inrush current Because the operational currents, the starting currents and the current
spikes vary on account of the inrush current, even in motors of the same
power, the motor powers listed in the tables are only guide values. Most
important when selecting the correct circuit breakers are the concrete start-
ing data and rating of the motor to be protected. This also applies to circuit
breakers used for transformer protection.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Phase loss The phase loss sensitivity of the circuit breaker ensures that it is tripped in
sensitivity good time in the event of the loss of a phase and the resulting overcurrents
in the other phases.
During normal operation, the device should have a three-pole load. To pro-
tect single-phase loads or direct current loads, all 3 main conducting paths
should be switched in series.

Explosion protection Note

In the case of a three-pole load, at 5 to 8 times the set current, the release
time deviates by a maximum of ± 20% and therefore complies with the
requirement of DIN VDE 0165 and EN 50019: 1977 +A1 to A5 and
DIN VDE 0165.

Characteristics The tripping characteristic of the inverse-time delayed overload release

(thermal overload release, a-release) is valid for direct current and alternat-
ing current with frequencies of 0 to 400 Hz.
The characteristics are valid for tripping operations from a cold state. From a
warm state, the release times of the thermal releases are reduced to
approximately 25 %.
The tripping characteristics of the instantaneous electromagnetic overcur-
rent releases (short-circuit release, n-release) is based on the rated current
In, which in circuit breakers with adjustable overload releases is also the
upper value of the adjustment range.
The following is a chart of the time-current characteristic:

opening time
10 000 NSB00004
100
min 5000
60
40 s
2000
1000
10
500
5
200 three-pole
2 load
100
1 class 20
50
three-pole
20 load
class 10
10
5
two-pole
2 load
class 10
1
0,5

0,2
0,1
0,05

0,02
0,01
0,005

0,002
0,001
0,6 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 A 80 x n
0,8 current

Figure 2-6: Time-current characteristic, chart

Time-current characteristics, current-limiting characteristics and I2t characte-

ristics can be requested directly from your sales representative, if neces-
sary.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-11
3RV1 circuit breakers

Frequency sensitivity of The characteristics of the short-circuit releases apply to frequencies of 50/
the short-circuit 60 Hz. For lower frequencies, such as 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up
releases to 400 Hz, and for direct current, appropriate correction factors have to be
taken into account.
The following characteristic curve illustrates the frequency sensitivity of the
short-circuit releases (calibrated to 12 times Iu +20%):

40
Tripping current
Change in %
30

20

10

-10

-20

-30
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 Hz
Figure 2-7: Frequency sensitivity of the n-short-circuit releases

The increase in tripping current is approximately 30% for DC voltage.

Frequency converters The thermal switch disconnectors do not have to be corrected when you
use frequency converters.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.3 Field of application/variants

The tripping characteristics of the 3RV1 circuit breakers are designed prima-
rily to protect three-phase induction motors.
The circuit breakers are therefore also referred to as motor protecting
switches.
The 3RV1 circuit breakers for motor protection are limited to the protection
of systems.
2.3.1 Motor protection

Set current The current of the motor that is to be protected is set on the adjustment
scale. The short-circuit release is set at the factory to 12 times the value of
the rated current of the circuit breaker. This ensures problem-free startup
and reliable protection of the motor.

Phase loss The phase loss sensitivity of the circuit breaker ensures that it is tripped in
sensitivity good time in the event of the loss of a phase and the resulting overcurrents
in the other phases.

CLASS10/CLASS20 Circuit breakers of frame sizes S00 to S3 with thermal overload releases
comply with tripping class 10 (CLASS 10). Circuit breakers with the
CLASS 20 tripping characteristic are available for frame sizes S2 and S3 in
difficult startup conditions.

2.3.2 Transformer protection

Inrush current In the case of primary protection of control transformers, the high inrush
currents that occur when the transformers are switched on often result in
the unwanted tripping of the protective devices.
The 3RV1 circuit breakers with frame sizes S0 and S2 therefore have over-
current releases for the protection of transformers that are set at the factory
to approximately 19 times the rated current. This makes it possible to pro-
tect transformers in which the inrush currents reach peak values of up to 30
times the rated current with circuit breakers in the primary circuit.

In the case of 4AM control transformers with low inrush current (Siemens
control transformers, for example), this is not required. 3RV1 circuit brea-
kers can be used here for motor protection.

2.3.3 Starter protection The 3RV13 starter protection switches are circuit breakers without overload
releases. They are used together with a contactor and overload relay if the
circuit breaker is not to be triggered in the case of overload tripping.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-13
3RV1 circuit breakers

2.3.4 Circuit breakers with overload relay function

Circuit breakers with the 3RV11 overload relay function are available for
frame sizes S0, S2, and S3.

Description Circuit breakers with the overload relay function contain overload releases
that do not affect the breaker mechanism of the circuit breakers. In the
event of an overload, the circuit breaker remains switched on.
To protect the following loads, 2 auxiliary contacts (1S + 1Ö) are attached on
the right side. These are operated in the event of an overload. The auxiliary
switch function can be evaluated or used to disconnect a downstream con-
tactor. After the circuit breaker has cooled down, the auxiliary contacts are
reset automatically.

Caution
In the overload range, the circuit breaker does not protect itself with the
overload relay function. You must therefore ensure that the circuit breaker is
safely disconnected by means of a downstream switching device (e.g. a
contactor).

Fixed link: auxiliary Note:

contacts with circuit The auxiliary contacts are connected to the circuit breaker on the right side
breaker and cannot be removed.

Diagrams
S0: 3RV1121-.... S2: 3RV1131-.... S3: 3RV1141-....

TEST

TEST TEST
Figure 2-8: Circuit breaker with overload relay function (frame sizes S0 to S3)

2.3.5 Fuse monitoring

The 3RV16 11-0BD10 circuit breaker is used with frame size S00 for fuse
monitoring.
A conducting path of the circuit breaker is switched in parallel for each fuse.
If one fuse fails, the current flows via the parallel-switched conducting path
of the circuit breaker and trips it.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Warning
Fuse monitoring using the 3RV16 11-0DB10 circuit breaker is not permissible
in feeders with power control regulators where a DC feedback with higher
values can occur in the event of a fault.

Auxiliary switch func- The circuit breaker used for fuse monitoring can be equipped with a trans-
tions verse or lateral auxiliary switch (Section 2.4, Accessories). The auxiliary
switch reports the tripping of the circuit breaker and thus the failure of the
fuse and initiates an all-pole disconnection of the problem circuit by a corre-
sponding switching device.

Safety sign Note

When fuses used for isolation purposes are monitored, a warning sign must
be put up next to them. Via the parallel-switched voltage circuit of the moni-
toring facility, voltage may get into the area that is supposed to be isolated if
the monitoring equipment has not bee disconnected.

We suggest the following text for the warning:

Attention
To ensure isolation, also disconnect
the fuse-monitoring device with the
item designation ............

Voltages The 3RV16 11-0DB10 circuit breaker is suitable for fuse monitoring in the fol-
lowing voltage ranges:
• 24 to 690 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• 24 to 250 VDC, 100 to 600 VDC
Switching capacity ICN 100 kA

Circuit diagrams Ue AC 24 ... 690V DC 24 ... 250V DC 100 ... 600V

I» I» I» I» I» I» I» I» I»

Figure 2-9: Circuit diagrams of circuit breakers for fuse monitoring

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-15
3RV1 circuit breakers

Parallel cables/meshed Attention

networks In the case of parallel cables and meshed networks, a tripping operation and
report only occurs when the voltage difference at the circuit breaker is at
least 24 V.

2.3.6 Switching direct current

The 3RV1 circuit breakers for alternating current are suitable for switching
direct current. However, you must note the maximum permissible DC volt-
age per conducting path. In the case of higher voltages, series connection
of 2 or 3 conducting paths is required.

Response thresholds The response thresholds of the overload releases remain unchanged. The
response thresholds of the short-circuit releases are increased with direct
current by approximately 40%.
The following table lists suggestions for switching direct current:

Max.
Suggestion Circuit Frame permissible Meaning
breaker size direct voltage
EI

3RV1. S00 to 150 VDC 2-pole switching

L+ L- S3 Ungrounded system
If a ground fault can be excluded, or if every
M ground fault is immediately corrected
(ground-fault monitoring), the maximum per-
missible DC voltage can be tripled.

3RV1. S00 to 300 VDC 2-pole switching

L+ L- S3 Grounded system
The grounded pole must always be assigned
M to the individual conducting path so that in
the event of a ground fault there are always
2 conducting paths in series.

3RV1. S00 to 450 VDC 1-pole switching

L+ L- S3 Grounded system
3 conducting paths in series.
M The grounded pole should be assigned to
the unswitched conducting path.
Table 2-4: Suggestions for switching direct current

Double ground fault Note

In the case of the circuit with 2-pole switching and an ungrounded system, it
is assumed that even in the event of a double ground fault that bridges two
contacts, safe disconnection still occurs.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.3.7 Main and emergency stop switches

Since the circuit breakers meet the requirements for disconnectors in acc.
with IEC 60947-3 and the additional test requirements for circuit breakers
with disconnector features in acc. with IEC 60947-2, they can be used with
the appropriate accessories as main and emergency stop switches. They
must also comply with DIN VDE 0113.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-17
3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4 Accessories
2.4.1 Attachable accessories: Overview

Auxiliary switches, alarm switches, auxiliary releases and other accessories

can be easily attached to the circuit breakers without tools, as required.

Accessories Function/use Width Attach to

Transverse auxi- The contacts of the auxiliary switches close and open together with Width of Front
liary switch the main contacts of the circuit breaker. Variants: the cir-
• 1 changeover contact cuit
• 1 NO + 1 NC contact breaker
• 2 NO contacts remains
the same

Electronically One transverse auxiliary switch can be attached for each circuit
optimized trans- breaker:
verse auxiliary Variants:
switch • 1 changeover contact
Lateral One lateral auxiliary switch can be attached for each circuit breaker: Left side
auxiliary switch • 1 NO + 1 NC contact 9 mm
• 2 NO contacts
• 2 NC contacts
• 2 NO + 2 NC contacts 18 mm

Alarm switch One alarm switch can be attached at the side of the circuit breakers 18 mm
Frame sizes with rotary switches.
S0, S2 and S3
The alarm switch has two contact systems:
• One contact system (1 NO + 1 NC) reports a general
tripping operation, irrespective of whether it was caused by a
short circuit, overload or auxiliary release.
• The other contact system (1 NO + 1 NC) only switches in
the event of a short circuit tripping operation.
To reclose the circuit breaker after a short circuit, the alarm switch
must be reset manually after the cause of the error has been elimi-
nated.

Shunt Remote release of the circuit breaker: 18 mm Right side

release • Via PLC: The coil of the release should be connected to
the voltage only briefly Accessories
• Especially suitable for emergency stop disconnection by cannot be
means of appropriate emergency stop switches in acc. with attached on
the right of a
DIN VDE 0113
circuit
Undervoltage Trips the circuit breaker in the event of a voltage interruption (e.g. breaker with
release when the power plug is removed) and prevents the motor starting up a relay func-
inadvertently when the voltage returns. tion.

Undervoltage Function and use, see undervoltage release.

release with lea- Additional function:
ding The auxiliary contacts isolate the undervoltage release from the
auxiliary con- power system on both sides in the event of breaking or a tripping
tacts operation and thus prevent voltage distortion to the control circuit
2 NO when the switch is in the off position.
It is possible to reclose the circuit breaker because the contacts
reclose.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Accessories Function/use Width Attach to

Disconnecting The supply is fed to the circuit breaker via the disconnecting module. Width of Upper side
module A connector which can only be removed when the circuit breaker is the cir-
Frame sizes switched off isolates the circuit breaker from the power system on 3 cuit
S0 and S2 poles. breaker
The shock-protected isolation position is easily visible and is secured remains
by a padlock to ensure that the connector cannot be used during the same
maintenance work, for example.

Motorized The circuit breakers can be opened and closed via the remote-con-
remote-control trolled mechanism by means of electrical commands. This enables a
mechanism load or system to be disconnected from and then reconnected to the
For frame sizes power system from an operator control panel.
S2 and S3 The circuit breaker can be disconnected from and reconnected to the
remote-control mechanism in situ.

Rotary switch The rotary switch extension for the door consists of a knob, a drive
extension for coupling and an extension shaft. They comply with IP 65. The door
the door interlock prevents the cubicle door being opened inadvertently when
the switch is in the on position. The off position can be secured with
a maximum of 3 padlocks.

Emergency stop Rotary switch extension with emergency stop function.

rotary switch
extension
Table 2-5: Attachable accessories

2.4.2 Auxiliary switch, alarm switch, and auxiliary release

The maximum configuration for each 3RV1 circuit breaker is one transverse
auxiliary switch, one lateral auxiliary switch, one alarm switch, and one aux-
iliary release.

Possible combinations The following combinations of auxiliary switches and alarm switches or of
auxiliary switches are possible:
• Auxiliary and alarm switches can be installed individually or together. The
lateral auxiliary switch is installed on the left of the alarm switch.
• Transverse and lateral auxiliary switches can be combined.
• One auxiliary release can be attached on the right for each circuit breaker:

Mounting the The auxiliary switches, alarm switches, and auxiliary releases are mounted
auxiliary switches in the same way for all frame sizes:

Transverse auxiliary switch (3RV1901-1D, -1E, -1F)

1

3RV 1901-1D, -1E

2

Figure 2-10: Mounting the transverse auxiliary switch (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-19
3RV1 circuit breakers

Lateral auxiliary switch (3RV1901-....)

Undervoltage release (3RV1901-....)

3RV 1901-.... 3RV 19.2-....

1
1
3
2 3
2
1
3
1
Figure 2-11: Mounting/removing the lateral auxiliary switch/undervoltage release (frame size S00)

Voltage ranges of the One undervoltage release or shunt release can be installed for each circuit
auxiliary releases breaker. The following voltage ranges are possible:

Auxiliary release Frequency

Undervoltage release AC 50 Hz AC 60 Hz

24 V
110 V 120 V
208 V
230 V 240 V
400 V
415 V 480 V

Undervoltage release 230 V 240 V

with leading 400 V
auxiliary contacts 415 V 480 V

Shunt release AC 50/60 Hz AC 50/60 Hz; DC

100% duty cycle 1) 5 sec. duty cycle 2)

20 V - 24 V 20 V - 70 V
90 V - 110 V 70 V - 190 V
210 V - 240 V 190 V - 330 V
350 V - 415 V 330 V - 500 V
500 V -
Table 2-6: Voltage ranges of the auxiliary releases
1) Transformer operational voltage of the lower mark of the voltage range at 0.85 (Tu = 60 °C)
is valid for 100% (continuous) duty cycle only at AC 50/60 Hz
2) Transformer operational voltage of the lower mark of the voltage range at 0.9 (Tu = 60 °C) is
valid for 5 seconds duty cycle at AC 50/60 Hz and DC

SIRIUS System Manual

2-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Mounting the alarm The following

23RV1 table explains how the 3RV19.2-.... alarm switch is mounted
circuit breakers
switch onto the circuit breaker:

Drawing Step Procedure

1 Press and hold down the trans-

3RV 19.2-.... port safety button on the inside
3 of the alarm switch.
2 Then press the blue RESET but-
4
ton on the front of the alarm
2 switch.
3
3 Hook the alarm switch onto the
circuit breaker.
1 2 4 Move the alarm switch towards
the circuit breaker until you
hear it click into place.

Table 2-7: Testing overload tripping (example: frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-21
3RV1 circuit breakers

Alarm switch signals The alarm switch has two signals:

• Tripped
• Short circuit
The following table lists the signals, the status of the alarm switch, and the
procedure required:

Drawing Status Procedure

Tripped signal
Tripped position Switch off (0 position)
LED: Red Switch on again (I position)
RESET button (blue):
remains depressed

1 2

Short circuit
Tripped postion Switch off (0 position)
LED: red Switch on again (I position)
RESET button (blue): RESET button (blue): press
not depressed

Table 2-8: Alarm switch with tripped signal and short circuit signal

SIRIUS System Manual

2-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4.3 Motorized remote-control mechanism

The motorized remote-control mechanism is available for 230 VAC, 50 Hz

and 24 VDC
• Frame size S2: Inmax = 50 A
• Frame size S3: Inmax = 100 A

Mounting and connec- The following table shows you how to mount and connect the motorized
tion remote-control mechanism:

Drawing Step Procedure

1 Remove the Allen key from the

cover of the circuit breaker.

2 Use the Allen key to change the

selector switch to "Manual".
4
3, 4 Undo the 2 screws and remove
the cover.
3

2 1
AUTOMATIC MANUAL

3 2

5, 6 Undo the 4 screws on the remote-

controlled mechanism, and
remove it.
(Pozidriv 2).

5 (4 x)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-23
3RV1 circuit breakers

Drawing Step Procedure

7 Screw the frame onto the mount-

ing surface using 4 screws (M5).
M5 (4 x)
8, 9 Attach the circuit breaker using 2
screws.
7 Attention:
Use screws 14 mm in length.
S2: M4/S3: M5

8 9

7
9

10 Attach the ground wire.

11 11 Connect the main and control
wires to the circuit breaker.
10
12 If desired, set MANUAL RESET:
Remove the screw from the
RESET lever.
13
13-15 Put the remote-control mecha-
nism module into place,
making sure that the driver covers
the knob on the circuit breaker,
and screw it on.
15 (4 x)

3RV1921-1M
MANUAL AUTOM.
RESET RESET
12 14

SIRIUS System Manual

2-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Drawing Step Procedure

16-18 Screw the control wires for the

remote-control mechanism onto
17 the connector, and insert it.
UC
16 19 Set the current.

20, 21 Put the cover on, and screw it

tightly.
18
22 Use the Allen key to switch to
AUTOMATIC and replace the Allen
20 key in the cover.

21

(22)

19
21 22

Table 2-9: Mounting the remote-control mechanism (frame size S2)

Warning
Do not set the "Automatic" position or operate the remote-control mecha-
nism when open! There is a risk of injury!

If used as an emergency stop, it is not permissible to switch on manually.

Manual RESET Remove the screw from the RESET lever (step 12)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-25
3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4.4 Disconnecting module

The disconnecting module is suitable for creating a visible isolating dis-

tance. The isolating connector can only be removed in a deenergized state.
The isolating distance can be secured with padlocks when open.
Disconnecting modules are available for the circuit breakers of frame sizes
S0 and S2.

Mounting sequence for Attention

the disconnecting mod- The disconnecting module covers the terminal screws of the transverse
ule and lateral auxiliary auxiliary switch. We therefore recommend that you use the lateral auxiliary
switch switches or that you only install the disconnecting module once the trans-
verse auxiliary switch has been wired.

Locking Disconnecting modules can be mounted on the circuit breakers of every

frame size. The modules are mounted in the same way for frame sizes S0
and S2. The following diagrams show you how to mount the disconnecting
module for frame size S0 (3RV1928-1A):

3RV1928-1A

3RV1.2

5
4
1

6 8
7

Figure 2-12: Mounting the disconnecting module (frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-26 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Disconnecting and The disconnecting module can be locked and sealed or secured with two
locking padlocks if the connector is removed during maintenance work, for example.
The circuit breaker itself can also be secured with a third padlock.

3
5
2
1

4 5

Figure 2-13: Locking the disconnecting module (frame size S0)

Terminal cover A terminal cover (3RT1936-4EA2) is available for the disconnecting module
(frame size S2) in frame size S2 (3RV1938-1A) that protects the contacts from dirt and pro-
vides additional shock protection.

3RV1938-1A 3 3RT1936-4EA2

3RV1.3 4
2
1

Figure 2-14: Locking the disconnecting module and mounting the cover (frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-27
3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4.5 Rotary switch extension for door

Rotary switch extensions for doors are available for frame sizes S0, S2, and
S3. They consist of a lockable rotary switch with a detachable door coupling,
a 150 mm long extension shaft, and a connector for the switch drive. The
door handle complies with IP 65.

Installation

1
4
3
2
0.7 to 0.9 Nm 5

3RV1926-0B, -0C, -0M: 130 mm

3RV1926-0K, -0L: 330 mm

Min. 16 mm
Max. 20 mm

6
7

Figure 2-15: Mounting the rotary switch extension for the door (frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-28 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Opening the door The following table shows you how the cubicle door can be opened using
the rotary switch extension for the door:

Drawing Procedure
To open the cubicle door, set the
circuit breaker to O (OFF). This
releases the extension shaft from
the rotary switch and allows the
door to be opened.

2
If you want to open the cubicle
door during operation, you can
override the procedure by press-
ing the button at the side of the
rotary knob (step 1).
1 To close it during operation, press
the button again so that the exten-
sion shaft snaps into place again.

2
Table 2-10: Opening a cubicle door using the rotary switch extension

Opening the door with Note:

great force If the circuit breaker is in the ON position and the door is opened with a
force >150 N to 200 N, the cap of the extension shaft is separated from the
rotary switch of the circuit breaker to prevent the circuit breaker being
destroyed.
The circuit breaker remains in the ON position.

Approx. 150
to 200 N

Figure 2-16: Operating the rotary switch extension for the door

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-29
3RV1 circuit breakers

The extension shaft must then be remounted on the circuit breaker and the
rotary switch extension for the door as follows:

Drawing Procedure

1Switch the circuit

breaker off, and turn the
rotary switch on the
door to OFF.
2Put the cap of the
extension shaft on the
1 rotary switch of the cir-
cuit breaker, and put the
2 extension shaft in the
cap.
3Close the cubicle door.
1

Table 2-11: Mounting the extension shaft

Security When the rotary switch is in the OFF position, it can be secured with up to 3
padlocks (e.g. during maintenance work on the system).

Max.
ø 8 mm
1

Figure 2-17: Locking the rotary switch extension for the door

SIRIUS System Manual

2-30 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4.6 Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508

Since July 16, 2001, 1 inch air clearance and 2 inch creepage distance is
required for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" on the input side in acc.
with UL 508. Use terminal blocks 3RV1928-1H and 3RT1946-4GA07 for the
3RV10 circuit breakers in frame sizes S0 and S3. The 3RV10 circuit breaker
in frame size S2 complies with the required air clearance and creepage dis-
tance without a terminal block. Terminal blocks are not required for use in
acc. with CSA. These terminal blocks cannot be used in the S0 frame size at
the same time as the 3RV19.5 3-phase busbars or in the S3 frame size at
the same time as a transverse auxiliary switch.

S0 Self-Protected
S3
3RT1946-4GA07
Combination
Controller Type E

3RV1928-1H

2
1

Figure 2-18: Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E"

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-31
3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4.7 Housings and mounting accessories

Molded-plastic housings (IP 55) are available if you want to install circuit
breakers as single units. All the housings are equipped with neutral and
ground terminals. Above and below are two openings that can be knocked
out for cable glands. On the back of the housing there are 2 precut open-
ings. All the cable bushings have metric dimensions. The surface casings
can be sealed. There is space in the housing on the rail for additional modu-
lar terminal blocks.

Molded-plastic
Model Width Frame size
...

Housing with actuator membrane for toggle switch Surface casing 54 mm, 72 mm S00

Bay 72 mm S00

Lockable housing with rotary switch Surface casing 54 mm, 72 mm S0

82 mm S2

Bay 72 mm S0

Lockable housing with emergency stop rotary switch (red/ Surface casing 54 mm, 72 mm S0
yellow) 82 mm S2

Bay 72 mm S0
Table 2-12: Housings for circuit breakers

Widths The widths of the housing depend on whether auxiliary releases are used:
• 54 mm: circuit breaker + lateral auxiliary switch
• 72, 82 mm: circuit breaker + lateral auxiliary switch + auxiliary release

Mounting the
surface casing
2
3

Neutral/ground terminals

4
1

Figure 2-19: Molded-plastic surface casing (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-32 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Mounting the bay

1 1

2 2
3
3
4
5

4
Figure 2-20: Molded-plastic bay (frame size S00)

Front plates Molded-plastic front plates that have IP 55 protection are suitable for any
housing:
Front plates
Frame
and Model
size
accessories

Front plates With actuator membrane and support for switch S00

With lockable with rotary switch S0, S2, S3

With lockable emergency-stop rotary switch (red/ S0, S2, S3

yellow)

Accessories Support for front plate S0

Table 2-13: Front plates for any housings

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-33
3RV1 circuit breakers

Mounting the front plates

Frame size S00

3RV1913-4C 3RV1913-4B

VU-01015
M3 5
M3 5 1 6
6 e.g.
cubicle door M6
M6 3
3 4
4

5 5

2 2
Figure 2-21: Mounting the front plate (frame size S00)

Frame size S0
3RV1923-4. + 3RV1923-4G 3RV1923-4.

M3
4 M3 a
e.g. cubicle door 3RV1.2 86,5
3RV1.3 139,0
2
3RV1.4 164,5
2

3RV1923-4G

1
1
Figure 2-22: Mounting the front plate (frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-34 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Accessories for the housings and front plates (S00)

The following accessories are available for the housings and front plates of
the circuit breakers in frame size S00:
• Replacement actuator membrane
• Locking device for 3 padlocks
• Emergency-stop button (red/yellow)
• Emergency-stop button (red/yellow) with safety lock

3RV1913-7D
3RV1913-7F

1
2
3RV1913-7E

3RV1913-6B

Figure 2-23: Accessories for the housings and front plates (frame size S00)

Locking device

The locking device can be used on the inside of the housings or front plates.
To do this, remove the frame of the actuator membrane. The locking device
can be secured with up to 3 padlocks that can prevent the circuit breaker
from being switched on during maintenance work, for example.

Emergency-stop button

The emergency-stop button is attached to the actuator membrane. When

hit, the circuit breaker is switched off and the button locks into position. You
can release the button by turning it or using a key. The circuit breaker can
then be switched on again.

Indicator lights

Indicator lights are available for the housings and front plates of circuit
breakers in frame sizes S00, S0, and S2. They contain a glow lamp and red,
green, yellow, orange, and transparent lenses. Indicator lights are available
for the following voltage ranges: 110-120 V, 220-240 V, 380-415 V and
480-500 V.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-35
3RV1 circuit breakers

Installation There is a precut opening on the front of the housing that can be knocked
out to install an indicator light:

2
For 3RV 1913-4
16 mm

1
3RV 1903-5

Figure 2-24: Indicator light installation in a molded-plastic housing

SIRIUS System Manual

2-36 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4.8 Busbar adapter 2 3RV1 circuit breakers

To enable the circuit breakers to be mounted without using up too much

space, and to ensure that the infeed is economical in terms of both time and
money, the switches are mounted directly onto busbar systems using bus-
bar adapters.
The circuit breakers are snapped onto the adapter and connected at the
input side. This prepared unit is mounted directly onto the busbar systems,
thus both attaching it mechanically and establishing electrical contact.

Busbar systems The adapters are suitable for the following systems:

For copper busbars in acc. with DIN 46 433

Busbar systems with
center-to-center spacing
Width Depth

40 mm systems 12 mm and 15 mm 5 mm and 10 mm

60 mm systems 12 mm to 30 mm 5 mm and 10 mm
Table 2-14: Busbar systems

Accessories The following accessories are available for busbar adapters:

• Modules that can be mounted on either side to widen the adapters
• Busbar holder for 3 rails
• Molded-plastic covers for 3 terminals (40 mm system)
• Molded-plastic cover profiles for shock protection

Measurements The following table lists the dimensions of the busbar adapters and accesso-
ries.

For circuit
Busbar adapter and
System Length Width breakers in frame
accessories
size
40 mm Circuit breaker 121 mm 45 mm S00, S0
+ lateral auxiliary switch 55 mm
Circuit breaker
139 mm 55 mm S2

Circuit breaker 182 mm 70 mm S3 (up to 400 V)

72 mm S3 (up to 690 V)
Side module 139 mm 13.5 mm S2
182 mm 13.5 mm S3
60 mm Circuit breaker 182 mm 45 mm S00, S0
182 mm 55 mm S2
182 mm 70 mm S3 (up to 400 V)
72 mm S3 (up to 690 V)
Side module 182 mm 13.5 mm S00 to S3
Table 2-15: Dimensions of the busbar adapters and accessories

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-37
3RV1 circuit breakers

Link module for Link modules are needed to make electrical and mechanical connections
circuit breaker and between the circuit breaker and contactor to form a load feeder. Link mod-
contactor ules are available for the following combinations:

Actuating voltage of Frame size For circuit breakers

contactor of contactor of frame size

AC and DC S00 S00

S00 S0

S0 S0

S2 S2

S3 S3
Table 2-16: Link modules for connecting circuit breakers to contactors

You can find additional information about load feeders on busbar systems in
Chapter 5, "Fuseless load feeders".

Mounting circuit The following illustrations show you how to mount circuit breakers in frame
breakers on busbars sizes S00 and S0 onto busbar adapters (8US1..1-5D) and how to remove
them again, using frame size S00 as an example:

8US1..1-5D

10 mm

Connection
module

Figure 2-25: Mounting circuit breakers on busbar adapters (frame sizes S00 and S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-38 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Mounting circuit The following illustrations show you how to mount circuit breakers in frame
breakers on a busbar sizes S2 and S3 onto a busbar adapter:
system
S2 S3

8US1.61-5FP08 8US1111-4SM00

3
6 to 9 Nm

6
8 (3x)

7
Figure 2-26: Mounting circuit breakers on busbar adapters (frame sizes S2 and S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-39
3RV1 circuit breakers

Mounting The following illustration shows you how to mount accessories for busbar
accessories adapters for frame sizes S00 to S2:
• Side module
• Device holder
• Extension piece
• Outgoing terminal rail (for frame sizes S00 and S0 only)

40 mm

Device holder

Side module

1
2

Extension piece Outgoing terminal rail

Figure 2-27: Accessories for busbar adapters (frame sizes S00 to S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-40 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

2.4.9 Isolated 3-phase busbar system

3-phase busbars are used to snap circuit breakers of frame sizes S00, S0,
and S2 quickly and easily in a row onto a rail. There is only one power supply,
via a feed-in terminal.
The 3-phase busbar systems are safe from fingers and are shock protected.
They are rated for the short-circuit stress that can occur on the output side
of the connected circuit breakers.

Feed-in terminal, connection 3-phase busbar

from above (3RV1915-5A) 3RV1915-.AB

Spacer

Protective cap
3RV1915-6AB

Feed-in terminal, connection

from below (3RV1915-5B)

Figure 2-28: 3-phase busbar system

Rated operational 690 V

Rated operational voltage
voltage/current
Rated current Frame sizes S00, S0: 63 A
Frame size S2: 108 A
Table 2-17: Rated operational voltage/current

Models The 3-phase busbars take 2 to 5 circuit breakers, depending on the model.
There are busbars with more generous spacing for circuit breakers with
accessories attached on the side.

Frame size
of the
Spacing Models
circuit
breaker

S00, S0 45 mm For 2, 3, 4, or 5 circuit breakers

55 mm For 2, 3, 4, or 5 circuit breakers + accessories

63 mm For 2 or 4 circuit breakers + accessories

S2 55 mm For 2, 3, or 4 circuit breakers

75 mm For 2, 3, or 4 circuit breakers + accessories

Table 2-18: Types of 3-phase busbars

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-41
3RV1 circuit breakers

Combination of Circuit breakers in frame sizes S00 and S0 vary in height and depth and
frame sizes S00 therefore cannot be combined on one busbar. You can combine two busbars
and S0 for circuit breakers in frame sizes S0 and S00 using an extension piece.

Extending the It is possible to extend the busbars by clamping the connecting lugs of a fur-
bus ther bus (turned 180°) under the terminals of the last circuit breaker (see the
section on mounting).

Attention
Note the current-carrying capacity of the busbars when you extend them.

Accessories The following accessories are available for the isolated 3-phase busbar sys-
tem:
• Feed-in terminal from above (3RV1915-5A for S00, 3RV1925-5AB for S0,
3RV1935-5A for S2)
• Feed-in terminal from below (3RV1915-5B for S00, S0)
• Connector
A connector links two 3-phase busbars over a space of 45 mm for circuit
breakers in frame sizes S00 and S0.
• Protective cap for connecting lugs (3RV19 15-6AB)
Protective caps provide shock protection for spare slots. To extend the
bus, remove the protective caps.
• Spacer

Feed-in terminal 3-phase feed-in terminals make it possible to have greater conductor cross-
sections than on the circuit breaker itself.
Tightening torque: 2 to 4 Nm (17.6 to 35.2 LB.IN).

Frame size of
Connec- Conductor
the circuit Conductors
tion cross-section
breaker

S00, S0 From above Single- or multi-core 2.5 to 25 mm2

Finely stranded with wire end 2.5 to 25 mm2
ferrule
AWG 12 to 4

S00, S0 From below Single- or multi-core 6 to 25 mm2

Finely stranded with wire end 4 to 16 mm2
ferrule
AWG 10 to 4

S2 From above Single- or multi-core 2.5 to 50 mm2

Finely stranded with wire end 1.5 to 35 mm2
ferrule
AWG 14 to 0
Table 2-19: Conductor cross-section of the 3-phase feed-in terminals

Feed-in terminal - con- Attention

nection from below The feed-in terminal with connection from below is clamped on instead of a
circuit breaker. Make sure you check how much space you require when you
order the 3-phase busbars.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-42 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breakers

Mounting the 3-phase

busbars S00
3RV1915-.AB
Turned
3RV1915-5A 180°

3RV1915-6AB

3RV1915-5B

S00:
Cage Clamp 1
1
2

8WA2011-1DG30

3b
3a
3c

S0
3RV1915-.AB
3RV1925-5AB Turned
180°

3RV1915-6AB

3RV1915-5B

Figure 2-29: Mounting the isolated 3-phase busbar system (frame sizes S00 to S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-43
3RV1 circuit breakers

S2 3RV1935-1./3.
3RV1935-5A

3RV1935-6A

Figure 2-30: Mounting the isolated 3-phase busbar system (frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-44 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

2.5 Mounting and 2connection

3RV1 circuit breaker

2.5.1 Mounting

Mounting position You can install the 3RV1 circuit breakers anywhere.

Snap-on mounting The circuit breakers are mounted by snapping them onto 35 mm rails that
comply with DIN EN 50 022. The circuit breakers with a frame size of S3
require a rail with an installation height of 15 mm. Alternatively, they can also
be snapped onto 75 mm rails.

S00 S3
DIN EN 5022

RV-00298
DIN EN 5022
1

2
1
1
Figure 2-31: Mounting the circuit breakers onto the rail

Screw-on mounting The circuit breakers are attached to a flat surface with 2 screws. For circuit
breakers in frame sizes S00 and S0, two push-in lugs (3RB1900-0B) (pack of
10) are also required.
Circuit breakers in frame sizes S2 and S3 can be screwed directly onto a
base plate.

3RB1900-0B

Figure 2-32: Screw-on mounting of the 3RV1 (example: frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-45
3RV1 circuit breaker

2.5.2 Connection

Tools You require the following to connect the circuit breakers:

• Frame sizes S00 to S2: Pozidriv 2 screwdriver
• Frame size S3: Allen key (4 mm)

Conductor cross-sec- The typical SIRIUS conductor cross-sections apply (see Section 1.5.2 "Con-
tions ductor cross-sections").

Screw-type terminals 3RV1 circuit breakers with frame sizes S00 and S0 have terminals with cap-
tive screws and terminal washers that enable you to connect 2 conductors,
even if they have different cross-sections.

The box terminals of the circuit breakers of frame sizes S2 and S3 can also
take 2 conductors with different cross-sections. With the exception of circuit
breakers of frame size S3, which have terminal screws with a 4 mm Allen
screw, all the terminal screws can be tightened using a standard screwdriver
or a Pozidriv screwdriver (size 2).

You can remove the box terminals from circuit breakers with a frame size of
S3 to connect conductors with lugs or connecting bars. A terminal cover is
available as shock protection and to ensure that you comply with the
required creepages and clearances when the box terminals are removed.

Soldering pin connec- Circuit breakers in frame size S00 can be soldered onto printed circuit
tor boards by means of a soldering pin connector. A soldering pin connector is
available for the main contacts and the transverse auxiliary switch.

SIRIUS System Manual

2-46 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

Mounting the solder- The soldering pin adapters are clamped above and below in the screw-type
ing pin adapters terminals of the circuit breakers. Alternatively, the power supply can be
taken to the printed circuit boards via cables.

1 3

2
4

1
1

Figure 2-33: Circuit breaker, soldering pin connector (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-47
3RV1 circuit breaker

2.5.3 Device circuit diagrams

13 23
Frame size S00 3RV1901-1F

14 24
13 21 3RV1902-.D..
C1
3RV1901-1E
C2
14 22
11 3RV1902-.A..
3RV1901-1G D1
3RV1901-1D
U
D2
14 12
3RV1901-.J 3RV1901-.A 3RV1901-.B 3RV1901-.C
13 21 31 43 33 41 33 43 31 41 L1 1 L2 3 L3 5

14 22 32 44 34 42 34 44 32 42
I >> I >> I >>
3RV1912-.C..
T1 2 T2 4 T3 6
D1 07
max. 10 A

U
D2 08

Figure 2-34: Device circuit diagram (frame size S00)

13 23
Frame sizes S0 to S3
3RV1901-1F

14 24
13 21 3RV1902-.D..
C1
3RV1901-1E
C2

14 22
11 3RV1902-.A..
3RV1901-1G D1
3RV1901-1D U
D2

14 12 3RV1921-1M
3RV1901-.J 3RV1901-.A 3RV1901-.B 3RV1901-.C
57 65
13 21 31 43 33 41 33 43 31 41 L1 1 L2 3 L3 5

58 66
14 22 32 44 34 42 34 44 32 42
77 85
I >> I >> I >>
T1 2 T2 4 T3 6

max. 10 A
78 86
3RV1922-.C..
D1 07

U
D2 08

Figure 2-35: Device circuit diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3)

13 23
Circuit breaker with
3RV1901-1F
overload relay func-
tion 14 24
13 21

Frame sizes S0 to S3 3RV1901-1E

14 22
11
3RV1901-1G
3RV1901-1D

14 12
3RV1901-.J 3RV1901-.A 3RV1901-.B 3RV1901-.C
13 21 31 43 33 41 33 43 31 41 L1 1 L2 3 L3 5

97 95

14 22 32 44 34 42 34 44 32 42
I >> I >> I >>
T1 2 T2 4 T3 6 98 96
max. 10 A

Figure 2-36: Circuit breaker with relay function, device circuit diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-48 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

2.6 Dimensioned drawings (measurements in mm)

3RV1 circuit breakers

2) 1) 11) 5) 3) 4) 1) 2) 11) 5) 3) 4)
14 72 25
25

5
5
12

12
45

45

106
105
45
90

45
90
97
7)
7)
3,5

NSB00027b
8) 8)
NSB 00026c

9 45 18 18 45 18 5 56
18 5 62 9 69
70 80
6) 76 91
Figure 2-37: 3RV10 11, 3RV16 (frame size S00) 3RV10 21 (frame size S0)

1) 2) 11) 20 121 30
3) 4)
5
130
125

140
89

45
85

7)

8)

8
NSB00028a

18 55 18 5 109
9 127
132
144
Figure 2-38: 3RV10 31 (frame size S2)

146
11) 10) 8 4) 30

3)
1) 2) 5
165

116
150

155
45

7)

9)

7
18 70 18 132
NSB00029b

9 5 153
157
169
Figure 2-39: 3RV10 4 (frame size S3)

1) Lateral auxiliary switch, 2-pole 7) Drilling pattern

2) Alarm switch (S0 to S3) or lateral auxiliary switch, 4-pole (S00 to S3) 8), 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50022
3) Auxiliary release 9) Mounting onto 35 mm rail, 15 mm high, in acc. with EN 50 022
4) Transverse auxiliary switch or 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50023
5) Push-in lugs for screw mounting 10) 4 mm Allen screw
6) Only with undervoltage release with leading auxiliary switch 11) Lockable in 0 position with shackle (5 mm in diameter)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-49
3RV1 circuit breaker

3RV11 circuit breaker with overload relay function

1) 2) 11) 5) 3) 1) 2) 11) 121

25 20 4) 30
72 4)
3) 5
5
12

45

106

125
90
97
45

130
140
90
45
7) 7)
NSB00030b

8) 8)

18 45 20 5 55 18 55 20 8

NSB00031c
9 69 9 5 109
80 127
132
91 144
Figure 2-40: 3RV11 21 (frame size S0) 3RV11 31 (frame size S2)

146 4)
11) 10) 3) 8 30

1) 2)
5
165

116
150

155
45
90

7)

9)

18 70 20 7
NSB00032c

9 5 132
153
157
169
Figure 2-41: 3RV11 42 (frame size S3)

1) Lateral auxiliary switch, 2-pole

2) Alarm switch or lateral auxiliary switch, 4-pole
3) Block for overload relay function
4) Transverse auxiliary switch
5) Push-in lugs for screw-type mounting
7) Drilling pattern
8) 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 022
9) Mounting onto 35 mm rails, 15 mm high, in acc. with EN 50 022 or 75 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 023
10) 4 mm Allen screw
11) Lockable in 0 position with shackle (5 mm in diameter)

Disconnecting module
55 149

45 94
57
51

121
96
NSB00033a

NSB00034a
144

190

Figure 2-42: 3RV19 28-1A (for frame size S0) 3RV19 38-1A (for frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-50 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

Molded-plastic surface casing

45 19
55 105
3)
4) 11 13 c)
7)
NSB 00035c

4.5

6)
5)
145 - 148

8)
77.5

9)

b) 99 b)
b) 100.5 d) 190
a) 88 b) 143

Figure 2-43: 3RV19 13-1. (for frame size S00)

a) 3RV19 13-1CA00 85 mm 3) Knockout opening for M25

3RV19 13-1DA00 105 mm 4) Knockout opening for rear M20 cable routing
b) With 3RV19 13-7D: 146.5 mm 5) With safety lock
With 3RV19 13-7E: 166.5 mm 6) Max. shackle diameter for padlock is 8 mm
The dimensions relate to the mounting surface 7) Indicator light 3RV19 03-5
c) With 3RV19 13-7D: 64 mm 8) Locking device 3RV19 13-6B
With 3RV19 13-7E: 84 mm 9) Emergency-stop button 3RV19 13-7
d) The dimensions relate to the mounting surface

32 29 25

1) 2)

4)
45 19
7

1)
4)
2)

3)
4.5

3)
145 - 148

235
250
155

NSB 00036c

18
a) 126
NSB 00037c

18
150 181

Figure 2-44: 3RV19 23-1. (for frame size S0) 3RV19 33-1. (for frame size S2)

a) 3RV19 23-1CA00 85 mm 1) Knockout opening for M32 (left) and M40 (right)
3RV1923-1DA00 105 mm 2) Knockout opening for rear M32 cable entry
1) Knockout opening for M25 3) Opening for padlock with a max. shackle diameter of 8 mm
2) Knockout opening for rear M20 cable entry 4) Indicator light 3RV19 03-5.
3) Opening for padlock with a max. shackle diameter of 8 mm
4) Indicator light 3RV19 03-5.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-51
3RV1 circuit breaker

Molded-plastic bay

3) 2) max. 7 1) 3) 2) max. 6 1)
87.5

87.5
105 95 12 87 105 95 12 87
1) Leuchtmelder
1) Indicator light 3RV19
3RV19 03-5.
03-5. 1) Indicator light 3RV19 03-5.
1) Leuchtmelder 3RV19 03-5.
2) Ausbrechöffnungen
2) Knockout opening forfürM25
M25 2)2) Knockout opening für
Ausbrechöffnungen for M25
M25
3) Ausbrechöffnungen
3) Knockout opening forfürM20
M20 3)3) Knockout opening für
Ausbrechöffnungen for M20
M20

Figure 2-45: 3RV19 13-2DA00 (frame size S00) 3RV19 23-2DA00/-2GA00 (frame size S0)

Molded-plastic front plate

40
12
NSB 00039a 1) ø7 4.5
4,5

85 56.5
56,5 10 62
70

1)1)Leuchtmelder
Indicator light 3RV19
3RV19 03-5.
03-5.
Figure 2-46: 3RV19 13-4C (frame size S00)

Molded-plastic front plate + support

12 18 40
NSB 00042a 1) ø 3.5
3,5 7.4
7,4
37.5

85 56.5
56,5 10 62
70
1) Leuchtmelder
1) Indicator light 3RV19
3RV19 03-5.
03-5.
Figure 2-47: 3RV19 23-4. (frame sizes S0, S2, S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-52 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

Soldering pin connector for main and auxiliary switches

13.4 13.1
12
45 5 59 5
9

9
2

8.4

14.4 14.4
103

97.4
NSB00041

8.4

49
14.4 14.4
Figure 2-48: 3RV19 18-5A/-5B (frame size S00)

Rotary switch extension for the door

66
16 45 19 15
1 ... 4
34.5
1)
NSB 01090b

5
2)
max. 327
5) 33 17
min. 55

Figure 2-49: 3RV19 26-0 (frame sizes S0, S2, S3)

1) Lockable in 0 position with shackle (max. 8 mm in diameter)

2) Affixed with screw caps
5) Ground terminal 35 mm2 and support bracket for 330 mm shaft

Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508

70
10

45 74
84
27
72

168
121

NSB 01228

NSB 01229

Figure 2-50: 3RV19 28-1H (frame size S0) and 3RT19 46-4GA07 (frame size S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-53
3RV1 circuit breaker

Motorized remote-control mechanism

∅5 112

NSB00044
SI EMENS

RESET I>
I
182
224

MANUAL
AUTOMATIC REVISION

87 a)
148

Figure 2-51: 3RV19. 6-3AP0 for circuit breaker

a) 3RV19 36-3AP0, frame size S2, 211 mm
b) 3RV19 46-3AP0, frame size S3, 236 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

2-54 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

Busbar adapter

68
1

40
139
142

40
NSK-8186

NSK-8187
13,5 55 32
50
Figure 2-52: 8US10.1-5DJ07 8US1061-5FK08

4) For busbars 1) For 40 mm busbar systems

Width: 12 to 15 mm 2) Side module 8US1998-2KB00
Depth: 5 mm and 10 mm

2 6 .5 2 0

4 0
68

1
60

6 0
3 )
185
182

1 8 5
2 2 0
2 0 0
60

6 0
NSK-8188

N S K -9 4 0 3 a
NSK-8189

13,5 55
32
60 2 0 5 1

Figure 2-53: 8US1251-5DM07 8US1261-5FM08 8US1923-2AA00

1) For 60 mm busbar systems 1) For 60 mm busbar systems 3) For busbars

2) Side module 8US1998-2BM00 2) Side module 8US1998-2BM00 Width: 12 to 30 mm
Depth: 5 and 10 mm

3-phase busbar systems

NSB 00055b
13 NSB 00056b
13
21

21
64

64

45 55
108

108

83 93
128
173 148
218 203
258

Figure 2-54: 3RV19 15-1. (frame sizes S00, S0)

3RV19 15-1A for 2 circuit breakers (length 83 mm) 3RV19 15-3A for 2 circuit breakers with accessories (length 93 mm)
3RV19 15-1B for 3 circuit breakers (length 128 mm) 3RV19 15-3B for 3 circuit breakers with accessories (length 148 mm)
3RV19 15-1C for 4 circuit breakers (length 173 mm) 3RV19 15-3C for 4 circuit breakers with accessories (length 203 mm)
3RV19 15-1D for 5 circuit breakers (length 218 mm) 3RV19 15-3D for 5 circuit breakers with accessories (length 258 mm)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-55
3RV1 circuit breaker

15

31

96
55

NSB00057b
111

166
165
221

Figure 2-55: 3RV19 35-1 (for circuit breakers in frame size S2)

3RV19 35-1A for 2 circuit breakers (length 111 mm)

3RV19 35-1B for 3 circuit breakers (length 166 mm)
3RV19 35-1C for 4 circuit breakers (length 221 mm)

15
31

96

75
NSB00058b

121
166

196
271

Figure 2-56: 3RV19 35-3 (for circuit breakers in frame size S2)

3RV19 35-3A for 2 circuit breakers with accessories (length 121 mm)
3RV19 35-3B for 3 circuit breakers with accessories (length 196 mm)
3RV19 35-3C for 4 circuit breakers with accessories (length 271 mm)

3-phase feed-in terminals

44
14 14 54
NSB01093a
25

44 24
92
NSB00059a

73

71
NSB00060b
25

114

14 14 a
44 31

a) 3RV1.1 19 mm
a) 3RV1.2 23 mm

Figure 2-57: 3RV19 15-5A 3RV19 15-5B 3RV19 25-5AB

Connection from above (for frame size S00) Connection from below Connection from above (frame size S0)
(frame size S00/S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

2-56 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

Connector

112 13
55

NSB 00062c
NSB00061b

21
34

64
91

108
42,5
81
161

Figure 2-58: 3RV19 35-5A 3RV19 15-5D

(for frame size S2) (frame size S0 (left) and frame size S00 (right))

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-57
3RV1 circuit breaker

2.7 Technical specifications

2.7.1 General specifications

Type 3RV1. 1 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 3RV1. 4

Specifications
• IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes
• IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes
• IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes
Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Pole number 3
Max. rated current Inmax (= max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 25 50 100
Permissible ambient temperature
Storage/transportation °C -50 to +80
Operation °C -20 to +70 1)
Permissible rated current with the following internal cubicle temperature:
• +60 °C % 100
• +70 °C % 87
Circuit breaker in housing
Permissible rated current with the following ambient housing temperature:
• +35 °C % 100
• +60 °C % 87
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 2)
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6
Utilization category
• IEC 60 947-2 (circuit breaker) A
• IEC 60 947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3
CLASS In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 10 10/20
Direct current short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant τ = 5 ms)
(time constant t = 5 ms)
• 1 conducting path 150 VDC kA 10
• 2 conducting paths in series 300 VDC kA 10
• 3 conducting paths in series 450 VDC kA 10
Power loss (Pv) per circuit breaker In -> to 1.25 A W 5 - - -
Depends on rated current In In -> 1.6 A to 6.3 A W 6 - - -
(Upper setting range) In -> 8 A to 12 A W 7 - - -
In -> to 0.63 A W - 5 - -
Rper conducting path = P/I2 × 3 In -> 0.8 A to 6.3 A W - 6 - -
In -> 8 A to 16 A W - 7 - -
In -> 20 A to 25 A W - 8 - -
In -> to 25 A W - - 12 -
In -> 32 A W - - 15 -
In -> 40 A to 50 A W - - 20 -
In -> to 63 A W - - - 20
In -> 75 A and 90 A W - - - 30
In -> to 100 A W - - - 38

SIRIUS System Manual

2-58 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

Type 3RV1. 1 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 3RV1. 4

Shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 25/11 (rectangular and sine pulse)
Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529 IP20 IP 20 3)
Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part protected against touching by fingers
100
Temperature compensation In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 °C -20 to +60
Phase loss sensitivity In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 Yes
Explosion protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0165 and EN 50 019 Yes for 3RV10 (KEMA test certificate no. Ex-97.4.32 36)4)
Isolating function In acc. with IEC 60 947-2 Yes
Main and emergency-stop switch features5) In acc. with IEC 60 204-1 Yes
(VDE 0113)
Safe isolation between the main circuit and the In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
auxiliary circuit required for PELV applications
• to 400 V + 10% Yes
• to 415 V+ 5 % (higher voltage on request) Yes
Mechanical life Operating 100,000 50,000
cycles
Electrical life 100,000 25,000
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor star- 1/h 15
tups)

1) Reduction in current above +60 °C 3) Connection room IP 00 5) With corresponding accessories

2) With molded-plastic housing 500 V 4) ATEX certification in acc. with EU directive
94/9/EC in preparation

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-59
3RV1 circuit breaker

Conductor cross-sections - main circuit

Type 3RV1. 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 3RV1. 4
Connection type Screw-type terminal Screw-type terminal with box termi-
nal
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm
Specified tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6
Conductor cross-sections, 1 or 2 conductors
Single-core mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 16)
mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) - -
(max. 4)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule: mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35)
mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50)
(max. 10)
Stranded mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50)
mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70)
(max. 4) (max. 10)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0)
AWG - - 1 x (18 to 2) 1 x (10 to 2/0)
Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm - - 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Removable box terminal 1)
With copper busbars mm - - - 18 x 10
With lug mm² - - - To 2 x 70
Cage Clamp connections2)3)4)
(1 or 2 conn. can be connected) Single-coil mm² 2 x (0.25 to 2.5) -
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm² 2 x (0.25 to 1.5) -
Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm² 2 x (0.25 to 2.5) -
AWG cables, single-core or stranded AWG 2 x (24 to 14) -
Max. outer diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm
Permissible service position Any
In acc. with IEC 60 447 start com-
mand "I"
Right or above
Control switch
Transverse auxiliary switch at front with 1 changeover contact Switching capacity with different voltages
Rated operational voltage Ue AC voltage VAC 24 230 400 690
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 A 4 3 1.5 0.5
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Ith A 10 10 10 10
Rated operational voltage Ue DC voltage L/R 200 ms VDC 24 110 220
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 A 1 0.22 0.1
Transverse electronically optimized auxiliary switch at front with 1 changeover contact
Rated operational voltage Ue AC voltage VAC 3 to 60
Rated operational current Ie/AC-14 mA 1 to 300
Rated operational voltage Ue DC voltage L/R 200 ms VDC 3 to 60
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 mA 1 to 300
Transverse auxiliary switch at front with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO contacts
Rated operational voltage Ue AC voltage VAC 24 230
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 A 2 0.5
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Ith A 2.5 2.5
Rated operational voltage Ue DC voltage L/R 200 ms VDC 24 48 60
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 A 1 0.3 0.15
Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC and alarm switch
Rated operational voltage Ue AC voltage VAC 24 230 400 690
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 A 6 4 3 1
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Ith A 10 10 10 10
Rated operational voltage Ue DC voltage L/R 200 ms VDC 24 110 220 440
Rated operational current Ie A 2 0,5 0.25 0.1

1) After the box terminals have been removed, lug or busbar connections are possible.
2) For notes on the Cage Clamp system, see pages 1-19.
3) Use an insulation stop for a conductor cross-section ≤ 1 mm2.
5) Associated opening tool 8WA28 03/8WA28 04

SIRIUS System Manual

2-60 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

Permissible rating of approved devices for North America, u s

The circuit breakers in the SIRIUS 3RV1 series are approved for u/s and can also be used in acc. with UL 508 and C22.2 No.14 with a
contactor as a load feeder. You can use these circuit breakers as a "Manual Motor Starter" for "Group Fusing" or for "Group Installation" or as a
"Combination Motor Controller Type E".

3RV1 circuit breaker as a "Manual Motor Starter"

When the circuit breaker is used as a "Manual Motor Starter", it is always with a device for short-circuit protection (upstream short-cir-
cuit protection device). Any fusible link ("group fusing") or circuit breaker ("group installation") can be used as a device for short-circuit
protection. The type and size are selected in acc. with the American NFPA 70 standard, Article 430-53 (c) for adequate protection of
supply lines.
Accreditation was issued under the following file numbers with the listed data:
u File No. E14705, Product Class NLRV
s File No. LR12730, Product Class 3211 05

Circuit breaker Hp rating Rated current To 240 VAC To AC 480 Y/277 V To AC 600 Y/347 V
1 1 1
For FLA max. In Icu ) Icu ) Icu )
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA
0.11 to 2 50 50 10
3RV10 11 2.5 50 50 10
3RV16 11-0BD10 115 ½ - 3.2 50 50 10
200 1½ 3 4 50 50 10
Frame size S00 230 2 3 5 50 50 10
460 - 7½ 6.3 50 50 10
FLA max. 12 A, 600 V 575/600 - 10 8 50 50 10
NEMA Size 00 10 50 50 10
12 50 50 10
0.11 to 3.2 50 50 30
3RV10 21/3RV11 21 4 50 50 30
3RV13 21 5 50 50 30
115 2 - 6.3 50 50 30
Frame size S0 200 3 7½ 8 50 50 30
230 5 7½ 10 50 50 30
FLA max. 25 A, 600 V 460 - 15 12.5 50 50 30
NEMA Size 1 575/600 - 20 16 50 50 30
20 50 50 30
22 50 50 30
25 50 50 30
3RV10 31/3RV11 31 11 to 16 50 50 25
3RV13 31 20 50 50 25
115 3 - 25 50 50 25
Frame size S2 200 7½ 15 32 50 50 25
230 10 20 40 50 50 25
FLA max. 50 A, 600 V 460 - 40 45 50 50 25
NEMA Size 2 575/600 - 50 50 50 50 25
11 to 16 50 50 30
3RV10 41/3RV10 42 20 50 50 30
3RV11 42 115 10 - 25 50 50 30
3RV13 41/3RV13 42 200 20 30 32 50 50 30
230 20 40 40 50 50 30
Frame size S3 460 - 75 50 50 50 30
575/600 - 100 63 50 50 30
FLA max. 99 A, 600 V 75 50 50 30
NEMA Size 3 90 50 50 30
100 (99) 50 50 30

Hp rating = output power in horse power (maximum motor power)

FLA = full load amps

1) Corresponds to "short circuit breaking capacity" in acc. with UL

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-61
3RV1 circuit breaker

Permissible rating of approved devices for North America, u s

3RV10.A circuit breaker as "Combination Motor Controller Type E"

Since 16.07.2001, 1 inch air clearance and 2 inch creepage distance is required for a "Combination Motor Controller Type E" on the input
side with UL 508 The 3RV10 circuit breaker in frame sizes S0 and S3 are therefore approved with the terminal blocks listed below in
acc. with UL 508.
The 3RV10 circuit breaker in frame size S2 already complies with the required air clearance and creepage distance as a basic unit.
These extended air clearances and creepage distances are not required for CSA. The terminal blocks are therefore not required for use
as a "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with CSA. 3RV10 circuit breakers are certified as "Combination Motor Controller
Type E" under the following file numbers with the listed data:
u File No. E156943, Product Class NKJH
s File No. LR12730, Product Class 3211 08

Circuit breaker Hp rating Rated current To 240 VAC To AC 480 Y/277 V To AC 600 Y/347 V
1
Icu )
1 1
For FLA max. In Icu ) Icu )
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA
0.11 to 1.6 50 50 30
3RV10 21 2 50 50 30
+ 3RV19 28-1H 115 2 - 2.5 50 50 30
200 3 7½ 3.2 50 50 30
Frame size S0 230 3 7½ 4 50 50 30
460 - 15 5 50 50 30
FLA max. 22 A, 480 V 575/600 - 10 6.3 50 50 30
12.5 A, 600 V 8 50 50 30
NEMA Size 1 10 50 50 30
12.5 50 50 30
16 50 50 -
20 50 50 -
22 50 50 -
0.9 to 16 50 50 25
3RV10 31 20 50 50 25
115 3 - 25 50 50 25
Frame size S2 200 7½ 15 32 50 50 25
230 10 20 40 50 50 25
FLA max. 50 A, 600 V 460 - 40 45 50 50 25
NEMA Size 1 575/600 - 50 50 50 50 30
3RV10 31/3RV11 31 11 to 16 50 50 25
3RV13 31 20 50 50 25
115 3 - 25 50 50 25
Frame size S2 200 7½ 15 32 50 50 25
230 10 20 40 50 50 25
FLA max. 50 A, 600 V 460 - 40 45 50 50 25
575/600 - 50 50 50 50 25
NEMA Size 2
11 to 16 50 50 30
3RV10 41 20 50 50 30
+ 3RT19 46-4GA07 115 10 - 25 50 50 30
200 20 30 32 50 50 30
Frame size S3 230 20 40 40 50 50 30
460 - 75 50 50 50 30
FLA max. 100 A, 480 V 575/600 - 75 63 50 50 30
75 A, 600 V 75 50 50 30
90 50 50 -
NEMA Size 3 100 50 50 -
Hp rating = output power in horse power (maximum motor power)
FLA = full load amps
1) Corresponds to "short circuit breaking capacity" in acc. with UL

Rating of the control switches and alarm switches

Lateral Transverse Transverse
auxiliary switch with auxiliary switch with auxiliary switch with
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 1 changeover contact 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC
and alarm switch
Max. rated voltage
• In acc. with NEMA u VAC 600 240
• In acc. with NEMA s VAC 600 240
Continuous current A 10 5 2.5
Switching capacity A600 B600 C300
Q300 R300 R300

SIRIUS System Manual

2-62 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

2.7.2 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn in acc. with IEC 60 947-2

The table lists the rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics of 3RV1 circuit
breakers with different inception voltages and related to the rated current In of the circuit breakers.
The incoming supply of the circuit breakers is permissible at the upper or lower terminals irrespective of the rating.
If the short-circuit current at the installation location exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit breaker specified in
the table, a backup fuse is required. You can also use an upstream circuit breaker with a limiter function.
The maximum rated current of this backup fuse is specified in the tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified for the
fuse then applies.
Circuit breaker/contactor combinations for short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA can be used as fuseless load feeders in acc. with Part 5.
Circuit Rated To 240 VAC 2) To 400 VAC 2)/415 V 3) To 440 VAC 2)/460 V3) To 500 VAC 2)/525 V3) To 690 VAC 2)
breaker current In Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max.
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

(gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG)

Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A
3RV10, 0.16 to 0.8 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
3RV16 11-
1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
0BD10
frame size S00
1.25 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2 2 20
1.6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2 2 20
2 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10 35 2 2 35
2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10 35 2 2 35
3.2 100 100 100 100 50 10 40 1) 3 3 40 2 2 40
4 100 100 100 100 50 10 40 1) 3 3 40 2 2 40
5 100 100 100 100 50 10 50 1) 3 3 50 2 2 50
6.3 100 100 100 100 50 10 50 1) 3 3 50 2 2 50
8 100 100 50 12.5 80 1) 50 10 63 1) 3 3 63 2 2 63
10 100 100 50 12.5 80 1) 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63
12 100 100 50 12.5 80 1) 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 80
3RV1. 2 0.16 to 1.25 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Frame size S0 1.6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
2 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 25
2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 25
3.2 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 32
4 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 3 32
5 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 3 32
6.3 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 3 50
8 100 100 100 100 50 25 63 1) 42 21 63 6 3 50
10 100 100 100 100 50 25 80 1) 42 21 63 6 3 50
12.5 100 100 100 100 50 25 80 1) 42 21 80 6 3 63
16 100 100 50 25 100 1) 20 10 80 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63
20 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 10 80 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63
22 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 10 100 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63
25 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 10 100 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63
3RV1. 3 16 100 100 50 25 100 1) 50 25 100 1) 12 6 63 5 3 63
Frame size S2 20 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 25 100 1) 12 6 80 5 3 63
25 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 15 100 1) 12 6 80 5 3 63
32 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 63
40 100 100 50 25 160 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 63
45 100 100 50 25 160 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 63
50 100 100 50 25 160 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 80

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-63
3RV1 circuit breaker

Circuit Rated To 240 VAC 2) To 400 VAC 2)/415 V 3) To 440 VAC 2)/460 V 3) To 500 VAC 2)/525 V 3) To 690 VAC 2)
breaker current In Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max.
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

(gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG)

Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A
3RV1. 41 40 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 20 125 1) 12 6 100 6 3 63
Frame size S3 50 100 100 50 25 125 1) 50 20 125 1) 12 6 100 6 3 80
63 100 100 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 12 6 100 6 3 80
75 100 100 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 8 4 125 5 3 100
90 100 100 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 8 4 125 5 3 125
100 100 100 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 8 4 125 5 3 125
3RV1.42 16 100 100 100 50 100 50 30 15 80 12 7 63
Frame size S3 20 100 100 100 50 100 50 30 15 80 12 7 63
With increased
switching 25 100 100 100 50 100 50 30 15 80 12 7 63
capacity 32 100 100 100 50 100 50 22 11 100 12 7 63
40 100 100 100 50 100 50 18 9 160 12 6 80
50 100 100 100 50 100 50 15 7.5 160 10 5 100
63 100 100 100 50 70 50 200 1) 15 7.5 160 7.5 4 100
75 100 100 100 50 70 50 200 1) 10 5 160 6 3 125
90 100 100 100 50 70 50 200 1) 10 5 160 6 3 160
100 100 100 100 50 70 50 200 1) 10 5 160 6 3 160
No backup fuse required because it is short circuit-proof up to 100 kA.
1 A backup fuse is only required if the short-circuit current at the installation location is > Icu.
2 10% overvoltage
3 5% overvoltage

SIRIUS System Manual

2-64 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RV1 circuit breaker

2.7.3 Limiter function with standard devices for 500 VAC and 690 VAC in acc. with IEC 60 947-2

The table lists the rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics with an
upstream standard circuit breaker that fulfills the limiter function at 500 VAC and 690 VAC.
The short-circuit breaking capacity can be significantly increased using the upstream standard circuit breaker with a limiter function.
The circuit-breaker connected downstream, should be set to the rated current of the load. Be sure when you set up circuit breaker
combinations to note to the distances between the grounded parts and the distances between the circuit breakers.
Make sure that the cabling between the circuit breakers is short circuit-proof. You can set up the circuit breakers side by side.

Standard circuit breaker Standard circuit breaker To 500 VAC 1)/ 525 V 2) To 690 VAC 1)
with limiter function

Type Rated current In Icu Ics Icu Ics

Rated current In Type A kA kA kA kA
3RV13 21-4DC10 3RV10 2 To 1
Frame size S0 Frame size S0 1.25
In = 25 A 1.6
2 50 25
2.5 50 25
3.2 50 25
4 50 25
5 50 25
6.3 50 25
8 100 50 20 10
10 100 50 20 10
12.5 100 50 20 10
16 100 50 20 10
20 100 50 20 10
22 100 50 20 10
25 100 50 20 10
3RV13 31-4HC10 3RV10 3 16 100 50 50 25
Frame size S2 Frame size S2 20 100 50 50 25
In = 50 A 25 100 50 50 25
32 100 50 50 25
40 100 50 50 25
50 100 50 50 25
3RV13 41-4HC10 3RV10 4 32 100 50 50 25
Frame size S3 Frame size S3 40 100 50 50 25
In = 50 A 50 100 50 50 25
3RV13 41-4MC10 3RV10 4 50 100 50 50 25
Frame size S3 Frame size S3 63 100 50 50 25
In = 100 A 75 100 50 50 25
90 100 50 50 25
100 100 50 50 25
No upstream circuit breaker required because it is short circuit-proof up to 100 kA
1)10% overvoltage
2)5% overvoltage

Characteristics You can obtain the characteristics for all the setting ranges from our Techni-
cal Assistance team by e-mail: ([email protected]).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 2-65
 3
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Section Subject Page

3.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 3-3

3.1.1 Utilization categories 3-3

3.1.2 Positively driven operation 3-7

3.1.3 Safe isolation 3-7

3.1.4 Explanation of terms 3-9

3.2 Device description 3-10

3.2.1 Actuating systems 3-12

3.2.2 Short-circuit protection of the SIRIUS contactors 3-12

3.2.3 Operation 3-13

3.2.3.1 General information 3-13

3.2.3.2 Contact reliability 3-14

3.3 Application and areas of use 3-20

3.3.1 3RT10 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching 3-20

motors

3.3.2 3RT1446 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching 3-21

resistive loads (AC-1)

3.3.3 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors with 4 main contacts 3-22

3.3.4 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors for switching capaci- 3-25

tors

3.3.5 Contactors with an extended operating range 3-26

3.3.5.1 Contactors with an extended operating range 3-27

(3RH11...-0LA0/3RT10...-0LA0)

3.3.5.2 Contactors with an extended operating range 3-29

(3RH1122-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4., 3RT102.-3K.40)

3.3.6 3RH1 auxiliary contactors 3-29

3.3.7 3RT10 contactor relays for switching motors (interface) and 3-30
3RH11 contactor relays for switching auxiliary circuits

3.3.8 Contactor combinations for reversing 3-32

3.3.9 Star-delta combinations 3-41

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-1
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Section Subject Page

3.4 Accessories 3-49

3.4.1 Attachable auxiliary switches for the auxiliary contacts 3-52

3.4.1.1 Terminal markings (frame sizes S00 to S3) 3-57

3.4.1.2 Terminal markings of the contactors and auxiliary contac- 3-59

tors combined with auxiliary switch blocks

3.4.1.3 Auxiliary switches that can be attached to 3RH1 auxiliary 3-61

contactors

3.4.2 Time-delay auxiliary switches 3-64

3.4.2.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2E, -2F, -2G) 3-64

3.4.2.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2E, -2F, -2G) 3-66

3.4.3 Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output 3-67

3.4.3.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2C, -2D) 3-68

3.4.3.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2C, -2D) 3-69

3.4.4 Additional load module (3RT1916-1GA00) 3-70

3.4.5 Coupling element for frame sizes S0 to S3 3-71

(3RH1924-1GP11)

3.4.6 Surge suppression 3-73

3.4.7 Other accessories 3-78

3.4.7.1 LED module for indicating contactor control 3-78

(3RT1926-1QT00)

3.4.7.2 Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3 pole (for frame size S3) 3-79

3.4.7.3 EMC module (3RT19161P..) 3-79

3.4.7.4 Soldering pin connector for frame size S00 3-81

3.4.7.5 Parallel connections 3-83

3.4.7.6 Covers for frame sizes S2 and S3 3-84

3.5 Mounting and connection 3-86

3.5.1 Mounting 3-86

3.5.2 Connection 3-88

3.5.3 Changing the magnet coils 3-92

3.5.4 Changing the contact piece 3-97

3.6 Dimensioned drawings 3-99

3.7 Technical specifications 3-110

SIRIUS System Manual

3-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals
Regulations The following regulations apply to contactors:
• IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100), which includes the gen-
eral specifications for low- voltage switching devices.
• IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102), which contains, in
particular, the requirements for contactors and motor starters.
The following regulations apply to auxiliary contactors:
• IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100), which includes the gen-
eral specifications for low-voltage switching devices.
• IEC 60 947-5-1, EN 60 947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) which includes, in par-
ticular, the requirements for control equipment and switching elements
for the control, signaling, locking, etc. of switchgear and controlgear.

Standards The following standards apply to the terminal markings of the contactors:
• EN 50 012: terminal markings and identification numbers for auxiliary con-
tact elements of particular contactors (also applies to contactors with a
built-on auxiliary switch block)
• EN 50 011: terminal markings, identification numbers, and identification
letters for particular auxiliary contactors (also applies to auxiliary contac-
tors with a built-on auxiliary switch block)
• EN 50 005: terminal markings and identification numbers, general rules

Approvals/ Confirmation of approvals and test certificates and characteristics can be

test reports obtained on the Internet/intranet.

Shock protection The shock protection provided is in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100.

3.1.1 Utilization categories

In acc. with EN 60 947-4-1, the purpose of the contactors and the stress
placed on them is indicated by the utilization category together with details
of the rated operational current or motor output and the rated voltage.
The following tables list the definitions of the utilization categories for low-
voltage switching devices and contactors from IEC 60 947 (VDE 0660) an.
The rated operational voltages for the various utilization categories are listed
in the low-voltage switching devices catalog.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-3
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Utilization category for

AC voltages AC Utilization category for Switching capacity I/Ie Electrical service life I/Ie
AC voltages OnOff OnOff
AC-1 Not an inductive load or 1.5 1.5 1 1
a slightly inductive load
AC-2 Slipring 4 4 2.5 2.5
motors: switch on, switch off
AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: 10 8 6 1
switch on, switch off
during the run
AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: 12 10 6 6
switch on, plugging or
reversing, inching
Table 3-1: Utilization categories, test conditions for AC voltage

Definition of AC-1 to The definitions of the utilization categories AC-1 to AC-4 for main circuits
AC-4 can be found in the relevant regulations.
The main areas of application for contactors are:
• AC-3 operation: switching of squirrel-cage motors
• AC-1 operation: switching of resistive loads
• AC-4 operation: plugging, reversing, inching

Test conditions Test conditions for the various utilization categories:

• In AC-1 operation, the contactor must be able to switch 1.5 times the
rated operational current on and off.
• In AC-3 operation, the starting currents of the motors must be controlled.
In other words, the contactor must be able to switch on 10 times the
rated operational current (Ie), and switch off 8 times the Ie.
• In AC-4 operation, the contactor must be able to switch off 12 times the
rated operational current (Ie) and 10 times the Ie. This represents extre-
mely high stress for contactors because the high starting currents of the
motors have to be switched off.
The breaking current is decisive in calculating the electrical service life:
• In AC-1 and AC-3 operation, 1 x Ie must be assumed.
• In AC-4 operation, 6 x Ie must be assumed because the contactor also has
to switch off the motor during startup.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Utilization category for DC Utilization category for Switching capacity I/Ie Switching capacity
DC voltages DC voltages Make/break Time constant L/R (ms)
DC-1 Not an inductive load or 1.5 1.0
a slightly inductive load,
resistance furnaces
DC-3 Shunt motors: 4.0 2.5
switching on, plugging,
reversing, inching
DC-5 Series motors: 4.0 15
switching on, plugging,
reversing, inching
DC-6 Switching of incandescent 1.5 (Incandescent lamp
lamps test)
Table 3-2: Utilization categories, test conditions for DC voltages

Definition of DC-1 to The definitions of the utilization categories DC-1 to DC-6 apply to main cir-
DC-6 cuits for switching DC voltage.
The main areas of application for contactors are:
• DC-3/DC-5 operation: switching of shunt or series motors
• DC-1 operation: switching of resistive loads, resistance furnaces

Note:
In the information on DC switching capacity in previous documents, the uti-
lization categories DC-2 and DC-4 correspond to the current utilization cate-
gories DC-3 and DC-5.

Utilization category for AC Utilization category for Switching capacity

AC voltage (auxiliary AC voltage (auxiliary
contact elements) contact elements) Make Break
I/Ie I/Ie cosϕ

AC-12 Control of resistive load and 1 1 0.9

semiconductor load in the input cir-
cuits of optocouplers

AC-14 Control of a small electro- 6 1 0.3

magnetic load (max. 72 VA)

AC-15 Control of an electromag- 10 1 0.3

netic load (greater than 72 VA)
Table 3-3: Utilization categories, test conditions for AC voltage (auxiliary contact elements)

Definition of AC-12 to IEC 60 947-5-1/EN 60 947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) contains the definitions
AC-15 of the utilization categories AC-12 to AC-15 for switching elements for the
control, signaling, locking, etc. of switchgear and controlgear.
The main areas of application for auxiliary contactors are:
• AC-14/AC-15 operation: switching of contactor coils, solenoid valves, for
example
• AC-14/AC-12 operation: switching of resistive loads, for example

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-5
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Rated operational cur- The rated operational currents for the various utilization categories are listed
rents in the low-voltage switching devices catalog. The test specifications given in
the table for each utilization category represent the scale for the making and
breaking capacity of the auxiliary contacts.

Example 3RT1016 contactor:

Ie/AC-15 of the auxiliary contact: 6 A/230 V
Making capacity: 10 x Ie/AC-15 = 60 A
• This enables the contactor coil with the greatest power consumption
(3TF56) to be switched on.
• Current value of the contactor coil when switched on: 10.7 A
• Only the holding current is decisive for switching off the contactor coil:
Approximately 0.5 A in the example
According to regulations, the auxiliary contact must normally be able to
switch off the rated operational current.

Utilization category for DC Utilization category for DC Switching capacity

DC voltage voltage (auxiliary contact ele-
(auxiliary contact ele- ments) Make Break
L
I/Ie I/Ie /R (ms)
ments)
DC-12 Control of resistive load and
semiconductor load in the 1 1 1
input circuits of optocouplers

DC-13 Control of solenoids 1 1 300

DC-14 Control of electromagnetic

loads with economy resistors 10 1 15
in the circuit
Table 3-4: Utilization categories, test conditions for DC voltage (auxiliary contact elements)

Definition of DC-12 to The DC voltage switching capacity of auxiliary contacts is defined in utiliza-
DC-14 tion categories DC-12 to DC-14.
The main areas of application for contactors are:
• DC-12: switching of resistive loads (typical application)
• DC-13: switching of inductive loads, such as contactor coils and solenoid
valves
In DC operation, the difference in stress is also determined by the L/R time
constant. This must be specified by the user.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.1.2 Positively driven operation

Regulations The regulations for positively driven operation are:

• For contactors IEC 60 947-4-1, Appendix H (draft 17B/996/DC)
• For auxiliary contactors IEC 60 947-5-1, Amendment 2, Annex L,
edition 10.1999
• ZH 1/457 Safety rules for controllers on power-operated presses
• SUVA Accident prevention guidelines of the Schweizer Unfallver-
sicherungsanstalt (Swiss institute for accident insurance)
SIRIUS contactors comply with these regulations.

The core message of these regulations is:

Positively driven operation in contactors means that the NO contacts and
NC contacts must on no account be closed at the same time.

Definition: positively Positively driven contacts are contacts that are mechanically connected with
driven contacts one another in such a way that the NC contacts and NO contacts can never
be closed at the same time. This means ensuring that there is a distance
between the contacts of at least 0.5 mm throughout the entire service life
of the contactor, even when there is a defect, such as when the contact has
been wrongly welded (ZH 1/457).

Positively driven opera- Positively driven operation occurs in:

tion in the case of • 3RT101 contactors and 3 RH11 auxiliary contactors in frame size S00 in
3RT1/3RH11 both the basic unit and in the auxiliary switch block and also between the
basic unit and the built-on auxiliary switch block
• 3RT1 contactors in frame sizes S0 to S3 between the main contacts and
the normally closed auxiliary contacts. In other words, if the main contact
is welded, the normally closed auxiliary contact will not close.
Positively driven operation does not occur in the case of:
• Electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks in frame size S00
Positively driven operation is not compulsory for normal controllers. It is,
however, imperative for protective circuits.

3.1.3 Safe isolation

The term "safe isolation" occurs in connection with safety/protective extra-

low voltage (SELV/PELV) and functional extra-low voltage (FELV). Safe isola-
tion reliably prevents voltage that is capable of causing electric shock from
transferring to the safely isolated voltage (e.g. to safety extra-low voltage
that is applied to or switched to the same device).
Safe isolation is also becoming increasingly important due to the more wide-
spread use of electronic systems in high-voltage installations.

Definition Circuits are safely isolated when a single fault does not result in a transfer of
voltage from one circuit to another. Faults to be taken into account are, for
example, a bent or loose conductive part, a bent soldering pin, broken win-
ding wire, a screw that has fallen out, or a broken partition wall in a device.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-7
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Regulations IEC 61 140 (replacing VDE 0106 Part 101/IEC 536) lists basic requirements
that can be met using safe isolation between circuits in electrical equip-
ment.
Basic requirements are, for example:
• Double or reinforced insulation
• Protective screening
• Combination of double or reinforced insulation and protective screening
The insulation must be resistant to aging throughout the expected service
life.
Circuits without protective extra-low voltage or functional extra-low voltage
do not require safe isolation.

Safe isolation in the If the conducting paths of a contactor are operated with different voltages,
case of 3RT1 and 3RH1 the requirements for safe isolation must be met.
contactors In the case of the 3RT1 and 3RH1 contactors, safe isolation is ensured up to
the following voltage:
• Safe isolation between the different main conducting paths is always
400 V.
• Safe isolation between the different main conducting paths and the coil
connection is always 400 V.
• The following table lists the values for safe isolation between the main
and auxiliary conducting paths and the coil connection:

3RT1 and 3RH1 contactors

Frame size Frame size Frame size Frame size

S00 S0 S2 S3
Main con- Main contact Main contact Main contact
tact

Aux. switch
at front 690 (*) 500 500 500
at side - 690 500 690
Coil connection 400 400 400 400
Table 3-5: Safe isolation

(*) Only applies to 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks at the front

All the data are power system specifications with 10% overvoltage in volts
[V].
400 V + 10% corresponds to 415 V + 5% and 500 V + 10% corresponds to
525 V + 5%.

Attention
In the table, the voltage that can cause electric shock and that must be
safely isolated is critical. If the voltages 400 V and 24 V are to be safely iso-
lated from one another, contactors with safe isolation up to 400 V must be
used between the two points of connection used.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.1.4 Explanation of terms

Safety extra-low volt- Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) allows circuits with a rated voltage of up to
age 50 VAC or 120 VDC to be operated ungrounded. The higher voltage is safely
isolated from the SELV circuits.
Safety extra-low voltage helps protect people.

Functional Functional extra-low voltage (FELV) allows circuits with a rated voltage of up
extra-low voltage to 50 VAC or 120 VDC can be operated. It does not, however, meet the
requirements of safety extra-low voltage and is therefore subject to additio-
nal conditions. FELV is implemented using a ground terminal.
Functional extra-low voltage helps protect devices (e.g. programmable con-
trollers).

PELV PELV (protective extra-low voltage) has the same requirements as safety
extra-low voltage, except for the fact that the circuit and/or exposed conduc-
tive part is/are grounded (so it is basically grounded SELV).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-9
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.2 Device description

The SIRIUS contactors are components of the SIRIUS modular system and
can therefore offer the typical benefits of SIRIUS when it comes to the
selection of components and the assembly and operation of controllers and
load feeders.

The SIRIUS range of contactors encompasses the following:

• Contactors for switching motors of up to 45 kW/400 V
• Auxiliary contactors with the contact variants 4 NO, 3 NO +1 NC, and 2
NO + 2 NC
• Contactor relays for system-specific cooperation with electronic
controllers
• Contactors for particular applications:
- Contactors with 4 main contacts
- Capacitor switching contactors
- Contactors for switching resistive loads
- Contactors with an extended operating range
- Contactor combinations

Frame sizes The SIRIUS range of contactors covers everything up to 45 kW in 4 frame

sizes. Each frame size has 3 or 4 standard motor outputs:

S00 S0 S2 S3

Figure 3-1: Frame sizes of the 3RT1 contactors

Performance ranges The following table specifies the performance ranges for the frame sizes of
the 3RT10 contactors:

Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3

Order number 3RT10.. 3RT10.. 3RT10.. 3RT10..

15 16 17 23 24 25 26 34 35 36 44 45 46

At 400 V:

P/AC-3kW 3 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45

Ie/AC-3 A 7 9 12 9 12 17 25 32 40 50 65 80 95

Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
Table 3-6: Performance ranges of the 3RT10 contactors

SIRIUS System Manual

3-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following table provides an overview of the existing variants of the 3RT and 3RH contactors:

Models Frame size

3RT10 contactors AC/DC operation S00 to S3

To operate motors, 3-pole, up to 45 kW/400 V
Ie/AC-1 up to 40 °C: up to 120 A to 690 V
Ie/AC-3 up to 60 °C: up to 95 A/400 V

3RT14 contactors AC/DC operation S3

To switch resistive loads, 3-pole, up to 92 kW/400 V
Ie/AC-1 at 40 °C: up to 140 A to 690 V

3RT13 contactors AC/DC operation, 4 main contacts (NO contacts) S00 to S3

To switch resistive loads, up to 92 kW/400 V
Ie/AC-1 up to 40 °C: up to 140 A to 690 V

3RT15 contactors AC/DC operation, 4 main contacts (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts) S00 to S2

To switch three-phase induction motors up to 18.5 kW/400 V
Ie/AC-3 up to 60 °C: up to 40 A to 400 V

3RT16 contactors AC operation S0 to S3

To switch three-phase capacitors up to 50 kvar/400 V

3RH/3RT contactors DC operation with an extended operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x U S S00 to S3
3RT: to switch motors up to 45 kW/400 V
Ie/AC-3 up to °C: 95 A to 400 V
3RH: to switch auxiliary circuits
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 70 °C: 6 A/230 V

3RT contactor relays DC operation with an extended operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x U S S00 and S0
(interface) To switch motors, 3-pole, up to 11 kW/400 V
Ie/AC-3 up to 60 °C: 25 A to 400 V

3RA13 contactor combina- AC/DC operation S00 to S3

tions To reverse up to 45 kW/400 V, I e/AC-3: 95 A/400 V

3RA14 contactor combina- AC/DC operation, S00-S00-S00 to

tions for star-delta startup up to 75 kW/400 V, Ie/AC-3: 150 A/400 V S3-S3-S2

3RH11 auxiliary contactors AC/DC operation, S00

to switch auxiliary circuits, 4-pole (basic unit)
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 60 °C: 6 A/230 V

3RH14 latched auxiliary AC/DC operation, S00

contactors to switch auxiliary circuits, 4-pole (basic unit)
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 60 °C: 6 A/230 V

3RH11 contactor relays DC operation with an extended operating range (0.7 to 1.25 x U S) S00
(interface) to switch auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 60 °C: 6 A/230 V

Unwelded contactors The unwelded contactors are put together using a circuit breaker to S0, S2
3RT11 24, 3RT11 35 make an unwelded feeder. The features are:
• Standard: IEC 947-6-2 (for feeders with increased requirements)
• Compact
• Extremely high reliability in the entire current range up to 50 kA
Table 3-7: Types of 3RT/3RH contactors

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-11
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Auxiliary contacts and • A uniform and diverse range of auxiliary switches and accessories that
built-on accessories can be quickly upgraded and replaced is available for 3RT1 contactors up
to 45 kW for various applications.
• The 3RH auxiliary contactors can be extended to form variants with a
maximum of 8 poles using attachable 2 or 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks.
• Wiring kits with and without mechanical interlocking are available for put-
ting together 3RA contactor combinations for reversing and for star-delta
starting.
The accessories are described in detail in Section 3.4, "Accessories".

3.2.1 Actuating systems

AC coil: • Ferromagnetic iron core (due to eddy current

losses)
• Adequate holding power
• Automatic reduction from high closing power to
low holding power
• Short switching times
DC coil: • Solid parts are permissible
• Larger unit volumes (to achieve a tensile force
comparable to that of an AC coil)
• High holding power
• Closing power = holding power
• Longer switching times

Table 3-8: Actuating systems

3.2.2 Short-circuit protection of the SIRIUS contactors

Section 3.7, "Technical specifications", has information on short-circuit pro-

tection. Fuses and circuit breakers can be used as short-circuit protective
devices for the contactors.
The test criteria that apply in this case are stipulated by EN 60 947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102).

Coordination types Two types of assignment are defined in the standards that correspond to
two different levels of damage.
The following applies to both types of assignment:
In the event of a short-circuit, the short-circuit protective device used must
be able to disconnect the overcurrent that occurs both safely and success-
fully. Persons or other parts of the system must not be put at risk.

Coordination type 1 The load feeder (e.g. motor starter) can be inoperable after each short-circuit
disconnection. Damage to the contactor and the overload relay is permissi-
ble, but it is only possible to continue operation after defective devices have
been repaired or replaced.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Coordination type 2 After short-circuit disconnections, there must be no damage to the load
feeder devices. The only exception is if the contactor contacts have been
welded and can be easily separated again without distorting the contact
pieces.

Contactors with over- If contactors are combined with an overload relay, a smaller fuse as speci-
load relay fied in the NSK catalog on permissible short-circuit protection fuses for
motor starters should be used.

The information required to ensure unwelded fusing of the contactors is

contained in the NSK catalog.

3.2.3 Operation

3.2.3.1 General information

Ambient temperature The 3RT10 contactors are designed for use in ambient temperatures of
-25 °C to +60 °C. Some variants can be used in temperatures of -35 °C to
+70 °C.

Degree of protection The degree of protection of the SIRIUS contactors is IP20.

Warning
When the supply voltage and load are present, the contactor must not be
actuated by pressing the contact support. It is permissible, however, to
carry out tests with an extra-low test voltage (e.g. ≤ 24 V).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-13
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Mechanical life A significant criterion for the economical use of contactors is their mechani-
cal endurance. This is expressed in the number of operations that are possi-
ble without placing a load on the conducting path. You cannot expect too
much in terms of mechanical endurance from switches that have to work
with a relatively high contact load, such as isolators and circuit breakers
without neglecting their cost-efficiency. Contactors, on the other hand, are
switching devices designed specifically for very high numbers of operations
and switching frequency.
The following table shows you the mechanical endurance of 3RT1 contac-
tors:

Device Mechanical endurance

Basic unit, frame size S00 30 mill. operating cycles

Basic unit, frame size S00 with built- 10 mill. operating cycles
on auxiliary switch block

Basic unit, frame sizes S0 to S3 10 mill. operating cycles

Basic units, frame sizes S00 to S3 5 mill. operating cycles

with built-on, electronically optimized
auxiliary switch block
Table 3-9: Mechanical endurance

The mechanical endurance can be increased if low current is used (for exam-
ple, 17 V 5 mA) but only if there is no arcing during switching.

Display of the contactor The 3RT1926 LED indicator block can be connected to the coil connections
function of the contactors in frame sizes S00 to S3. It indicates the status of the con-
tactors by means of the yellow LED. The indicator block can be snapped
onto the front in the opening intended for the inscription plate.
The advantage is that the LED indicator block can be used for AC/DC volt-
ages of 24 V to 240 V and that it is protected against polarity reversal.

3.2.3.2 Contact reliability

Increasingly in industrial control engineering, conventional contactor con-

trols are combined with electronic control systems. Working together in this
way gives rise to higher demands than those when used in conventional
contactor controls.
An important requirement is that the signal generators (auxiliary contacts of
contactors, for example) display high contact reliability at low voltages and
currents, while retaining their full switching capacity at high voltages.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Switching with auxil- The following applies to the contactors of the SIRIUS range:
iary contacts (≤ 110 V If voltages ≤ 110 V and currents ≤ 100 mA are to be switched, the auxiliary
and ≤ 100 mA) contacts of the 3RT1 contactors or the 3RH1 auxiliary contactors should be
used instead of the main contacts because of their contact reliability. This
comes from their high contact stability due, in particular, to the shape of the
contact pieces (cross-ribbing).
This ensures that the points of contact remain conductive in spite of surface
contamination and the effect of dust.
These auxiliary contacts are suitable for electronic circuits (programmable
controllers) with voltages > 17 V and currents in the milliampere range (test
circuit: 17 V, 5 mA).

Cross-ribbing Surface contamination is the most common cause of contact faults. Cross-
ribbing the contact areas is an extremely effective way of increasing contact
reliability. All the auxiliary contacts of the SIRIUS contactors have this fea-
ture.
The following illustration show you how cross-ribbing is particularly effective
against surface contamination due to the high number of contact areas and
high surface pressure:

Accumulated surface
contamination

Isolated contact areas

Here: 13 contact surfaces

Depression
Lip

Figure 3-2: Contact areas

Contact reliability of The contact areas of the SIRIUS auxiliary contacts display a high degree of
the auxiliary contacts contact reliability. Fault frequency rates of HF ≤ 10-8 (i. e. < 1 fault per
100 mill. operating cycles at 17 V, 1 mA) have been registered.
These values apply to auxiliary contacts that are either integrated in the con-
tactor housing or can be snapped on as auxiliary switch blocks.
In the case of built-on auxiliary switch blocks at the side, fault frequency
rates are between 10-6 and 10-8.
The tests are based on the requirements placed on signal generators by
electronic controllers.
This means that with the auxiliary contacts of the SIRIUS contactors or aux-
iliary contactors, the permissible contact resistance is only exceeded once
during a total of 108 (100 million) switching operations. During a long period
of operation, therefore, a fault is not expected to occur, irrespective of the
number of switching operations.
A restriction applies in the case of auxiliary switch blocks built on at the
side.

Definition of switch The fault frequency HF is defined as the number of contact faults that occur
fault frequency HF during a certain number of switching operations.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-15
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Electrical service life of The rated operational current Ie is defined in acc. with utilization category
the main AC-4 (switching off 6 times the rated operational current) for a contact ser-
contacts vice life of approximately 200 000 operating cycles.
If mixed modes are used - in other words, if normal switching mode (the
rated operational current is switched off in acc. with utilization category AC-
3) is mixed with occasional inching mode (several times the rated opera-
tional current is switched in acc. with utilization category AC-4) - the service
life of the contact pieces can be roughly calculated with the following for-
mula:
A
X = -----------------------------------------
1 + --------- ⋅  --- – 1
C A
100 B
Key to the formula:
X Contact service life in mixed mode in operating cycles
A Contact service life in normal operation (Ia=Ie) in operating cycles
B Contact service life in inching mode (Ia = a multiple of Ie) in operating
cycles
C Percentage of the total number of switching operations accounted for
by inching operations
The following characteristic curves illustrate the contact service life of con-
tactors when switching inductive three-phase loads (AC-3), irrespective of
the breaking current and rated operational voltage. The prerequisites are
arbitrary (i.e. not synchronous with the phase relation of the control station
operating the network).

SIRIUS System Manual

3-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Characteristic curve: The characteristic curves illustrate the contact service life of the main con-
contact service life of tacts of contactors when switching inductive three-phase loads (AC-3).
the main contacts Ia = breaking current
Ie = rated operational current
PN = rated output of three-phase induction motors with squirrel cage at
400 V

Frame size S00

Operating cycles at
230 V

500 V

690 V

400 V
Contactor type 3RT1015 3RT1016, 3RT1017
(3 kW) (4 kW, 5,5 kW)
10 7
10 7 8 6 8 NSB0 0473a
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 6
10 6 8 10 6
10 6 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 5
5
10 8 10 5
10 5 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 4
4
10 8 10 4
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 I a (A) 40 50 60 80
7 9 12 I e (A)

3 4 5,5 PN (kW)

Figure 3-3: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S00)

Frame size S0
Operating cycles at
230 V

500 V

690 V

400 V

Contactor type 3RT1023 3RT1024 3RT1025 3RT1026

(4 kW) (5,5 kW) (7,5 kW) (11 kW)
10 7
10 7 8 6 8 NSB00474a
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 6
10 6 8 10 6
10 6 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 5
5
10 8 10 5
10 5 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 4
4
10 8 10 4
3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Ia (A)
9 12 17 25 Ie (A)
4 5,5 7,5 11 PN(kW)
Figure 3-4: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-17
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Frame size S2
Operating cycles at

230 V

500 V

690 V

400 V
Contactor type 3RT1034 3RT1035 3RT1036
(15 kW) (18,5 kW) (22 kW)
10 7
10 7 8 6 8 NSB00475a
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
22
2 6
10
10 6 8 10 6
10 6 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 5
10 5 8 10 5
10 5 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 4
4
10 8 10 4
10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Ia(A) 200 300 400
32 40 50 Ie (A)
15 18,5 22 PN (kW)

Figure 3-5: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S2)

Frame size S3
Operating cycles at
230 V

500 V

690 V

400 V

Contactor type 3RT1044 3RT1045 3RT1046

(30 kW) (37 kW) (45 kW)
10 7
10 7 8 6 8 NSB00476a
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 6
6
10
10 8 6
10
10 6 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2
5
10 5
10 8 10 5
10 5 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 4
10 4 8 10 4
10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Ia (A) 200 300 400 600
65 80 95 Ie (A)

30 37 45 PN (kW)

Figure 3-6: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Characteristic curve: The contact service life depends on the breaking current. The prerequisites
contact service life of are arbitrary (i.e. not synchronous with the phase relation of the control sta-
the auxiliary contacts tion operating the network).
The characteristic curves apply to:
• Integrated 3RT10 auxiliary contacts
• 3RH1911 auxiliary switch blocks for contactors in frame size S00
• 3RH1921 auxiliary switch blocks for contactors in frame sizes S0 to S3

30
NSB00472
Basic unit
Operating cycles in millions (10 6 )

10
5 Basic unit with
4 attachable
3 contact block
2
DC-13 DC-13
1 220 V 110 V
AC-15/AC-14
0,5

DC-13
24 V
0,1
0,05

1)
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 5 6 7 10 I a (A) I a = breaking current
I e DC-13 I e DC-13 I e AC-15 I e DC-13 I e = rated operational current
220 V 110 V < 230 V 24 V

Figure 3-7: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the auxiliary contacts

1) DC-13: built-on auxiliary switch blocks for frame size S00: 6 A

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-19
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.3 Application and areas of use

Various switching devices are available for switching electrical loads. The
contactor is most suitable device for frequent switching operations.
Contactors are the most commonly used switching device in industry,
mechanical engineering and in switchgear and controlgear. Due to the
increased automation of production, contactors have become more impor-
tant, involving greater and often different types of demands.
Automated production systems are considerably more sensitive to opera-
tional malfunctions than manually operated systems. Each fault on an elec-
trical device means downtimes, wastage, loss of production and often con-
siderable outlay in order to get the system up and running again.
For this reason, we concentrated on high reliability when developing the
SIRIUS contactor range. This includes, in particular, increased service life,
high contact reliability, and the possibility to use the contactors at higher
ambient temperatures in the cubicle. It is possible to use the contactors up
to 60 °C and also without derating when the devices are installed in a row.
To deal with the variety of possible applications, there are also contactor
variants for special applications, such as for switching resistive loads or
capacitors, in addition to the main 3RT10 range of contactors (for switching
motors).
The different contactor ranges and their possible applications are described
in the following subsections.

3.3.1 3RT10 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching motors

Field of application The 3-pole 3RT10 contactors use 3 NO contacts as main contacts. They are
mainly used to switch three-phase induction motors.

Frame sizes The full performance range from 3 to 45 kW/400 V (utilization categories AC-
2 and AC-3) is covered by 4 frame sizes.
The frame sizes cover the following levels of standard motor output:
• Frame sizes S00, S2, S3: three standard levels of motor output each
• Frame size S0: 4 standard levels of motor output

Dimensions The contactors are provided with alternating or direct current magnetic sys-
tems. The required floor areas of the devices of the two operating mecha-
nism types are the same. As of frame size S0, the installation depth for con-
tactors with the DC magnet system is between 10 mm and 15 mm greater
than for the variants with the AC magnet system.

Power ratings All the specified power and current ratings apply to an ambient temperature
of 60 °C without derating.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Increasing the power The ease of expansion is an advantage for configuration. In many applica-
tions there is enough space to insert the contactor with the next higher rat-
ing class and thus increase motor output.

3.3.2 3RT1446 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching resistive loads (AC-1)

Field of application The 3RT14 46 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching resistive loads
are used for applications in the AC-1 utilization category:
• Switching of resistive loads such as heating systems or resistance fur-
naces
• Applications in which a low switching capacity is sufficient
• Applications in which high continuous currents occur without peaks (e.g.
as a generator contactor or in the case of variable-speed drives.

Switching capacity 1.5 times the Ie/AC-1 can be switched on and off. Switching off higher cur-
rents, with the emergency stop, for example, is possible up to 8 times the
Ie/AC-3 current.

Comparison: 3RT1046/ The following table shows you the difference between the 3RT1446 and
3RT1446 3RT1046 contactors for normal AC-3 applications:

Contact material Conducting paths

3RT1446 Contact material with high Larger conducting paths that

current-carrying capacity and permit better cooling
better thermal properties
3RT1046 Contact material that ensures
better switching capacity
Table 3-10: Comparison between the 3RT1446 and 3RT1046 contactors

Note on configuration The 3RT10 range of contactors for switching motors also has a specific AC-1
switching capacity. It is much less costly, however, to use the AC-1 contac-
tor 3RT14 for this specific purpose.

Accessories You can use the same accessories for the 3RT14 contactors as you can for
the 3RT104 contactors in frame size S3.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-21
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.3.3 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors with 4 main contacts

Model There are two variants of the contactors with 4 main contacts :
• 3RT13 with 4 NO contacts
• 3RT15 with 2 NO and 2 NC contacts
You can use the accessories for both the 3-pole SIRIUS contactors and the
4-pole variants.

Field of application The following table gives the fields of application for the 3RT13 and 3RT15
contactors:

3RT13 contactors with 4 NO 3RT15 contactors with 2 NO + 2 NC

contacts contacts

• Switching of resistive loads • Pole switchover in the case of

• Isolation of networks with crane-type motors
ungrounded or badly • Switching of 2 separate loads
grounded neutral conductors
• Supply switchovers in the
case of alternative AC power
supplies
• As a contactor - for example,
in variable-speed drives that
only have to carry the current,
not switch it
Table 3-11: Applications of 4-pole contactors

Auxiliary contacts The following table specifies the maximum number of auxiliary contacts
that can be attached:

Frame size S00 Frame size S0 Frame sizes S2 and S3

4 auxiliary contacts Maximum 2 auxiliary con- Maximum of 4 auxiliary
tacts (built on at the side or contacts
snapped on at the top) (built on at the side or
snapped on at the top)
Table 3-12: 4-pole contactors and auxiliary contacts

Contactor combination The 4-pole 3RT13 contactors with 4 NO contacts as main contacts in frame
with mechanical inter- sizes S0 to S3 are suitable for putting together contactor combinations with
locking mechanical locking for use, for example, in supply switchovers.
The following tables show how the contactor combinations are put together
in different frame sizes:

SIRIUS System Manual

3-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Assembly of the con-

tactors in frame size S0 Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure
with front interlocking
1/2 Remove the fourth pole of the
left contactor by pressing the
1 ribbed surfaces at the top and
bottom at the same time (1)
and then removing the pole
(2).
2

1
3/4 Attach the pole to the left side
of the same contactor.

3
4

5/6 Put the contactors together by

inserting two mechanical cou-
plers (3RA1922-2C) in the
5 appropriate openings of the
6 contactor (5), and then press
5 the other contactor onto these
mechanical couplers (6).

3RA1922-2C

7/8/9 Mount the mechanical inter-

lock at the front (3RA1924-1A)
over the two contactors.

7
9

Table 3-13: 4-pole reversing contactor combination with front interlock (frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-23
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Assembly of the con-

tactors in frame size S0 Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure
with lateral interlocking
5/6 Note:
The lateral mechanical inter-
lock (3RA1924-2B) can be used
6 if the contactor combination is
5 to be mounted on a base plate.

3RA1924-2B

Table 3-14: 4-pole reversing contactor combination with lateral interlock (frame size S0)

Assembly of the con-

tactors in Drawing: frame sizes S2 and S3 Step Procedure
frame sizes S2/S3
1/2 Mount the mechanical inter-
3 3RA19.2-2G
lock between the two contac-
tors (1/2), and insert the 2
connecting clips (10 mm spa-
2 cing) (3) on the back of the
3 1 two contactors.

Table 3-15: 4-pole reversing contactor combination (frame sizes S2 and S3)

Attention
The mechanical interlock at the front cannot be used in contactors in frame
sizes S2 and S3.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.3.4 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors

3 3RT1/3RH1 contactorsfor switching capacitors

Field of application 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors are used to switch power capacitors
that are used in reactive-current compensation.

Frame sizes The capacitor-switching contactors are available in frame sizes S00 to S3
with the rating levels 12.5, 15 kvar, 25 kvar, and 50 kvar at 400 V.

S00 S3

RT-01023
RT-01022

Figure 3-8: Capacitor-switching contactors (frame sizes S0 and S2)

Auxiliary switch The auxiliary switch block snapped onto the capacitor-switching contactor
contains three leading NO contacts and a normal NO contact that can be
assigned as you wish. A 2-pole auxiliary switch block can also be attached at
the side of the capacitor-switching contactors (variants: 2 NO contacts, 2 NC
contacts, or 1 NO + 1 NC contact).

Switching capacitors/ A single capacitor can normally be switched on because the current is lim-
banks of capacitors ited by the inductance of the upstream transformer and the cables. It is
more difficult to switch banks of capacitors (parallel connection of a capaci-
tor to capacitors already present) because the current is now only limited by
the low inductance of the connecting leads and the capacitors.
This problem is solved in the case of capacitor-switching contactors using
precharging resistors.

Precharging resistors The precharging resistors are an integral part of the contactor in 3RT16
capacitor-switching contactors. They are switched on via leading auxiliary
contacts before the main contacts close. This results in damping down to
approximately 10 % of the undamped peak currents. Damping of peaks in
the making current prevents disturbances to the network.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-25
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Important
Make sure when switching banks of capacitors that you adhere to the speci-
fied minimum inductance between the capacitors connected in parallel that
are to be provided in addition.

3RT10. capacitor The normal 3RT10 contactors for switching motors also have a certain
switching capacity capacitor switching capacity. Details of this can be found in
Section 3.7, Technical specifications: Utilization category AC-6b, switching of
individual capacitors and switching of low-inductance three-phase capaci-
tors. The tables contain information on the switching of individual capacitors
and the switching of banks of capacitors.

Operation Caution
Only switch to discharged capacitors! Do not carry out a function test by
hand.
The precharging resistors must not be removed as this will damage the con-
tact pieces in circuits with a load.

Circuit diagram
L1 L2 L3

F0

A1 1 3 5 43

A2 2 4 6 44

C1

Figure 3-9: Capacitor-switching contactors, circuit diagram

3.3.5 Contactors with an extended operating range

Field of application The contactors with an extended operating range are used in systems with
strong fluctuations in the control supply voltage and at the same time high
ambient temperatures, such as railway applications in extreme climatic con-
ditions, rolling mills, etc.

Standards Contactors with an extended operating range comply with the following
standards:
• IEC 60 947-4-1
• EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
• The requirements of IEC 60 077
They are shockproof in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100.
Exception: the series resistor in frame sizes S0 to S3

SIRIUS System Manual

3-26 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Control current circuits The magnet coils of the contactors have an extended operating range of 0.7
and auxiliary current to 1.25 x Us and are wired with varistors as standard to provide protection
circuits against overvoltage. This increases the time to contact parting compared
with standard contactors by 2 ms to 5 ms.

With/without a series The 3RH11 and 3RT10 contactors with the suffix -0LA0 at digits 13 to 16 in
resistor the order number are used particularly where, in addition to a wide operat-
ing range and a high ambient temperature of 70 °C, several auxiliary con-
tacts are required. Up to 4 auxiliary contacts can be used in these variants.
To ensure that the magnetic system can produce the required amount of
power at power-up, the contactors initially require a certain amount of over-
excitation. By means of the series resistor, the contactors are switched to
the normal hold-in coil level after power-up.
If fewer auxiliary contacts are required, contactors with the same extended
operating range that work without a series resistor are available up to frame
size S0.
The two ranges are described in more detail below.

3.3.5.1 Contactors with an extended operating range (3RH11...-0LA0/3RT10...-0LA0)

The DC magnetic systems of the contactors must be switched to hold-in

coil level via a series resistor.

Arrangement of compo- Auxiliary contactors and contactors of frame size S00 are available with the
nents in frame size S00 following:
• A built-on block that contains the series resistor (the NC contact required
for the switchover in the basic unit is already wired).
• Integrated varistor
• A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (in acc. with EN 50 005) can also be built
on.

Arrangement of compo- Contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 are fitted on the front with an auxiliary
nents in frame sizes S0 switch block with 2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts. The separate series resis-
to S3 tor that is attached at the side next to the contactor on the 35 mm rail has
connecting leads for contactor attachment. An NC contact of the auxiliary
switch block is required for the switchover to hold-in coil level. A circuit dia-
gram with the terminal points is stuck onto each contactor.

Auxiliary contacts One NC contact of the auxiliary contacts is required for the series resistor.
The number of auxiliary contacts that are available beyond this is listed in
the selection and order data. With frame size S00, the auxiliary switch block
that you may need must be ordered separately.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-27
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Installation The following types of installation are permissible for contactors and auxil-
iary contactors in ambient temperatures of up to 70 °C:
Frame size S00: installation in series
Frame sizes S0 to S3: The resistor block must be installed on the right next
to the contactor because of the connecting leads there.

Dimensions When the resistor is mounted, the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3

become wider (see Section 3.6, Dimensioned drawings).

Circuit diagrams Frame size S00

Terminal markings in acc. with Terminal markings in acc. with
DIN EN 50 012 DIN EN 50 005
Contactors 3RT1017-2K.42-0LA0 Auxiliary contactors
3RH1122-2K.40-0LA0
L+
L-
L+
L-
S1
S1

E1+
E1+ RV K1
RV K1

K1 13 23 31
K1 1 3 5

NSB00560a
A2-
14 24 32
NSB00559a

A2-
2 4 6

Series resistor RV attached

NC contact wired
2 NO + 1 NC contacts available
Figure 3-10: Contactors with an extended operating range, circuit diagrams

Frame sizes S0 to S3
Terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012
Contactors 3RT102.-, 3RT103.-, 3RT104.-3K.44-0LA0
With front-mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block 3RH1921-1HA22
(+)
A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43
NSB00561a

A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44

2 NO + 2 NC contacts
Identification number 22
Figure 3-11: Contactors with an extended operating range, terminal markings

NC contact 21/22 is required for the wiring of the series resistor.

Circuit diagram for wiring of the series resistor

(-)
NSB00562a A1
A2

RV
A1

21 A2
22
(+) (-)
Figure 3-12: Contactors with an extended operating range, circuit diagram

SIRIUS System Manual

3-28 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.3.5.2 Contactors with an extended operating range

(3RH1122-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4., 3RT102.-3K.40)

Contactors of frame size S00: 3RH11 22-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4. and frame

size S0: 3RT102.-3K.40 have the following features:
• Extended operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
• The magnet coils are wired with a varistor; an additional series resistor is
not required
• Permissible ambient temperature 60 °C
Note the following:
• Frame size S00: an auxiliary switch block cannot be attached
• Frame size S0: a maximum of two 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be
attached

Installation At an ambient temperature > 60 °C < 70 °C, there must be spacing of

10 mm when installing in series.

Ambient temperature The permissible ambient temperature for operating the contactors at the full
operating range of the magnet coils is -35 °C to +70 °C. During continuous
operation with temperatures > +55 °C, the mechanical service life, the cur-
rent-carrying capacity of the conducting paths, and the switching frequency
are reduced.

3.3.6 3RH1 auxiliary contactors

Auxiliary contactors are switching devices for auxiliary circuits for control-
ling, reporting, and interlocking. Auxiliary contactors have to meet specific
requirements in terms of clear terminal markings and a time- and cost-sav-
ing terminal system.
The SIRIUS 3RH1 auxiliary contactors (frame size S00) meet these require-
ments

Terminal markings The terminal markings comply with EN 50 011 and EN 50 005 (for a more
detailed explanation, see Section 3.4.1, Auxiliary switches).

Frame size and features 3RH1 auxiliary contactors are available with the following:
• Frame size S00
• With AC and DC operation
• Format as for motor contactor of frame size S00
• 4-pole basic version
• Can be extended to 8 poles with snap-on auxiliary switch blocks
• Screw-type or Cage Clamp terminals

Screw-type terminals The 3RH1 auxiliary contactors have captive screws (cross-tip Pozidriv,
size 2), with all the terminal points open on delivery. The screwdriver guides
allow screwdriving machines to be used.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-29
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Cage Clamp terminals The 3RH11 auxiliary contactors are also available with Cage Clamp terminals
- a screwless terminal system. This type of terminal is particularly suitable if
strong shaking or vibrations can be expected at the installation location.
These terminals are also suitable for two-conductor connections. All the ter-
minals are accessible from the front and are easily visible.

Soldering pin Both the 4-pole basic version as well as the auxiliary contactors that have an
connections auxiliary switch block attached at the front (see Section 3.4, Accessories)
can be soldered onto printed circuit boards using a soldering pin adapter.

Contact reliability All the switching elements of the 3RH1 auxiliary contactors are equipped
with contact pieces that have particularly high contact stability, ensuring
high contact reliability even at low voltages and currents. This subject is dis-
cussed in detail in Section 3.2.3.2, "Contact reliability".

3RH14 latched If there is a short circuit in the low-voltage network, or when large drive
auxiliary contactors motors are switched on directly, the control supply voltage for the auxiliary
contactors may fail briefly or fall under the permissible tolerance level. To
ensure continuous operation, the variant with mechanical latching (3RH14)
can be used with the auxiliary contactors.
These auxiliary contactors latch mechanically after power-up and remain in
an energized state even in the event of a power failure. The auxiliary contac-
tor can be unlocked electrically using an interlock release magnet or manu-
ally using a button on the front of the attached latched block. When the volt-
age returns, the production program can be resumed immediately without
resetting times due to the storage feature of the auxiliary contactors. The
contactor coil and the coil of the release magnet are both designed for con-
tinuous operation.
The power input is the same for the contactor coil and the release coil. The
mechanical service life is 1 million operating cycles.

3.3.7 3RT10 contactor relays for switching motors (interface) and 3RH11 contactor relays for
switching auxiliary circuits

Contactor relays are available in the SIRIUS modular system for switching
motors and auxiliary circuits for the purpose of smooth interaction with elec-
tronic controllers. These are variants of the 3RT10/3RH11 contactor series
with the following features:
• Low power input
• Wide operating range of the magnet coil 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
• High contact reliability of the auxiliary contacts
• Integrated or attachable overvoltage damping

SIRIUS System Manual

3-30 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Contact reliability The high contact reliability of the auxiliary contacts ensures that false sig-
nals do not occur even at low switching capacities. With a voltage of 17 V
and a current of 1 mA, there is on average less than one contact fault per
100 million switching operations.

Overvoltage damping Overvoltage damping protects sensitive output levels of electronic control-
lers against switching overvoltages of the coil.

Extended operating The operating range of the coil of the contactor relays covers a voltage
range range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us (Us= rated control supply voltage). This wide
operating range is required for the supply voltage of electronic controllers
with the required voltage tolerances.
The supply voltage of electronic controllers with 24 VDC covers the range
20.4 V to 28.8 V in acc. with DIN 19 240. If you take into consideration an
additional loss of voltage of up to 3 V during the output phases, the contac-
tor drive must be able to operate perfectly with voltages between 17.4 V and
28.8 V. The 3RT10 and 3RH11 contactor relays for electronic controllers
operate safely from 17 V to 30 V, which corresponds to a voltage range of
0.7 x Us to 1.25 x Us. This is a considerably wider operating range than that
of 0.85 to 1.1 x Us for contactors and auxiliary contactors in acc. with
IEC 60 947, DIN EN 60 947 (VDE 0660).

Voltage ranges The following graphic shows you the voltage ranges for electronic control-
lers and drives of contactors and contactor relays with a rated control supply
voltage of Us = 24 VDC:

Supply voltage Operating range Voltage range of Operating range of

range for contactors in electronic outputs contactors for elec-
Electronic control- acc. with at ≤ 3 V internal tronic controllers
lers in acc. with VDE 0660 part 102 voltage drop (contactor relays)
U DIN 19240
1.25 x Us
1.2 x Us 1.2 x Us 1.25 Us
30
30 V
28.8 V 1.1 x Us 28.8 V
Voltage ranges for elec-
26.4 V
24 1.0 Us tronic controllers and
drives of contactors and
20.4 V
20.4 V contactor relays with a
0.85 x Us 17.4 V
0.85 x Us 17 V rated control supply vol-
17 0.72 x Us 0.7 Us tage of US = 24 VDC
0.7 x Us

Figure 3-13: Contactor relays: voltage ranges

Auxiliary switch blocks Auxiliary switch blocks can be built on as follows:

Frame size S00: none
Frame size S0: a maximum of two 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks

Power consumption Variant 1: The power input of the magnet coils for contactor relays in frame
size S00 is 2.3 W at 24 VDC (operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x US).
Variant 2: Contactor relays with reduced coil performance in frame size
S00, P = 1.4 W at 24 VDC (operating range: 0.85 to 1.85 US).
The power input of magnet coils for contactor relays in frame size S0 is
4.2 W at 24 VDC (operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x US).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-31
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.3.8 Contactor combinations for reversing

3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Contactor combinations are available for reversing (3RA1) in frame sizes S00
to S3:
• Installed in the factory
Frame sizes S2 and S3 are delivered already mounted on a base plate.
• As a kit for self-assembly
The same accessories can be used as for the basic units of the correspond-
ing frame size (see Section 3.4).
For motor protection an overload relay must be attached.
4-pole contactor combinations for reversing can be put together in frame
sizes S0 and S2.

S00 S0

3RU1.1
1
2 3RU1.2

Figure 3-14: Fully assembled contactor combination for reversing (frame sizes S00 and S0)

Approvals The s and u approvals only apply to complete contactor combinations and
not to combinations you have assembled from separate parts.

Switchover time If the contactors are interlocked by means of their auxiliary switches (electri-
cal interlocking) or by mechanical interlocking, there is no overlapping of the
contacting and the arcing time between the contactors at switchover.
The switching times of the contactors are not affected by the mechanical
interlock.

Note for frame size S00:

At voltages of >500 V a switchover pause of 50 ms must be included.
AC-operated 3RT10 contactors in reversing or Dahlander mode require an
NC contact interlock and a switchover pause of 50 ms.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-32 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Auxiliary contact Different auxiliary switches can be attached (at the front or the side) to the
elements 3RA1 reversing combination. An integrated auxiliary switch contact is avail-
able in frame size S00.

Accessories The following accessories for the basic units can also be used for contactor
combinations for reversing:
• Auxiliary switch blocks (at the front/side)
• Surge suppressors
• Soldering pin adapters (frame size S00)
The following accessory is designed specifically for contactor combinations
for reversing:
• Locking devices for mechanical interlocking
• Locking devices for mechanical and electrical interlocking (at the front/
side)
• Terminals for contactor coils (for frame sizes S0 to S3)
• Mechanical connectors
• Wiring modules

Terminals for To reach the coil terminals A1 and A2 of the contactor combinations for
contactor coils reversing more easily from contactors of frame sizes S2 and S3, you can
use terminals for contactor coils.
For each combination, 2 x A1 and 1 x A2 are required.

Wiring module Wiring modules are available to enable you to carry out different types of
wiring (Dahlander wiring, for example).
You can find out how to mount the wiring modules in the diagrams of the
self-assembly kits.

Mechanical Mechanical interlocking (for frame sizes S0 to S3) is available in 2 variants:

interlocking • Attachable at the front (contactor spacing: 0 mm)
• Attachable at the side (for frame sizes S0 to S3) with integrated NC con-
tact for electronic interlocking

Note
If you want NC contact interlocking, you must use contactors with 1 NC
contact in the basic unit with the 3RT1 contactors of frame size S00.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-33
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following graphics show you how to mount the locking devices at the
front for mechanical interlocking in frame size S0:

➀
3RA1923-2A

1
6

3
2
RESET
5

1 ➁

Figure 3-15: Star-delta combination, locking device at the front (frame size S0)

The following graphics show you how to mount the locking devices at the
front for mechanical interlocking with frame sizes S2 and S3:

3RA1932-2C

1 3

2
4

5
RESET

Figure 3-16: Star-delta combination, locking devices at the front (frame sizes S2/S3)

The following accessories are components of the self-assembly kits and

they are described in the diagrams of the relevant kit:
• Lateral locking device
• Mechanical connectors
• Wiring modules

SIRIUS System Manual

3-34 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Kits The following table shows you the components of the kit for the contactor
combination for reversing in frame size S00 and explains how to put it
together:

Drawing: frame size S00 Step Procedure

1/2/3 Mount the mechanical inter-
lock between the two contac-
5 tors.
4/5 Press the two connecting clips
3 from above and below onto the
2 two contactors.

1
4

6 Attach the wiring modules to

connect the main conducting
paths and to electrically inter-
6 lock the two contactors
(3RT10.1). Make sure that the
wiring modules are flush with
the contactor at the side.

Table 3-16: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame size S00)

Electrical interlock Note:

Contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit (3RT101.) are required for
the electrical interlock.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-35
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following table shows you the components of the kit for the contactor
combination for reversing in frame size S0 and explains how to put it
together:

Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure

1/2 Mount the mechanical inter-
lock between the two contac-
tors.
2
1

3 Wire the actuating voltage and

the electrical reversing interlock
3 using the auxiliary conducting
paths.

3
4/5 Attach the wiring modules (4)
in order to connect the main
4 conducting paths and tighten
the terminals (5).

Table 3-17: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-36 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following table shows you the components of the kits for the contactor
combination for reversing in frame size S2 and S3 and explains how to put it
together:

Drawing: frame size S2 (S3) Step Procedure

1/2/3 Mount the mechanical inter-
3 lock between the two contac-
tors (1/2), and insert the 2
3 connecting clips (10 mm spa-
2 cing) (3) on the back of the two
1 contactors.

4 Wire the actuating voltage and

the electrical reversing interlock
using the auxiliary conducting
4 paths.

5/6 Attach the wiring modules (5)

in order to connect the main
¿
conducting paths and tighten
5 the terminals (6).

5 À

Table 3-18: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame sizes S2/S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-37
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

4-pole contactor combi- 4-pole contactor combinations for reversing are available in frame sizes S0
nation for reversing and S2. You will require the following to mount these combinations:
• Frame size S0: locking device for mechanical interlock
• Frame size S2: locking device for mechanical interlock and 2 connecting
clips
The following table shows you how to set up the 4-pole contactor combina-
tion for reversing in frame size S0:

Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure

1/2 Remove the 4th pole from
one of the two contactors
1 by releasing the snap catch
(1).

1
3/4 Put the 4th pole on the
other side of the same con-
3 tactor by placing the cat-
ches on the pole into the
4
openings shown on the con-
tactor and snapping the pole
3 onto the contactor.
4

5/6 Mount the mechanical inter-

lock between the two con-
3RA1924-2B tactors (5/6).
6
5

Figure 3-17: 4-pole contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-38 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following table shows you how to set up the 4-pole contactor combina-
tion for reversing in frame size S2:

Drawing: frame size S2 Step Procedure

3RA1932-2G 1/2 Mount the mechanical inter-

3 lock between the two con-
tactors (1/2).
3 Press the two connecting
2 clips (3) onto the back of the
3
1 two contactors.

3RA1924-2B

Figure 3-18: 4-pole contactor combination for reversing (frame size S2)

NO contact function If contactors are used with 1 NO contact that is intended for an auxiliary
not locked function (e.g. as a signaling device), the wiring module must be separated.
The illustration below shows you the wiring for this function:

Figure 3-19: NC contact interlock (frame size S00)

Mounting and connec- The contactor combinations for reversing have screw-type connections that
tion are suitable for both screw-on and snap-on mounting on a 35 mm rail.

Conductor cross-sec- The permissible conductor cross-sections of the contactor combinations for
tions reversing correspond to those of the basic units for the corresponding frame
size.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-39
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Circuit diagrams Main circuit: S00, S0, S2, S3

L1
L2
L3

F1

K1
K2

NSB00634
F2
UV W
M
3~

Figure 3-20: Contactor combination for reversing, main circuit (frame sizes S00 to S3)

Control circuit: S00

Pushbutton switch control Continuous contacting

L1/L+ L1/L+
F3 F3
95 95
F2 F2
96 96

S0

10 2
S2 S1 S

53 53
S1 K1 S2 K2
54 54

22 22 22 22
K2 K1 K2 K1
21 21 21 21
NSB00636
NSB00635

A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2

Figure 3-21: Contactor combination for reversing, control circuit (frame size S00)

S0 "Off" button
S1 "Clockwise rotation on" button
S2 "Counterclockwise rotation on" button
S "Right/off/left" selector switch

K1 Clockwise rotation contactor

K2 Counterclockwise rotation contactor

F1 Fuses for main circuit

F2 Overload relay
F3 Fuses for control circuit

SIRIUS System Manual

3-40 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Control circuit: S0 to S3

Pushbutton switch control Continuous contacting

L1/L+ L1/L+
F3 F3
95 95
F2 F2
96 96

S0

10 2
S2 S1 S

.3 .3
S1 K1 S2 K2
.4 .4

K2 112 K1 121 112 121

K2 K1
111 122 111 122

NSB00639
NSB00638
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2

Figure 3-22: Contactor combination for reversing, control circuit (frame sizes S0 to S3)

Technical specifications The technical specifications of the contactor combinations for reversing cor-
respond to those of the basic units for the corresponding frame size.

3.3.9 Star-delta combinations

The 3RA1 star-delta combinations in frame sizes S00 to S3 are available as

follows:
• Fully assembled with the usual auxiliary switches in the following frame
sizes:
- S00-S00-S00
- S0-S0-S0
- S2-S2-S0
- S2-S2-S2
- S3-S3-S2
Frame sizes S2 to S3 are delivered already mounted on a base plate.
• As a kit for self-assembly
The same accessories can be used as for the basic units of the correspond-
ing frame size (see Section 3.4, "Contactor accessories").

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-41
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following graphics show you the fully assembled star-delta combina-
tions in frame sizes S00 to S2:

Frame size S00

3-phase feed-in termi-
nal (4 to 10 mm2)

Auxiliary switch
Auxiliary switch block, at front
block Time-delay auxiliary
At the front switch block, at
front
Time-delay auxiliary
switch block, at
front

Frame size S2

Auxiliary switch
block, at front Time-delay auxiliary switch
block, at front

Figure 3-23: Star-delta combinations (frame sizes S00, S0, S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-42 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Frame size S2

Time-delay auxiliary
switch block, at side

Figure 3-24: Star-delta combination (frame size S2)

Field of application The star-delta combination is used to start three-phase induction motors
which require a low load torque during startup.

Starting current ratio Star-delta starting can only be used when the motor is switched to delta
mode, starts with no load, or if the load torque during the star startup is
small and does not increase rapidly.
In the star stage, the motors can be loaded with approximately 50 %
(torque class KL16) and 30 % (KL10) of its rated torque.
The tightening torque is reduced to approximately 1/3 of the value at direct
power-up.
The starting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated current for the
motor.

Switchover Switching from the star to the delta stage can only be carried out once the
motor has completed startup to the rated speed.
The required switchover pause and interlock is included in the contactor
combination.

Important
Drives that require an early switchover are not suitable for star-delta star-
ting.

Overload protection The fully assembled combinations are not equipped with overload protec-
tion. Overload relay (3RU11) and tripping devices for thermistor motor pro-
tection must be ordered separately.
The overload relays can be attached to the contactor directly or set up sepa-
rately. The overload relay is set to 0.58 times the set current Ie. See
Chapter 4 on overload relays for further information.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-43
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Features of the star- The following table shows you the features of the fully assembled star-delta
delta combinations combinations with time-delay auxiliary switch blocks with the star-delta
function (3RT19.6-2B...) and solid-state time relays with semiconductor out-
put and the possible configuration if you use the self-assembly kit:

Frame size S00 Frame sizes S0 to S3

Fully assembled At front Lateral (time relay)
(time-delay auxiliary switch
block)
Kit At front • Lateral (time relay)
• At front
(time-delay auxiliary switch
block)
Table 3-19: Configuration of the star-delta combinations

Important
If a time-delay auxiliary switch block is mounted on the front of K3, an auxili-
ary switch block can only be mounted on the side of K3.

Accessories The following basic unit accessories can also be used for star-delta combina-
tions:
• Auxiliary switch blocks (front, side)
• Surge suppressors
• Time-delay auxiliary switch blocks with star-delta function
In addition, there are special accessories available for the star-delta combi-
nations:
• 3-phase feed-in terminals
• Star-point links (parallel links)
• Terminals for contactor coils (S2/S3)
• Mechanical connectors
• Wiring modules

Terminal for In order to reach coil terminals A1 and A2 in the star-delta combination bet-
contactor coils ter from contactors in frame sizes S2 and S3, terminals for contactor coils
can be used.
For each combination, 2 x A1 and 1 x A2 are required.

Infeed With conductor cross-sections > 2 x 2.5 mm2 and 1 x > 4 mm2 , a feed-in
terminal block must be used for the star-delta combination in frame size
S00. This makes the following conductor cross-sections possible:
• Frame size S00: up to 6 mm2
• Frame size S0: up to 25 mm2
• Frame size S2: up to 50 mm2

SIRIUS System Manual

3-44 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Kits The following table shows you the components of the kit for the star-delta
combination in frame size S00 and explains how to put it together:

Drawing: frame size S00 Step Procedure

1/2/3 Mount the mechanical inter-
5
locks between the K2 star con-
tactor and the K3 delta contac-
tor (1, 2).
3 4/5 Press the two connecting clips
2 from above and below onto the
two contactors (3).
Make sure the clips are on the
1
correct side.
4

6/7 Break the upper link module off

at the notches (6), and attach
the wiring modules (7) to con-
6 nect the main conducting paths
(between line contactor K1 and
delta contactor (K3) and at the
same time to interlock the com-
7 bination electrically (K3-K2).
8/9 Wire A2 (8), and tighten the
7 terminal screws (9).

8 7

Table 3-20: Assembly of the star-delta combination in frame size S00

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-45
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following table shows you the components of the kits for the star-delta
combinations in frame sizes S0 to S3 and explains how to put it together:

Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure

Attach the wiring modules
and the star-point link in
order to connect the main
¿ conducting paths and to
interlock the combination
electrically.

Drawing: frame size S2 (S3) Step Procedure

1/2 Place the star-point link on
1 the star contactor (1).
Tighten the main connec-
tions (2).
3 Place the wiring module on
the contactor undersides (3)
2 to connect the main conduc-
ting paths.

Drawing: frame sizes S3-S3-S2 Step Procedure

1 Attach the star-point link to
1 the star contactor (1).
2 Attach the wiring module to
the contactor undersides (2)
to connect the main conduc-
ting paths.
2

Table 3-21: Assembly of the star-delta combinations in frame sizes S0 to S3

SIRIUS System Manual

3-46 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Compensating for dif- In star-delta combinations with contactors of different frame sizes, it is nec-
ferent depths essary to compensate for the mounting depth of the smaller contactor.
One frame size is the maximum difference possible.
The following depth compensation must be made for a mechanical interlock
attached at the side:
• S2-S2-S0: K3: 1.5 mm; K2: 0 mm
• S3-S3-S2: K3: 0 mm; K2: 27.5 mm

Mounting and connec- The star-delta combinations have screw-type connections that are suitable
tion for both screw-on and snap-on mounting on the 35 mm rail.

Conductor cross-sec- The permissible conductor cross-sections of the star-delta combinations cor-
tions respond to those of the basic units for the corresponding frame size.

Circuit diagrams Main circuit: S00, S0, S2, S3

L1 3AC 50Hz ...V L1 3AC 50Hz ...V

L2 L2
L3 L3

F0 F0

K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2 K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6

NSB00642 NSB00645
F1 F1
U1 W2 U1 W2
V1 M U2 V1 M U2
W1 3 ~ V2 W1 3 ~ V2

U1 W2 U1 W2
V1 M U2 V1 M U2
W1 3 ~ V2 W1 3 ~ V2

S00 S0

L1 3AC 50Hz ...V

L2
L3

F0 F0

K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2
2 4 6 2 4 6

NSB00648
F1
U1 W2
V1 M U2
W1 3 ~ V2

U1 W2
V1 M U2
W1 3 ~ V2

S2 and S3

Figure 3-25: Star-delta combination, main circuit (frame sizes S00 to S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-47
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Control circuit: S00

Pushbutton switch control Continuous contacting

L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
F0 95 F0 95
F1 F1
96 96

S0

S1 S

13 13
K1 K1
14 14

27 37 27 37
K4 K4
28 38 28 38

22 22 22 22
K3 K2 K3 K2
21 21 21 21
K4 K1 K2 K3 K4 K1 K2 K3

N(L ) N(L )
NSB00643 NSB00644

Figure 3-26: Star-delta combination, control circuit (frame size S00)

Control circuit: S0 to S3

Pushbutton switch control Continuous contacting

L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V

F0 95 F0 95
F1 F1
96 96

S0

S1 S

44 44
K1 K1
43 43
33 13 33 13
27 38 K1 K2 27 38 K1 K2
K4 34 14 K4 34 14
28 37 28 37
12 22 12 22
K3 K2 K3 K2
11 21 11 21
K4 K2 K3 K1 K4 K2 K3 K1
N(L ) N(L )

Figure 3-27: Star-delta combination, control circuit (frame sizes S0 to S3)

S0 "Off" button F0 Fuses

S1 "On" button F1 Overload relay
S Continuous contact maker
K1 Line contactor
K2 Star contactor
K3 Delta contactor
K4 Time-delay auxiliary switch block or time relay

Technical specifications The technical specifications of the star-delta combinations correspond to

those of the basic units for the corresponding frame size.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-48 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4 Accessories 3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Accessories for frame The accessories for contactors that switch motors and for auxiliary contac-
size S00 tors are of the same type. The accessories are attached at the front.

Accessories for frame The accessories are (with few exceptions) the same for frame sizes S0 to
sizes S0 to S3 S3. They can be attached in different ways:
• Auxiliary switches can be attached at the front or the side.
• Surge suppressors can be attached at the top or the bottom.

The following graphic shows you the accessories for the contactors that switch motors and for the
contactor relays of frame size S00:
3 17
18
4

5
12

1
6 19 13
20
7

2
8

10

11

14
15

16
NSB00448

Figure 3-28: Accessories for contactors of frame size S00

1 Contactor, frame size S00

2 Contactor relay
3 Solid-state time relay block, on-delay
4 Solid-state time relay block, off-delay
5 Auxiliary switch block, time-delay
(on-delay or off-delay or star-delta function)
6/7 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above or below
8/9 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above or below
10 4-pole auxiliary switch block (terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012 or EN 50 005)
11 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard or electronic type
12 Soldering pin adapter for contactors with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
13 Soldering pin adapter for contactors and contactor relays
14 Additional load module to increase the permissible residual current
15/16Surge suppressor with and without LED
17 3-phase feed-in terminal
18 Parallel link (star-point link), 3-pole, without terminal
19 Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal
20 Parallel link, 4-pole, with terminal

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-49
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following graphic shows you the accessories for the auxiliary contactors and contactor relays for
auxiliary circuits of frame size S00:
3

12
5

7 13

8 2

14

10

11

15

16 NSB00066a

Figure 3-29: Accessories for auxiliary contactors/contactor relays of frame size S00

1 Auxiliary contactor
2 Contactor relay for auxiliary circuits
3 Solid-state time relay block, on-delay
4 Solid-state time relay block, off-delay
5 Auxiliary switch block, time-delay (types: on-delay or off-delay)
6 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above
8 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below
9 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below
10 4-pole auxiliary switch block (terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 011 or EN 50 005)
11 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard or electronic type
(terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 005)
12 Soldering pin adapter for auxiliary contactors with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
13 Soldering pin adapter for auxiliary contactors and contactor relays
14 Additional load module to increase the permissible residual current
15 Surge suppressor with LED
16 Surge suppressor without LED

SIRIUS System Manual

3-50 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following graphic shows you the accessories for the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3:
4

5
17 20
11
18

10 21

16 2

12

1
14

1
6
9

15
7
19

8
16
20

13

21

22 3
23

NSB00449

Figure 3-30: Accessories for contactors of frame size S00

1 Contactor, frame size S0

2 Contactor, frame size S2
3 Contactor, frame size S3

For frame sizes S0 to S3:

4 Solid-state time relay block, on-delay
5 Solid-state time relay block, off-delay
6 Auxiliary switch block, time-delay
(on-delay or off-delay or star-delta function)
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above
8 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below
9 4-pole auxiliary switch block
(Terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012 or EN 50 005)
10 Parallel link (star-point link), 3-pole without terminal
11 Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal
12 2-pole auxiliary switch block, attachable on the right or left side
(Terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012 or EN 50 005)
13 1-pole auxiliary switch block (a maximum of 4 can be snapped on)
14 Mechanical interlock, attachable at the side
15 Mechanical interlock, attachable at the front
16 Wiring modules above and below (reversing operation)
17 Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode combination),
attachable above or below (different for S0 and S2/S3)
18 Coupling link for direct attachment to the contactor coil
19 LED block to display the contactor function
For frame sizes S2 and S3 only:
20 Terminal for contactor coil for assembling contactor combinations
21 Terminal cover for box terminals
For frame sizes S3 only:
22 Terminal cover for lug connection and bar connection
23 Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-51
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.1 Attachable auxiliary switches for extending the auxiliary contacts

Integrated auxiliary Frame size S00

contacts The contactors of frame size S00 have an auxiliary conducting path inte-
grated in the basic unit.

Frame size S0 to S3
The contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 do not have an integrated auxiliary
conducting path in the basic unit.

Auxiliary switch blocks Auxiliary switch blocks for extending the auxiliary contacts are available with
Formats screw-type or Cage Clamp terminals to attach to contactors to switch
motors. They are available in the following formats:
• At the front 1 to 4-pole for frame sizes S00 to S3
• At the side: 2-pole for frame sizes S0 to S3
Different auxiliary switch blocks can be added to the 3RT1 basic units,
depending on the application:
The following can be snapped onto the front of the contactors:
• Frame sizes S00 to S3: a 4-pole auxiliary switch block
or
• Frame sizes S0 to S3: up to four 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks
Frame sizes S0 to S3
If the depth of the installation space is limited, 2-pole auxiliary switches can
be attached on the right and left side in frame sizes S0 to S3.
If 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks are used, note the location ID on the contac-
tor.

1-pole/2-pole auxiliary 1 or 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks that can be connected from above or
switch blocks below make the wiring simple and straightforward when setting up feeders.
These auxiliary switch blocks are only available with a screw-type terminal.
We recommend with the circuit breaker/contactor combination that you use
auxiliary switch blocks that are connected from below. In the case of the
contactor/overload relay combination, an auxiliary switch connected from
above is more suitable.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-52 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Electronically opti- The electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks contain enclosed switch-
mized auxiliary switch ing elements that are particularly suitable for switching low voltages and
blocks currents (hard gold-plated contacts) as well as for use in dusty atmospheres.
The rated operational current is Ie/AC-14 and DC-13: 1 to 300 mA, voltage: 3
to 60 V.
The electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks are available as screw-
type or Cage Clamp terminal types:
• Frame size S00 (3RH1911-.NF..): Has two enclosed auxiliary contacts (1
NO contact + 1 NC contact, 2 NO or 2 NC contacts
• Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RH1921-.FE22): Has two enclosed auxiliary con-
tacts and two standard auxiliary contacts, each 1 NO contact + 1 NC con-
tact
• The switched current is in acc. with the VDE 0435 regulation for relays.

Auxiliary contacts The following table gives you an overview of all the available auxiliary con-
tacts:
Auxiliary contacts and atta-
Frame size S00 Frame sizes S0 to S3
chable accessories

Integrated auxiliary contact 1 integrated auxiliary ---

contact

4-pole auxiliary switch Attachable at the front Attachable at the front

2-pole auxiliary switch Attachable at the front ---

1-pole auxiliary switch --- Attachable at the front

1-pole auxiliary switch (infeed Attachable at the front ---

from 1 side)

2-pole auxiliary switch (infeed Attachable at the front Attachable at the front
from 1 side)

2-pole auxiliary switch --- Attachable at the side

Time-delay auxiliary switch Attachable at the front Attachable at the front

blocks

Electronically optimized auxil- Attachable at the front Attachable at the front

iary switches
Table 3-22: Auxiliary switch blocks

Adding to the auxiliary • The 3RT10 basic units of frame size S00 with an integrated auxiliary con-
contacts tact can be supplemented with up to 4 contacts using attachable auxiliary
switches.
• The basic units of frame sizes S0 to S3 do not have any auxiliary switches,
but auxiliary switches can be attached at the front or the side.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-53
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

The following table shows you the expansion options for the different frame
sizes:
Frame size Auxiliary switch block Connection

S00 1, 3 and 4-pole (attachable at the front) Screw-type/Cage

Clamp terminal

Feeder auxiliary switch (attachable at the front): Screw-type termi-

• 1-pole (1 NO or 1 NC contact) nal
• 2-pole (1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO contacts)
Infeed from above or below possible

S0 to S3 1, and 4-pole (attachable at the front) Screw-type/Cage

2-pole (attachable at the side) Screw-type termi-
nal
Clamp terminal

Feeder auxiliary switch (attachable at the front): Screw-type termi-

• 2-pole (1 NO + I NC contact) nal
• 2-pole (2 NO or 2 NC contacts)
Infeed from above or below possible
Table 3-23: Expansion options for auxiliary switch blocks

Auxiliary switch at front Auxiliary switches that can be attached at the front are hooked into the
opening of the contactors and pulled down until they snap into place. They
can be removed using the release lever in the middle.

Figure 3-31: Auxiliary switch at front

SIRIUS System Manual

3-54 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Auxiliary switches at The auxiliary switches are hooked onto the left or right side of the contactor
side (S0 to S3) and snapped onto it. They are removed again by pressing the ribbed sur-
faces.

1 1
2
1
2
2
1
Figure 3-32: Auxiliary switch at side

Note
When you use two 2-pole, auxiliary switches at the side, you must attach an
auxiliary switch block on the left and right in the interests of symmetry.

Maximum number of The following table shows you the maximum number of auxiliary switches and their
auxiliary switches combination options:
Frame size S0 and S2 (3RT102./3RT103.)
1 auxiliary 4 auxiliary 2 auxiliary A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can
contact contact contact be attached, and you can use any type
element elements elements of auxiliary switch. When you use two
2-pole, auxiliary switch blocks at the
side, you must attach a block on the
left and right in the interests of sym-
metry. In some situations, it is permis-
Max. 4 0 0
sible to have more auxiliary contacts
Max. 2 0 1 in frame size S2 (for more details,
0 1 0 please contact Technical Assistance).
0 0 1+1
Table 3-24: Possible auxiliary switch combinations (frame size S0/S2)

Frame size S3 (3RT104./3RT14)

1 auxiliary 4 auxiliary 2 auxiliary A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can
contact contact contact be attached. Please note the follow-
element elements elements ing:
Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, a maxi-
mum of four can be NC contacts.
Symmetry must be preserved in the
case of auxiliary switch blocks
4 0 1+1
attached at the side.
0 1 1+1
0 0 2+2
Table 3-25: Possible auxiliary switch combinations (frame size S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-55
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Contactors with 4 main contacts and capacitor-switching contactors

S00 S0 S2/S3

Contactors with 4 auxiliary con- Maximum of 2 auxiliary Maximum 4 auxiliary

4 main contacts tacts contacts contacts (attached at the
(attached at the side or side or snapped on at the
snapped on at the top) top)

Capacitor-swit- An additional 2-pole auxiliary switch block on each side

ching contactors (3RH1921-1EA..: 2 NO, 2 NC or 1 NO + 1 NC contact)
Table 3-26: Possible auxiliary switch combinations with 4-pole/capacitor-switching contactors

Switching of the auxil- With the standard type of auxiliary switch, when the contactors are
iary contact elements switched on, first the NC contacts are opened and then the NO contacts are
closed.
On
Contactor Off
N On
Standard Off
auxiliary On
switch S Off

Figure 3-33: Switching of the auxiliary contact elements

Auxiliary contact ele-

ments with make- S00 Auxiliary switch S0 - S3 Auxiliary switch type
before-break contact- type
ing
3RH1911-1FC22 22U, 2 NO + 2 NC 3RH1921-1FC22 22U, 2 NO + 2 NC
contacts contacts
Screw-type terminal Screw-type terminal
3RH1911-1FB11 11U, 1 NO + 1 NC
contact
Screw-type terminal
3RH1911-1FB22 11/11U.
1 NO+1 NC+1PS 1)
+1lagging NC
contact
Screw-type terminal
3RH1911-2FC22 22U, 2 NO + NC
contact
Cage Clamp
3RH1911-2FB11 11U, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RH1921-1CD10 1 NO contact, lead-
contact ing
Cage Clamp Screw-type terminal
3RH1921-1CD01 1 NC contact, lagging
Screw-type terminal
3RH1921-2FC22 22 U, 2 NO + 2 NC
Cage Clamp
Table 3-27: Auxiliary switches with make-before-break contacting
1) Leading NO contact

SIRIUS System Manual

3-56 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.1.1 Terminal markings of the contactors (frame sizes S00 to S3)

In contactors of frame size S00 with an integrated auxiliary contact, the ter-
minal marking complies with EN 50 012. This also applies to contactors of
frame sizes S0 to S3 with an attached auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC
contacts) that are available as complete systems.

Expanding the contac- All the contactors of frame size S00 (3 and 4-pole) can be expanded with
tors of frame size S00 auxiliary switch blocks with the identification numbers 40 to 02 in acc. with
EN 50 005 as follows:
• Frame size S00 with an integrated auxiliary contact (identification number
10E or 01) for contactors with 3 or 5 auxiliary contacts
• Frame size S00 with 4 main contacts for contactors with 2 or 4 auxiliary
contacts

Note
The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks only apply to the
attached auxiliary switches.

Expanding the contac- Contactors with one NO contact as an auxiliary contact with screw-type or
tors with 1 integrated Cage Clamp terminals, identification number 10E, can be expanded with
NO contact, S00 auxiliary switch blocks with terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012
(3RT101.-...01) for contactors with 2, 4, and 5 auxiliary contacts. The terminal markings of
the complete contactors comply with EN 50 012. The identification numbers
11E, 22E, 23E, and 32E on the auxiliary switch blocks apply to the complete
contactors.

Important
Auxiliary switch blocks in acc. with EN 50 012 can only be combined with
contactors of frame size S00 that have 1 NO contact in the basic unit
because they are coded. These auxiliary switch blocks cannot be combined
with contactors that have an NC contact in the basic unit (identification num-
ber 01).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-57
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Auxiliary contacts S00 The following graphic shows you the auxiliary contacts that can be used to
expand the contactors of frame size S00 (terminal marking in acc. with
EN 50 012 or EN 50 005):

contactors, DIN EN 50 012,

1 auxiliary contact

identification no. 10E identification no. 01

auxiliary switch auxiliary switch

blocks, blocks,
4, 3 or 1 contact(s) 4 or 2 contacts

identification no. identification no. 40,

32E, 23E, 22E, 11E 31, 22, 20, 11, 02

contactors, contactors,
Hilfsschütze
DIN EN 50 012 DIN
DINEN 50 005,
EN50 005,
5, 4 or 2 58oroder
3 6 Kontakte
auxiliary contacts auxiliary contacts
NSB00450

identification no. 32E, identification no. 40,

23E, 22E, 11E 31, 22, 20, 11, 02

Figure 3-34: Auxiliary contacts, contactors for switching motors (frame size S00)

Expanding the contac- With contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3, you can also attach 1-pole auxiliary
tors of frame sizes S0 to switch blocks instead of 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks.
S3 The terminal markings of the 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks consist of
sequence numbers (location ID) on the basic unit and function numbers on
the auxiliary switch blocks.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-58 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Auxiliary contacts S0 to The following graphic shows you the auxiliary contacts that can be used to
S3 expand the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 (terminal marking in acc. with
EN 50 005 or EN 50 012):
4-pole auxiliary switch blocks 1-pole aux. switch blocks
contactors
3RT10 2. contactors
3RT10 3. 3RT10 2.
3RT10 4. 3RT10 3.
without auxiliary 3RT10 4.
contact without
auxiliary contact

auxiliary switch blocks, auxiliary switch blocks,

with 4 contacts 3RH19 21-. FA.. with 4 contacts 3RH19 21-. HA.. auxiliary switch blocks,
in acc. with DIN EN 50 005 in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 with 1 contact

identification no. 40, 31, 22, 1 NO 1O

identification no. 31, 22, 13
04, 22U

contactor arrangements with possible contactor

contactor arrangements
a 4-pole auxiliary switch block, arrangements with 1-pole
with a 4-pole auxiliary switch
terminal markings auxiliary switch blocks,
block, terminal markings
in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 terminal markings in acc. with
in acc. with DIN EN 50 005
DIN EN 50 005 or
DIN EN 50 012
identification numbers:
01, 10
11
21, 12
31, 22, 13
02, 20
NSB00452a

NSB00451a
03, 30
identification no. 40, 31, 22, 02 identification no. 31, 22, 13 04, 40

Figure 3-35: Auxiliary contacts, contactors for switching motors (frame sizes S0 to S3)

3.4.1.2 Terminal markings of the contactors and auxiliary contactors combined with auxiliary
switch blocks

Terminal markings in The terminal markings for contactors are defined in EN 50 005 that contains
acc. with EN 50 005 general directives. The following summarizes the basic rules that apply to
switching elements of auxiliary circuits:
• The terminals of auxiliary contact elements are designated by two-digit
numbers.
• The digit in the unit place is a function number (NC contact: 1 and 2,
NO contact: 3 and 4).
• The digit in the tens place is a sequence number (all the switching ele-
ments of the same function must have different sequence numbers).
Identification numbers The identification numbers mean:
(DIN EN 50 005) Switching devices with a fixed number of auxiliary contact elements (NO
contacts or NC contacts) can be assigned a two-digit identification number.
The first digit represents the number of NO contacts and the second one
the number of NC contacts.
There is no information on the sequence of NO contacts and NC contacts in
the contactor/auxiliary contactor.

Note
The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks only apply to the
attached auxiliary switches.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-59
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

EN 50 012/ For certain equipment such as auxiliary contact elements of contactors and
EN 50 011 auxiliary contactors, the EN 50 012 and EN 50 011 standards also apply.
The EN 50 012 defines the terminal markings and identification numbers for
auxiliary contact elements of particular contactors.
The terminal markings of the auxiliary contact elements match the terminal
markings of corresponding auxiliary contactors with the ID letter E (in acc.
with EN 50 011). For auxiliary contact elements of contactors with the same
identification number, the terminal marking must correspond to the
sequence defined in the standard.

Graphical symbols for Below are some examples of graphical symbols for auxiliary contact ele-
auxiliary contact ele- ments of contactors that comply with EN 50 012:
ments

ID ID ID
Coil Main contact elem. Auxiliary contact elements Auxiliary contact elements Auxiliary contact elements
no. no. no.
13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43 13 21 31 41
31 22 13

14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44 14 22 32 42

13 21 33 43 53 13 21 31 43 53 13 21 31 41 53

41 32 23

14 22 34 44 54 14 22 32 44 54 14 22 32 42 54

Figure 3-36: Graphical symbols for auxiliary contact elements in acc. with EN 50 012 (excerpt)

Device circuit diagrams The following device circuit diagrams of the auxiliary switch blocks for con-
tactors that switch motors contain the terminal markings in acc. with
EN 50 012:
3RT101 contactors
2 NO + 2 NC contacts 2 NO + 3 NC contacts 3 NO + 2 NC contacts
Identification number: 22E Identification number: 23E Identification number: 32E
A1(+) 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 A1(+) 1 3 5 13 21 31 41 53 A1(+) 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 53

A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 42 54 A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 54

Contactors 3RT102, 3RT103, 3RT104, 3RT1446

2 NO + 2 NC contacts
Identification number: 22

A1(+) 1 3 5 13 21 31 43
NSK-1321

A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44

4-pole auxiliary switch blocks 3RH1921-1HA.., can be snapped onto the

front
3 NO contacts + 1 2 NO + 2 NC contacts 1 NO + 3 NC contacts
Identification no.: 31E
13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43 13 21 31 41

14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44 14 22 32 42

Figure 3-37: Device circuit diagrams of the auxiliary switch blocks (DIN EN 50 012)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-60 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.1.3 Auxiliary switches that can be attached to 3RH1 auxiliary contactors

The 3RH1 auxiliary contactors can be expanded by up to 4 contacts using

attachable auxiliary switch blocks.

Definition: The main standard for the designation of switching elements for the auxiliary
EN 50 011 contactors is EN 50 011, which defines the terminal markings, identification
numbers, and identification letters of certain auxiliary contactors using a spe-
cific sequence of the switching elements. The number, type, and position of
the switching elements must be specified using an identification number fol-
lowed by an identification letter.
In the case of 8-pole auxiliary contactors, the letter "E" means that four NO
contacts have to be arranged on the lower (rear) contact level.

Expansion using auxil- The following example of an auxiliary contactor with 4 NO contacts (contact
iary switch blocks designation in acc. with EN 50 011 and EN 50 005) explains how auxiliary
switch blocks are added on:

auxiliary contactors,
DIN EN 50 011, 4 contacts

identification no.
identification no. 40E 31E, 22E

auxiliary switch blocks, auxiliary switch blocks,

4 contacts 4 or 2 contacts

identification no. 80E, identification no.

71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 40, 31, 22, 20, 11, 02

auxiliary contacts, auxiliary contacts,

Hilfsschütze
DIN EN 50 011 DIN
DINEN 50 005,
EN50 005,
8 contacts 88 oroder
6 contacts
6 Kontakte
NSB00067

identification no. 80E, identification no.

71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 40, 31, 22, 20, 11, 02

Figure 3-38: Auxiliary contacts for auxiliary contactors

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-61
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Contact designation Auxiliary switch blocks - for example, 3RH1911-1GA22 (2 NO + 2 NC con-

tacts) in acc. with EN 50 011 - can only be attached to auxiliary contactors
with 4 NO contacts (3RH1140-..... ) because they are coded. The identifica-
tion number (62E) printed on the auxiliary switch block (6 NO + 2 NC con-
tacts) applies to the whole contactor.
NO and NC contacts are in the same position on all the auxiliary contactors
with the identification number 62E (DIN EN 50 011).
This means contactors can be replaced without changing the wiring, which
therefore makes wiring very easy. You can attach auxiliary switch blocks that
comply with EN 50 005 on all 3RH11 auxiliary contactors and 3RT101 motor
contactors. For example, the 3RH1911-1FA22 auxiliary switch block (2 NO +
2 NC contacts) has the identification number 22, and this only applies to the
attached auxiliary switch block.

Graphical symbols of Below are some examples of graphical symbols for auxiliary contactors with
the auxiliary contactors the identification letter E that comply with EN 50 011:

ID ID Coil Switching elements

Coil Switching elements
no. no.
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
40 E 80 E

14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84

13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83

31 E 71 E

14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84

13 21 31 43 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
22 E 62 E

14 22 32 44 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84

13 21 31 41 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81
13 E 53 E

14 22 32 42 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82

11 21 31 41 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81

04 E 44 E

12 22 32 42 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82

Figure 3-39: Graphical symbols for auxiliary contactors in acc. with EN 50 011 (excerpt)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-62 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Device circuit diagrams The following device circuit diagrams of the auxiliary contactors contain ter-
minal markings in acc. with EN 50 011:

4 NO contacts 3 NO contacts + 1 NC contact 2 NO + 2 NC contacts

Identification number: 40 E Identification number: 31 E Identification number: 22 E
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A1(+) 13 21 33 43 A1(+) 13 21 31 43

NS2-5552

NS2-5553

NS2-5554
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 A2( ) 14 22 34 44 A2( ) 14 22 32 44

8S 7 NO contacts + 1 NC contact 6 NO + 2 NC contacts

Identification number: 80 E Identification number: 71 E Identification number: 62 E
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83 A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83

NS2-5558

NS2-5559

NS2-5560
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84 A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84

5 NO + 3 NC contacts 4 NO + 4 NC contacts
Identification number: 53 E Identification number: 44 E
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81 A1(+) 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
NS2-5561

NS2-5562
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82 A2( ) 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82

Figure 3-40: Device circuit diagrams

Position diagrams The following position diagrams of the auxiliary switches of frame sizes S00
to S3 also apply to leading and lagging contacts:

N On
Standard Off
auxiliary On
switch S Off
N On
Off
Overlapping
auxiliary On
switches S Off

Figure 3-41: Position diagrams of the auxiliary switches (frame sizes S0 to S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-63
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.2 Time-delay auxiliary3switches

3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Variants The following variants of the time-delay auxiliary switch are available:
• On-delay
• Off-delay without auxiliary supply
• Star-delta function

On-delay and off-delay The time-delay auxiliary switch in the on-delay or off-delay variants has the
functions following features:
• It facilitates time-delayed functions up to 100 s
• 3 single time areas
• Contains a relay with 1 NO contact and 1 NC contact that switches the
on-delay or off-delay depending on the version.

Star-delta function The time-delay auxiliary switch with star-delta function has the following fea-
tures:
• Equipped with a delayed and an instantaneous NO contact between
which there is an idle time of 50 ms.
• The delay time of the NO contact can be set at between 1.5 s to
30 seconds.
• The contactor on which the time-delay auxiliary switch block is mounted
functions instantaneously.

Conductor cross-sec- The permissible conductor cross-sections correspond to the auxiliary con-
tions ductor terminals of the corresponding frame size.

3.4.2.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2E, -2F, -2G)

Description The time-delay auxiliary switch of frame size S00 has the following features:
• The power supply is provided using plug-in contacts directly via the coil
connections of the contactors, parallel to A1/A2.
• The time function is activated when the contactor that has the auxiliary
switch block mounted on it is switched on.
• The off-delay version functions without an auxiliary supply.
• The minimum on-time is 200 ms.
• To dampen switching overvoltages of the contactor coil, a varistor is inte-
grated in the time-delay auxiliary switch of frame size S00.

Information on mount- Note about the off-delay without auxiliary supply function:
ing The position of the output contacts is not defined at shipment (bistable
relay). Apply the control supply voltage once, and then switch it off again to
set up the initial state of the contacts.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-64 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Important
The time-delay auxiliary switch cannot be built onto contactor relays.

Installation/removal Caution
Switch off the supply voltage to A1/A2 before you install or remove the time-
delay auxiliary switch block.

3RT1.1 The time-delay auxiliary switch is

attached to the front of the contac-
tor.

Figure 3-42: Time-delay auxiliary switch block (frame size S00)

Connection When they are attached, the connections for the rated control supply volt-
age are connected to the contactor below by the integrated spring contacts
of the time-delay auxiliary switch.

Function 3RT1916-2E
diagrams A1/A2

On-delay
NSK-7932

27/28

35/36 1 NO and 1 NC contact

t

3RT1916-2F
> 200 ms
A1/A2 Off-delay
27/28 Without auxiliary supply
35/36 1 NO and 1 NC contact
t

3RT1916-2G
A1/A2
Star-delta function
NSK-7955

Y 27/28
1 NO contact, instantaneous
D 37/38
t 50 ms 1 NO contact, delayed
t

Figure 3-43: Function diagrams of the time-delay auxiliary switches (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-65
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.2.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2E, -2F, -2G)

Description The time-delay auxiliary switch for frame sizes S0 to S3 has the following
features:
• The power supply of the time-delay auxiliary switch is via 2 terminals (A1/
A2).
• The time delay for the time-delay auxiliary switch can be activated by par-
allel connection to any contactor coil, or by any source of voltage.
• The off-delay version works without an auxiliary supply.
• The minimum on-time is 200 ms.
• In addition to the time-delay auxiliary switch, a 1-pole auxiliary switch
block can be snapped onto the front of the contactor.
• The time-delay auxiliary switch does not have any integrated overvoltage
damping for the contacted contactor.

Information on mount- Note about the off-delay without auxiliary supply function:
ing The position of the output contacts is not defined at shipment (bistable
relay). Apply the control supply voltage once, and then switch it off again to
set up the initial state of the contacts.

.
Installation/removal
3RT1.2 The time-delay auxiliary switch
3RT1.3 is attached to the front of the
3RT1.4 contactor.
1 2

Figure 3-44: Time-delay auxiliary switch block (frame sizes S0 to S3)

Connection The A1 and A2 terminals for the rated control supply voltage of the time-
delay auxiliary switch are connected to the respective contactor with cables.

Terminal markings Because an additional auxiliary switch block can be snapped onto the con-
tactor, the terminals of the delayed contacts have been
designated as -5/-6 (NC contact) and -7/-8 (NO contact).

SIRIUS System Manual

3-66 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Function
diagrams A1/A2 On-delay

NSK-7932
27/28 1 NO and 1 NC contact
35/36
t

> 200 ms

A1/A2
Off-delay without auxiliary supply

NSK-7933a
27/28
1 NO and 1 NC contact
35/36
t

A1/A2
Star-delta function
NSK-7955
Y 27/28

D 37/38
1 NO contact, instantaneous
t 50 ms 1 NO contact, delayed

Figure 3-45: Time-delay auxiliary switches, function diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3)

3.4.3 Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output

The solid-state time relay blocks are suitable for AC and DC operation. To
dampen switching overvoltages of the contactor coil, a varistor is inte-
grated.

Variants The following variants of the time-delay auxiliary switch are available:
• On-delay (integrated varistor)
• Off-delay with auxiliary supply (integrated varistor)

On-delay and off-delay The time-delay auxiliary switch in the on-delay or off-delay with an auxiliary
functions supply variants has the following features:
• It facilitates time-delayed functions up to 100 seconds.
• 3 individual time ranges
• Contactors with a solid-state time relay block close and open with a delay
according to the time set.

Connection: on-delay The on-delay time relay block is connected in series to the contactor coil;
time relay block the A1 terminal of the contactor coil must not be connected.

Connection: off-delay When an off-delay time relay block is attached, the contactor coil is con-
time relay block tacted via the time relay block; the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil
must not be connected.

Conductor cross-sec- The permissible conductor cross-sections correspond to the auxiliary con-
tions ductor terminals of the corresponding frame size.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-67
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Notes on configuration The control of loads parallel to the start input is not permissible in AC opera-
tion. See the relevant circuit diagram ¿ below.
The off-delay solid-state time relay blocks (3RT1916-2D.../3RT1926-2D...)
have a live start input (B1). With AC voltage, this can imitate the control of a
parallel load on the B1 terminal. In this case, an additional load (contactor
K3, for example) should be wired as shown in circuit diagram À.
¿ À
L1 L1
S1 K3 S1

A1 B1 A2 K3 A1 B1 A2 K3
K1 K1
A1 A2 A1 A2
K2 K2
N N

K1 time relay block

K2 contactor
Figure 3-46: Control of loads

3.4.3.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2C, -2D)

Caution
Switch off the supply voltage to A1/A2 before you install or remove the
solid-state time relay block.

Installation/removal Important
The time-delay auxiliary switch cannot be attached to contactor relays.

The solid-state time relay block of frame size S00 is attached to the front of
the contactor and latched into place with a pushing movement.
Installation Removal

2
1
1 2

Figure 3-47: Solid-state time relay block with semiconductor output, installation (frame size S00)

Connection When the solid-state time relay block is installed, it is connected at the
same time with the A1 and A2 coil connections of the contactor by the plug-
in contacts. Coil connections of the contactor that are not required are cov-
ered by covers on the housing of the time relay block, thus preventing inad-
vertent connection.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-68 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Function diagrams 3RT1916-2C, on-delay 3RT1916-2D, off-delay

A1/A2 A1/A2
Time relay Time relay

NSK-7937a

NSK-7938a
B1/A2
t > 35 ms
A1/A2 A1/A2
Contactor Contactor
t

Figure 3-48: Solid-state time relay block with semiconductor output, function diagrams (frame size
S00)

Circuit diagrams 3RT1916-2C 3RT1916-2D

on-delay off-delay with auxiliary supply
L1/L+ L1/L+

S1
A1 A1 B1 A2
K1 K1
A1 A2
K2 A1 A2
K2
A1 A2
A1 A2
N/L

K1 Solid-state time relay block

K2 Contactor
Connection prohibited!

Figure 3-49: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, circuit diagrams (frame size S00)

3.4.3.2 Frame size S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2C, -2D)

Note on configuration Caution

The solid-state time relay block with a semiconductor output
(3RT1926-2C, -2D) must not be used for 3RT104 contactors of frame size S3
with US ≤ 42 V because the coil current used for the output semiconductor
is too high.
The solid-state time relay block must not be attached to the lower coil con-
nections.

Installation/removal
The solid-state time relay block
for the contactors of frame sizes
S0 to S3 is attached at the top on
1 the A1 and A2 coil connections
of each contactor, connecting the
2 time relay electrically and mecha-
nically with pins.

Figure 3-50: Solid-state time relay with a semiconductor output, installation (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-69
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Circuit diagrams 3RT1926-2C 3RT1926-2D

on-delay off-delay with auxiliary supply
L1(L+) L1(L+) S1
A1 A2
A1 B1 A2
K1
K1
A1 A2
A1 A2
K2 K2
A1 A2 A1 A2
N(L-) N(L-)

K2:3RT102. US = 24 V to 240 VAC/DC K2:3RT102. US = 24 V to 240 VAC/DC

3RT103. US = 24 V to 240 VAC/DC 3RT103. US = 24 V to 240 VAC/DC
3RT104. US = 48 V to 240 VAC/DC 3RT104. US = 48 V to 240 VAC/DC

✘ Connection prohibited!
Can be connected if required
Figure 3-51: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, circuit diagrams

Function diagrams 3RT1926-2C..1, on-delay 3RT1926-2D..1, off-delay

A1/A2 A1/A2
Time relay Time relay

NSK-7938a
B1/A2
NSK-7937a

t > 35 ms
A1/A2 A1/A2
Contactor Contactor
t

Figure 3-52: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, function diagrams

3.4.4 Additional load module (3RT1916-1GA00)

Field of application The additional load module for the contactors of frame size S00 is used to
increase the permissible residual current and to limit the residual voltage of
SIMATIC semiconductor outputs.

Mode of operation Malfunctions can sometimes occur when SIRIUS contactors and auxiliary
contactors of frame size S00 work together with SIMATIC output modules
whose residual current at signal "0" is higher than is permissible for the con-
tactors of frame size S00. The maximum permissible residual current of the
electronic components is 3 mA for contactors of frame size S00 with a
230 VAC drive, and in the case of higher residual currents, the contactors no
longer drop down.
The additional load module is used to ensure the safe switching off of S00
contactors in the case of direct control by programmable controllers via
230 VAC semiconductor outputs.
The additional load module takes on the function of overvoltage damping at
the same time.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-70 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Technical specifications Rated voltage AC 50/60 Hz

180 V to 255 V
Rated output power 1.65 W at 230 V
Permissible contactor types 3RT1.1
3RT1.
Associated coil type P0 (230 V, 50/60 Hz)
N2 (220 V, 50/60 Hz)
P6 (220 V, 50Hz/240 V, 60 Hz)
Operating range 0.8 to 1.1 Us

Installation The additional load is connected in parallel to the contactor coil. It has the
same construction as the surge suppressor and is attached on the front of
the contactors with or without an auxiliary switch block.

3.4.5 Coupling element for frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RH1924-1GP11)

Field of application The 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling link is intended for contactors of frame sizes
S0 to S3. It can be controlled by a programmable controller output because
the operating range of 17 to 30 VDC is permissible.

Mode of operation A contactor of frame size S0 to S3 can be controlled, for example, at 24 VDC
with a low control level (< 0.5 W) from a programmable controller output.
The control voltage for the coupling link and the rated control supply voltage
for the contactor are electrically isolated. An LED indicates the switching
state of the coupling link.
To dampen switching overvoltages of the contactor coil, a varistor is inte-
grated in the coupling link.

Installation Caution
Switch off the supply voltage applied to L1 and N before installation.

The coupling link is inserted with

its two integrated mounting pins
directly onto the coil connections
1 of the contactor.

Figure 3-53: Coupling link (frame sizes S0 to S3)

Conductor cross-sec- The permissible conductor cross-sections correspond to the auxiliary con-
tions ductor terminals of the corresponding frame size.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-71
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Circuit diagram
L1 B1+ B2- N
K1
U

U
K1 Coupling link
A1
K2 K2 Contactor
A2

B1+/B2-: Control voltage 24 VDC

L1/N: Rated control supply voltage for the selected contactor

Figure 3-54: Coupling link, circuit diagram (frame sizes S0 to S3)

Technical specifications You can find the technical specifications of the coupling link in Section 3.6,
Technical specifications.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-72 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.6 Surge suppression 3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

When contactor coils are disconnected, overvoltage occurs (inductive load).

Voltage peaks of up to 4 kV with a rate of rise in voltage of 1 kV/ms can
result (showering arcs).
The consequences of this are:
• Heavy contact erosion and thus premature wearing of the contacts that
switch the coil
• Unwanted signals can occur that may cause false signals in electronic
controllers.
All contactor coils, therefore, should be damped against switching overvolt-
ages, particularly when working with electronic controllers.

Oscillograms The following oscillograms illustrate the behavior at disconnection of contac-

tor coils with and without overvoltage damping:

Unused coil
Disconnection of an unused contactor coil
U Sp [V ]

U Sp

3000

1000

50 100 t[µs]

Figure 3-55: Disconnecting an unused contactor coil

Oscillogram of a disconnection of the coil of an auxiliary contactor. The coil

is not used:
Showering arcs can be clearly seen (voltage peaks of up to approximately
4 kV). After the disconnection procedure has been started, showering arcs
occur for approximately 250 microseconds, and after that the oscillation is
merely damped.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-73
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Varistor
Circuit with a varistor
(AC/DC operation)
U Sp [V ]

U Sp

200

0 20 t[µs]

Figure 3-56: Circuit with a varistor (AC/DC operation)

This is what happens when a coil is disconnected that is connected to a

varistor (voltage-dependent resistor):
Voltage peaks still occur. They are cut off at approximately 400 V and have a
shorter overall duration (approximately 50 microseconds).
(Note: The oscillogram is cut off, and the voltage is reduced to zero after
approximately 3 ms.)
A varistor is suitable for AC and DC operation.
The off-delay of the contactor is extended by approximately 2 to 5 ms.

RC element
Circuit with an RC element
(AC/DC operation)
U Sp [V ]

U Sp

200

0 5 t[m s]

Figure 3-57: Circuit with an RC element (AC/DC operation)

This is what happens when a coil is disconnected that is connected to an RC

element:
The amplitude and rate of rise of the switching overvoltage are reduced by
the capacitor. Showering arcs no longer occur. The voltage swings briefly to
400 V and then slowly drops down. This represents ideal damping.
Disadvantage: The component is larger and generally more expensive.
RC elements are suitable for AC and DC operation.
Only a minimal off-delay occurs (under 1 ms).

SIRIUS System Manual

3-74 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Diode
Circuit with diode
(DC operation)
U Sp [V ]

U Sp
20

0 = 0,6 V ^
= U SP
derD iode

0 200 t[µs]

Figure 3-58: Circuit with a diode (AC/DC operation)

This is what happens when a coil is disconnected that is connected to a

diode:
Advantages: No overvoltage occurs during disconnection. The diode block
becomes effective at 0.6 V.
Disadvantage: The diode can only be used for DC operation.
The break time of the contactor is considerably increased and amounts to 6
to 9 times the off-delay.
This increased break time can be used, if necessary, for control purposes,
such as for bridging brief interruptions in voltage.
Zener diodes (diode combinations) are available for shorter break times. The
break time then amounts to 2 to 6 times the off-delay.

Surge suppressors The following surge suppressors are available for the 3RT1 contactors:

Without
Surge suppressor With LED
LED

For S00 For S00 For S0 For S2, S3

Suppression diode x x -- --

Diode combination: -- x x x
suppression diode and Zener
diode

Varistor x x x x

RC element -- x x x

Table 3-28: Surge suppressor

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-75
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Selection aid The following table gives you a comparison of the effects of the different
surge suppressors:

Suitable for
Overvoltage
Surge suppressor control supply Effect
is limited
voltage

Suppression diode/ DC 0.6 V • Off-delay is considerably greater

flywheeling diode (6 to 10 times)
• A two-stage drop1) cannot be
ruled out in the case of contactors as
of frame size S0

Diode combination: DC To Zener voltage • Off-delay is greater (2 to 6 times)

suppression diode • A 2-stage drop no longer occurs
Zener diode

Varistor AC/DC To varistor voltage • Off-delay is only slightly greater

(current-dependent) (2 to 5 ms)

RC element AC/DC Corresponds to • Off-delay remains unchanged

the dimensioning • Rate of rise in voltage is damped
Table 3-29: How surge suppressors work

1) The rate of drop is reduced once or twice to zero for a few ms:
• A safe drop is always ensured in the case of switching without current.
• The contact pieces are subjected to a greater thermal load when switch-
ing with current. When switching at the upper current limit, this can result
in overload.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-76 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Installation Frame size S00

The surge suppressor is attached

on the front of the contactors.
There is space next to the
attached auxiliary switch block.
The direction of for attachment is
defined by a code.

Frame sizes S0 to S3

2 Varistors, RC elements, and

diode combinations can either be
1
inserted and snapped on from
above or below directly onto the
coil terminals.

1
2
2 To remove them, press the varis-
1 tors, RC elements, and diode
combinations forwards, and
remove them from the recess.

Figure 3-59: Surge suppressors, installation

Installation instruc- Important

tions for frame sizes The 3RT1926-1E.00 diode combination is inserted from above. The direction
S0 to S3 of attachment is defined by a code.
Alternatively, the 3RT1926-1T.00 diode combination can be inserted from
below. The direction of attachment is not coded, but the terminals are mar-
ked with "+" and "-" so that the direction is clear.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-77
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Circuit diagrams RC element Varistor

3RT1916-1PA. 3RT1916-1PB.
L1
L2
L3

R_L1 C_L1 V_L1

U
R_L2 C_L2 V_L2

U
R_L3 C_L3 V_L3

U
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3

M M
3~ 3~
Figure 3-60: RC element/varistor, circuit diagrams

3.4.7 Other accessories

3.4.7.1 LED module for indicating contactor control (3RT1926-1QT00)

Description The LED module can be connected to the coil terminals of the contactors of
frame sizes S0 to S3. It indicates the status of the contactors by means of
yellow LEDs.

Mode of operation The LED module can be used for AC/DC voltages of 24 V to 240 V.
The LEDs are connected bidirectionally to protect against polarity reversal.
Both LEDs light up in AC control, and one lights up in DC control, depending
on the polarity.

Connection The LED module is connected to the A1 and A2 coil terminals of the contac-
tor.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-78 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Installation The LED module is snapped onto the front in the openings intended for the
inscription plate.

Figure 3-61: LED module

3.4.7.2 Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole (for frame size S3)

Using the 3-pole auxiliary lead terminal, auxiliary and control cables can be
connected to the main cable terminals.
Conductor cross-sections of auxiliary connecting leads that can be con-
nected:
Screw-type terminals (1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) in acc. with IEC 60 947;
Max. 2 x (0.75 to 4)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (20 to 16); 2 x (18 to 4); 1 x 12
Terminal screws M3
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in)

Table 3-30: Conductor cross-sections of 3-pole auxiliary connecting lead terminals (for frame size S3)

3.4.7.3 EMC module (3RT1916-1P..)

In the case of motors or various inductive loads, back-e.m.f (electromotive

force) is produced at disconnection. This can produce voltage peaks of up to
4000 V with a frequency range of 1 kHz to 10 MHz and a rate of voltage vari-
ation of 0.1 to 20 V/ns.
Capacitive coupling to various analog and digital signals makes suppression
necessary in the load circuit.

Description The connection of the main conducting path to the EMC suppression mod-
ule reduces the contact sparking that is responsible for contact erosion and
many of the clicks, which in turn supports an EMC-compatible configuration.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-79
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Mode of operation The EMV suppression module reduces through 3 phases the radio-fre-
quency parts and the voltage peaks. The advantages of this are as follows:
• Longer service life of the contact pieces
• Higher operational reliability and high system availability

A fine grading within the performance class is not required because smaller
motors have greater inductance due to their construction, and one EMC sup-
pression module is thus sufficient for all non-stabilized drives up to 5.5 kW.

Variants Two electrical variants are available:

• RC circuit
• Varistor switching

Installation
The EMC suppression module is
attached to the underside of the
contactor. To do this, hook the
EMC suppression module with
both hooks onto the contactor,
and push it upward until the con-
1 nection pins of the EMC module
are firmly in place in the terminal
2 3RT1916-1P.. openings of the contactor.

Figure 3-62: EMC suppression module

RC circuit The RC circuit is suitable:

• For reducing the rate of rise
• In RF damping
Effective suppression can be achieved for a wide range of applications.

Varistor circuit A varistor circuit can absorb a high level of energy and can be used for fre-
quencies from 10 to 400 Hz (stabilized drives). There is no limit below the
buckling stress.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-80 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.7.4 Soldering pin connector for frame size S00

Description The standard contactors of frame size S00 in the SIRIUS range can be sol-
dered onto printed circuit boards by means of the soldering pin adapter.
Soldering pin connection is possible:
• For contactors with an integrated auxiliary contact
• For contactors with an attached 4-pole auxiliary switch block
• For the reversing wiring of the S00 contactors. This involves carrying out
the reversing wiring before soldering it on the printed circuit board

Mounting main con-

tacts
2
3
The soldering pin connectors are
inserted above and below in the screw-
type terminals of the contactors.
1
4
2

3
Figure 3-63: Soldering pin connection, mounting

Mounting on 4-pole
auxiliary switch block

1
3

Figure 3-64: Mounting the soldering pin connection on a 4-pole auxiliary switch block

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-81
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Removing the spring If necessary, the spring for attachment to the rail can be removed before the
soldering pin connection is mounted.

Figure 3-65: Removing the spring from the soldering pin connection

SIRIUS System Manual

3-82 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.4.7.5 Parallel connections

3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

If the conducting paths of multipole switching devices are connected in par-

allel, the total current is distributed to the individual conducting paths
according to their ohmic resistance and the inductive effect they have on
each other. The ohmic resistance is mainly formed by the transfer resistance
at the contact pieces, the value of which can be changed by contact erosion
and oxidation. The distribution of current is therefore neither even or stable:
Individual conducting paths can be overloaded and the overload release or
overload relay may be prematurely triggered (triggering fault).

Permanent load in The following applies to permanent loads in the case of parallel connection
parallel connection unless specified otherwise in the catalogs:
• When three conducting paths are connected in parallel, 2.5 times the
amount of continuous current can be applied, and when two conducting
paths are connected in parallel, 1.8 times the continuous current can be
applied. Make sure, however, that the making and breaking capacity do
not increase because the contact pieces do not close and open at the
same time, and therefore the contact pieces in a conducting path have to
switch the entire making and breaking current.
• The wiring must be routed in such a way that each conducting path has
the same line length.
• Any short-circuit current is distributed in proportion to the conducting
path resistances.
Important: The operating current of electromagnetic, instantaneous
short-circuit releases is not reached.

Making/breaking You can find out the making and breaking capacity of contactors in relation
capacity to the load currents in the parallel connection of two or three conducting
paths from the following table:
Ie Ie Ie I’e I’’e I’’e

1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 7

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 8

Ie Ie Ie Ie Ie Ie
1) 2 conducting paths 3 conducting paths 4 conducting paths
3-pole switching
in parallel1) in parallel1) in parallel1)

Making 12 x Ie (utilization 12 ⋅ I′e 12 ⋅ I′′e 12 ⋅ I′′e

----------------- = 6, 67 ⋅ I′e ------------------- = 4, 8 ⋅ I′′e ------------------- = 3, 9 ⋅ I′′e
capacity: category AC -4) 1, 8 2, 5 3, 1

Breaking 10 x Ie (utilization 10 ⋅ I′e 10 ⋅ I′′e = , ⋅ I′′e 10 ⋅ I′′e

----------------- = 5, 55 ⋅ I′e ------------------- 4 0 ------------------- = 3, 2 ⋅ I′′e
capacity category AC -4) 1, 8 2, 5 3, 1
Table 3-31: Parallel links making and breaking capacity

1) Voltage at each clearance between open contacts:

Ue
U = -------
3

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-83
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Variants The following variants of parallel connections are available:

Frame size Variants

S00 to S3 3-pole, without terminal (star-point link)2)

S00 to S3 3-pole with terminal

S00 4-pole with terminal

Table 3-32: Parallel connections Variants

2) Accessories for star-delta combinations

Installation The parallel connections can be each shortened by one pole.

3.4.7.6 Covers for frame sizes S2 and S3

To increase safety, terminal covers are available for contactors of frame

sizes S2 and S3:
Variants Function Number required

Terminal cover Offers additional shock protection 2 covers per contactor are
for box terminals required (for the upper
3RT19.6-4EA2 and lower main terminals)
Terminal cover Ensures that voltage intervals are adhered to
for lug and Provides shock protection when the box termi-
bar connection nal is removed
3RT1946-4EA1
Table 3-33: Covers

SIRIUS System Manual

3-84 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Installation The following diagrams show you how to mount the covers:

1 The cover for box terminals is

inserted in the guides on the box
2 terminal block and pushed back-
wards until it snaps into position.

3 To attach the cover for the lug

and bar connection, first remove
the box terminal block (1, 2, 3),
1 and then push the cover in the
guide rails.

Figure 3-66: Terminal covers

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-85
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.5 Mounting and connection

3.5.1 Mounting

Note Note the following when mounting the cover:

• If foreign bodies, such as wood shavings, can get into the device, the con-
tactors must be covered during installation.
• If there is a danger that dirt or dust could be present, or if there is a corro-
sive atmosphere, the contactors must be installed in a housing.
• Dust deposits must be vacuum cleaned.

Attachment The attachment options for the contactors are uniform.

options
Frame size Installation Removal

S00 to S3 Screw-on attachment Removed with a screwdriver

Snapped onto a
S00, S0 35 mm rail (in acc. with Removed without a tool
EN 50 022)

Snapped onto a
S2, S3 35 mm rail (in acc. with
EN 50 022) The snap-on spring can be opened with a
screwdriver
Snapped onto a
S3
75 mm rail
Table 3-34: Attachment

Screw-on attachment
The 3RT1 contactors can be screwed
M4 onto a flat surface.
• With 2 M4 screws, diagonal
• Maximum tightening torque 2 Nm
• Washers and spring lock washers must
always be used
• The distance to grounded parts at the
side must be more than 6 mm

Figure 3-67: 3RT: Screw-on attachment (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-86 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Snap-on attachment on Snap-on attachment is possible:

rails • Frame sizes S00 to S3: on 35 mm rail
• Frame size S3: on 75 mm rail. The height of the rail must be at least
15 mm.
The following illustration shows you how to mount the device onto the rail:
Frame sizes S00 and S0
Place the device on the upper edge
of the rail, and press it downward
until it snaps onto the lower edge of
the rail (1).
Push the device downward to
release the tension of the mounting
spring, and remove the device by
2 1 tilting it (2).

Frame sizes S2 and S3

Place the device on the upper edge

1 of the rail, (1) and press it down-
ward toward the rail until it snaps
2 onto the lower edge of the rail (2).

Using a screwdriver, push the lug

on the lower rear side of the device
downward to release the tension of
the mounting spring (3), and
remove the device by tilting it (4).
4
3
3
Figure 3-68: Snap-on attachment

Installation positions The contactors are designed for use on vertical surfaces. The following
installation positions are permissible for AC and DC operation:

22,5° 22,5°
360° Without overload relay

22,5° 22,5°

With 3RU1 overload relay

225° 315°

Figure 3-69: Installation positions

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-87
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Vertical installation The following table indicates usage in a vertical installation position:
position
No. Size AC/DC Output power Measure

1 S00 coupler DC 3 to 5.5 kW Without restriction

3RT10 1.

1 S00 coupler DC Ie/AC-15 With 2 NO + 2 NC contacts:

3RH11 6 A/230 V stronger springs,
otherwise no restriction

2 S00 3RT10 1. DC 3 to 5.5 kW Without restriction

2 S00 3RH11 DC Ie/AC-15 Without restriction

6 A/230 V

3 S00 AC 3 to 5.5 kW/ Special variant

and Ie/AC-15
6 A/230 V

4 S0 coupler DC 5.5 to 11 kW Special variant

5 S0 DC 4 to 11 kW Special variant

6 S0 AC 4 to 11 kW Without restriction

8 S2 AC 15 to 22 kW Special variant

9 S2 DC 15 to 22 kW Vertical installation position not

possible.

10 S3 AC 30 to 45 kW Special variant

11 S3 DC 30 to 45 kW Vertical installation position not

possible.
Table 3-35: Vertical installation position

Motor and auxiliary contacts (including the contactor relay variants) are
included in frame size S00.

Installation in series No derating is necessary up to an ambient temperature of 60 °C for all the

contactors, even those in side-by-side installation.
In the case of contactors with an extended operating range (0.7 to 1.25 x Us)
that use a series resistor, installation in series is permissible up to an ambi-
ent temperature of +70 °C.

3.5.2 Connection

The SIRIUS contactors are available with the following terminal types:
• Frame sizes S00 to S3: screw-type terminals
• Contactors and auxiliary contactors of frame size S00: All the terminals
are also available as Cage Clamp terminals
• Contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3: The auxiliary switches and coil con-
nections are also available with Cage Clamp terminals.
• Accessories: screw-type and (for most of the range) Cage Clamp termi-
nals
• The contactors of frame size S3 have removable box terminals for the
main conductor terminals. This enables the connection of ring lugs or bus-
bars.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-88 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Screw-type terminals The devices with screw-type terminals have the following features:
• All the connections have captive screws.
• All the terminal points are delivered in the open position.
• The screwdriver guides allow screwdriving machines to be used.
• In frame size S00, all the terminal screws for the main and auxiliary cir-
cuits have a uniform screw size (cross-tip Pozidriv 2 screws) and therefore
all require the same torque.
• In all the frame sizes (S00 to S3), the terminal screws are identical for the
auxiliary conductor terminals (no bit change and uniform torque).

Cage Clamp terminals In the variant with Cage Clamp terminals, the devices have the following
features:
• The contactors are recommended if strong shaking or vibrations can be
expected at the installation location.
• The terminals are also suitable for two-conductor connections
• All the terminals are accessible from the front and are easily visible.
• A maximum of two conductors with a cross-section of 0.25 mm2 up to a
maximum 2.5 mm2 can be used for each terminal point.

Cage Clamp terminals: The following illustration shows you how to use the Cage Clamp terminals:
Procedure
Insert the screwdriver straight
into the opening up until the
stop (1) to open the clamping
unit. Insert the conductor in
the oval terminal opening (2),
and remove the screwdriver
(3).
2
1.5 to 2.5 mm²
1
3
Figure 3-70: Cage Clamp terminals

Insulation stop With a conductor cross-section of ≤ 1 mm2, an insulation stop

(3RT1916-4JA02) must be used to hold the conductor insulation securely. An
insulation stop line consists of 5 pairs of connection terminals. The following
illustration demonstrates insertion into the Cage Clamp infeeds.

3RT1916-4JA02

≤ 1 mm²
Figure 3-71: Insulation stop with Cage Clamp terminals

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-89
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Two-conductor connec- It is possible with all the main, auxiliary, and control cable connections to
tion connect two conductor ends. They can also be used to connect untreated
conductors with different cross-sections. Box terminals each with 2 terminal
points are provided for the main conductor connection in contactors of
frame sizes S2 and S3.
This connection method also promises problem-free looping and parallel
connection without intermediate terminals.

Conductor cross-sec- Permissible conductor cross-sections for main and auxiliary connections:
tions S00
Main and auxiliary conductors
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Cage Clamp
∅ 5 to 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10
---- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²)

AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14)

S0
Control conductor: A1/A2 Main conductor
Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC
Screw-type termi- Cage Clamp termi- L1 L2 L3
nal nal T1 T2 T3
0.8 to 1.2 Nm 2 to 2.5 Nm
----
∅ 5 to 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 18 to 22 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²)
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²)
10
---- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²) ----

AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10)

S2
Control conductor: A1/A2 Main conductor
Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC
Screw-type termi- Cage Clamp termi- L1 L2 L3
nal nal T1 T2 T3

0.8 to 1.2 Nm 3 to 4.5 Nm

---- ∅ 5 to 6 mm /
∅ 5 to 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 27 to 40 lb.in
PZ2
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 13
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 1 x (0.75 to 25 mm²)
10 13 2 x (0.75 to 25 mm²)
---- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²)
1 x (0.75 to 35 mm²)
2 x (18 to 3)
AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) AWG
1 x (18 to 2)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-90 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

S3
Control conductor: A1/A2 Main conductor
Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC
Screw-type termi- Cage Clamp termi- L1 L2 L3
nal nal T1 T2 T3
0.8 to 1.2 Nm min
22 4 to 6 Nm
---- 4
∅ 5 to 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 35 to 53 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 17
2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 17 2 x (2.5 to 35 mm²)
2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 1 x (2.5 to 50 mm²)
10 17 2 x (10 to 50 mm²)
---- ----
1 x (10 to 70 mm²)
2 x (10 to 1/0)
AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) AWG
1 x (10 to 2/0)
Table 3-36: Conductor cross-sections (frame sizes S00 to S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-91
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.5.3 Changing the magnet coils

3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

4 coil terminals Contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 have 4 coil terminals.

The advantages of this are as follows:
• Variable connection, depending on the amount of space and cable routing
• Easier wiring of feeders
The connection options are:
• From above with in fuseless configuration with circuit breakers
connected above
• From below when fuses are used with an overload relay attached directly
below
• Diagonal

Changing the magnet The magnet coils can be replaced in the case of contactors of frame sizes
coils S0 to S3.

S0 - AC operation The following illustration shows the replacement of the magnet coil in frame
size S0 in AC operation:

1 Use screwdrivers to lever up

the release clips between the
rear and front contactor halves
and remove the front part of
the contactor.
1 2

Remove the magnet coil from

the rear half of the contactor.

Push in the new magnet coil,

and put the front section of the
5
contactor back on again.
4 Important:
Make sure that the springs
between the magnet coil and
the front contactor half sit
straight on the mounting (4a).

4a
Figure 3-72: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S0/AC)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-92 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

S2 - AC operation

Loosen the 2 screws between

the rear and front contactor
2 halves, and remove the mag-
net coil from the rear part of
1 the contactor.

3
1

Insert the new magnet coil.

Replace the front half of the

contactor, and tighten the 2
5 screws again.

Figure 3-73: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S2/AC)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-93
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

S2 - DC operation

Loosen the 2 screws between

the rear and front contactor
2 halves. Loosen the two screws
on the plates that attach the
magnet coil to the armature,
1 and remove the magnet coil
from the rear half of the con-
tactor.
3 1

Insert the new magnet coil,

and screw on the two plates
again with the two screws.

Replace the front half of the

contactor, and tighten the 2
5 screws again.
Make sure the springs are in
their correct position.
6

6
Figure 3-74: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S2/DC)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-94 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

S3 - AC operation

Loosen the 2 screws between

2 the rear and front contactor
halves, and remove the mag-
net coil from the rear part of
the contactor.
1

3
1

Insert the new magnet coil.

Replace the front half of the

contactor, and tighten the 2
5 screws again.

Figure 3-75: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S3/AC)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-95
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

S3 - DC operation

Loosen the 2 screws

2 between the rear and front
contactor halves. Loosen
the two screws on the
plates that attach the mag-
1
net coil on the armature,
and remove the magnet coil
from the rear half of the
4 contactor.
1

Insert the new magnet coil,

and screw on the two plates
again with the two screws.

6
3
Replace the front half of the
contactor, and tighten the 2
7
screws again.
Make sure the springs are in
8 their correct position.

Figure 3-76: Replacing the magnet coil (frame size S3/DC)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-96 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.5.4 Changing the contact piece

The contact pieces can be replaced in contactors of frame sizes S2 to S3.

When they are replaced for the third time, the arcing chamber also has to be
replaced.

Frame size S2
Remove the left identification
label, loosen the 2 screws on
the frontplate of the contactor,
and remove the top section of
3
the contactor (1, 2, 3).
Remove the movable contact
2 piece by gently tipping it
upward and then pulling it out
(4, 5). Loosen the screws that
2 attach the two immovable con-
1
tact pieces (6).

4 6

Remove the old contact pieces

(7), and screw on the new con-
8 tact pieces (8). Push in a new
movable contact piece (9).

9
Replace the top section of the
contactor, and tighten the 2
screws on the frontplate.
Replace the identification label.
10

11

11
12
Figure 3-77: Replacing the contact piece (frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-97
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Frame size S3
Loosen the 2 screws on the
frontplate of the contactor, and
remove the top section of the
2 contactor (1, 2).
Remove the movable contact
piece by gently tipping it
1 upward and then pulling it out
(3, 4). Loosen the screws that
attach the two immovable con-
tact pieces (5).
1

3 5

Remove the old contact pieces

(6), and screw on the new con-
tact pieces (7). Push in a new
7
movable contact piece (8).

Replace the top section of the

contactor, and tighten the 2
screws on the frontplate.
9

10

10

Figure 3-78: Replacing the contact piece (frame size S3)

Contact pieces The following contact pieces can be used for frame sizes S2 and S3 for the
different performance classes:
S2 S3
3RT1034 3RT1035 3RT1036 3RT1044 3RT1045 3RT1046 3RT1446
15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 140 A (AC-1)

34 35 36

Figure 3-79: Contact pieces (frame sizes S2/S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-98 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.6 Dimensioned drawings

3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors
(dimensions in mm)

3RT1. / 3RH11 contactors, 3-pole

106
45 99
5.3
5,3 8.6
8,6 5 67

5
3)

50
57,5
57.5

4)
51

118

2) 35
NSB00752a

15.5
15,5 67 5

Figure 3-80: 3RT1. 10 1/3RH11 contactors (frame size S00)

Screw-type terminal with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block, and attached overload relay
Different dimensions for contactors with Cage Clamp terminals: height 60 mm, mounting depth with auxiliary switch block 110 mm
2) Auxiliary switch block (also electronically optimized variant 3RH19 11-11N...)
3) Surge suppressor (also additional load module 3RT19 16-1GA00)
4) Drilling pattern
Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm

10 135
1) 10 45 b) 86
5 3)
35
a

5
85
80

4)
60

2)
143
63

NSB00753c

15.5
15,5 86 5

Figure 3-81: 3RT10 2 contactors, 3RT10 2 contactor relays (frame size S0)
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block, and attached overload relay
a = 3 mm at < 240 V
a = 7 mm at > 240 V
b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
1) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the side
2) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the front, 1-, 2-, and 4-pole (also electronically optimized variant 3RH1921-.FE22)
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-99
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

15 159
55 10 110
a

b) 5 3)
45
1)
5

112
4)

80

95
2)
171
75

NSB00754b

20.5
20,5 107 5

Figure 3-82: 3RT10 3 (frame size S2)

with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block, and attached overload relay

a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode combination

a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element
b = DC 15 mm deeper than AC

1) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the side

2) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the front (1-, 2-, and 4-pole)
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm

13 183
70 10 10 134
a

b) 5 3)
60

1)
5

4)
130
146
80

2)
221

5)
100

NSB00755b

6)

28 7 132 5
Figure 3-83: 3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 (frame size S3)
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block, and attached overload relay
a = 0 mm with varistor, diode combination and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element
b = DC 13 mm deeper than AC

1) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the side

2) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the front (1-, 2-, and 4-pole)
3) Surge supressor
4) Drilling pattern
5) Attachment to 35 mm rails with 15 mm depth in acc. with EN 50 022 or 75 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 023
6) 4 mm Allen screw
Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

3-100 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 contactor relays

3)

5
57,5
57.5

50
4)
NSB00258a

5.3
5,3 8.6
8,6 5 67 35
45 99

Figure 3-84: 3RT10 1 (frame size S00)

with surge supressor
Different dimensions for contactor relays with Cage Clamp terminal: height 60 mm
3) Surge supressor
4) Drilling pattern
3RT10 2. contactor relay, see Figure 3-80

3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors, 4-pole

45 106
8.6
8,6 99
5,3
5.3 5 67
2)
5
57.5

50
57,5

3)

NSB00757a 1) 35

Figure 3-85: 3RT13 1, 3RT15 1 (frame size S00)

Screw-type terminal with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block
Different dimensions for contactors with Cage Clamp terminals: height 60 mm, mounting depth with auxiliary switch block 110 mm
2) Auxiliary switch block (also electronically optimized variant 3RH19 11-1N...)
3) Surge supressor (also additional load module 3RT19 16-1GA00)
4) Drilling pattern
Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm

b)
135
10 61 10 5 86
a

35

2)
60
80

85

4)

NSB 00758e

Figure 3-86: 3RT13 2, 3RT15 2 (frame size S0)

with surge supressor and auxiliary switch block
a = 3 mm at < 250 V and attachment of surge suppressor
a = 7 mm at > 250 V and attachment of surge supressor
b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
1) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the side (left)
2) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the front, (max. two 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks)
3) Surge supressor
4) Drilling pattern

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-101
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

NSB00759c

Figure 3-87: 3RT133, 3RT153 (frame size S2)

with surge supressor and auxiliary switch block

a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V

a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element and diode combination
b = DC 15 mm deeper than AC

1) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the side (right or left)

2) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the front, (1-, 2-, and 4-pole, also electronically optimized variant 3RH19 21-1FE22)
3) Surge supressor
4) Drilling pattern
5) Attachment on 35 mm rails (15 mm deep) in acc. with EN 50 022 or 75 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 023
6) 4 mm Allen screw
Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm

b)
183
10 93 13 5 134
3)
a

60

1) 5

SIEMENS

4)
130
80

146

2)
5)

6)
NSB 00760b

Figure 3-88: 3RT13 4 (frame size S3)

with surge supressor and auxiliary switch block

a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V

a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element and diode combination
b = DC 13 mm deeper than AC

1) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the side (right or left)

2) Auxiliary switch block, attachable at the front, (1-, 2-, and 4-pole, also electronically optimized variant 3RH1921-1FE22)
3) Surge supressor
4) Drilling pattern
5) Attachment on 35 mm rails (15 mm deep) in acc. with EN 50 022 or 75 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 023
6) 4 mm Allen screw
Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

3-102 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors

121
67
44
100

72
60
85
48
18

ø5

5
45 NSB00761b 130

Figure 3-89: 3RT1626 (frame size S0)

145
94
68
42
45x75
130
38
64
18
NSB00762a

55 5
8
159
Figure 3-90: 3RT1636 (frame size S2)

116
90
22,5 22,5 51
60x130
104
124
150

167
18
38

NSB00763a

70 5
7
8
183

Figure 3-91: 3RT1646 (frame size S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-103
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Contactors with an extended operating range (3RT1/3RH11)

45 5 118

50
60
28

NSB00764a
35
Figure 3-92: 3RT10 17, 3RH 11 (frame size S00)

70
45 5 148
35 x 60
86
47

NSB00765a

Figure 3-93: 3RT10 2, view from right (frame size S0)

80
55 5 162
45 x 95
110
47

NSB00766a

Figure 3-94: 3RT103, view from right (frame size S2)

95
70 5 186
60 x 130
145
47

NSB00767a

Figure 3-95: 3RT104, view from right (frame size S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-104 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT19 time-delay auxiliary switch block

46

46
25
38

NSB00772
NSB00254
5 9 127
45 143 5 73
33

Figure 3-96: 3RT1916-2E.., -2F.., -2G.. (frame size S00) 3RT19 26-2E.., -2F.., -2G.. (frame sizes S0 to S3)

3RT19 time-delay time relay blocks, on-delay

45 41
6 4 50

66
38

40
NSB00256

45 92
105
NSB00773

Figure 3-97: 3RT19 16-2 (frame size S00) 3RT19 26-2 (frame sizes S0 to S3)
For attachment to the front of the contactor Attachable on the top of the contactor
(dimensions also apply to off-delay time relay blocks) (dimensions also apply to off-delay time relay blocks and
to coupling links (3RH19 24-1GP11))

3RH19 11 auxiliary switch block, 1-pole

13.6
13,6
27,5
27.5

NSB00255

24 27

Figure 3-98: 3RH19 11-1AA.., 3RH19 11-1BA..

Infeed from one side

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-105
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT1916 soldering pin connection

45 55

67.5

11.6

5
5
∅ 1.4
A1
50
5.2 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 5.2 57.5
67 50 57.5 71.5

71.5
18 x ∅ 2.0 A2
45

8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6

15.9
45

110

5
∅ 1.4
50
67

38.5 33.5
90

45 45

67.5
A1 A1

50 57.5

5
5 20 x ∅ 2.0 A2 20 x ∅ 2.0 A2
∅ 1.4

50
5.2 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 10.4 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 5.2 57.5 5.2 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 10.4 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 5.2

SIRIUS System Manual

3-106 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RA13 contactor combinations for reversing

NSB00774

5
67
50

5 8.6
8,6 35 7.5
7,5
90 5 51
67

Figure 3-99: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S00)

5

NSB00776
60
86

29
36
NSB00775

8 14 10 28 7.5
7,5
40 5 39
100 61 45 16
86 90 44
DC 95

Figure 3-100: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0)

with mechanical interlock at the side (3RA19 24-2B) with mechanical interlock at the front (3RA19 24-1A)
5

NSB00777
120
95
13

10
10 17.5
17,5 50 8
120 5 36
52
110
DC 125

Figure 3-101: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S2)

NSB00778
5
157
130
12

10
12 22 65 8
150 5 46
85
134
DC147

Figure 3-102: Contactor combination for reversing (frame size S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-107
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Locking device for 3RA reversing switch

2.5
111
NC

112 34 29 36
25 55 80.5
121

122
45 16
48.5 44
10
Figure 3-103: 3RA1924-2B (frame sizes S0 to S3) 3RA1924-1A (frame sizes S0 to S3)

3RA14 contactor combinations for star-delta starting

71

K4
K3 K2

NSB00779

135 5 67
143
(AC+DC)

Figure 3-104: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S00 - S00 - S00)
88

K1 K3 K2
K4

158 5 130 (AC)

NSB00780
140 (DC)

Figure 3-105: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S0 - S0 - S0)

140
125

K2
K1 K3 K4

7 10
150 169 (AC)
178 184 (DC)
NSB00781

Figure 3-106: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S2 - S2 - S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

3-108 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

125
140
K1 K3 K2 K4

7 10
150 169 (AC)
198 184 (DC)
NSB00782

Figure 3-107: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S2 - S2 - S2)

165
180

K1 K3 K2 K4

7
10
150 194 (AC)
218 207 (DC)
NSB00783

Figure 3-108: Contactor combinations for star/delta (frame sizes S3 - S3 - S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-109
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3.7 Technical specifications

3 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 contactors for switching motors

s and u rating data of the contactors

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S00 S0 S0 S0
Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17 3RT10 23/24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26
Rated insulation voltage VAC 600 600 600 600 600 600
Continuous current at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 20 20 20 35 35 35
Maximum horsepower ratings
(s and u approved values)
Rated power At 200 V hp 1½ 2 3 2/3 5 7½
of three-phase induction motors 230 V hp 2 3 3 3/3 5 7½
At 50/60 Hz 460 V hp 3 5 7½ 5/7½ 10 15
575 V hp 5 7½ 10 7½/10 15 20
Short-circuit protection kA 5 5 5 5 5 5
(contactor or overload relay) Fuse or circuit breaker to A 60 60 60 70 70 100
UL 489 A 50 50 50 70 70 100
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC SIZE – – 0 – – 1
Continuous current Open A – – 18 – – 27
Enclosed A – – 18 – – 27
Rated power At 200 V hp – – 3 – – 7½
of three-phase induction motors 230 V hp – – 3 – – 7½
At 60 Hz 460 V hp – – 5 – – 10
575 V hp – – 5 – – 10
Overload relay Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 2
Adjustment range A 0.11 to 12 1.8 to 25

Contactor Frame size S2 S2 S2 S3 S3 S3

Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Rated insulation voltage VAC 600 600 600 600 600 600
Continuous current at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 45 55 50 90 105 105
Maximum horsepower ratings
(s and u approved values)
Rated power At 200V hp 10 10 15 20 25 30
of three-phase induction motors 230 V hp 10 15 15 25 30 30
At 50/60 Hz 460V hp 25 30 40 50 60 75
575V hp 30 40 50 60 75 100
Short-circuit protection kA 5 5 5 10 10 10
(contactor or overload relay) Fuse or circuit breaker A 125 150 200 250 300 350
to UL 489 A 125 150 200 250 300 400
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC SIZE – – 2 – – 3
Continuous current Open A – – 45 – – 90
Enclosed A – – 45 – – 90
Rated power At 200V hp – – 10 – – 25
of three-phase induction motors 230 V hp – – 15 – – 30
At 60 Hz 460 V hp – – 25 – – 50
575 V hp – – 25 – – 50
Overload relay Type 3RU11 3 3RU11 4
Adjustment range A 5.5 to 50 18 to 100

s and urating data of the auxiliary contacts

Contactor Frame size S00 S0 to S12
Screw-type termi- Screw-type termi- Screw-type termi- Screw-type termi-
nal and Cage nal and Cage nal and Cage nal and Cage
Clamp terminal Clamp terminal Clamp terminal Clamp terminal
Integrated or snap- 4-pole snap-on aux. 1-pole snap-on Laterally attachable
on aux. switch block switch block aux.switch block aux. switch block
Rated voltage VAC 600 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300
Continuous current at 240 VAC
A 10 10 10 10

SIRIUS System Manual

3-110 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT1 contactors for switching motors

Auxiliary circuit

Rating of the auxiliary contacts in acc. with IEC 60 947-5-1/DIN EN 60 947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
Data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary switch blocks for contactors in frame sizes S00 to S12
Contactor Frame sizes S00 to S12
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
With laterally attachable auxiliary switch blocks
3RH19 21-.EA . . and 3RH19 21-.KA . . V Max. 500
Conventional free air thermal current Ith =
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 A 10
AC loading
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
With rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
110 V A 6
125 V A 6
220 V A 6
230 V A 6
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V2) A 1
690 V2) A 1
DC loading
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
With rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 10
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V2) A 0.3
600 V2) A 0.15
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13
At rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 0.9
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V2) A 0.1
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Contact fault frequency < 10–8
in acc. with DIN EN 60 947-5-4 i. e. < 1 fault in 100 mill. operating cycles

1) DC-13: attachable auxiliary switch blocks for frame size S00: 6 A

2) With laterally attachable auxiliary switch blocks: switching capacity only up to 500 V

Contactor Frame size S00

Type 3RT1. 1.
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6
Protective separation between the coil and main contacts V 400
(in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [Draft 2/89])
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60
During storage °C –55 to +80
Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 20, actuating system IP 40
Shock resistance Rectangular impulse AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10

Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relay, see Part 4.
Short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders, see Part 5.
Main circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG
NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
– In acc. with IEC 60 947-4/DIN EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Coordination type "1" 1) A 35
Part 102)
1
Coordination type "2" ) A 20
Unwelded 2) A 10
Or miniature circuit breaker (up to 230 V) with C characteristic A 10

(Short-circuit current 1 kA, coordination type 1)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-111
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT1 contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S00
Type 3 RT1.1.
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG A 10
DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE (unwelded fuse at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
Or miniature circuit breaker (up to 230 V) with C characteristic A 6
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):
Coordination type "1": Coordination type "2"
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The overload relay must not be damaged.
The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily
separated again from the contactor.
2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1

Contactor Frame size S00

Type 3 RT1.1.
Drive
Operating range of the magnet coils AC At 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
At 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
DC At +50 °C: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
At +60 °C: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
Power input of the magnet coils (cold coil and at 1.0 x Us) Standard version For USA and Canada
AC operation Hz 50/60 50 60
Making capacity VA 27/24.3 26.4 31.7
cos ϕ 0.8/0.75 0.81 0.77
Holding power VA 4.4/3.4 4.7 5.1
cos ϕ 0.27/0.27 0.26 0.27
DC operation Making capacity = holding power W 3.3

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S00

Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive
loads
Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20
Rated power At 230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5
of three-phase loads3) 400 V kW 11 13 13
cos ϕ = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 13.8 17 17
690 V kW 19 22 22
Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie At 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
60 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5

3) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account).

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S00

Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie To 400 V A 7 9 12
500 V A 5 6.5 9
690 V A 4 5.2 6.3
Rated power of motors
with slipring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
230 V kW 2.2 3 3
400 V kW 3 4 5.5
500 V W 3.5 4.5 5.5
690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5
Thermal stress 10-s current1) A 56 72 96
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24

SIRIUS System Manual

3-112 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT1.1 contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S00
Type 3RT1. 15 3RT1. 16 3RT1. 17
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization category AC-4
(contact service life of approximately 200,000 operating cycles at
Ia = 6 x Ie)
Rated operational currentsIe Up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1
690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3
Rated power of motors At 127 V kW 0.3 0.5 0.5
with squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 200 V kW 0.6 1.1 1.1
220 V kW 0.6 1.1 1.1
230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1
240 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1
380 V kW 1.15 2 2
400 V kW 1.15 2 2
415 V kW 1.15 2 2
440 V kW 1.15 2 2
460 V kW 1.15 2 2
500 V kW 1.45 2 2
575 V kW 1.45 2 2
660 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5
690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5
1) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102. Rated values for different startup conditions, see Part 4.

Current carrying capacity with direct current

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S00
Type 3RT1. 15 3RT1. 16 3RT1. 17
Utilization category DC-1,
switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Up to 24 V A 15 15 15 20 20 20 20 20 20
60 V A 15 15 15 20 20 20 20 20 20
110 V A 1.5 8.4 15 2.1 12 20 2.1 12 20
220 V A 0.6 1.2 15 0.8 1.6 20 0.8 1.6 20
440 V A 0.42 1.6 0.9 0.6 0.8 1.3 0.6 0.8 1.3
600 V A 0.42 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.7 1 0.6 0.7 1
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5,
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Up to 24 V A 15 15 15 20 20 20 20 20 20
60 V A 0.35 3.5 15 0.5 5 20 0.5 5 20
110 V A 0.1 0.25 15 0.15 0.35 20 0.15 0.35 20
220 V A – – 1.2 – – 1.5 – – 1.5
440 V A – – 0.14 – – 0.2 – – 0.2
600 V A – – 0.14 – – 0.2 – – 0.2
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour AC/DC operation
Contactors without overload relay No-load operation fre- 1/h 10,000
quency
Dependency of switching frequency z’ Rated operation
on operating current I’ and operating voltage U’:
In acc. with AC-1 1/h 1,000
In acc. with AC-2 1/h 750
z’ = z ⋅ ----- ⋅ -------------  1/h
I e 400 V 1.5
I′  U′  In acc. with AC-3 1/h 750
In acc. with AC-4 1/h 250
Contactors with overload relay (average value) 1/h 15

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-113
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 2. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S0

Type 3RT10 2.
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Protective separation between the coil and main contacts V 400
(in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [Draft 2/89])
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60
During storage °C –55 to +80
Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 20, actuating system IP 20
Shock resistance Rectangular impulse AC operation g/ms 8.2/5 and 4.9/10
DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10
Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10
DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10

Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relay, see Chapter 4.
Short-circuit protection for unwelded contactors, see Chapter 5
(overload and short-circuit protection only with the 3RV10 circuit breaker).
Short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders, see Chapter 5.
Contactor Frame size S0 S0 S0
Type 3RT10 23, 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26
Main circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG
NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
With fuse-links
– In acc. with IEC 60 947-4/DIN EN 60 947-4 Coord. type "1" 1) A 63 63 100
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Coord. type "2" 1) A 25 25 35
Unwelded2) A 10 10 16
Or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 25 25 32
(Short-circuit current 3 kA, coordination type 1) 1)

Auxiliary circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG A 10 10 10
DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
(unwelded fuse at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
Or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) A 10 10 10
1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):
Coordination type "1":
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary.
Coordination type "2":
The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily
separated again from the contactor.
2)Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1.
Unwelded 3RT11 contactors, see Chapter 5 (overload and short-circuit protection only with the 3RV10 circuit breaker).

Contactor Frame size S0

Type 3RT10 2.
Drive
Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
Power input of the magnet coils (cold coil and at 1.0 x Us) Standard version For USA and Canada
AC operation Hz 50 50/60 50 60
Making capacity VA 61 64 /63 61 69
cos ϕ 0.82 0.72/ 0.74 0.82 0.76
Holding power VA 7.8 8.4 / 6.8 7.8 7.5
cos ϕ 0.24 0.24/ 0.28 0.24 0.28
DC operation making capacity = holding power W 5.4

SIRIUS System Manual

3-114 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT102. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S0 S0 S0

Type 3RT10 23, 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 40 40 40
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 35 35 35
Rated power At 230 V kW 13.3 13.3 13.3
400 V kW 23 23 23
of three-phase loads2) 500 V kW 29 29 29
cos ϕ = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 690 V kW 40 40 40
Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie At 40 °C mm2 10 10 10
60 °C mm2 10 10 10
2) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account).

Contactor Frame size S0 S0 S0 S0

Type 3RT10 23 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25
500 V A 6.5 12 17 18
690 V A 5.2 9 13 13
Rated power of motors At 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
with slipring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 120 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
127 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
200 V kW 2.2 3 4 5.5
220 V kW 3 3 4 5.5
230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5
240 V kW 3 3 4 5.5
380 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
415 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
440 V kW 4 5.5 9 11
460 V kW 4 5.5 9 11
500 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11
575 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11
660 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11
690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11
Thermal stress 10-s current1) A 80 110 150 200
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6
Utilization category AC-4
(contact service life of approximately 200,000 operating cycles at
Ia = 6 x Ie)
Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9
690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9
Rated power of motors At 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2
with squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 120 V kW 0.5 0.8 1.1 1.3
127 V kW 0.5 0.85 1.15 1.4
200 V kW 1.1 1.3 1.8 2.2
220 V kW 1.1 1.4 2 2.4
230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5
240 V kW 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.6
380 V kW 2 2.5 3.5 4.2
400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4
415 V kW 2 2.7 3.5 4.6
440 V kW 2 2.9 4 4.9
460 V kW 2 3 4.2 5.1
500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6
575 V kW 2 3.8 5.2 6.4
660 V kW 2.5 4.4 6 7.4
690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7

1) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102, rated value for different startup conditions, see Chapter 4.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-115
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 2. contactors for switching motors

Current carrying capacity with direct current

Contactor Frame size S0 S0 S0
Type 3RT10 23, 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26
Utilization category DC-1,
switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
up to 24 V A 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
60 V A 20 35 35 20 35 35 20 35 35
110 V A 4.5 35 35 4.5 35 35 4.5 35 35
220 V A 1 5 35 1 5 35 1 5 35
440 V A 0.4 1 2.9 0.4 1 2.9 0.4 1 2.9
600 V A 0.25 0.8 1.4 0.25 0.8 1.4 0.25 0.8 1.4
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5,
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Up to 24 V A 20 35 35 20 35 35 20 35 35
60 V A 5 35 35 5 35 35 5 35 35
110 V A 2.5 15 35 2.5 15 35 2.5 15 35
220 V A 1 3 10 1 3 10 1 3 10
440 V A 0.09 0.27 0.6 0.09 0.27 0.6 0.09 0.27 0.6
600 V A 0.06 0.16 0.6 0.06 0.16 0.6 0.06 0.16 0.6
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour AC DC AC DC AC DC
Contactors without overload relay No-load operation fre- 1/h 5000 1500 5000 1500 5000 1500
quency
Dependency of switching frequency z’ AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC
on operating current and operating voltage U’:
With AC-1 1/h 1000 1000 1000
With AC-2 1/h 1000 1000 750
z’ = z ⋅ ----- ⋅ -------------  1/h
I e 400 V 1.5 With AC-3 1/h 1000 1000 750
I′  U′  With AC-4 1/h 300 300 250

Contactors with overload relay (average value) 1/h 15 15 15

3RT10 3. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S2

Type 3RT10 3.
Mechanical life Basic units Opera- 10 mill.
Basic unit with attached auxiliary switch block ting cyc- 10 mill.
Electronically optimized auxiliary switch block les
5 mill.
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Protective separation between the coil and main contacts V 400
(in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [Draft 2/89])
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60
During storage °C –55 to +80
Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 20 (terminal housing IP 00), actuating system IP 40
Shock resistance Rectangular impulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10

Contactor Frame size S2 S2 S2

Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relay, see Chapter 4.
Short-circuit protection for unwelded contactors, see Chapter 5
(overload and short-circuit protection only with circuit breaker 3RV10).
Short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders, see Chapter 5.
Main circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG
NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
– In acc. with IEC 60 947-4/DIN EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Coordin. type "1" 1) A 125 125 160
Part 102)
Coordin. type "2" 1) A 63 63 80
Unwelded 2) A 16 16 50

SIRIUS System Manual

3-116 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 3. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S2 S2 S2
Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse applications, performance class gL/gG A 10 10 10
DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
(unwelded fuse at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
Or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10 10 10
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):
Coordination type "1":
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary.
Coordination type "2":
The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily
separated again from the contactor.
2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1.
Unwelded 3RT11 contactors, see Chapter 5 (overload and short-circuit protection only with the 3RV10 circuit breaker).

Contactor Frame size S2 S2 S2

Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
Drive

Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us

Power input of the magnet coils (cold coil and at 1.0 x Us) Standard version
AC operation Hz 50 50/60 50 50/60
Making capacity VA 104 127 /113 145 170 /155
cos ϕ 0.78 0.73/ 0.69 0.79 0.76/ 0.72
Holding power VA 9.7 11.3 / 9.5 12.5 15 / 11.8
cos ϕ 0.42 0.41/ 0.42 0.36 0.35/ 0.38
For USA and Canada
Hz 50 60 50 60 50 60
Making capacity VA 90 118 160 127 160 127
cos ϕ 0.76 0.8 0.82 0.85 0.82 0.85
Holding power VA 11 12 13.5 14.2 13.5 14.2
cos ϕ 0.38 0.41 0.34 0.37 0.34 0.37
DC operation making capacity = holding power W 13.3 13.3 13.3
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive
loads
Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 50 60 55
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 45 55 50
Rated power At 230 V kW 18 22 20
400 V kW 31 38 35
of three-phase loads2)
500 V kW 39 46 43
cos ϕ = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 690 V kW 54 66 60
Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie At 40 °C mm2 16 16 16
60 °C mm2 10 16 10

2) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-117
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT103. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S2 S2 S2
Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 32 40 50
500 V A 32 40 50
690 V A 20 24 24
Rated power of motors at 127 V kW 4 5.5 7.5
with slipring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 200 V kW 7.5 7.5 11
220 V kW 7.5 11 11
230 V kW 7.5 11 15
240 V kW 7.5 11 15
380 V kW 15 18.5 22
400 V kW 15 18.5 22
415 V kW 15 18.5 22
440 V kW 18.5 18.5 22
460 V kW 18.5 22 30
500 V kW 18.5 22 30
575 V kW 18.5 22 22
660 V kW 18.5 22 22
690 V kW 18.5 22 22
Thermal stress 10-s current1) A 320 400 400
Power loss per conducting path With Ie/AC-3 W 1.8 2.6 5
Utilization category AC-4
(contact service life of approximately 200,000 operating cycles at
Ia = 6 x Ie)
Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 15.6 18.5 24
690 V A 15.6 18.5 24
Rated power of motors At 127 V kW 2.6 3 3
200 V kW 4.1 4.7 4.7
with squirrel cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
220 V kW 4.5 5.2 5.2
230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3
240 V kW 4.9 5.7 5.7
380 V kW 7.8 9 9
400 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
415 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
440 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
460 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
500 V kW 9.8 11.8 15.8
575 V kW 8.3 11.8 15.8
660 V kW 9.6 13.5 18
690 V kW 13 15.5 21.8
1) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102. Rated values for different startup conditions, see Part 4.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-118 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Current carrying capacity with direct current

Contactor Frame size S2 S2 S2
Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
Utilization category DC-1,
switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Up to 24 V A 45 45 45 55 55 55 50 50 50
60 V A 20 45 45 23 45 45 23 45 45
110 V A 4.5 45 45 4.5 45 45 4.5 45 45
220 V A 1 5 45 1 5 45 1 5 45
440 V A 0.4 1 2.9 0.4 1 2.9 0.4 1 2.9
600 V A 0.25 0.8 1.4 0.25 0.8 1.4 0.25 0.8 1.4
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5,
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Up to 24 V A 35 45 45 35 55 55 35 50 50
60 V A 6 45 45 6 45 55 6 45 50
110 V A 2.5 25 45 2.5 25 55 2.5 25 50
220 V A 1 5 25 1 5 25 1 5 25
440 V A 0.1 0.27 0.6 0.1 0.27 0.6 0.1 0.27 0.6
600 V A 0.06 0.16 0.35 0.06 0.16 0.35 0.06 0.16 0.35
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour AC DC AC DC AC DC
Contactors without overload relay No-load operation fre- 1/h 5000 1500 5000 1500 5000 1500
quency
Dependency of switching frequency z’ AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC
on operating current I’ and operating voltage U’: With AC-1 1/h 1200 1200 1000
With AC-2 1/h 750 600 400
z’ = z ⋅ ----- ⋅ -------------  1/h
I e 400 V 1.5
With AC-3 1/h 1000 1000 800
I′  U′ 
With AC-4 1/h 250 300 300
Contactors with overload relay (average value) 1/h 15 15 15

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-119
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 4. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S3

Type 3RT10 4.
Mechanical Basic units Opera- 10 mill.
life Basic unit with attached auxiliary switch block ting 10 mill.
Electronically optimized auxiliary switch block cycles 5 mill.
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 1000
Protective separation between the coil and main contacts V 690
(in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [Draft 2/89])
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60
During storage °C –55 to +80
Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 20 (terminal housing IP 00), actuating system IP 40
Shock resistance Rectangular impulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10

Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relay, see Part 4.
Short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders, see Chapter 5.
Contactor Frame size S3 S3 S3
Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Main circuit
Fuse applications, performance class gL/gG
NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
– In acc. with IEC 60 947-4/DIN EN 60 947-4 Coordin. type "1" 1) A 250 250 250
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Coordin. type "2" 1) A 125 160 160
Unwelded 2) A 63 100 100
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse applications, performance class gL/gG A 10 10 10
(unwelded fuse at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
Or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) A 10 10 10

1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):

Coordination type "1":
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary.
Coordination type "2":
The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily
separated again from the contactor.
2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1

Contactor Frame size S3 S3 S3

Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46

Drive

Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us

Power input of the magnet coils (cold coil and at 1.0 x Us) Standard version
AC operation Hz 50 50/60 50 50/60 50 50/60
Making capacity VA 218 247 /211 270 298 /274 270 298 /274
cos ϕ 0.61 0.62/ 0.57 0.68 0.7 / 0.62 0.68 0.7 / 0.62
Holding power VA 21 25 / 18 22 27 / 20 22 27 / 20
cos ϕ 0.26 0.27/ 0.3 0.27 0.29/ 0.31 0.27 0.29/ 0.31
For USA and Canada
Hz 50 60 50 60 50 60
Making capacity VA 218 232 270 300 270 300
cos ϕ 0.61 0.55 0.68 0.52 0.68 0.52
Holding power VA 21 20 22 21 22 21
cos ϕ 0.26 0.28 0.27 0.29 0.27 0.29
DC operation making capacity = holding power W 15 15 15

SIRIUS System Manual

3-120 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 4. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S3 S3 S3

Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive
loads
Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 100 120 120
1000 V A 50 60 70
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 90 100 100
1000 V A 40 50 60
Rated power At 230 V kW 34 38 38
400 V kW 59 66 66
of three-phase loads2) 500 V kW 74 82 82
cos ϕ = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 690 V kW 102 114 114
1000 V kW 66 82 98
Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie At 40 °C mm2 35 50 50
60 °C mm2 35 35 35

Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3

Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 65 80 95
500 V A 65 80 95
690 V A 47 58 58
1000 V A 25 30 30
Rated power of motors at 230 V kW 18.5 22 22
with slipring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 30 37 45
500 V kW 37 45 55
690 V kW 55 55 55
1000 V kW 30 37 37
Thermal stress 10-s current1) A 600 760 760
Power loss per conducting path With Ie/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8

Contactor Frame size S3 S3 S3

Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Main circuit

Current carrying capacity with alternating current

Utilization category AC-4 at Ia = 6 x Ie
Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 55 66 80
Rated power of motors At 400V kW 30 37 45
with squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
The following applies for a contact service life of approximately
200,000 operating cycles:
Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 28 34 42
690 V A 28 34 42
1000 V A 20 23 23
Rated power of motors At 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12
with squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22
500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27
690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38
1000 V kW 22 30 30
1) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102, rated values for different startup conditions, see Chapter 4.
2) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-121
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT10 4. contactors for switching motors

Contactor Frame size S3 S3 S3

Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Current carrying capacity with direct current
Utilization category DC-1,
switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Up to 24 V A 90 90 90 100 100 100 100 100 100
60 V A 23 90 90 60 100 100 60 100 100
110 V A 4.5 90 90 9 100 100 9 100 100
220 V A 1 5 70 2 10 80 2 10 80
440 V A 0.4 1 2.9 0.6 1.8 1.8 0.6 1.8 4.5
600 V A 0.26 0.8 1.4 0.4 1 1 0.4 1 2.6
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5,
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Up to 24 V A 40 90 90 40 100 100 40 100 100
60 V A 6 90 90 6.5 100 100 6.5 100 100
110 V A 2.5 90 90 2.5 100 100 2.5 100 100
220 V A 1 7 35 1 7 35 1 7 35
440 V A 0.15 0.42 0.8 0.15 0.42 0.8 0.15 0.42 0.8
600 V A 0.06 0.16 0.35 0.06 0.16 0.35 0.06 0.16 0.35
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour AC DC AC DC AC DC
Contactors without overload relay No-load operation fre- 1/h 5000 1000 5000 1000 5000 1000
quency
Dependency of switching frequency z’ AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC
on operating current I’ and operating voltage U’:
With AC-1 1/h 1000 900 900
With AC-2 1/h 400 400 350
z’ = z ⋅ ----- ⋅ -------------  1/h
I e 400 V 1.5
I′  U′  With AC-3 1/h 1000 1000 850
With AC-4 1/h 300 300 250
Contactors with overload relay (average value) 1/h 15 15 15

3RT14 contactors, 3-pole

Contactor Frame size S3

Type 3RT14 46
Mechanical life Opera- 10 mill.
ting
cycles
Service life Opera- 0.5 mill.
Utilization category AC-1 atIe ting
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 1000
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6
Protective separation between the coil and main contacts V 690
(in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [Draft 2/89])
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60
During storage °C –55 to +80
Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 20 (terminal housing IP 00), actuating system IP 40
Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
Power input of the magnet coils (cold coil and at 1.0 x Us) Standard version For USA and Canada
AC operation Hz 50 50/60 50 60
Making capacity VA 270 298 /274 270 300
cos ϕ 0.68 0.7 / 0.62 0.68 0.52
Holding power VA 22 27 / 20 22 21
cos ϕ 0.27 0.29/ 0.31 0.27 0.29
DC operation making capacity = holding power W 15

Shock resistance
Rectangular impulse With AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse With AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10

SIRIUS System Manual

3-122 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT14 contactors, 3-pole

Contactor Frame size S3
Type 3RT14 46
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay
Main circuit
Fuse applications, performance class gL/gG NH Type 3NA
Coordination type "1" 2) A 250
Fuse-links, performance class gR SITOR Type 3NE
Coordination type "2" 2) A 250
Control circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG DIAZED Type 5SB A 10
(unwelded fuse at Ik ≥ 1 kA) NEOZED Type 5SE A 10
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
(Ik < 400 A)
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour AC operation DC operation
Contactors without overload relay No-load operation fre- 1/h 5000 1000
quency
Rated operation In acc. with AC-1 1/h 650 650
In acc. with AC-3 1/h 1000 1000
Dependency of switching frequency z’
on operating current I’ and operating voltage U’:

z’ = z ⋅ ----- ⋅ -------------- 
Ie 400 V 1.5
1/h
I ′  U′ 

2) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):

Coordination type "1":
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary.
Coordination type "2":
The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily
separated again from the contactor.

Contactor Frame size S3

Type 3RT14 46
Current carrying capacity with alternating current
Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive
loads
Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 140
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 130
At 1000 V A 60
Rated power At 230 V kW 50
of three-phase loads 400 V kW 86
cos ϕ = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 107
690 V kW 148
1000 V kW 98
Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie At 40 °C mm2 50
At 60 °C mm2 50

Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3

with an electrical service life of 1.3 mill. operating cycles
Rated operational current Ie Up to 690 V A 44
Rated power of motors At 230 V kW 12.7
with slipring or squirrel-cage rotor 400 V kW 22
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 29.9
690 V kW 38.2
Current carrying capacity with direct current
Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3
Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C) Up to 24 V A 130 130 130
60 V A 80 130 130
110 V A 12 130 130
220 V A 2.5 13 130
440 V A 0.8 2.4 6
600 V A 0.48 1.3 3.4

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-123
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT14 contactors, 3-pole

Contactor Frame size S3
Type 3RT14 46
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5, shunt and series motors
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3
Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C) Up to 24 V A 6 130 130
60 V A 3 130 130
110 V A 1.25 130 130
220 V A 0.35 1.75 4
440 V A 0.15 0.42 0.8
600 V A 0.1 0.27 0.45
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-1 W 12.5

3RT13 contactors, 4-pole (4 NO contacts), for switching resistive loads

Technical specifications
Contactor Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 S3
Type 3RT13 16/17 3RT13 25/26 3RT13 36 3RT13 44 3RT13 46
General specifications
Mechanical life Opera- 30 mill. 10 mill.
ting
cycles
Electrical service life with Ie/AC-1 Opera- Approx. 0.5
ting mill.
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60
During storage °C –55 to +80
Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and IP20 IP 20
DIN 40 050 Terminal housing IP 00
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay
Main circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG
NH type 3NA,
DIAZED type 5SB,
NEOZED type 5SE
– In acc. with IEC 60 947-4/
DIN EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Coord. type "1" 1) A 35 63 160 250 250
Coord. type "2" 1) A 20 25/35 63 125 160
Unwelded 2) A 10 16 50 63 100
Drive
Operating range of the magnet coils AC At 50 Hz: 0.8 - 1.1 x Us AC/DC: 0.8 - 1.1 x Us
At 60 Hz: 0.85 - 1.1 x Us
DC At +50 °C: 0.8 - 1.1 x Us
At +60 °C: 0.85 - 1.1 x Us
Power input of the magnet coils (cold coil and at 1.0 x Us)
AC operation Hz 50/60 50 50/60 50 50/60 50 50/60
Making capacity VA 26.5/24.3 61 64/ 145 170/ 270 298/
63 155 274
cos ϕ 0.79/0.75 0.82 0.82 0.79 0.76/ 0.68 0.72/
0.74 0.72 0.62
Holding power VA 4.4/3.4 7.8 8.4/ 12.5 15/ 22 27/
6.8 11.8 20
cos ϕ 0.27/0.27 0.24 0.24/ 0.36 0.35/ 0.27 0.29/
0.28 0.38 0.31
DC operation Making capacity = holding power W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15

1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):

Coordination type "1":
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary.
Coordination type "2":
The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor.
2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 90 947-4-1.

SIRIUS System Manual

3-124 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT13 contactors, 4-pole (4 NO contacts), for switching resistive loads

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S0 S0 S2 S3 S3
Type 3RT13 16 3RT13 17 3RT13 25 3RT13 26 3RT13 36 3RT13 44 3RT13 46
Main circuit
Current carrying capacity with alternating current
Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads
Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C) Up to A 18 22 35 40 60 110 140
690 V
(at 60 °C) Up to A 16 20 30 35 55 100 120
690 V
Rated power of three-phase loads At 230 V kW 7 8.5 12.5 15 23 42 53
cos ϕ = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 12 14.5 22 26 39 72 92
Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie At 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
and 60 °C
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C) At 400 V A 9 12 17 25 26
Rated power of slipring or squirrel-cage motors at At 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 5.5
50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S0

Type 3RT13 16 3RT13 17 3RT13 25/26
Current carrying capacity with direct current
Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
up to 24 V A 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 35 35 35 35
60 V A 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 20 35 35 35
110 V A 2.1 12 18 18 2.1 12 22 22 4.5 35 35 35
220 V A 0.8 1.6 18 18 0.8 1.6 22 22 1 5 35 35
440 V A 0.6 0.8 1.3 1.3 0.6 0.8 1.3 1.3 0.4 1 2.9 2.9
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Up to 24 V A 18 18 18 18 20 20 20 20 20 35 35 35
60 V A 0.5 5 18 18 0.5 5 20 20 5 35 35 35
110 V A 0.15 0.35 18 18 0.15 0.35 20 20 2.5 15 35 35
220 V A ---- ---- 1.5 1.5 ---- ---- 1.5 1.5 1 3 10 35
440 V A ---- ---- 0.2 0.2 ---- ---- 0.2 0.2 0.09 0.27 0.6 0.6
Contactor Frame size S2 S3 S3
Type 3RT13 36 3RT13 44 3RT13 46
Current carrying capacity with direct current
Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Up to 24 V A 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 80 80 80 80
60 V A 23 45 45 45 23 70 70 70 60 80 80 80
110 V A 4.5 45 45 45 4.5 70 70 70 9 80 80 80
220 V A 1 5 45 45 1 5 70 70 2 10 80 80
440 V A 0.4 1 2.9 2.9 0.4 1 2.9 2.9 0.6 1.8 4.5 4.5
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Up to 24 V A 20 45 45 45 20 70 70 70 20 80 80 80
60 V A 6 45 45 45 6 70 70 70 6.5 80 80 80
110 V A 2.5 25 45 45 2.5 70 70 70 2.5 80 80 80
220 V A 1 5 25 45 1 7 35 70 1 7 35 80
440 V A 0.1 0.27 0.6 0.6 0.15 0.42 0.8 0.8 0.15 0.42 0.8 0.8

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-125
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT15 contactors, 4-pole (2 NO contacts + 2 NC main contacts)

Contactor Frame size S00 S0 S2

Type 3RT15 16/17 3RT15 26 3RT15 35
General specifications
Mechanical life Opera- 30 mill. 10 mill. 10 mill.
ting
cycles
Electrical service life with Ie/AC-1 Opera- Approx. 0.5 mill.
ting
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60
During storage °C –55 to +80
Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP20 IP 20
(terminal housing IP 00)
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay
Main circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG
NH type 3NA,
DIAZED type 5SB,
NEOZED type 5SE
– In acc. with IEC 60 947-4/
DIN EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Coordination type "1" 1) A 35 63 160
Coordination type "2" 1) A 20 35 80
Unwelded 2) A 10 16 50
Drive
Operating range of the magnet coils AC at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us AC/DC: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
DC at +50 °C 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at +60 °C 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
Power input of the magnet coils (cold coil and at 1.1 x Us)
AC operation Hz 50/60 50 50/60 50 50/60
Making capacity VA 26.5/24.3 61 64/63 145 170/155
cos ϕ 0.79/0.75 0.82 0.82/0.74 0.79 0.76/0.72
Holding power VA 4.4/3.4 7.8 8.4/6.8 12.5 15/11.8
cos ϕ 0.27/0.27 0.24 0.24/0.28 0.36 0.35/0.38
DC operation Making capacity = holding power W 3.3 5.6 13.3

1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):

Coordination type "1":
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary.
Assignment "2":
The overload relay must not be damaged. Contactwelding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor.
2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1

SIRIUS System Manual

3-126 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT15 contactors, 4-pole (2 NO contacts + 2 NC main contacts)

Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S0 S2
Type 3RT15 16 3RT15 17 3RT15 26 3RT15 35
Current carrying capacity with alternating current
Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive
loads
Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C) Up to 690 V A 18 22 40 55
(at 60 °C) Up to 690 V A 16 20 35 50
Rated power of three-phase loads
cos ϕ = 0.95 (at 40 °C) At 230 V kW 6.5 7.5 15 20
400 V kW 11 13 26 36
Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie At 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 10 16
and 60 °C
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C) Up to 400 V A 9 12 25 1) 40
Rated power of motors
with slipring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and At 230 V kW 3 3 5.5 9.5
400 V kW 4 5.5 11 18.5
Current carrying capacity with direct current
Utilization category DC-1,
switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Up to 24 V A 16 16 20 20 35 35 50 50
60 V A 16 16 20 20 20 35 23 45
110 V A 2.1 12 2.1 12 4.5 35 4.5 45
220 V A 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 1 5 1 5
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.6 0.8 0.4 1 0.4 1
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5 2),
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Up to 24 V A 16 16 20 20 20 35 35 50
60 V A 0.5 5 0.5 5 5 35 6 45
110 V A 0.15 0.35 0.15 0.35 2.5 15 2.5 25
220 V A 0.75 1.5 0.75 1.5 1 3 1 5
440 V A ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.09 0.27 0.1 0.27
1) With AC drive: 25 A
DC drive: 20 A.
2) At Us > 24 V the rated operational currents Ie for the conducting paths of the NC contacts are 50% of the values for the conducting paths of the NO
contacts.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-127
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors

The technical specifications for frame size S0 correspond, unless listed below, to those of the 3RT10 26 contactors,
for frame size 2 to those of the 3RT10 36 contactors, and for frame size S3 to those of the 3RT10 45 contactors.
Contactor Frame size S0 S2 S3
Type 3RT16 26 3RT16 36 3RT16 46
Capacitor power at 230 V 50/60 Hz kvar 8.5 14 29
operating voltage 400 V 50/60 Hz kvar 15 25 50
525 V 50/60 Hz kvar 20 32 65
690 V 50/60 Hz kvar 25 32 65
Auxiliary contacts attached (freely avai- 1 NO contact
lable)
Additional auxiliary contacts that can be attached (lateral) 2 NC contacts, 2 NO con-
tacts, or 1 NO + 1 NC
Operating range of the magnet coil 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
Max. switching frequency 1/h 180 100 100
Electrical life Operat- > 100,000
ing
cycles
Ambient temperature °C 60 55 55
Regulations IEC 60 947/DIN EN 60 947 (VDE 0660)

3RT10 contactor relays (interface)

The technical specifications correspond to those of the 3RT10 contactors used to switch motors, unless listed below.
Auxiliary switch blocks cannot be added to 3RT10 1. contactor relays.
Two, 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be built on to the 3RT10 2. contactor relays.
Contactor Frame size S00 S00 S00 S0
Type 3RT10 1.-1HB4. 3RT10 1.-1JB4. 3RT10 1.-1KB4. 3RT10 2.-1KB40
Mechanical life Opera- 30 mill. 30 mill. 30 mill. 10 mill.
ting
cycles
Operating range of the magnet coils 0.7 to 1.25 x Us q (17 V to 30 V)
Power input of the magnet coil
(with a cold coil) With Us 17 V W 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1
24V W 2.3 2.3 2.3 4.2
Making capacity = holding power 30V W 3.6 3.6 3.6 6.6
Permissible residual current
< 10 mA x  ------------  < 10 mA x  ------------  < 10 mA x  ------------  < 6 mA x  ------------ 
24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
of the electronic components mA
(at 0 signal)  Us   Us   Us   Us 

Suppressor circuit of the magnet coil Without overvoltage With diode With varistor With varistor
damping

U U
Switching times of the contactor
relays
Making At 17 V On delay NO ms 40 to 120 40 to 120 40 to 120 93 to 270
Off delay NC ms 30 to 70 30 to 70 30 to 70 83 to 250
At 24 V On delay NO ms 30 to 60 30 to 60 30 to 60 64 to 87
Off delay NC ms 20 to 40 20 to 40 20 to 40 55 to 78
At 30 V On delay NO ms 20 to 50 20 to 50 20 to 50 53 to 64
Off delay NC ms 15 to 30 15 to 30 15 to 30 45 to 56
Breaking At 17 V to 30 V On delay NO ms 7 to 17 40 to 60 7 to 17 18 to 19
Off delay NC ms 22 to 30 60 to 70 22 to 30 24 to 25
Protective separation between coil and contacts V 400 400 400 400
(in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 A1 [Draft 02/89])

SIRIUS System Manual

3-128 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Accessories for 3RT1. contactors

Type Solid-state time relay blocks Time-delay auxiliary switch blocks

with semiconductor output

3RT19 .6- 2C 3RT19 .6- 2E

2D 2F
2G
Rated insulation voltage VAC 250 250
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III in acc. with DIN VDE 0110
Energizing operating range 0.8 to 1.1 x Us 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
0.95 to 1.05 times the 0.95 to 1.05 times the
rated frequency rated frequency
Rated power W 1 2
Power input at 230 VAC, 50 Hz VA 1 4
Rated operational currents Ie
AC-140, DC-13 A 0.3 in the case of the 3RT19 16 –
0.5 in the case of the 3RT19 26 –
AC-15 at AC 230 V, 50 Hz A – 3
DC-13 at 24 V A – 1
DC-13 at 110 V A – 0.2
DC-13 at 230 V A – 0.1
DIAZED fuse
Performance class gL/gG A – 4
Switching frequency
Loaded with Ie 230 VAC 1/h 2500 2500
Loaded with 3RT1016 contactor, 230 VAC 1/h 2500 5000
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum on-time ms 35 200 (off-delay)
Residual current mA ≤5 –
Voltage drop V ≤ 3.5 –
in switched state
Short-term current car- A 10 (to 10 ms) –
rying capacity
Setting accuracy ≤ ± 15% ≤ ± 15%
in relation to the value at the end of the scale
Repeatability ≤ ± 1% ≤ ± 1%
Mechanical life Operating cycles 100 x 106 30 x 106
Permissible ambient temperature For operation °C –25 to +60 –25 to +60
During storage °C –40 to +85 –40 to +85
Degree of protection IP 40 IP 40
in acc. with DIN EN 60 529 IP 20 terminals IP 20 terminals
Terminal type Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
2 x (0.75 to 4) 2 x (0.75 to 4)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule: mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
Single or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14)
Terminal screw M3 M3
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 0.8 to 1.2
Permissible installation Any Any

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-129
3RT1/3RH1 contactors

Accessories for 3RT1. contactors

Type Solid-state time relay blocks Time-delayed auxiliary switch
with semiconductor output blocks

3RT19 .6- 2C 3RT19 .6- 2E

2D 2F
2G
Shock resistance g/ms 15/11 15/11
half-sine in acc. with IEC 60 068-2-27
Vibration resistance Hz/mm 10 to 55/0.35 10 to 55/0.35
in acc. with IEC 60 068-2-6
EMC tests Basic specification EN 50081-1; IEC 61 000-6-2 EN 50081-1; IEC 61 000-6-2
Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated in the time relay –

3RA13 contactor combinations for reversing

The technical information corresponds to that of the 3RT10 ... contactors.

The s and u approvals only apply to complete contactor combinations and not to combinations you have put together from separate parts.

3RA14 contactor combinations for star-delta starting

The technical specifications correspond to those of the 3RT individual contactor and the 3RU time relay, unless listed below.
starter Frame sizes S . . - S . . - S . . 00-00-00 00-00-00 0-0-0 0-0-0 2-2-0 2-2-2 2-2-2 3-3-2 3-3-2
Type 3RA . . . . 14 15 14 16 14 23 14 25 14 34 14 35 14 36 14 44 14 45
Mechanical life Operating 3 mill.
cycles
Short-circuit protection without overload Short-circuit protection with overload relay, see Part 4
relay
Highest rated current of the fuse
Main circuit1)
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG
NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE
Single or double incoming supply
– In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1/ Coordination type "1" 1) A 35 35 63 100 125 125 160 250 250
DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 Coordination type "2" 1) A 20 20 25 35 63 63 80 125 160
Control circuit
Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG A 10,
DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE A
(Short-circuit current Ik ≥ 1 kA) 62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is in the circuit of the contactor coil.
Circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10,
A
62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is in the circuit of the contactor coil.
Size of the individual contac- Line contactor K1 Type 3RT 10 15 10 17 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 44 10 45
tors Delta contactor K3 Type 3RT 10 15 10 17 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 44 10 45
Star contactor K2 Type 3RT 10 15 10 15 10 24 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 34 10 35 10 36
Unassigned auxiliary con- See circuit diagram for the control circuit, page 3/93.
tacts of the individual contac-
tors
Current carrying capacity for the AC-3 utili-
zation category
Switchover time up to 10 s
Rated operational current At 400 V A 12 17 25 40 65 80 86 115 150
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 31.2 55.4 69.3 86 112.6 138.6
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 53.7 69.3 69.3 98.7 138.6
Rated power At 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 12 20.4 25.5 27.8 37 49
of three-phase induction motors 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 21 35 44 48 65 85
at 50 Hz and 500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 20.5 38 48 60 80 98
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 51 66 67 97 136
1000 V kW – – – – – – – – –
Switching frequency with overload relay 1/h 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Current carrying capacity for utilization cate-
gory AC-3
Switchover time to 15 s
Rated operational current At 400 V A 12 17 25 31 44 57 67 97 106
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 31 44 57 67 97 106
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 44 57 67 97 106
Rated power At 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 9.4 13.8 18.2 21.6 32 35
400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 16.3 24 31.6 38 55 60
of three-phase induction motors
500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 20.4 30 40 47 69 75
At 50 Hz and 690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 42 55 65 95 104
1000 V kW – – – – – – – – –
Switching frequency with overload relay 1/h 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

SIRIUS System Manual

3-130 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RT1/3RH1 contactors

3RA14 contactor combinations for star-delta starting

Starter Frame sizes S . . - S . . - S . . 00-00-00 00-00-00 0-0-0 0-0-0 2-2-0 2-2-2 2-2-2 3-3-2 3-3-2
Type 3RA . . . . 14 15 14 16 14 23 14 25 14 34 14 35 14 36 14 44 14 45
Current carrying capacity for the AC-3 utili-
zation category
Switchover time to 20 s
Rated operational current At 400 V A 12 17 25 28 39 51 57 85 92
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 28 39 51 57 85 92
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 39 51 57 85 92
Rated power At 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 8.5 12.2 16.3 18.4 28 30
of three-phase induction motors 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 14.7 21.3 28 32 48 52
at 50 Hz and 500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 18.4 26.7 35 40 60 65
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 37 49 55 83 90
1000 V kW – – – – – – – – –
Switching frequency with overload relay 1/h 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
1) Corresponds to IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102):
Coordination type "1":
The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary.
Coordination type "2":
The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can easily be separated again from the contactor.
2) Up toIk ≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 3-131
 4

3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Section Subject Page

4.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 4-2

4.2 Device description 4-4

4.2.1 Overload relays in motor feeders 4-5

4.2.2 General device description 4-6

4.2.3 Operation 4-13

4.3 Application and use 4-15

4.3.1 3RU11 thermal overload relay and 3RB10 electronic 4-15

overload relay

4.3.2 3RB12 electronic overload relays 4-19

4.4 Accessories 4-23

4.4.1 Electromechanical remote reset 4-23

4.4.2 Mechanical remote reset 4-24

4.5 Mounting and connection 4-26

4.5.1 Mounting 4-26

4.5.2 Connection 4-29

4.5.3 Circuit diagrams 4-31

4.6 Dimensioned drawings 4-34

4.7 Technical specifications 4-37

4.7.1 3RU11 thermal overload relays 4-37

4.7.2 3RB10 electronic overload relays 4-43

4.7.3 3RB12 electronic overload relays 4-47

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-1
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals
Standards • The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic
overload relays comply with the following standards:
IEC 60947-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 100
IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102
IEC 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
IEC 60801-2, -3, -4, -5; UL 508/CSA C 22.2.
• The 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays also comply with the
EMC standards.
Tripping classes The tripping classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays
have to trip from a cold state with 7.2 times the set current in the case of a
symmetrical, three-pole load. You will find the tripping classes in which the
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays are available in Section 4.2. The
following table indicates the tripping classes and tripping times in acc. with
the IEC 60947-4-1 standard:

Tripping time tA in sec at

Tripping class
7.2 x Ie from a cold state

10A 2 < TA ≤ 10
10 4 < TA ≤ 10
20 6 < TA ≤ 20
30 9 < TA ≤ 30

Table 4-1: Tripping classes/tripping times

Time-delayed overload The following table contains the operating limits of time-delayed overload
release releases in the case of an all-pole load:

Multiple of the set current Reference

Overload
ambient tem-
release type A B C D perature

Ambient tem-
perature-com- 1.05 1.2 1.5 7.2 + 20 °C
pensated

Not Tripped Tripped Tripped from

tripped <2h < 4 min a cold state
<2h in 4 to 10
sec.

CLASS 10

<2h <2h < 8 min 6 to 20 sec

CLASS 20

Table 4-2: Operating limits of time-delayed overload releases in the case of an all-pole load

Resistance to extreme The 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays are climate-proof in acc. with
climates IEC 721.

Shock protection The 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays are shockproof in acc. with
DIN VDE 0106 Part 100.
Depending on assignment to other devices, extended terminal covers are to
be attached to the connecting bars.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Ships' systems The 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays are suitable for use in ships'
systems.
The overload relays have been submitted to:
• GL (Germany)
• LRS (Great Britain)
• DNV (Norway)

Explosion-proof motors The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic
overload relays comply with the regulations for the overload protection of
explosion-proof motors of "increased safety" protection types (EEx d and
EEx e) in acc. with EN 50 019/DIN VDE 0165 and DIN VDE 0170/0171:
• 3RU11: KEMA test certificate no. Ex-97.Y.3235
DMT certificate in acc. with directive 94/9/EC: DMT 98 ATEX G001
• 3RB10: PTB test rules: PTB test report no. 3 43-8803/98
• 3RB12: PTB test rules: PTB test report no. 3 53-3907/96
EC special test certificate in acc. with directive 94/9/EC:
PTB 01 ATEX 3220

In the case of tripping devices with DC operation, electrical isolation must

be secured by means of a battery network or a safety transformer in compli-
ance with DIN VDE 0551.

When the 3RB12..-....1 electronic overload relays (no change to the switch-
ing state of the auxiliary contact elements in the event of the failure of the
control supply voltage) are used to protect EEx d and EEx e motors, sepa-
rate monitoring of the control supply voltage is recommended.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-3
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.2 Device description

Overload relays are used to protect electrical equipment such as three-
phase induction motors and transformers from overheating. Overheating
can be caused by overload, asymmetric current consumption, loss of a
phase in the main supply conductor, or a blocked rotor.

Models There are 3 overload relay models available:

• 3RU11 thermal overload relays
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays up to 100 A are designed for the cur-
rent-dependent protection of loads with normal starting (tripping class 10)
against impermissible overheating.
Impermissible overheating as a result of the above-mentioned causes
leads to an increase in the motor current beyond the set rated current for
the motor. This increase in current heats up the bimetal strips inside the
device by means of heating elements. The strips are deflected and ope-
rate the auxiliary contact elements by means of a tripping mechanism.
The auxiliary contact elements switch the load off by means of a contac-
tor.

• 3RB10 electronic overload relays

The 3RB10 self-supplying electronic overload relays up to 100 A are desig-
ned for the current-dependent protection of loads with normal and heavy
starting (tripping classes 10 and 20) against impermissible overheating.
Impermissible overheating as a result of the above-mentioned causes
leads to an increase in the motor current beyond the set rated current for
the motor. This increase in current is detected by the current transfor-
mers integrated in the devices and evaluated by an appropriate electronic
circuit, which then sends a pulse to the auxiliary contact elements. These
switch the load off by means of a contactor.

• 3RB12 electronic overload relays

The 3RB12 externally supplied electronic overload relays up to 820 A are
designed for the current-dependent protection of loads with normal to
heavy starting (tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30, which can be set
on the device) against impermissible overheating. Impermissible overhea-
ting as a result of the above-mentioned causes leads to an increase in the
motor current beyond the set rated current for the motor. This increase in
current is detected by the current transformers integrated in the devices
and evaluated by an appropriate electronic circuit, which then sends a
pulse to the auxiliary contact elements. These switch the load off by
means of a contactor. In addition to the current-dependent protection of
the loads against impermissible overheating, the 3RB12 electronic over-
load relay allows the temperature of the motor winding to be monitored
by connecting a PTC thermistor detector circuit in order to protect the
load against overtemperature. This can be caused indirectly, for example,
if the flow of the coolant is hindered and cannot be detected.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.2.1 Overload relays in motor feeders

There are two categories of motor feeder:

Fuseless motor feeders Fuseless motor feeders consist of combinations of circuit breakers for
motor protection and contactors. These combinations are described in
Chapter 5, "3RA1 fuseless load feeders".

Fused motor feeders Fused motor feeders consist of combinations of contactors and overload
relays, often referred to as starter combinations, with upstream short-circuit
protection (e.g. fuses, circuit breakers for starter protection).

The advantages of fused motor feeders are as follows:

• It is easy to distinguish between tripping caused by an overload and trip-
ping caused by a short circuit. In the event of a short circuit, the fuses
limit the short-circuit current; in the event of an overload, the overload
relay switches off the contactor and thus the motor.
• At voltages > 400 V, fuses have a short-circuit breaking capacity of up to
100 kA. As a result, in 690 V systems, in particular, fused motor feeders
are often preferred.
• If automatic RESET is set, the overload relay resets itself automatically
and does not have to be switched on again locally.
• A remote reset can be implemented very easily by means of attachable
electrical and mechanical RESET modules for the 3RU11 and 3RB10 over-
load relays. The electrical remote RESET is already integrated in the
3RB12 multifunctional devices.
• Group fusing can be used with a circuit breaker to protect several motor
feeders against short circuit simultaneously, which has a positive effect
on the costs of a single feeder.
• If there are already outgoing feeders that are protected against short cir-
cuits in the cubicle, additional short-circuit protection is often unneces-
sary.
• Combinations of a circuit breaker for starter protection, a contactor, and
an overload relay also have the advantage that the feeder can be easily
isolated and that, in the event of a short circuit, it is disconnected in three
poles. 3RV13 circuit breakers for started combinations are available in the
SIRIUS modular system for building these combinations. These circuit
breakers do not have any overload releases.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-5
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.2.2 General device description

The 3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays are electrically and mechanically com-
patible with the 3RT10 contactors and 3RW30/31 soft starters in the corre-
sponding frame size.

Frame sizes The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 electronic overload relays
are available in 4 frame sizes:
• Frame size S00: width 45 mm; up to 12 A
• Frame size S0: width 45 mm; up to 25 A
• Frame size S2: width 55 mm; up to 50 A
• Frame size S3: width 70 mm; up to 100 A

The 3RB12 electronic overload relay is available with the following dimen-
sions:
• 3RB12 46: width 70 mm; up to 100 A
• 3RB12 53: width 120 mm; up to 205 A
• 3RB12 57: width 145 mm; up to 500 A
• 3RB12 62: width 230 mm; up to 820 A

3RU11 S00 S0 S2

95
96 95
96
979
8 979
8

Figure 4-1: 3RU11 overload relays (frame sizes S00 to S2)

S3

Figure 4-2: 3RU11 overload relay (frame size S3)

3RB10 The construction of the 3RB10 is the same as that of the 3RU11.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

3RB12
3RB12 46 3RB12 53
Stand-alone installation
with bar-type transformer

3RB12 57 3RB12 62

Figure 4-3: 3RB12 electronic overload relay

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-7
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Overload relay: compar- The following table compares the thermal and electronic overload relays in
ison terms of their configuration and functionality:

3RU11 3RB10 3RB12

Tripping classes CLASS 10 CLASS 10 or 20 CLASS 5/10/15/20/
25/30
Switchable
Current range 0.1 to 100 A 0.1 to 100 A 1.25 to 820 A
Permissible operating -20 to +70 °C1) -20 to +70 °C -25 to +70 °C
temperature derating
Auxiliary contact ele- 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC over-
ments load
1 NO + 1 NC
ground fault
Manual/auto RESET Switchable Switchable Switchable
Electrical remote RESET Accessories Accessories Integrated
Mechan. remote RESET Accessories Accessories No
Stop button Yes Yes No
(only effects NC contact)
Test function Yes Yes Yes, electronic
Protection of Yes No No
direct-current machines
Protection of Yes No Only in the case of
single-phase motors devices without
internal ground
fault protection
Screw-type terminal Yes Yes Yes
Main conductor connec- Screw-type termi- Screw-type termi- Up to 100 A with
tion nal nal Bar-type trans-
former
Cage Clamp terminal Yes (S00) No No
S0 to S3: auxiliary
conducting leads
only
Table 4-3: SIRIUS overload relays, configuration and functions

1)With 13 % current reduction, up to 60 °C without restrictions

SIRIUS System Manual

4-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Overview: Performance The following table provides an overview of the assignment of the overload
ranges relays to the contactors together with their ratings:

3RU1116 3RU1126 3RU1136 3RU1146 3RB125

3RB1246
3RB1016 3RB1026 3RB1036 3RB1046 3RB126
Max. set 12A 25 A 50A 100 A 100 A 820 A
current
Contactor Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 70 mm
3 kW 3RT1015 S00 X ¿
4 kW 3RT1016 S00 X ¿
5.5 kW 3RT1017 S00 X ¿
5.5 kW 3RT1024 S0 X ¿
7.5 kW 3RT1025 S0 X ¿
11 kW 3RT1026 S0 X ¿
15 kW 3RT1034 S2 X ¿
18.5 kW 3RT1035 S2 X ¿
22 kW 3RT1036 S2 X ¿
30 kW 3RT1044 S3 X ¿
37 kW 3RT1045 S3 X ¿
45 kW 3RT1046 S3 X ¿
>45 kW 3TF5/ 6-12 ¿ X
3TF6
Table 4-4: Assignment of the overload relays to the contactors

X = direct attachment
¿ = stand-alone installation (device with bar-type transformer)
Snapped onto a 35 mm rail

Fuses The maximum permissible fuse values for overload relays are dependent on:
• The selected setting range (the smaller the setting range, the lower the
fuse value).
• The maximum permissible fusing of the contactor or other devices in the
circuit (e.g. soft starter or even the motor supply lead).
In the case of fuse values in acc. with coordination type 2, the contactor and
overload relay can be reused after a short circuit.
The type plates on the devices provide information on the permissible fuse
values. In addition, you will find detailed information in part 4 of the low-volt-
age switching technology (NSK) catalog.

Starter protection The operating current of the instantaneous short-circuit release should be
switch 12 times the value of the rated motor current (the current set on the over-
load relay). The corresponding 3RV13 starter circuit breakers can be
selected from part 2 of the low-voltage switching technology (NSK) catalog.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-9
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Heavy starting Heavy starting is when the motor requires longer than 10 seconds to reach
the nominal speed. Given such long starting times, the switching devices
and capacities have to be configured appropriately because the thermal load
increases. The permissible AC-3 currents of motor contactors only take into
account 10-second starts. In the case of longer starting times, derating
must be carried out or a larger contactor used. You can determine the corre-
sponding configuration on the basis of the tables of different starting times
and motor currents in part 4 of the low-voltage switching technology (NSK)
catalog.

Setting ranges with The setting ranges can be used up to the maximum value when there are
thermal overload relays temperatures of up to 60 °C inside the cubicle. At temperatures of 60 °C to
70 °C, derating is required. In other words, the maximum permissible set
value must be reduced. The reduction at 70 °C is 13 % and thus so negligi-
ble that due to the overlapping of the different current setting ranges no
gaps occur between the setting ranges. A uniform current range of 0.11 to
87 A can thus also be used at 70 °C.

Overload relays in star- When overload relays are used in star-delta combinations, it must be taken
delta combinations into consideration that only 1 ⁄ 3 of the motor current flows through the
line contactor. An overload relay built onto the line contactor must be set to
this level (i.e. 0.58 of the motor current). A second overload relay must be
built onto the star contactor if your load is to receive optimal protection in
star operation as well. The star current is 1 ⁄ 3 of the rated current of the
motor. The corresponding overload relay must be set to this current. The
3RB12 electronic overload relays with internal ground fault detection are not
suitable for use in star-delta combinations, since transient current spikes
occur at switchover from star to delta operation. These can result in the trig-
gering of ground fault detection.

3RU11 thermal overload relays

Description • Tripping class 10

• For motor currents of up to 100 A
• For three-phase, single-phase, or DC motors
• Insensitive to "untidy" power systems

Thermal, time-delayed overload relays are the usual way of providing motor
protection with overload relays. The technology has been tried and tested
and continuously improved over a period of decades. They are reasonably
priced and provide reliable protection, particularly in the case of normal
starting times (class 10) and motor ratings of up to 45 kW (100 A).
Thermal overload relays work with bimetals and heater coils through which
the motor current flows. Thermal overload relays record true root-mean-
square values and direct currents as a result of their current measuring
method (Joule heat). Compatible heating coils and bimetals are used for the
different setting ranges. Single-phase and direct-current motors can also be
protected against overload by looping the motor line. Thermally time-
delayed overload relays can also be used after frequency converters.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

3RB10 electronic overload relays

Description • Tripping classes 10 and 20

• For motor currents of up to 100 A
• Low waste heat, energy-saving
• Wide setting ranges for simple configuration, selection, and less storage
• Extremely low energy requirements: approx. 50 mW

Electronic overload relays work with current transformers that provide a

measurement signal that is evaluated by an electronic circuit. They are
designed for sinusoidal 50/60 Hz supply voltages.
The 3RB10 electronic overload relay, like the 3RU11 thermal overload relay,
can be built directly into the motor feeder but hardly causes any heat loss
thanks to the electronic measurement system. The tripping classes 10 (for
normal starting) and 20 (for heavy starting) are implemented with the 3RB10
electronic overload relay.
The current range of the electronic overload relays can be set to the motor
current at a ratio of 1:4 (lower to upper current mark). Up to 6 motor ratings
are covered by a single range, and a current range of 0.1 to 100 A is covered
by only 7 setting ranges.

3RB12 electronic overload relays

Description The 3RB12 electronic overload relays are suitable when there are high
motor protection requirements on account of the following features:
• Tripping classes 5/10/15/20/25/30 settable
• For motor currents of up to 820 A
• Evaluation of PTC thermistors
• Analog output signal of 4 mA to 20 mA for current detection (insensitive
to harmonics)
• High accuracy of the tripping characteristic with a tolerance of < ± 10 %
• Ground fault detection internally and externally through summation cur-
rent transformer
• Insensitive to external influences such as vibrations, different cable cross-
sections, temperature fluctuations, corrosive environments or aging

The 3RB12 electronic overload relay can be used for everything from easy
starting (CLASS 5) to very heavy starting (CLASS 30). The tripping class can
be set in steps to the relevant motor starting time. In addition, the 3RB12 is
equipped with inputs for PTC thermistors, which make it a fully protected
motor device. Additional functions such as ground fault detection and an
analog output signal are also possible. It is available in 4 sizes from 1.25 to
820 A.
It is triggered in the event of an overload, current imbalance, phase loss, or
a blocked rotor.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-11
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Variants The 3RB12 electronic overload relays are available in the following variants:
• Output relay with monostable behavior
• Output relay with bistable behavior
• For the following control supply voltages: 24 VDC
110 VAC to 120 VAC
220 VAC to 240 VAC

Auxiliary contact ele- The 3RB12 electronic overload relays have electrically isolated auxiliary con-
ments tact elements with the following functions (depending on the variant):
• 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for overload tripping through current and/or
thermistor
1 NO contact/1 NC contact for ground fault tripping
• 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for overload tripping through current and/or
thermistor and ground fault; 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for overload
warning

Overload protection The currently flowing motor current is detected in each motor supply line by
current transformers and constantly monitored by a microprocessor.
An overload warning occurs as of:
• 1.15 x Ie in the case of a symmetric load
• 0.85 x Ie in the case of an asymmetric load
The overload warning is indicated by the flashing "Overload" LED on the
overload relay or externally by means of 1 NO contact/1 NC contact.

Thermistor motor pro- The continuous evaluation of a PTC thermistor detector ensures thermistor
tection motor protection.
Additional thermistor motor protection (full motor protection) is imple-
mented by connecting a PTC thermistor detector (PTC sensor circuit in the
motor winding). This is important for stator-critical motors, motors with long
starting and braking, and motors with cooling systems problems or with
high ambient temperatures.
No additional equipment is required for evaluation purposes.
Full motor protection is deactivated on delivery by means of a wire jumper.
The monitoring of the thermistor is secure against a wire break. In other
words, tripping occurs in the event of a wire break.

Ground fault protection Internal ground fault monitoring

The ground fault protection integrated in the overload relay monitors motors
with a three-conductor terminal. Ground faults are detected in the event of
fault currents > 30 % of the set current Ie in rated service.

External ground fault monitoring

External ground fault protection is implemented by connecting a 3UL220.-.A
summation current transformer and monitors motors with three- and four-
conductor terminals. Ground faults are detected reliably in the event of fault
currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1 A. These values refer to sinusoidal fault cur-
rents 50/60 Hz.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.2.3 Operation

Short-circuit protection For short-circuit protection of starter combinations consisting of a contactor

and an overload relay, fuses or 3RV13 circuit breakers are required for
starter combinations.

Use with external cur- If external current transformers are to be used to operate the 3RB12, the
rent transformers following things should be taken into consideration. The 3RB12 with the cur-
rent setting range from 1.25 to 6.3 A must be selected.
The secondary current of the 1 A or 5 A current transformer becomes the
primary current of the 3RB12. In the case of 5 A current transformers, the
3RB12 can be set from 1.25 to 5 A (i.e. from 1/4 of to 1 times the trans-
former's rated current). In the case of 1 A current transformers, a signal
> 1.25 A must be generated by looping the line. If the line is looped five
times, a 5 A signal is generated for the 3RB12.

Environmental conditi- 3RU11

ons The 3RU11 overload relays can be used without restrictions at ambient tem-
peratures of up to 60 °C. This is the result of new bimetals and continuous
temperature compensation (up to 70 °C with derating).

3RB10
A special coating on the PCB and the electronic components ensures reli-
able operation even in corrosive and tropical environmental conditions.

Auxiliary contact ele- The 3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays are equipped with a normally closed
ments contact for switching off the contactor and a normally open contact for the
tripped signal.
The switching contacts have a high switching capacity so that they can
switch contactor coils directly. The overload relays are therefore suitable for
use with a PLC (17 V, 5 mA).

Coil and auxiliary Frame size S00

switch repetition termi- In the case of direct mounting onto contactors, the auxiliary switch and coil
nal repeat terminals (A2) are passed through the 3RU1116 and 3RB1016 over-
load relays. This makes wiring much simpler.

Frame sizes S0 - S3
The contactors of these frame sizes are equipped with 4 coil connections. It
is therefore not necessary to pass through the auxiliary switch and coil ter-
minals (A2) of the contactor.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-13
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Tripping classes 3RU11

The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are available for normal starting in trip-
ping class 10.

3RB10
The 3RB10 electronic overload relays are available in 2 tripping classes:
Tripping class 10 for normal starting
Tripping class 20 for heavy starting
3RB12
The 3RB12 electronic overload relays can be set to different tripping classes
(5/10/15/20/25/30) on the device.

Phase loss sensitivity The 3RU11/3RB10/3RB12 overload relays are sensitive to phase imbalance.

Note on explosion protection

For releases and relays with current-sensitive delayed tripping, tripping cha-
racteristics must be available at the installation location.
The releases or relays for machines with cage rotors must be selected in
such a way that the release time in the case of a 3-pole load, which is obtai-
ned from the characteristic for the IA/IN ratio of the machine to be protec-
ted, is not greater than the safe locked-rotor time tE specified on the
machine's test label.
Motors must have equipment that protects them even in the event of the
failure of a line conductor.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.3 Application and use

4.3.1 3RU11 thermal overload relay and 3RB10 electronic overload relay

3RB10 The 3RB10 electronic overload relays are developed for use in sinusoidal 50/
60 Hz voltage networks. No additional supply voltage is required for opera-
tion. The current transformers are integrated in the devices for the purpose
of current detection. An ASIC checks the current values of each phase and
causes tripping in the event of an overload or phase loss.

3RU11 3RU11 front view:

4
TEST
8 M A 7
2
3 1
STOP RESET

9
6 95 96 97 98 A2
9
5
2T2 4T2 6T3 14/22

Figure 4-4: 3RU11 front view

Functions 1 Scale for setting the load rated current

2 Reset button (blue):
Press the RESET button to get the relay ready before putting it into
operation or after tripping.
3 Stop button (red):
The stop button opens the normally closed contact, which remains
open until the button is released again. The downstream contactor and
thus the motor can be switched off.
Press the STOP button to switch the relay off when it is in operation.
The normally closed contact of the auxiliary switch opens. The relay
remains ready for operation.
4 Device type plate
5 Terminals for three motor supply lines
6 Terminals for normally closed/normally open contacts (95/96 for
normally closed contacts, 97/98 for normally open contacts)
7 Contact position indicator/test
The slider for the contact position indicator also serves as a test func-
tion. When it is operated, tripping of the overload relay is simulated.
The normally closed contact (95/96) opens, and the normally open con-
tact (97/98) closes. The switching position is indicated.
8 Switch for manual/auto RESET:
By pressing and turning the blue button you can select automatic or
manual reset.
In the case of the relay setting M (manual reset), the switching position
of the relay is indicated:
I = ready for operation
O = tripped
9 Only in the case of frame size S00:
Terminal A2: repetition terminal of the contactor coil
Terminal 14/22: repetition terminal of the contactor auxiliary switch

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-15
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Auxiliary contacts The following table shows the behavior of the auxiliary contacts when the
TEST/STOP and RESET buttons are pressed:

TEST STOP RESET

NC 95/96

NO 97/98

Table 4-5: 3RU11/3RB10 auxiliary contacts

Setting the rated cur- The following figure shows how the rated current is set, using the example
rent of the 3RU11, frame size S00.

A
Max. + 60 °C

Max. + 70 °C

Ie

Figure 4-5: Setting the rated current

Important
When the sealing cover (transparent sliding window) is closed (3RU11) or
mounted (3RB10), it is not possible to use the blue reset button for a
switchover between M (manual reset) and A (automatic reset).

Sealing the adjustment 3RU11 3RB10

scale

1
2
Figure 4-6: Sealing the adjustment scale (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

4-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Recovery time 3RU11 3RB10

Automatic reset 3 to 5 min1) 4 min
Manual reset 3 to 5 min1) Immediate
Table 4-6: Recovery time
1) Dependent on the setting range

The following figure shows how to switch between manual and automatic
for the 3RU11 and 3R10 using the example of the 3RU11, frame size S00:
Manual-automatic

MANUAL

AUTO
Figure 4-7: Manual/automatic switchover

Resetting The 3RU11 thermal overload relay can also be reset manually after the
bimetals have cooled down (after approx. 3 to 5 minutes), or it can reset
itself automatically after this time when the AUTO position is set.
The 3RB10 electronic overload relay can be reset at any time by pressing the
RESET button. The recovery time for the automatic reset is 4 minutes.

3RU11

Tripping characteristics The time-current characteristics show the dependency of the tripping time
from a cold state on the multiple of the set current Ie.
When the relay is at operating temperature, preloaded with 1x Ie, the trip-
ping times are reduced to around 25 %. In the case of a single-pole load, the
tripping characteristics lie between the characteristics. In normal operation,
all three bimetal strips of the overload relay must be heated.
The 3RU overload relays are suitable for protecting motors with phase con-
trol.
To protect single-phase or direct current loads, all three main conducting
paths must be connected in series. The minimum tripping current in the
case of a three-pole symmetric load lies between 105 % and 120 % of the
set current.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-17
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Tripping time
10 000

100 5000
min
60
s
40
2000

1000

10 500

5
200

2 100
three-pole
1 load
50

20
two-pole
load
10

1
0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 A 60 80 x I n
Current

Figure 4-8: Time-current characteristic, chart for the 3RU11

3RB10

Tripping characteristic The time-current characteristics show the behavior at starting, with a three-
pole load
¿ from a cold state
À from a warm state
Á in the event of phase loss or current imbalance (the phase loss protection
function triggers the overload relay after 3 seconds)

10 NSB00293 10 NSB00294
6 6
Tripping time min

Tripping time min

4 4
2 2
1 1 1
50 1 50
40 40

20 20 2
2
10 10
8 3 8 3
s

6 6
4 4

2 2

1 1
0,6 1 2 4 6 10x I e 0,6 1 2 4 6 10x I e
Tripping current (mean values) Tripping current (mean values)
CLASS 10 CLASS 20

Figure 4-9: Time-current characteristics for class 10 and class 20, chart for the 3RB10

SIRIUS System Manual

4-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.3.2 3RB12 electronic overload relays

3RB12 front view:

7
8
13
A1 A2 T1 T2/C1 C2 Y1 Y2
1 9

SIEMENS 70 80 90 3RB12
2 Ready 60
100
50
3 Gnd Fault
40 A
10
4 Overload 30
25
20 25
15 30
TEST/
5 RESET 10 11
5 CLASS

NC NC

6 12
95 96 97 98 05 06 07 08

NSB00297

Figure 4-10: Front view of the 3RB12 electronic overload relays

Functions 1 Terminals of the control supply voltage

2 Green "Ready" LED
3 Red "Ground Fault" LED
4 Red "Overload" LED
5 Combined test/reset button with function test
6 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for overload/thermistor tripping or
1 NO contact/1 NC contact for overload/thermistor or ground fault
tripping
7 Terminals for thermistor
8 Terminals for external summation current transformer
9 Terminals for remote or automatic reset
10 Rotary switch for current setting
11 Rotary switch for the class
12 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for ground fault tripping or 1 NO
contact/1 NC contact for overload warning

Overload In the event of an overload > 110 % of the current Ie set using the rotary
switch on the front of the device, of current imbalance of 40 % Ie, or of
phase loss, tripping occurs through the switchover of two auxiliary contact
elements (1 NO contact: 97/98 / 1 NC contact: 95/96) after the tripping time
set by means of the six-step rotary switch (CLASS 5/10/15/20/25/30).
After overload tripping, the overload relay can be reset either by pressing
the test/reset button on the device or by remote or automatic reset after the
recovery time of 5 minutes elapses.

Thermistor detector A tripping operation as a result of the thermistor detector responding takes
place via the same auxiliary contact elements as for overload tripping (1 NO
contact: 97/98 / 1 NC contact: 95/96), except that it is instantaneous.
The overload relay cannot be reset until the temperature in the motor wind-
ing 5 K has sunk to under the operating temperature of the thermistor.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-19
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Ground fault In the event of a ground fault, the device trips instantaneously; depending
on the device variant, this may occur via a separate output (1 NO contact/1
NC contact).

Remote/automatic Remote or automatic resetting can be implemented by means of external

reset wiring (Y1-Y2 terminals).

Important
In the case of ground fault tripping, an automatic reset is not possible.

Test The device functions of current detection, thermistor input, and ground fault
input and the tripping functions of the auxiliary contact elements can be
tested by pressing the test/reset button.
The device functions can also be tested during operation. The LEDs indicate
the status.

Internal failure Self-monitoring causes the device to trip in the event of an internal fault. In
this case, the overload relay cannot be reset.

Failure of the control In the event of the failure of the control supply voltage for any length of time
supply voltage (> 0.2 seconds), the output relays respond in either a monostable or
bistable manner, depending on the variant involved.
The following table shows the behavior of the output relays in the event of
the failure of the control supply voltage:

Behavior of the output Monostable Bistable

relays given: 3RB12..-....0 3RB12..-....1
Failure of the control Device trips No change to the
supply voltage switching status of
Return of the control Device resets the auxiliary contact
supply voltage without elements
prior tripping
Return of the control Device remains tripped
supply voltage after prior Reset at:
tripping - Overload tripping after 5 minutes
- Thermistor tripping when 5 K under the
operating temperature reached
- Ground fault tripping immediately
Table 4-7: Failure of the control supply voltage

SIRIUS System Manual

4-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Tripping characteristics The time-current characteristic for three-pole symmetric loading shows the
dependency of the tripping time from a cold state on the multiple of the set
current.
When the overload relay is preloaded with 100 % of the set current, the trip-
ping times are reduced.
In the case of two-pole loading (loss of a phase) or current imbalance
> 40 % of the set current, the corresponding characteristic applies.

120 120
100 100
50 50

20 20
min

min
10 10
CLASS 30 CLASS 30
5 25 5
25

Tripping time
Tripping time

20 20
2 2
1 1
50 50
20 20
15 15
10 10 10 10
s

s
5 CLASS 5 5 CLASS 5

2 2

0,6 1 2 5 10x I e 0,6 1 2 5 10x I e

Tripping current (mean values) Tripping current (mean values)

Three-pole loading Two-pole loading

Figure 4-11: Time-current characteristics, chart for the 3RB12

3RB12 electronic overload relay with analog output

Field of application The electronic overload relay with analog output is used for measuring
instruments and analog modules with 4 to 20 mA input.
A

A1 A2 T1 T2/C1 C2 + - Y1 Y2

AC220-240V J Gnd Fault 4 ... 20 mA Reset

3RB1
70 80
60 90
Ready
50 100
Gnd Fault 40 A
30
Overload 25
20 25
15 30
Test/ 10
Reset Class
5
G/9401 3RB1246-1EM40

NC Overload NO NC Gnd Fault NO

95 96 97 98 05 06 07 08

B
Figure 4-12: Electronic overload relay with analog output, front view

For automatic resetting, jumper B is attached between terminals Y1 and Y2.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-21
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Analog output 4 mA to 20 mA
1 % x Ie = 0.128 mA

I/Ie [%] = (Iout - 4 mA) / 0.128 mA

IMotor [A] = (Iout - 4 mA) x Ie /12.8 mA

Iout Output current of the analog output

IMotor Motor current, max. phase
Ie Set current (rated current for motor)

Iout [mA] I/Ie [%]

0 No connection,
wire break!
4.000 Device in operation
4.128
5.280 0
7.200 1
10.40 10
15.52 25
16.80 50
18.08 90
20.00 100
110
125

Example: Iout = 10.40 mA; Ie = 6.0 A

I = 50% v. Ie
IMotor = 3 A

Technical specifications Max. output current 23 mA

Terminals "+" and "-"
Max. load 100 Ω
Accuracy +/- 10%
Short circuit-proof and idling-proof

SIRIUS System Manual

4-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.4 Accessories
4.4.1 Electromechanical remote reset

The electromechanical remote reset is suitable as an accessory for the

3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays in frame sizes S00 to S3.
It is used to reset the overload relay from control rooms after overload trip-
ping.
The coil of the module is designed for an operation duration of 0.2 to
4 seconds. Maintained-contact control is not permissible.

Installation/removal The following figure shows how the electrical remote reset is installed and
removed, using the example of the 3RU11 in frame size S00.

2
Figure 4-13: Electrical remote reset, installation/removal

Voltages 24 VDC to 30 VDC 50/60 Hz

110 VDC 127 VDC 50/60 Hz
220 VDC to 250 VDC 50/60 Hz

Operating range The operating range of the coil is: 0.85 to 1.1 x US

Power consumption The power consumption of the electromagnetic remote reset is:
80 VA AC, 70 W DC

Manual reset A manual reset is possible by means of the blue repeat button on the
remote reset module.

Connection cross-sec- The values for the screw-type terminals of terminals E1 and E2 correspond
tions to the cross-sections of the auxiliary connecting leads of the 3RU11/3RB10
overload relays.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-23
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.4.2 Mechanical remote reset

The mechanical remote reset is available in 2 variants:

• A resetting plunger with a support and funnel (3RU1900-1A) for operation
from the cubicle door.
The plunger must be cut to the required length.
• A wire release with a support (3RU1900-1B, -1C) for built-in overload
relays that are hard to reach.
The wire is available in two lengths:
3RU1900-1B: 400 mm
3RU1900-1C: 600 mm

Resetting plunger

Installation The following graphics show how to install and remove the resetting plunger
or the wire release for the 3RU11, frame size S00.
Example 3RU11, frame size S00:

1
3SB1

Cubicle door

Figure 4-14: Mechanical remote reset: resetting plunger, installation

Removal
1

2
Figure 4-15: Mechanical remote reset: resetting plunger, removal

SIRIUS System Manual

4-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Wire release

Example 3RU11, frame size S00:

Installation

2
5
Ø 6.5 mm 6
1 4
3

≤ 8 mm 4

Figure 4-16: Mechanical remote reset: wire release, installation

Removal
1

2
Figure 4-17: Mechanical remote reset: wire release, removal

Sealable cover A sealable cover is available as an accessory for the 3RB10 electronic over-
load relay.
In the case of the 3RU11 thermal overload relay, the cover is integrated in
the device.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-25
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.5 Mounting and connection

4 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.5.1 Mounting

3RU11/3RB10 The 3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays can be attached directly to the 3RT
contactors and 3RW30/31 soft starters in the corresponding frame size.
In stand-alone installation they are suitable for being snapped onto a 35 mm
rail in acc. with DIN EN 50 022 or for screw-on mounting.
The overload relay in the frame size S3 is suitable for 35 mm and 75 mm
rails.

3RB12 70 mm width
The 3RB12 electronic overload relays are either snapped onto a
35 mm rail in acc. with DIN EN 50 022 or screwed onto a mounting plate by
means of push-in lugs, which are available as accessories.
The devices with current setting ranges < 100 A are designed for stand-
alone installation on account of the bar-type system of the primary current
lines.

120 mm/145 mm/230 mm width

In the case of the current setting ranges > 50 A to 820 A of the device
widths 120 mm, 145 mm, and 230 mm, the 3RB12 electronic overload
relays can be mounted directly onto the contactors by means of connecting
bars.
A screw-on attachment is integrated in the housing of these devices.
For the 3RB1253 devices (120 mm width) there is also a base plate available
for snap-on attachment to a 75 mm rail.

Mounting onto contac- The following illustration shows how overload relays (in this case the 3RU11)
tors/soft starters in frame size S00 are attached to the 3RT contactor and the 3RW30/31 soft
starter:

3
1
1
2
2

Figure 4-18: Mounting onto the 3RT contactor/3RW3 soft starter

SIRIUS System Manual

4-26 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Stand-alone installa- The following illustrations show how the holder for stand-alone installation
tion is mounted.
Frame size S00/S0:

3RU1916-3AA01
3RU1926-3AA01 3

1
3

2
Removal
Figure 4-19: Stand-alone holder, example 3RU11 (frame size S00/S0)

Frame size S2/S3:

Removal
3RU1936-3AA01 1
3RU1946-3AA01

2
2
Figure 4-20: Stand-alone holder, example 3RU11 (frame size S2/S3)

Snap-on mounting The 3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays can either be mounted onto the con-
tactor or snapped onto a 35 mm rail by means of the holder for stand-alone
installation.
The frame size S3 can be snapped onto a 35 mm rail or a 75 mm rail.

S00/S0 S2/S3
RU-00612
RU-00200

1
4
3
2 3
Figure 4-21: Snap-on mounting and removal with the 3RT contactor

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-27
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Removing the device Contactor/overload relay combination

from the rail S00/S0:
Push the contactor downward, and swing it forward (without a tool)
S2/S3:
1 Remove the overload relay from the contactor.
2 Use a screwdriver to release the snap-on mounting on the contactor
(this is shown in Section 3.5 on the installation and removal of contac-
tors).

Screw-on mounting Overload relay with holder for stand-alone installation

The overload relay is screwed on by means of 2 M4 screws in the openings
in the holder for stand-alone installation using the maximum tightening
torque of 1.5 to 2 Nm. The screws are secured with washers and spring lock
washers.

Contactor/overload relay combination

1 Mount the contactor on a flat surface with 2 M4 screws.
2 Mount the overload relay on the contactor.

Minimum clearance Maintain a minimum clearance from grounded parts at the side of
> 6.5 mm.

Installation positions 3RU11

The drawings below show the permissible installation positions for the
3RU11 overload relays for mounting on contactors and stand-alone installa-
tion. If the installation position is in the shaded area, an adjustment of 10%
must be made.

Contactor + overload relay Overload relay in stand-alone

installation
0°
0°

135° 135°
135° 135°
I e x 1.1
I e x 1.1
0°
22.5° 22.5° 45° 0° 45°
I e x 1.1 Ie x 1.1
90° 90°
NSB01364
NSB01363
Figure 4-22: Permissible installation positions for the 3RU11

3RB10/3RB12
Any installation position is possible for the 3RB10 and 3RB12.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-28 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.5.2 Connection

3RU11 The 3RU11 overload relays are equipped with the following terminal system:
• S00 to S3: Screw-type terminal for the main and auxiliary connecting
leads
• S00: Cage Clamp terminal for the main and auxiliary connecting leads
(only stand-alone installation possible)
• S0 to S3: Screw-type terminal for main contacts and Cage Clamp terminal
for auxiliary connecting leads (contactor mounting and stand-alone instal-
lation possible)

3RB10/3RB12 The 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays have screw-type terminals.
The 3RB1246 electronic overload relays are equipped with a bar-type trans-
former.

Bar-type system In the case of the 3RB1246 electronic overload relays with current setting
ranges < 100 A (70 mm width), the main lines are connected in a bar-type
system. The main lines are connected through the current transformer inte-
grated in the housing at rated currents for the motor of 1.25 A to 100 A.
The advantages are:
• No additional installation costs
• No power loss at the transfer resistors of the clamping units that would
otherwise be necessary

Looping through At motor rated currents IN < 1.25 A, the motor supply leads can be fed
through the loop-through openings several times (n times) in each phase.
The set current Ie of the device is calculated as follows:
Ie = 3 x IN
Example:
IN = 0.5 A
n=3
Ie = 3 x 0.5 A = 1.5 A
n = 5 is recommended as a good upper limit in practice.
The following graphics illustrate the loop-through system:

L1 L2 L3

3
1

2
Figure 4-23: Loop-through system, 3RB1246

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-29
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Screw-type terminal The screws are captive, and the screwdriver guides allow the use of power
screwdrivers.

Cage Clamp terminal The following illustration shows a Cage Clamp terminal with the 3RU11,
using the example of frame size S2:

Figure 4-24: 3RU11: Cage Clamp terminal (frame size S2)

Conductors with a cross-section of 0.5 mm2 (with insulation stop) to

2.5 mm2 can be used.
1. Insert the screwdriver into the opening until the stop.

Note
The 8WA280 screwdriver is recommended for opening the Cage Clamp ter-
minal.

The screwdriver head automatically keeps the clamp open.

Caution
When clamping and unclamping, the screwdriver must be inserted in the
rectangular opening until the stop. You must not make any levering or tur-
ning movements, because these might break the cage clamp.

2. Insert the conductor in the oval terminal opening.

3. Remove the screwdriver.
The terminal clamp closes, and the conductor is thus securely clamped.

Connection cross-sec- You can obtain the permissible connection cross-sections for the main and
tions auxiliary connections of the overload relays from Section 4.7, "Technical
specifications".

SIRIUS System Manual

4-30 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.5.3 Circuit diagrams

Device circuit diagrams Protection of single-phase and DC motors

3RU11

NSK-7601
NSK-7600
1 3 5 1 3 5

2 4 6 2 4 6

Single-pole Two-pole
Figure 4-25: 3RU11 circuit diagrams

Circuit diagrams 3RU11 and 3RB10

RESET
RESET

STOP
STOP

TEST
TEST

NSK-7515b

1L1 3L2 5L3 95 97 1L1 3L2 5L3 95 97

NSK-7599
2T1 4T2 6T3 96 98 A2 14/22 2T1 4T2 6T3 96 98

3RU1116/3RB1016 3RB1026/3RU112 to 3RU114

Figure 4-26: 3RU11 and 3RB10 device circuit diagrams

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-31
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Connection example 3RU11

L1 L2 L3 N L1 N

F1 F3

1 3 5 A2
K1
2 4 6 A1

STOP

1 3 5 95 97 S1
F2 S2
0.2 to 4 sec.
2 4 6 96 98
Test Reset

U V W Remote reset
M1 M E1 E2
3~

Figure 4-27: Connection example for the 3RU11

In the case of single-pole loads, the 3 main conducting paths must be con-
nected in series.

Warning
In the case of an automatic reset and maintained-contact operation, the
motor restarts automatically.

Connection example 3RB10

L1 L2 L3 N L1 N

F1 F3

1 3 5 A2 13
K1
2 4 6 A1 14
STOP

1 3 5 95 97 S1
F2 S2
0.2 to 4 sec.
2 4 6 96 98
Test Reset
A2 14/22

U V W Remote reset
M1 M E1 E2
3~

Figure 4-28: Connection example for the 3RU10

SIRIUS System Manual

4-32 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

3RB12 electronic overload relays

Connection plans for L L

N N
single-phase motors

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

3RB12 3RB12

T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3

1~ 1~
M M

Figure 4-29: Connection plants for 3RB12 single-phase motors

Important
The electronic overload relays with integrated ground fault detection
(3RB12..-....2./3RB12..-....3.) are not suitable for use with single-phase
motors.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-33
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.6 Dimensioned drawings

4 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload
(dimensions in mm)relays

3RU11/3RB10/3RB12 overload relays - screw-type terminals

4.5
4,5 52
NSB00339a 1)

185

38
NSK-8631

43
148
46
47

3)
118

87

5
75
61

41

1)
2)
24

5
5
10

5 35 33 30
15,5 5 33 45 5 68 41
45 49
68
max. 161 max. 8
3SB1

Figure 4-30: 3RU11 16-..B0, (frame size S00) 3RU11 16, 3RB10 16, (frame size S00)
with accessories with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation with accessories

4,5
4.5 62 5 51
NSK-9303a NSB00341a
44
50

50
54
105
97

85

95

4
4.5
4,5

5.5
5,5

5 35 44 5 40
45 5 86 5 5.5
5,5 44
55 108 5

Figure 4-31: 3RU11 26-.B., 3RB10 26, (frame size S0) 3RU11 36-..B., 3RB10 36, (frame size S2)
with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation

79
5 7
NSK-9307b
57
62

110

5)
5

5 60 5 59
70 130 5

Figure 4-32: 3RU11 46-..B., 3RB10 46

with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation

1) Mechanical reset
2) Wire release (400 mm or 600 mm long, mounting on front or side on bracket)
3) Bracket for reset
4) Module for remote reset
5) Attachment to rail (35 mm, 15 mm depth to DIN EN 50 022 or 75 mm to DIN EN 50 023)
The clearance from grounded parts at the side must be at least 6 mm.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-34 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

g
10
h f p
Ø4.5
4,5
14
12,5
12.5

100
100
85

o
d
b

i
7.2
7,2
50 5 127.5
127,5
70
f a

NSK-7049b
k m j
e l
a n c
b
e

NSK-7048d
c
d

Figure 4-33: 3RB12 46 3RB12 5. / 3RB12 62

Overload relay a b c d e Overload relay a b c d e g h i j k l m n o p
3RB12 46-1E 15 29 24 47 – – 3RB12 53-0F 120 85 155 110 40 ∅7 42 37 125 41 20 131 7.2 13 145 4
3RB12 46-1P 10 34 29 46 48 4 3RB12 57-0K 145 85 175 105 50 ∅9 52 48 130 46 30 151 7.2 – 160 6
3RB12 46-1Q 10 34 29 46 48 4 3RB12 62-0L 230 85 190 120 70 ∅1 70 – 135 55 40 166 7.2 – 175 8

3RU11 overload relays - Cage Clamp terminal

185 4.5
4,5
148
28 4,5
4.5 17,5
17.5 46 1)

42
8

3)
92

5
75
92

75

26

NSB00344a
12

1) 5
NSK-8249

5 35 7.5
7,5 30
2) 45 5 68 41
5

15.5
15,5 7,5
7.5
5 35 5 68
45

Figure 4-34: 3RU11 16-..C1 (frame size S00)

with accessories (same construction as for frame sizes S00 to S3)

4,5
4.5 62 5 51
44

50
50

54

SIEMENS
SIEMENS

TEST
0 1
TEST
H A 0 1
85

6
97

95
105

H A
4

STOP RESET
STO P RESET
4,5

NSK-8265
4.5

NSB00346a
5,5
5.5

5 35 44
45 5 86 5 5,5
5.5 44 40
55 5 108 5

Figure 4-35: 3RU11 26-..D0 (frame size S0) 3RU11 36-..D0 (frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-35
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

5 79
NSK-8267

57
62

SIEMENS

TEST
0 1
120

H A
110

STOP RESET

5)
5

5 60 7
70 59
5 130 5

Figure 4-36: 3RU11 46-..D0 (frame size S3)

1) Mechanical reset
2) Wire release (400 mm or 600 mm long, mounted on front or side on bracket)
3) Bracket
4) Remote reset
The clearance from grounded parts at the side must be at least 6 mm.
5) Attached to rail (35 mm, 15 mm depth to DIN EN 50 022 or 75 mm to DIN EN 50 023).

SIRIUS System Manual

4-36 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.7 Technical specifications

4.7.1 3RU11 thermal overload relays

Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46

Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
General specifications
Tripped at Overload and phase loss
Tripping class In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 10
Phase loss sensitivity Yes
Overload warning No
Resetting and recovery
Resetting options after tripping Manual, remote, and automatic resetting 1)
Recovery time With automatic reset min Depends on the height of the tripping current and the tripping cha-
racteristic
With manual reset min Depends on the height of the tripping current and the tripping cha-
racteristic
With remote reset min Depends on the height of the tripping current and the tripping cha-
racteristic
Configuration
Indication of operating status on device Yes, by means of the "test function/contact position indicator" slider
Test function Yes
Reset button Yes
Stop button Yes
For the safe operation of EC special test certificate KEMA test certificate no. EX-97.Y.3235
motors with increased number in compliance DMT 98 ATEX G001
safety protection with directive 94/9/EC
Ambient temperatures
Storage/transportation °C -55 to +80
Operation °C -20 to +70
Temperature compensation °C To 60
Permissible rated current at Internal cubicle temperature of 60 °C % 100 (current reduction is required at above +60 °C)
Internal cubicle temperature of 70 °C % 87
Repetition terminals
Terminal for contactor coil Yes Not required
Auxiliary switch repetition terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529/DIN VDE 0470 IP 20 IP 202)
Part 1
Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Protected against touching by fingers
Sinus shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 810
EMC noise immunity
Conducted In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-4: kV EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays
disturbance neutralization - burst (corresponds to severity grade 3)
Conducted In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-5: kV EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays
disturbance neutralization - surge (corresponds to severity grade 3)
Electrostatic discharge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-2: kV EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays
(corresponds to severity grade 3)
Field-related disturbance neutralization In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-3: V/m EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays
(corresponds to severity grade 3)
EMC emitted interference EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays
Resistance to extreme climates % 100
(atmospheric humidity)
Site altitude m Up to 2000 above sea level; above on request
Construction type/mounting Direct Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal
mounting 3)/ bracket 4)
stand-alone instal-
lation with termi-
nal bracket

1) Remote reset in conjunction with suitable accessories 4) For screw-on and snap-on attachment to 35 mm rail
2) Terminal compartment: IP 00 degree Frame size S3 also for 75 mm rail
of protection
3) Only stand-alone installation is possible for the 3RU11 16
overload relay with the Cage Clamp terminal system.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-37
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46

Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
Main circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 1000
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 8
Rated operating voltageUe V 690 1000
Current type Direct current Yes
Alternating current Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
Current setting A 0.11 - 0.16 1.8 - 2.5 5.5 - 8 18 - 25
Up to 9 - 12 Up to 20 - 25 Up to 40 - 50 Up to 80 - 100
Power loss per device (max.) W 3.9 to 6.6 3.9 to 6 6 to 9 10 to 16.5
Short-circuit protection With fuse, without contactor See the selection and ordering data in the NSK catalog as of page 4/4
With fuse and contactor See the technical specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses/
circuit breakers for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V 500 690
main and auxiliary conducting paths IEC 60 947-1-A1
Connection of the main circuit
Connection type Screw-type ter- Screw-type ter- Screw-type ter- Screw-type ter-
minal/ minal minal minal with box
Cage Clamp with box termi- terminal 2)/bar
terminal1) nal connection
Screw-type terminal
• Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 Allen screw
4 mm
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6
• Connection cross-section Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 16)
(min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) - -
max. 2 x max. 2 x
(1 to 4) (2.5 to 10)
Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 -
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35)
mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50)
Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50)
mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70)
max. 2 x max. 2 x
(1 to 4) (2.5 to 10)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0)
AWG – – 1 x (18 to 1) 2 x (10 to 2/0)
Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm – – 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Bar connection
• Terminal screw M 6 x 20
• Tightening torque Nm 4 to 6
• Connection cross-section Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 - 2 x 70
(min./max.) Stranded with cable lug mm2 - 2 x 70
AWG cables, single-core or stranded AWG - 2/0
with cable lug
With connecting bars (max. width) mm - 12

1) For the connection cross-sections for the Cage Clamp terminal system, see "Connecting the auxiliary circuit".
2) The box terminal can be removed. After the box terminal has been removed, busbar and cable-lug connections are possible.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-38 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46

Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
Auxiliary circuit
Auxiliary contact elements (number x (variant) 1 x (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact)
Assignment of the auxiliary contact elements 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload" signal
1 NC contact for switching off the contactor
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6
Contact rating of the auxiliary contact elements
NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
• 24 V A 4
• 120 V A 4
• 125 V A 4
• 230 V A 3
• 400 V A 2
• 600V A 0.6
• 690V A 0.5
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
• 24 V A 3
• 120 V A 3
• 125 V A 3
• 230 V A 2
• 400 V A 1
• 600V A 0.6
• 690 V A 0.5
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13 Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
• 24 V A 1
• 60 V A On request
• 110 V A 0.22
• 125 V A 0.22
• 220 V A 0.11
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6
Contact reliability (suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA) Yes
Short-circuit protection
With fuse Performance class gL/gG A 6
rapid A 10
With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 6 1)
Safe isolation between auxiliary conducting paths in acc. with V 415
DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Connection type Screw-type terminal or Cage Clamp terminal
Connection characteristics Screw-type terminal Cage Clamp terminal
•Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 -
•Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 -
•Connection cross-sections Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5)
(min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 - 2 x (0.25 to 2.5)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) -
mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14)
s, u, U rating data
Auxiliary circuit Switching capacity B600, R300

1) Up to IK ≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-39
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation

Type 3RU19 16- 3RU19 26- 3RU19 36- 3RU19 46-
3AA01 3AA01 3AA01 3AA01
For overload relays 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46
Mounting type For screw-on and snap-on attachment to a 35 mm rail; frame size S3
also on 75 mm rail
Connection of the main circuit
Connection type Screw-type terminal Screw-type terminal
with box terminal
•Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 Allen screw 4
mm
•Connection cross-section Single-core mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 16)
(min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors max. 1 x max. 1 x
(up to 4) (up to 10)
Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 -
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35)
1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50)
Stranded mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50)
max. 1 x max. 1 x 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70)
(up to 4) (up to 10)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 1 x (18 to 14) 1 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0)
1 x (18 to 1) 2 x (10 to 2/0)
Ribbon cables mm - - 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
(number x width x thickness)

SIRIUS System Manual

4-40 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents of up to 70 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 VAC
Permissible short-circuit protection for motor starters consisting of an overload relay and a contactor of the coordination type "2"
Frame size S00 UL Circuit breaker for
fuse starter protection at
Adjustment range 3 kW 3RT10 15 4 kW 3RT10 16 5.5 kW 3RT10 17
Ie max = 7 A Ie max = 9 A Ie max = 12 A RK5 Iq = 50 kA / 400 VAC
(at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC)
A gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T A
0.11 to 0.16 0.5 – – 0.5 – – 0.5 – – 1 –
0.14 to 0.2 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 3RV1321-0BC10
0.18 to 0.25 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 3RV1321-0CC10
0.22 to 0.32 1.6 – 2 1.6 – 2 1.6 – 2 1 3RV1321-0DC10
0.28 to 0.4 2 – 2 2 – 2 2 – 2 1.6 3RV1321-0EC10
0.35 to 0.5 2 – 2 2 – 2 2 – 2 2 3RV1321-0FC10
0.45 to 0.63 2 – 4 2 – 4 2 – 4 2.5 3RV1321-0GC10
0.55 to 0.8 4 – 4 4 – 4 4 – 4 3 3RV1321-0HC10
0.7 to 1 4 – 6 4 – 6 4 – 6 4 3RV1321-0JC10
0.9 to 1.25 4 – 6 4 – 6 4 – 6 5 3RV1321-0KC10
1.1 to 1.6 6 – 10 6 – 10 6 – 10 6 3RV1321-1AC10
1.4 to 2 6 – 10 6 – 10 6 – 10 8 3RV1321-1BC10
1.8 to 2.5 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 –
2.2 to 3.2 10 – 16 10 – 16 10 – 16 12 –
2.8 to 4 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 –
3.5 to 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 –
4.5 to 6.3 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 25 –
5.5 to 8 20 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 20 30 –
7 to 10 20 16 20 20 16 20 40 –
9 to 12 20 16 25 45 –

Frame size S0 UL Circuit breaker for

Adjustment range 5.5 kW 3RT10 24 7.5 kW 3RT10 25 11 kW 3RT10 26 fuse starter protection at
Ie max = 12 A Ie max = 17 A Ie max = 25 A RK5 Iq = 50 kA / 400 VAC
(at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC)
A gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T A
1.8 to 2.5 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 3RV1321-1CC10
2.2 to 3.2 10 – 16 10 – 16 10 – 16 12 3RV1321-1DC10
2.8 to 4 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 3RV1321-1EC10
3.5 to 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 3RV1321-1FC10
4.5 to 6.3 20 6 25 20 6 25 20 6 25 25 3RV1321-1GC10
5.5 to 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 30 3RV1321-1HC10
7 to 10 25 16 25 25 16 25 32 16 35 40 3RV1321-1JC10
9 to 12.5 25 20 25 25 20 25 35 20 35 45 3RV1321-1KC10
11 to 16 25 20 25 25 20 25 35 20 35 60 3RV1321-4AC10
14 to 20 25 20 25 35 20 35 80 3RV1321-4BC10
17 to 22 35 20 35 80 3RV1321-4CC10
20 to 25 35 20 35 100

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-41
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents of up to 70 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 VAC

Frame size S2 UL Circuit breaker for

fuse starter protection at
Adjustment range 15 kW 3RT10 34 18.5 kW 3RT10 35 22 kW 3RT10 36
Ie max = 32 A Ie max = 40 A Ie max = 50 A RK5 Iq = 50 kA / 400 VAC
(at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC)
A gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T A
5.5 to 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 30 –
7 to 10 32 16 32 32 16 32 32 16 32 40 –
9 to 12.5 35 16 35 35 16 35 35 16 35 50 –
11 to 16 40 20 40 40 20 40 40 20 40 60 –
14 to 20 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 80 –
18 to 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100 3RV1331-4DC10
22 to 32 63 35 63 63 35 63 80 35 80 125 3RV1331-4EC10
28 to 40 63 50 63 63 50 63 80 50 80 150 3RV1331-4FC10
36 to 45 63 50 80 80 50 80 175 3RV1331-4GC10
40 to 50 80 50 80 200 3RV1331-4HC10

Frame size S3 UL fuse Circuit breaker for

RK5 starter protection at
Adjustment range 30 kW 3RT10 44 37 kW 3RT10 45 45 kW 3RT10 46
Ie max = 65 A Ie max = 80 A Ie max = 95 A Iq = 50 kA / 400 VAC
(at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC) (at 50 Hz 400 VAC)
A gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T A
18 to 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100 –
22 to 32 80 35 80 80 35 80 80 35 80 125 –
28 to 40 80 50 80 80 50 80 80 50 80 150 –
36 to 50 125 50 125 125 50 125 125 50 125 200 –
45 to 63 125 63 125 160 63 160 160 63 160 250 3RV1341-4JC10
57 to 75 160 80 160 160 80 160 300 3RV1341-4KC10
70 to 90 160 100 160 350 3RV1341-4LC10
80 to 100 160 100 160 350 3RV1341-4MC10

SIRIUS System Manual

4-42 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.7.2 3RB10 electronic overload relays

Type 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46

Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
General specifications
Tripped at Overload, phase loss, and phase imbalance
(>40% in acc. with NEMA)
Tripping class In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 10 and 20, depending on the variant
Phase loss sensitivity Yes, tripped from a warm state < 3 seconds
Overload warning no
Resetting and recovery
Resetting options after tripping Manual, remote, and automatic resetting 1)
Recovery time With automatic reset min Approx. 4
With manual reset min Immediate
With remote reset min Immediate
Configuration
Indication of operating status on device Yes, by means of the "test function/contact position indicator" slider
Test function yes
Reset button yes
Stop button yes
For the safe operation of EC special test certificate On request
motors with increased number in compliance
safety protection with directive 94/9/EC
Ambient temperatures
Storage/transportation °C -55 to +80
Operation °C -20 to +70
Temperature compensation °C Up to 70
Permissible rated current at Internal cubicle temperature of 60 °C % 100 (current reduction is required at above +60 °C)
Internal cubicle temperature of 70 °C % 100 (current reduction is required at above +60 °C)
Repetition terminals
Terminal for contactor coil Yes Not required
Auxiliary switch repetition terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529/DIN VDE 0470 IP 20 IP 202)
Part 1
Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 protected against touching by fingers
Sinus shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 8/10 and 15/11
EMC noise immunity
Conducted In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-4: kV 2
disturbance neutralization - burst (corresponds to severity grade 3)
Conducted In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-5: kV 2/1 (line to ground/line to line)
disturbance neutralization - surge (corresponds to severity grade 3)
Electrostatic discharge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-2: kV 6/8 (contact/air discharge)
(corresponds to severity grade 3)
Field-related disturbance neutralization In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-3: V/m 3 103) 10
(corresponds to severity grade 3)
EMC emitted interference Limit value class B in acc. with CISPR 11
Resistance to extreme climates % 100
(atmospheric humidity)
Dimensions See dimensioned drawings
Site altitude m Up to 2000 above sea level
Installation position Any
Construction type/mounting Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal bracket 4)

1) Remote reset in conjunction with suitable accessories 4) For screw-on and snap-on attachment to 35 mm rail
2) Terminal compartment: IP 00 degree Frame size S3 also for 75 mm rail
of protection
3) For the setting ranges 0.1 to 0.4 A, 0.4 to 1.6 A, and 1.5 to 6 A,
it is 3 V/m.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-43
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Type 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46

Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
Main circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 1000
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 8
Rated operating voltageUe V 690 1000
Current type Direct current No
Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz ± 3 (other frequencies on request)
Current setting A 0.1 - 0.4 0.1 - 0.4 6 - 25 13 - 50
Up to 3 - 12 Up to 6 - 25 Up to 13 - 50 Up to 25 - 100
Power loss per device (max.) W Approximately
0.5
Short-circuit protection With fuse, without contactor See the selection and ordering data in the NSK catalog as of page 4/4
With fuse and contactor See the technical specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses
for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V On request
main and auxiliary conducting paths IEC 60 947-1-A1
Connection of the main circuit
Connection type Screw-type terminal Screw-type ter- Screw-type ter-
minal minal with box
with box termi- terminal 1)/bar
nal connection
Screw-type terminal
•Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 Allen screw
4 mm
•Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6
•Connection cross-sections Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 16)
(min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) - -
max. 2 x max. 2 x
(1 to 4) (2.5 to 10)
Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 -
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35)
mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50)
Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50)
mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70)
max. 2 x max. 2 x
(1 to 4) (2.5 to 10)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0)
AWG – – 1 x (18 to 1) 2 x (10 to 2/0)
Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm – – 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Bar connection
•Terminal screw M 6 x 20
•Tightening torque Nm 4 to 6
•Connection cross-section Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 - 2 x 70
(min./max.) Stranded with cable lug mm2 - 2 x 70
AWG cables, single-core or stranded AWG - 2/0
with cable lug
With connecting bars (max. width) mm - 12
1) The box terminal can be removed. After the box terminal has been removed, busbar and cable-lug connections are possible.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-44 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

3RB10 electronic overload relays

Type 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46
Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
Auxiliary circuit
Auxiliary contact elements (number x (variant) 1 x (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact)
Assignment of the auxiliary contact elements 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload" signal
1 NC contact for switching off the contactor
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6
Contact rating of the auxiliary contact elements
NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
• 24 V A 4
• 120 V A 4
• 125 V A 4
• 230 V A 3
• 400 V A 2
• 600V A 1
• 690V A 1
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
• 24 V A 4
• 120 V A 4
• 125 V A 4
• 230 V A 3
• 400 V A 2
• 600V A 1
• 690 V A 1
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
• 24 V A 1
• 60 V A 0.22
• 110 V A 0.22
• 125 V A 0.22
• 220 V A 0.11
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6
Contact reliability (suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA) yes
Short-circuit protection
With fuse Performance class gL/gG A 6
rapid A 10
With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 6 1)
Safe isolation between auxiliary conducting paths in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V 300
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Connection type Screw-type terminal
Connection characteristics
•Terminal screw Pozidriv 2
•Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2
•Connection cross-sections Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
(min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors mm2 2 x (0.75 to
2.5)
Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 -
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
mm2 2 x (0.75 to
2.5)
Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
mm2 2 x (0.75 to
2.5)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14)
s, u, U rating data
Auxiliary circuit Switching capacity B600, R300

1) Up to IK ≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-45
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA at 690 VAC
690 V 415 V 600 V
Overload relay Contactor CLASS Fuse links1)
Adjustment range 10 20 NH Type 3NA NH British
Rated operating current Ie DIAZED Type 5SB Type 3ND Standard UL-listed
fuses
AC-3 in A at NEOZED Type 5SE Fuses
Performance class gL/gG aM BS88, CLASS
Coordination type2) Type T
R K5
Type Type 400 500 690 400 500 690 "1" "2" "2" "1" "2"
V V V V V V
Frame size S00
0.1 A to 0.4 A 3RT10 153) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 25 2 25 2 1.6
3RB10 16
0.4 A to 1.6 A 3RT10 153) 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 25 6 35 6 6
3RB10 16
1.5 A to 6 A 3RT10 153) 6 5 4 6 5 4 35 20 35 20 25
3RB10 16 3RT10 173) 6 6 6 6 6 6 35 20 35 20
3 A to 12 A 3RT10 173) 12 9 6.3 10 6 6.3 35 20 35 25 45
3RB10 16
Frame size S0
0.1 A to 0.4 A 3RT10 243) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 63 2 63 2 1.6
0.4 A to 1.6 A 3RT10 243) 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 63 6 63 6 6
1.5 A to 6 A 3RT10 243) 6 6 6 6 6 6 63 25 20 63 25 25
3 A to 12 A 3RT10 243) 12 12 12 12 12 12 63 25 20 63 25 45
3RB10 26
6 A to 25 A 3RT10 243) 12 12 12 12 12 12 63 25 20 63 25 70
3RB10 26 3RT10 253) 17 17 13 16 16 13 63 25 20 63 25 70
3RT10 263) 25 18 13 16 16 13 100 35 20 63 25 100
Frame size S2
6 A to 25 A 3RT10 343) 25 25 25 22 22 22 125 63 50 125 63 100
3RB10 36 3RT10 353) 25 25 25 25 25 25 125 63 50 125 63 100
13 A to 50 A 3RT10 343) 32 32 31 22 22 22 125 63 50 125 63 125
3RB10 36 3RT10 353) 40 40 40 29 29 29 125 63 50 125 80 150
3RT10 363) 50 50 40 32 32 33 160 80 50 125 80 200
Frame size S3
13 A to 50 A 3RT10 443) 50 50 50 49 49 49 250 100 63 250 100 200
3RB10 46 3RT10 453) 50 50 50 50 50 50 250 100 80 250 100 200
25 A to 100 A 3RT10 443) 65 65 57 49 49 49 250 125 63 250 125 250
3RB10 46 3RT10 453) 80 80 80 53 53 53 250 160 80 250 160 350
3RT10 463) 95 95 95 59 59 59 250 160 100 250 160 350
1) Please note the operating voltage.
2) Assignment and short-circuit facilities in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 660 Part 102
Coordination type "1": Contactors or starters must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit. They do not have to be suitable for
further operation without repair and part replacement.
Coordination type "2": Contactors or starters must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit and must be suitable for further use.
There is a danger of contact welding.
3) Mounting on the contactor is possible after removal of the box terminal block.

SIRIUS System Manual

4-46 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

4.7.3 3RB12 electronic overload relays

Type 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62
Width 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm 230 mm
General specifications
Tripped at Overload, phase loss, phase imbalance (>40% in acc. with NEMA),
ground fault, and operation of thermistor motor protection1)
Tripping class In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30; adjustable by means of a 6-way rotary
switch
Phase loss sensitivity Yes
Overload warning Yes, as of 1.5 x Ie given a symmetric load, and as of 0.85 x Ie given an
asymmetric load
Resetting and recovery
Resetting options after tripping Manual, remote, and automatic resetting 1)
Recovery time With automatic reset min When tripped by overcurrent: 5 (stored permanently)
When tripped by thermistor: time until the motor temperature 5K
sinks under the operating temperature
When tripped by ground fault: no automatic reset
With manual reset min When tripped by overcurrent: 5 (stored permanently)
When tripped by thermistor: time until the motor temperature 5K
sinks under the operating temperature
When tripped by ground fault: immediate
With remote reset min When tripped by overcurrent: 5 (stored permanently)
When tripped by thermistor: time until the motor temperature 5K
sinks under the operating temperature
When tripped by ground fault: immediate
Configuration
Indication of operating status on device Yes, with 3 LEDs; green "Ready" LED, red "Overload" LED, and red
"Ground fault" LED 2)
Test function Yes, with combined TEST/RESET button 2)
Reset button Yes, with combined TEST/RESET button 2)
Stop button Yes, with combined TEST/RESET button 2)
For the safe operation of motors with EC special test certificate number in PTB 01 ATEX 3220
increased safety protection compliance with directive 94/9/EC
Ambient temperatures
Storage/transportation °C -40 to +80
Operation °C -25 to +70
Temperature compensation °C Up to 70
Permissible rated current at Internal cubicle temperature of 60 °C % 100 (current reduction is not required at above +60 °C)
Internal cubicle temperature of 70 °C % 100 (current reduction is not required at above +60 °C)
Repetition terminals
Terminal for contactor coil Not required
Auxiliary switch repetition terminal Not required
Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529/DIN VDE 0470 IP 20 (≤ 100 A max. set current Ie
Part 1 IP 00 (≤ 100 A max. set current Ie
Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Protected Protected against finger touch with cover
against finger
touch
Sinus shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 15/11
EMC noise immunity
Conducted In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-4: kV 2
disturbance neutralization - burst (corresponds to severity grade 3)
Conducted In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-5: kV 2
disturbance neutralization - surge (corresponds to severity grade 3)
Electrostatic discharge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-2: kV 8
(corresponds to severity grade 3)
Field-related disturbance neutralization In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-3: V/m 10
(corresponds to severity grade 3)
EMC emitted interference Limit value class B in acc. with EN 55 011
Resistance to extreme climates % 100
(atmospheric humidity)
Dimensions See dimensioned drawings
Site altitude m Up to 2000 above sea level
Construction type/mounting Stand-alone Direct mounting/stand-alone installation without addi-
installation3) tional terminal bracket 4)
1) Tripped at ground fault only in the case of devices with the order number suffi- 3) Snap-on attachment to 35 mm rail or screw-on attachment with
xes 20 and 30 or in conjunction with the external summation current transformer accessories
2) For a detailed explanation, see "Description". 4) For screw-on attachment

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-47
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Type 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62

Width 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm 230 mm

Main circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 (for bare/ 1000
uninsulated
conductors)
1000 (for insula-
ted conductors)
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 8
Rated operating voltage Ue V 690 1000
Current type Direct current No
Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz
Current setting A 1.25 - 6.3 50 - 205 125 - 500 200 - 820
Up to 25 - 100
Power loss per device (max.) W Approx. 2
Short-circuit protection With fuse, without contactor See the selection and ordering data in the NSK catalog as of page 4/4
With fuse and contactor See the technical specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses
for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V Up to 690 V Up to 690
main and auxiliary conducting paths IEC 60 947-1-A1 (using main cir-
cuit cables with
an impulse with-
stand voltage of
6 kV)
Connection of the main circuit
Connection type Bar-type trans- Bar connection
former connec-
tion
Screw-type terminal
• Terminal screw -
• Tightening torque Nm -
• Connection cross-section Single-core mm2 -
(min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 -
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 -
mm2 -
Stranded mm2 -
mm2 -
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG -
AWG -
Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm -
Bar connection
• Terminal screw - M8 M10 M 10 or M 12
• Tightening torque Nm - 10 to 14 14 to 24 14 to 24 (with
M10)
20 to 25 (with
M12)
• Connection cross-section Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 - 35 to 95 50 to 240
(min./max.) Stranded with cable lug mm2 - 50 to 120 70 to 240 185 to 240
AWG cables, single-core or stranded AWG - 1/0 to 250 kcmil 2/0 to 500 kcmil 2/0 to 500 kcmil
with cable lug
With connecting bars (max. width) mm - 20 x 4 30 x 6 40 x 8
Bar-type transformer connection
• Opening diameter mm 10 (devices ≤ -
25 A max. set
current Ie)
15 (devices with
max. 100 A set
current Ie)

• Conductor cross-section NYY mm2 - -

• H07RN-F 10/16 -

SIRIUS System Manual

4-48 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Type 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62

Width 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm 230 mm

Auxiliary circuit
Auxiliary contact elements: number x (variant) 2 x (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact)
Assignment of the auxiliary contact elements 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload and/or thermistor" signal
1 NC contact for tripping the contactor
1 NO contact for the "tripped by ground fault" signal
1 NC contact for tripping the contactor
Or1)
1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload and/or thermistor and/or
ground fault" signal
1 NC contact for switching off the contactor
1 NO contact for the "tripped by ground fault" signal
1 NC contact for tripping the contactor
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 300
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 4
Contact rating of the auxiliary contact elements
NC contact with alternating current AC- Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
14/AC-15
• 24 V A 6
• 120 V A 6
2
• 125 V A )
• 230 V A 3
• 400 V A 1.5
• 600V A 2)

• 690V A 2)

NO contact with alternating current Rated operational current Ie at Ue:

AC-14/AC-15
• 24 V A 6
• 120 V A 6
• 125 V A 2)

• 230 V A 3
• 400 V A 1.5
• 600 V A 2)

2
• 690 V A )
NC contact, NO contact with direct cur- Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
rent DC-13
• 24 V A 2
• 60 V A 0.55
• 110 V A 0.25
• 125 V A 0.25
• 220 V A 0.14
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6
Contact reliability 2)
(suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA)
Short-circuit protection
With fuse Performance class gL/gG A 6
flink A 10
With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 1.63)
Safe isolation between auxiliary conducting paths V 300
in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 4-49
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays

Connection of the auxiliary circuit

Connection type Screw-type terminal
Connection characteristics
•Terminal screw Pozidriv 2
•Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2
•Connection cross-sections Single-core mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4)
(min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
Finely stranded without wire end fer- mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5)
rule
mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5)
mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
Stranded mm2 -
AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG Without wire end ferrule
2 x (20 to 14)
1 x (20 to 12)
With wire end ferrule:
2 x (20 to 15)
1 x (20 to 14)
s, u, U rating data
Auxiliary circuit Switching capacity B600, R300

1) The assignment of the auxiliary contact elements depends on the order number suffix
2) On request
3) Up to IK ≤ 1000 A

SIRIUS System Manual

4-50 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB12 and 3UF50
Overload relay Contactor CLASS 690 V 415 V 600 V
Overload relay Contactor CLASS Fuse links1)
Adjustment range 5 and 10 15 20 25 30 NH Type 3NA NH British UL-listed
Rated operating current Ie DIAZED Type 5SB Type 3ND standards fuses
AC-3 in A at NEOZED Type 5SE fuses
Performance class gL (gG) aM BS88 RK5
Coordination type 2) Type T
(Type) 400 500 690 V 400 500 690 V 400 500 690 V 400 500 690 V 400 500 690 V 1 2 2 2
V V V V V V V V V V
1.25 - 6.3 A

SIRIUS System Manual

3RB1246-1P 3RT1015 6.3 5 4 6.3 5 4 6.3 5 4 6.3 5 4 6.3 5 4 35 20 - 20 25

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b

3RT1016 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2 35 20 - 20 25
3RT1017 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 35 20 - 20 25
6.3 - 25 A
3RB1246-1Q 3RT1015 7 --- --- 7 --- --- 7 --- --- 7 --- --- 7 --- --- 35 20 - 20 60
3RT1016 9 6.5 --- 9 6.5 --- 9 6.5 --- 9 6.5 --- 9 6.5 --- 35 20 - 20 60
3RT1017 12 9 6.3 11 9 6.3 10 9 6.3 9.5 9 6.3 9 9 6.3 35 20 - 20 60
3RT1024 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 63 25 20 25 70
3RT1025 17 17 13 17 17 13 16 16 13 15 15 13 14 14 13 63 25 20 25 70
3RT1026 25 18 13 18 18 13 16 16 13 15 15 13 14 14 13 100 25 20 25 100
3RT1034 25 25 25 25 25 25 22.3 22.3 22.3 20.3 20.3 20.3 19.1 19.1 19.1 125 63 50 63 100
3RT1035 - - - - - - 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 125 63 50 63 100
25 - 100 A
3RB1246-1E 3RT1034 32 32 – 25 25 - - - - - - - - - - 125 63 50 63 125
3RT1035 40 40 - 33 33 – 29 29 – 28 28 - 26 26 125 63 50 63 150
3RT1036 50 50 – 38 38 – 32 32 – 29 29 – 26 26 – 160 80 50 80 200
3RT1044 65 65 47 56 56 47 49 49 47 45 45 45 41 41 41 250 125 63 125 250
3RT1045 80 80 58 61 61 58 53 53 58 47 47 47 45 45 45 250 160 80 160 250
3RT1046 95 95 58 69 69 58 59 59 58 53 53 53 50 50 50 250 160 100 160 350
50 - 205 A
3RB1253-0F 3RT1054 115 115 115 93 93 93 81 81 81 74 74 74 69 69 69 355 315 160 250 450
3RT1055 150 150 150 121 121 121 106 106 106 97 97 97 90 90 90 355 315 200 315 500
3RT1056 185 185 185 149 149 149 131 131 131 120 120 120 111 111 111 355 315 200 315 500
125 - 500 A
3RB1257-0K 3RT1064 225 225 225 182 182 182 159 159 159 146 146 146 135 135 135 500 400 250 - 700
3RT1065 265 265 265 214 214 214 188 188 188 172 172 172 159 159 159 500 400 315 - 800
3RT1066 300 300 280 243 243 243 213 213 213 195 195 195 180 180 180 500 400 315 - 800
3RT1075 400 400 400 324 324 324 284 284 84 260 260 260 240 240 240 630 400 400 - 800
3RT1076 500 500 450 405 405 405 355 355 355 325 325 325 300 300 300 630 500 500 - 1200
3RT1264 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 193 193 193 173 173 173 500 500 400 - 800
3RT1265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 227 227 227 204 204 204 500 500 400 - 800
3RT1266 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 258 258 258 231 231 231 500 500 400 - 800
3RT1275 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 344 344 344 308 308 308 800 800 630 - 1200
3RT1276 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 430 430 430 385 385 385 800 800 630 - 1200
3TF68 500 500 500 500 500 500 440 440 440 408 408 408 376 376 376 800 5003) 630 500 1200
3TF69 - - - - - - 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 800 6303) 630 500 2000
200 - 820 A
3RB1262-0L 3TF68 4) 630 630 630 502 502 502 440 440 440 408 408 408 376 376 376 1000 5003) 630 500 1200
3TF69 4) 820 820 820 662 662 662 572 572 572 531 531 531 500 500 500 1250 6303) 630 630 2000

1) Please note the operating voltage 2) Assignment and short-circuit facilities in acc. with IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 660 Part 102
3) Please ensure that the safety clearance between the max. 3 AC ope- Coordination type "1": The contactor or starter must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit. They do not have
rating current and the fuse rated current is maintained. to be suitable for further operation without repair and part replacement.
4) Mounting onto contactor possible Coordination type "2": The contactor or starter must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit and must be sui-
table for further operation. There is a danger of contact welding.

4-51
3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays
 5
3RA1 fuseless load feeders
Section Subject Page

5.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 5-2

5.2 Device description 5-3

5.2.1 Mounting systems 5-4

5.2.2 Kits for self-assembly 5-5

5.2.3 Complete devices 5-5

5.3 Application and areas of use 5-7

5.4 Accessories 5-8

5.4.1 Accessories for the individual devices 5-8

Accessories specifically for the SIRIUS

5.4.2 5-8
SIRIUS 3RA1 fuseless load feeder

5.4.3 Instructions for self-assembly 5-9

5.5 Mounting and connection 5-18

5.5.1 Mounting 5-18

5.5.2 Connection 5-21

5.5.3 Circuit diagrams 5-23

5.6 Dimensioned drawings 5-24

5.7 Technical specifications 5-28

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-1
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals
Coordination types

The fuseless load feeders are manufactured and tested in acc. with IEC
60947 Part 1 and Part 2.
An important selection criterion for the fuseless load feeders are the coordi-
nation types.
IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 draws a distinction between two
coordination types, known as coordination type 1 and coordination type 2.
They describe what happens at a short circuit and the device status after a
short circuit. In both coordination types, the short circuit to be dealt with is
reliably disconnected. There must be no damage to systems or injury to per-
sons. The differences lie only in the degree to which the device is damaged
after the short circuit.

Coordination type 1 The fuseless load feeder can be inoperable after each short-circuit discon-
nection. Damage to the contactor and the circuit breaker is permissible.

Coordination type 2 After a short-circuit disconnection, there must not be any damage to the
overload release or any other part. The 3RA1 fuseless load feeder can be put
into operation again without the need for replacement. Only welding of the
contactor contacts is permissible if they can be separated easily without any
significant deformation.

Approvals/test reports All the approvals and test certificates of the individual devices used in the
feeders are valid.

SIRIUS System Manual

5-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.2 Device descriptions

Fuseless load feeders are combinations of devices consisting of a circuit
breaker for overload and short-circuit protection and a contactor for normal
switching duty.
The 3RA fuseless feeders of SIRIUS are used to switch loads of up to 100 A
and protect them against overload and short circuits.
The feeders always consist of a SIRIUS 3R circuit breaker for motor protec-
tion (3RV) and a motor contactor (3RT).
The different devices can be set up separately and connected electrically by
means of cables. It is simpler to connect the circuit breakers and contactors
mechanically and electrically using ready-made kits.
The circuit breaker and contactor in the combination must be compatible
with each other. It is not permissible to combine contactors and circuit
breakers that are not compatible.
The combinations described below have been tested individually in order to
verify that the specified performance data are correct.
The 3RV circuit breaker provides overload and short-circuit protection;
upstream protective devices are not required for short-circuit currents of up
to 50 kA / 400 V.
The 3RT contactor takes on the normal switching of loads.
Depending on which device combination is selected, coordination type "1" or
"2" is reached.
Coordination type "2", which is the more stringent test, always includes
coordination type "1".
The specifications apply to direct starters and reversing starters.

Device variants The fuseless load feeders can be set up in 4 frame sizes:
• Frame size S00: width 45 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to
0.75 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and 5.5 kW / 400 V, coordination
type "1"
• Frame size S0: width 45 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to
7.5 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and 11 kW / 400 V, coordination type
"1"
• Frame size S2: width 55 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to
22 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and coordination type "1"
• Frame size S3: width 70 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to
45 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and coordination type "1"

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-3
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.2.1 Mounting systems

The possible types of mounting are as follows:

• On a 35 mm rail in acc. with DIN EN 50 022
• Screw-on attachment by means of the attachment openings integrated in
the rail adapter
• On busbar systems with a busbar center-to-center clearance of 40 mm or
60 mm
The following illustrations show the adapters for rail and busbar mounting:
Rail adapter Busbar adapter

Figure 5-1: Rail adapter/busbar adapter

SIRIUS System Manual

5-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.2.2 Mounting kits for self-assembly

Because SIRIUS is a modular system, the standard devices fit together opti-
mally both mechanically and electrically. The fuseless load feeders can
therefore be assembled quickly and easily in all four frame sizes. To this end,
the circuit breaker and the contactor are connected to the corresponding kit.

Kits There are kits for reversing feeders for mounting on:
• Rail, frame sizes S0, S2, S3: mounting kit for reversing operation
frame size S00: wiring kit for reversing operation
• Busbars, frame sizes S00, S0, S2: mounting kit for reversing operation
The following illustration shows how to assemble the fuseless load feeder
of frame size S00 for reversing operation and rail mounting:

7 6
4
5
Adapter
(3RA1911-1A)

1
2

Figure 5-2: Self-assembly of a fuseless load feeder (frame size S00)

5.2.3 Complete devices

The fuseless load feeders are also available fully assembled:

• Up to 22 kW in the case of direct starters
• Up to 11 kW in the case of reversing starters

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-5
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

Control supply voltage For control voltages of:

• 230 VAC / 50 Hz
• 24 VDC

Self-assembly on rails or busbar systems is recommended for other control

voltages.

Auxiliary contact ele- • Direct feeders

ments The contactors of frame size S00 contain a free normally open contact
• Reversing feeders
S00/S0: electrical and mechanical interlocking

SIRIUS System Manual

5-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.3 Application and areas of use

The fuseless load feeders can be used in electrical installations wherever
combinations of fuses, contactors, and overload relays have been used up
to now. The greater functionality of the circuit breaker over fuses, and their
suitability as emergency-stop and disconnecting switches, means that many
requirements can be met more easily with a fuseless load feeder.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-7
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.4 Accessories
5.4.1 Accessories for the individual devices

The accessories for the individual devices can also be used in the load
feeder.
You will find information on the accessories of the contactors in Chapter 3,
"Contactors" (Section 3.4, "Accessories").

You will find information on the accessories of the circuit breakers in

Chapter 2, "Circuit breakers" (Section 2.4, "Accessories").

5.4.2 Accessories specifically for the SIRIUS 3RA fuseless load feeder

The following accessories facilitate the setup and wiring of the fuseless load
feeder:

Accessory Description

Auxiliary switch for the circuit • Transverse and connectable from

breaker above
• 1 changeover contact, 1 normally
open contact +
1 normally closed contact or 2 nor-
mally open contacts
Auxiliary switch blocks for the Snap-on and connectable from below
contactor
Link modules • Provide electrical connections
between circuit breakers and link
modules
• Also provide a mechanical connec-
tion in frame sizes S00 and S0
Wiring kits • Electrical and mechanical connec-
tion for reversing combinations
• The wiring kit can be combined with
the link module
• In the case of frame size S00, the
wiring module contains integrated
cables for electrical interlocking
Table 5-1: Fuseless load feeder, accessories

SIRIUS System Manual

5-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.4.3 Instructions for self-assembly

Fuseless load feeder for rail mounting

Assembly The following illustration and the table below it show how to assemble the
fuseless load feeder:
• Rail mounting
• Frame size S00
• Reversing operation

7 6
4
5
3RA1911-1A

1
2

Figure 5-3: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame size S00)

Step Procedure
1 Hook the back of the right contactor of the contactor combi-
nation onto the link module
2 With a tilting movement, insert the connecting pins of the link
module into the upper terminal openings of the contactor
3 Tighten the upper terminal screws of the contactor
4 Hook the link module onto the back of the circuit breaker
5 With a tilting movement, insert the connecting pins of the link
module into the lower terminal openings of the circuit breaker
6 Tighten the lower terminal screws of the circuit breaker
7 Snap the circuit breaker and thus the feeder onto the rail
Table 5-2: Self-assembly of the reversing starter for rail (frame size S00)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-9
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder:
• Rail mounting
• Frame sizes S00 to S3
• Direct starters
S00 S0

7 7
4 6 4 6
5
5
1 3RA1911-1A 1 3RA1921-1.
2
2

3
3

S2 S3 3RA1942-1A
3RA1932-1A

1 1

3RA1931-1. 1
1
2 2 3RA1941-1.
4
4 3
3 5
5

4 4
Figure 5-4: Self-assembly, rail, direct starter (frame sizes S00 to S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

5-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder:
• Rail mounting
• Frame sizes S00 with Cage Clamp terminal system
Direct starter

6
4
3RA1911-2E 3
5

5b
5a
5c
Figure 5-5: Self-assembly, rail, direct starter (frame size S00, Cage Clamp)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-11
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder:
• Rail adapter
• Reversing operation
• Frame size S0

3RA1924-2B 3
2
1

Kit
3RA1923-1B

4 3

4
6 (4x)
7

12
8
7 3RA1921-1.

10 11

Figure 5-6: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame size S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

5-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder:
• Rail adapter
• Reversing operation
• Frame size S2 (assembly of frame size S3 is analogous)

3 4
2
1

Kits 3RA1924-2B
S2: 3RA1933-1B
S3: 3RA1943-1B

4
5 S2: 4X
S3: 6X
7
8 9
6

8
11
5 9
10 3RA1931-1.
3RA1941-1.
12
14
13

14
14 14

Figure 5-7: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame sizes S2 and S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-13
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

Fuseless feeders for busbar mounting

5 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

There are kits available for reversing operation for frame sizes S00 to S2.
The fuseless load feeders of frame size S3 are not suitable for busbar
mounting.
Direct starters of frame The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder:
sizes S00 to S2 • Busbar adapter
• Direct starters
• Frame sizes S00 to S2
S00 S0
8US1
8US1

5 5

1
1
110

125

3RA1911-1A
3RA1921-1.
3 2 3
3
3 2
4
4
S2
8US1

2
3RA1931-1.
4
3
4 5

Figure 5-8: Self-assembly, busbars, direct starters (frame sizes S00 and S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

5-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder:
• Busbar adapter
• Direct starters
• Frame sizes S00 and S0 with Cage Clamp terminal system

6
1 8

5
4

7
3 3

7b
7a
7c

3 4 5

3RA1911-2E 1

1b

1a
1c
Figure 5-9: Self-assembly, busbars, direct starters (frame size S00/S0, Cage Clamp)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-15
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

Reversing operation of The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder:
frame sizes S00 to S2 • Busbar adapter
• Reversing operation
• Frame sizes S00 to S2
S00

5
Kit 3RA1913-1.

3RA1911-1A
3 2
3

S0

55

5
Kit 3RA1923-1.

1
3RA1921-1.
3
6
3 2
3 4

3RA1924-2B

Figure 5-10: Self-assembly, busbars, reversing operation (frame sizes S00 and S0)

SIRIUS System Manual

5-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

S2

Kit 3RA1933-1.

2
3RA1931-1.

4
4
3
5

4
3RA1904-2B

Figure 5-11: Self-assembly, busbars, reversing operation (frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-17
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.5 Mounting and connection

5.5.1 Mounting

Snap-on attachment

The fuseless load feeders can be snapped onto a 35 mm rail in acc. with
DIN EN 50 022.

Rail mounting without The fuseless direct feeders of frame sizes S00 and S0 and reversing feeders
adapter S00 can be snapped onto the rail without an adapter with the circuit breaker.
No tools are required for either mounting or removal.
A rail adapter is available as an accessory for frame sizes S00/S0. The
reversing feeders of frame sizes S2/S3 are mounted with a rail adapter.

Rail mounting with To mount frame sizes S2 and S3 and reversing feeders S0 on a rail, adapters
adapter must be used for stability reasons. These are available as accessories. To
remove them, the rail adapter is unlocked with a screwdriver. You will find
information on this in Section 2.5.1 on how to mount circuit breakers.
All feeders can be mounted with a rail adapter.

SIRIUS System Manual

5-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

Screw-on attachment

Screw-on attachment is implemented in the case of sizes S00 and S0 by

means of push-in lugs (see Section 2.4 for information on circuit-breaker
accessories).
In the case of sizes S2 and S3, the holes for screw-on attachment are inte-
grated in the mandatory rail adapter.
The following illustration shows screw-on attachment by means of push-in
lugs in the case of the fuseless load feeder of frame size S00:.
3RA1900-0B

4 6

1
2

Figure 5-12: Screw-on attachment, fuseless load feeder (frame size S00)

Important
In the case of screw-on attachment without a rail adapter, the feeder must
not be screwed onto a conductive surface. Insulation is necessary so that, in
the event of a short circuit of the circuit breaker, there is no short circuit to
the base plate.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-19
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

Busbar mounting

The following illustrations show busbar mounting and

removal of the fuseless load feeders S00 to S2.

S00 (S0): Mounting S00 (S0): Removal

10 mm

8US1.51-5DM07

S2: Mounting Removal of the extension piece

8US1.61-5FP08
2

1
2

Figure 5-13: Busbar system, mounting/removal (frame sizes S00 to S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

5-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.5.2 Connection 5 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

The fuseless load feeders are available with the SIGUT terminal system.
Conductor cross-sections

The following table gives the permissible conductor cross-sections for fuse-
less load feeders. The specifications apply to main and auxiliary connec-
tions.

Frame sizes S00 and S0:

S00 S0
A1/A2; NO/NC A1/A2; NO/NC L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3
T1 T2 T3
0.8 to 1.2 Nm 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 2 to 2.5 Nm
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 7 to 10.3 lb.in 18 to 22 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²)
10 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²)

AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10)

Table 5-3: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S00/S0)

Frame size S2:

S2
A1/A2; NO/NC L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
0.8 to 1.2 Nm 3 to 4.5 Nm
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in ∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 27 to 40 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 13
2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²)
1 x (0.75 to 25 mm²)
13 2 x (0.75 to 25 mm²)
---- ----
1 x (0.75 to 35 mm²)
2 x (18 to 3)
AWG 2 x (18 to 14) AWG
1 x (18 to 2)

Table 5-4: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S2)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-21
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

Frame size S3:

S3
A1/A2; NO/NC L1, L2, L3
T1,T2,T3

0.8 to 1.2 Nm min

22 4 to 6 Nm
4
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 35 to 53 lb.in
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 17
2 x (2.5 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
10 17 2 x (2.5 to 35 mm²)
2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²)
1 x (2.5 to 50 mm²)
17 2 x (10 to 50 mm²)
---- ----
1 x (10 to 70 mm²)
2 x (10 to 1/0)
AWG 2 x (18 to 14) AWG
1 x (10 to 2/0)

Table 5-5: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

5-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.5.3 Circuit diagrams

Direct starters
S00 S0 to S3
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 NO/21 NC A1 1L1 3L2 5L3

I»I»I» I»I»I»

A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 NO/22 NC A2 2T1 4T2 6T3

Figure 5-14: Circuit diagrams, direct starters (frame sizes S00 to S3)
Reversing starters
S00 S0 to S3
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3

I» I» I» I» I» I»
2 4 6 2 4 6

21 NC NC
21 NC NC
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 122 A1 1 3 5 111
K1 K2 K1 K2
A2 2 4 6 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 2 4 6

121 110

2T1 4T2 6T3 22 NC A2 22 NC 2T1 4T2 6T3 NC A2 NC

Figure 5-15: Circuit diagrams, reversing starters (frame sizes S00 to S3)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-23
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm)

3RA1 fuseless load feeders - frame size S00 for rail

70
30 10 67.5
67,5 10
6 14 5 27.5
27,5
1)

8
20
5
8

45

SIEMENS

0 I

0 I

163
163

159

SIEMENS SIEMENS

NSK-8165
SIEMENS
NSK-8164

59 40
7.5 6.5
6,5 90
59 7,5
6.5
6,5 45 51

Figure 5-16: 3RA11 10-..A.. for direct-on-line starting 3RA12 10-..A.. for reversing operation
1) Space above the arc chute
Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm

3RA1 fuseless load feeders - frame size S00

for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems

1)
13 21
48

SIEMENS SIEMENS
60

0 I 0 I
203
159
203
159

60

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

NSK-8167
NSK-8166

59 27 82 59
6.5 6.5
6,5 90
6,5 45 98
101

Figure 5-17: 3RA11 10-..C.., 3RA11 10-..D.. for direct-on-line starting 3RA12 10-..C.., 3RA12 10-..D.. for reversing operation
1) Space above the arc chute
Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

5-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

3RA1 fuseless load feeders - frame size S0 for rail

106
14 91 8 14 7 5 49
8 14 10 5 33
1)

5
22
30

1)
5

39
45

SIEMENS SIEMENS
2) 2)

104
185
178
183

199

125
SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS
5
NSK-8168

NSK-8169
6

7.5 3)
6 5 28 7,5
45 39 8 10 6 55
14
61
55 77
86 7.5
DC 96 7,5 100 102
DC 112

Figure 5-18: 3RA11 20-..A.. for direct-on-line starting 3RA12 20-..B.. for reversing operation
1) Space above the arc chute
2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm
3) Attached using two 35 mm rails with a depth of 7.5 mm in acc. with EN 50 022 or one 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 023.
Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm

3RA1 fuseless load feeders - frame size S0

for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems
23

1)
26
13

2)
2)
48

SIEMENS
SIEMENS
b)
209

211
183

185

SIEMENS
SIEMENS SIEMENS
NSK 8170b

NSK 8171b

28 27 70
8 10 6
8 6 92
14 117 14
45 100
121
DC 127

Figure 5-19: 3RA11 20-..C.., 3RA11 20-..D.. for direct-on-line starting 3RA1220-..C.., 3RA1120-..D.. for reversing operation
1) Space above the arc chute
2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm
Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-25
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

3RA1 fuseless load feeders - frame size S2 for rail

168
79 10 17 77
10 17 5
NSK-8172b

40
1)
39

NSK-8173
40
104

SIEMENS
SIEMENS 2)
2)
125

260
260

270
270

SIEMENS SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3)

10 17.5
17,5
5

78 17 10 60
18 87 8 65
55 134 120
DC 149
Figure 5-20: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S2) 3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S2)
1) Space above the arc chute
2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm
3) Attached using two 35 mm rails with a depth of 7.5 mm in acc. with EN 50 022 or one 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 023.
Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm

3RA1 fuseless load feeders - frame size S0

for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems

1)
1)
34
14
53

SIEMENS
2)
SIEMENS

2)
259

259
309

309

SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS
NSK-8174

NSK-8175

7 18 18 68
17 28 95 10
10 55 142 10 17.5
17,5
DC 157 120
176
Figure 5-21: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S0) 3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S0)
1) Space above the arc chute
2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm
Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

5-26 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

3RA1 fuseless load feeders - frame size S3 for rail

12 23 8
111
12 23

1)
60

60
5

5
40
4)
4)
100

SIEMENS
2)
SIEMENS
2)
125
330
310
320

330
320
3)

SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS
NSK-8200

NSK-8176
78 23 12 72
23 111
70 160 78 80 55
DC 173 150
195

Figure 5-22: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S3) 3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S3)
1) Space above the arc chute
2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm
3) Attached using two 35 mm rails with a depth of 7.5 mm in acc. with EN 50 022 or one 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 023.
4) Hexagonal socket 4 mm
Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-27
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

5.7 Technical specifications

Installation regulations for 400/500 VAC
When installing the combinations, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded parts: Z Z
Circuit breakers Clearances to grounded or

Y
combined with contactors live parts 1L1 3L2 5L3

Circuit Contactor Rated operational Y X21) Z 3RV1... 3RV1...

breaker voltage mm mm mm
3RV1. 1 with 3RT10 1 400/500 V 20 10 9
3RV1. 2 with 3RT10 1 400/500 V 30 10 9
2T1 4T2 6T3
3RT1 .2 400/500 V 30 10 9
3RT1 .3 400/500 V 30 10 9 1L1 3L2 5L3
X2
3RV1. 3 with 3RT10 2 400/500 V 50 10 10
3RT1 .3 400/500 V 50 10 10 3RT1... 3RT1...
3RT10 4 400/500 V 50 10 10
3RV1. 4 with 3RT10 4 400 V 90 10 12
3RT10 4 500 V 220 10 20
2T1 4T2 6T3
NSB01030b

1) Minimum clearance to the contactor at the front. A minimum clearance at the front is not required for a circuit breaker.

Installation regulations for 690 VAC

Frame size Format Standard format for frame sizes S0 to 5.5 kW, S2, and S3 Format for frame size S0 from 7.5 to 11 kW
3-phase busbar Infeed side
S0 Mounted on an insulated
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
base plate. In screw-on Frame size S0:
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
mounting, the screws 3RV19 15-1A
must not be grounded. 3RV1... 3RV1...
Frame size S2: 3RV1...
Alternatively, the rail adap- 3RV1...
3RV19 35-1A
ter can be used without
restrictions.
S2/S3 Mounted on an insulated 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
base plate. Alternatively, 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3

the rail adapter can also be 1L1 3L2 5L3

Infeed side 1L1 3L2 5L3
used.

3RT1... 3RT1...
NSB01031c

NSB01032b

2T1 4T2 6T3 Link module 2T1 4T2 6T3

see accessories
Load side Load side

When installing the combination, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded
parts:
2 circuit breakers combined with contactors Clearance to grounded or live parts

Circuit Contactor Rated operational Y1 Y2 Y3 X1 X2 X3

breaker voltage mm mm mm mm mm mm
3RV1. 2 with 3RT10 1 690 V 80 10 95 20 14 20
3RV1. 3 with 3RT10 3 690 V 50 10 120 10 32 10
3RT10 4 690 V 50 10 120 10 40 10

1
1 3-phase busbar 2 In a combination
Z Z involving a circuit breaker
S0: 3RV19 15-1A of frame size S2 and a
Y1

S2: 3RV19 35-1A contactor of frame size

1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 S3, a clearance of 10 cm
X1 must be maintained

3RV1... 3RV1... 3RV1...

2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2

1L1 3L2 5L3 X2

3RT1... 3RT1...
Y3
Y2

2T1 4T2 6T3

NSB01033c

SIRIUS System Manual

5-28 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RA1 fuseless load feeders

General specifications
Specifications IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Type 3RA1. 1 3RA1. 2 3RA1. 3 3RA11 4
Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Max. rated current Inmax A 12 25 50 100
(= max. rated operational current Ie)
Permissible ambient temperature °C –55 to +80 for storage/transportation
°C –20 to +70 for operation (above +60 °C with restrictions)
Rated operating voltage Ue V 690
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6
Tripping class (CLASS) In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, 10
EN 60 947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Rated short-circuit current Iq at 50/60 Hz 400 VAC kA 50
in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
1
Coordination types in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 )
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Power loss Pv max of all main conducting paths Up to 1.25 A W 6
depending on the rated current In 1.6 to 6.3 A W 7
(upper setting range) 8 to 12 A W 10.5
2 to 6.3 A W 7
8 to 16 A W 9.5
20 to 25 A W 13
25 to 32 A W
40 A W 19
45 to 50 A W 28
63 A W 35
75 to 90 A W 29
100 A W 45
60
Power input of the magnet coils with contactors
(given a cold coil and Us, 50 Hz)
AC operation Making capacity VA 27 61 127 270
cos ϕ 0.8 0.82 0.82 0.68
Holding power VA 4.6 7.8 13.5 22
cos ϕ 0.27 0.24 0.34 0.27
DC operation Making capacity = holding power W 3.2 5.4
11.50 15
Operating range of the magnet coils with contactors 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
Lower limit at 55 °C 0.8 x Us –
at 60 °C 0.85 x Us –
Service life of circuit breakers
Mechanical life Operating cycles 100,000 50,000
Electrical life Operating cycles 100,000 50,000
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor startups) 1/h 15 15
Service life of contactors
Mechanical life Operating cycles 30 million 10 million
Electrical life Operating cycles See the service life characteristic of the contactors (part 3).
Shock resistance (sinus) In acc. with IEC 60 068 Part 2-27 g Up to 9.8 Up to 12.5 Up to 8 Up to 6
Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 947-1 IP 20 IP 20
IP 00
terminal housing
Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Protected against
touching by fin-
gers
Phase loss sensitivity In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, Yes
of the circuit breaker EN 60 947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Disconnector properties In acc. with IEC 60 947-2, Yes
of the circuit breaker EN 60 947-2
Main and emergency-stop (VDE 0660 Part 101)
switch properties of the circuit In acc. with IEC 60 204-1, Yes, with undervoltage release to category 1
breaker and accessories EN 60 204-1 in the case of proper use
(VDE 0113 Part 1)
Safe isolation between the main In acc. with DIN VDE 0160 Part 101 Up to 400 V
and auxiliary circuits
Positively driven operation with contactors Yes Yes, from the main contact to the auxiliary normally
closed contact

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 5-29
3RA1 fuseless load feeders

Conductor cross-sections - main circuit

Specifications IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Type 3RA1.1 3RA1. 2 3RA1. 3 3RA11 4
Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Connection type Screw-type Screw-type Box terminal Box terminal
terminal terminal
Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 Pozidriv 2 Pozidriv 2 Allen screw
Minimum/maximum conductor cross-sections
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
- 1-wire mm2 0.5/2.5 1/6 0.75/25 2.5/501)
- 2-wire mm2 0.5/2.5 1/2.5 to 2.5/6 0.75/16 2.5/351)
Single- or multi-core
- 1-wire mm2 0.5/4 1/6 (max. 10) 0.75/35 2.5/701)
- 2-wire mm2 0.75/2.5 (max. 4) 1/2.5 to 2.5/6 0.75/25 2.5/501)
Ribbon conductor – – yes yes
Bar connection – – – yes
Single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (30 to 2) –
Multi-core AWG – – – 2 x (10 to 1/0)
Connection type Cage Clamp terminal
mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) –
AWG 2 x (18 to 14)
Permissible installation position 22,5° 22,5°
90° 90°

Important: NSK-7666
In acc. with DIN 43 602
Start command "I"
right or above

1) After the box terminals have been removed, lug or busbar connections are possible.

SIRIUS System Manual

5-30 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 6
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

Section Subject Page

6.1 Specifications/regulations 6-2

6.2 Device description 6-3

Relay coupling modules versus semiconductor coup-

6.2.1 6-4
ling modules

Coupling links in two-tier and

6.2.2 6-5
box terminal format

6.2.3 Plug-in relay coupling links 6-6

6.2.4 Coupling links for direct attachment 6-7

6.2.5 SIRIUS 3 R contactor relays 6-7

6.2.6 Installation 6-7

6.2.7 Notes on configuration 6-8

6.2.8 Explanation of terms 6-9

6.3 Application and areas of use 6-10

6.3.1 General information 6-10

6.3.2 Criteria for selection 6-10

6.4 Accessories 6-12

6.4.1 Accessories for two-tier coupling links 6-12

6.4.2 Accessories for LZX plug-in relay coupling links 6-13

6.5 Mounting and connection 6-14

6.5.1 Mounting 6-14

6.5.2 Connection 6-14

6.5.3 Device circuit diagrams 6-16

6.6 Dimensioned drawings 6-20

6.7 Technical specifications 6-22

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-1
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.1 Specifications/regulations

Degrees of protection EN 60 529

offered by housing

I/O interfaces EN 61 131-2

Connection designations EN 50 005

DIN standard rail EN 50 022

Coordination of insula- VDE 0110

tion

Electrical relays, DIN VDE 0435 Part 201/IEC 60255-1-00

all-or-nothing relays

Control devices DIN VDE 0660 Part 200/IEC 60947-5-1

and switching elements

Optocoupler DIN VDE 0884

Equipment of DIN VDE 0160

high-voltage installations

Shock protection DIN VDE 0106 Part 100

Safe isolation DIN VDE 0106 Part 101

Environmental conditions IEC 60721

EMC
emission EN 50081
immunity EN 50082

General information VDE 0660 Part 100/IEC 60947-1

Specifications for indus- UL 508

trial control systems

Specifications for indus- CSA C22.2-14

trial equipment

Table 6-1: Regulations and specifications

SIRIUS System Manual

6-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.2 Device description

Coupling links are interface modules that enable optimal adaptation
between electronic controllers and I/O devices, both on the sensor and the
actuator side.
They also provide electrical isolation.

Overview The following table offers an overview of the device groups and their distin-
guishing features:

Device group Distinguishing features

Two-tier coupling links Relay couplers:
3TX7004/3TX7005 6.2 to 22.5 mm width, contact elements: 1 to 3 normally
open contacts, 1 to 2 changeover contacts
Multi-channel devices
Semiconductor couplers:
6.2 to 12.5 mm width
Long service life, high switching frequency
Screw-type terminal (3TX7004)
Cage Clamp terminal (3TX7005)

Box terminals Relay couplers:

3TX7002/3TX7003 Contact elements: 1 to 2 normally open contacts, 1 to 2
changeover contacts, low device height
Semiconductor couplers:
Long service life, high switching frequency
Screw-type terminal (3TX7002)
Cage Clamp terminal (3TX7003)

Plug-in relay coupling links Plug-in relays (1 to 4 changeover contacts)

LZX: RT/PT/MT High switching currents, prewiring possible

Coupling links for direct Space-saving, adapted to contactor type,

attachment to contactor reduced wiring
coils
3RH1924/3TX4090/3TX7090 3RH1924 for frame sizes S0 to S3
3TX4090 for 3TH42/43 auxiliary contactors
3TX7090 for frame sizes 3 to 14

SIRIUS
contactor relays3RT10
3RH11 For main circuits: switching from motors to 11 kW directly
For main circuits: up to 4 auxiliary switches
Table 6-2: 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links - overview of the device groups with their distinguishing
features

Contact material Relay coupling links are offered with AgNi and hard gold-plated contacts.
Hard gold-plated contacts have greater contact reliability at low voltages and
currents. They can be used as of mV or µA. They can be used to switch low
levels of power, such as those involved in measurement and control signals.
In the case of input coupling links, they are to be recommended on account
of the low currents of the input modules of controllers.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-3
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.2.1 Relay coupling modules versus semiconductor coupling modules

Models Advantages Disadvantages

• Suitable for direct and alter- • Lower switching frequency
Relay coupling modules nating voltage • Contact erosion, particularly
• High switching capacity with- in the case of inductive loads
out heat generation • Inductivity of the coil (distur-
• Virtually no transfer resis- bance)
tance • Mechanical wear (service life)
(suitable as measured value • Low direct-current switching
6.2 mm 12.5 17.5 22.5
transfer switch) capacity
• Electrical isolation • Bounce time of the relay con-
• Single- • Single- • Single- • Single-
• Safe isolation between con- tact
channel channel channel channel
• Multi- • Multi- • Multi- tact and coil sides • Danger of contact microweld-
• 1NO/
1W channel channel channel • No leakage current ing in the case of capacitive
• With/wit- • Without • Without • High electromagnetic com- loads
hout switch switch
patibility
M-O-A • 3NO • 2W
switch • High noise immunity
• 1W/1NO/ • Insensitive to overloads and
2NO voltage peaks
• Several switching levels
• No contact welding in the • High temperature rise in the
Semiconductor coupling modules case of capacitive loads case of high loads
• High switching frequencies • Leakage current at output
• High direct-current switching • Sensitive to peaks in the
capacity power system
• Long service life • Not suitable as measured
6.2 mm
• Bounce-free switching value transfer switch because
12.5
• Insensitive to vibrations and of a voltage drop at the
impact switching transistor
• Single- • Single-channel • Defined transfer resistance
channel • With M-O-A
switch
and volume resistance
• Without • Safe isolation between drive
switch circuit and load in acc. with
DIN VDE 0884
• Silent switching operation
Table 6-3: Comparison: Relay coupling modules and semiconductor coupling modules

SIRIUS System Manual

6-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.2.2 Coupling links in two-tier and box terminal format

Features • Connections at two levels

• Very narrow design, as of 6.2 mm
• Terminal system: screw-type and Cage Clamp
• Labeling strip to identify equipment

Models The 3TX70 coupling links for SIRIUS are available as both input couplers and
output couplers, which have their terminals in different positions:

A1 13
A2 14

13 A1
14 A2

Figure 6-1: Output couplerInput coupler

Input coupling links have hard gold-plated contacts for greater contact reli-
ability at low voltages and currents.

Status indication A yellow status LED on the drive circuit side indicates whether there is any
control supply voltage applied to the coupler.

Protective circuit There is an integrated rectifier at the input of each coupler. As a result, they
are protected against polarity reversal. The rectifiers function as flywheeling
diodes at disconnection. Semiconductor outputs are protected by suppres-
sor or Zener diodes.

Manual-0-automatic Some coupling links are equipped with a manual-0-automatic switch that
makes it easier to switch the system on and is used for test purposes.
• Manual: Relay is always on
• O (zero): Relay is always off
• Automatic: Relay follows the control supply voltage

Power consumption Following on from the technical specifications of the electronic systems, the
coupling links have low power consumption. They can be controlled from a
programmable controller and are suitable for continuous duty.

Accessories The following accessories are available for two-tier coupling links:
• 24-pole connecting lead or connection comb
• Screwdriver for Cage Clamp terminal system
• End holder and end plate

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-5
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.2.3 Plug-in relay coupling links

The Plug-in relay coupling links are modular coupling links. The plug-in for-
mat means the relays can be easily replaced.

Models There are complete modules for 1 and 2 changeover contacts and individual
modules for 1, 2, 3 or 4 changeover contacts for a rated control supply volt-
age of either 24 VDC or 230 VAC.

Widths Plug-in relay coupling links are available in 3 widths:

• 15.5 mm print relays, LZX: RT variants
• 27 mm mini-industrial relays, LZX: PT variants
• 38 mm industrial relays, LZX: MT variants

Installation The plug-in relay coupling links are plugged into the associated bases, and
these are snapped onto a 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 022.

Surge suppression To avoid high breaking voltage peaks, LZX: RT and PT plug-in relay coupling
links are available for a rated control supply voltage of 24 VDC, with 1, 2, or
4 changeover contacts (Ws) and integrated surge suppression (flywheeling
diode). RC elements are available for AC voltages.

Connection The standard polarity must be taken into consideration when connecting up:
• At A1: positive voltage supply (+)
• At A2: negative voltage supply (-)

Test button The LZX: PT and MT variants are equipped with a test button. The plug-in
relay coupling link can thus be brought into the switching state and locked
without the need for electrical triggering. When the test button is protrud-
ing, this indicates the locked switching position.

LED An LED is available either as an individual plug-in module or is integrated in

the relay, depending on the variant involved.

Power consumption Following on from the technical specifications of the electronic systems, the
coupling links have low power consumption.

Safe isolation The drive circuit and contacts are electrically isolated. Safe isolation can also
be achieved for the print relays (LZX:RT series) by means of a special base.

SIRIUS System Manual

6-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.2.4 Coupling links for direct attachment

Contactors S0 to S3 The 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling relay, which is screwed directly onto the coil
terminals, is available for direct attachment to the contactors of frame sizes
S0 to S3.
The 3TX4090-0C/-0D coupling links are suitable for attachment to 3TH42/43
auxiliary contactors.

Contactors of up to In the case of the large contactors of up to 450 kW (size 14), the 3TX7090
450 kW coupling link can be snapped on at the side like an auxiliary switch block,
and the wires are connected to the contactor coil terminals.

Variants There are variants with one normally open contact, 24 VDC, with and with-
out surge suppression.
The operating range is 17 to 30 VDC.

Installation The 3TX 4090 and 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling links are screwed directly onto
the contactor coil terminals, and the 3TX7090 coupling links are snapped on
at the side like the auxiliary switches.

Surge suppression The following coupling links have an integrated surge suppressor (varistor)
for the contactor coil to be switched:
• 3RH1924-1GP11
• 3TX4090-0D
• 3TX7090-0D

Power consumption Following on from the technical specifications of the electronic systems, the
coupling links have low power consumption.

LED An LED is integrated in the coupler.

6.2.5 SIRIUS contactor relays

The SIRIUS 3RT10/3RH11 contactor relays are described in Chapter 3, "Con-

tactors".

6.2.6 Installation

Attachment Snap-on attachment

The coupling links can be snapped onto a 35 mm rail in acc. with
DIN EN 50 022.
Screw-on attachment is not possible.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-7
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

Connection Screw-type terminals

The two-tier coupling links are fitted with slotted screws for a maximum
screwdriver blade width of 4 mm.
Plug-in relay couplers have plus-minus POZIDRIV 2 screw-type terminals.

Cage Clamp terminals

The two-tier coupling links described in Section 6.2.1 are available with
Cage Clamp terminals as well as screw-type terminals.

6.2.7 Notes on configuration

Contact microwelding When capacitive loads are switched, a short-circuit current briefly occurs
(for a period lasting only microseconds) if the capacitor is not connected in
series with a resistor. This can result in contact microwelding and the con-
tact being unable to open after the control supply voltage is removed. To
prevent this from happening, a resistor can be connected in series, or a cou-
pling link with a semiconductor output and short-circuit protection can be
used.

Switching inductive The contacts are tested in acc. with EN 60947-5-1, utilization category AC-
loads 15 and DC-13. Going beyond the requirements of the standard, a continuous
test was carried out on the contacts with an AC-15 load for 100,000 operat-
ing cycles. The electrical service life of the contacts was thus tested over
100,000 operating cycles at the specified current under normal conditions. A
lower load on the contacts or a protective circuit for the inductive load
increases the service life of the contacts. If this service life is insufficient, a
semiconductor coupler with an unlimited service life must be used.

Max. line length in AC Each wire has a line capacitance that works like a capacitor connected in
operation series to the coupling link. The effect of this in operation with alternating
current is that so much current may flow due to the line capacitance that the
coupling link does not fall in spite of a switch being open. To remedy this, a
parallel resistor can be fitted to A1/A2 of the coupling link, or an RC combi-
nation can be used. Both of these measures change the performance and
switching times of the coupling link.
The following basic circuit diagram shows the line capacitance:
CL= line capacitance

A1
Button/
switch
Relay coupling link
~
A2

Figure 6-2: Basic circuit diagram, line capacitance

The line lengths specified in the NSK catalog were calculated for a line
capacitance of 0.3 nF/m. This depends on the wire used.

SIRIUS System Manual

6-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.2.8 Explanation of terms

Electrical isolation There is no conductive connection between the input circuit and the output
circuit. Electrical isolation is ensured by the in-built relay and, in the case of
semiconductor outputs, by means of optocouplers.

Safe isolation Safe isolation provides protection against shock currents in different circuits.
It is implemented by means of increased creepages and clearances.

Distinction between Electrical isolation is not necessarily safe isolation.

terms Safe isolation is a protective measure against shock current, the primary
purpose of which is to prevent injury. It prevents the voltage of one circuit
crossing over into another.

For the insulation coordination of equipment, the standard specifies values

for the rating of the creepages and clearances.

In the case of safe isolation, these values must be selected by means of

double or reinforced insulation.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-9
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.3 Application and areas of use

6.3.1 General information

Advantages The use of coupling links offers the following advantages:

• Galvanic isolation between two circuits
• Current gain
• Protects the controller from interference and overvoltage
• Substantially reduces the power input of switchgear
• Permits power gain or level adaptation

Applications Coupling links are used in:

• Production engineering
• Machine setup
• Process control in power distribution
• Building services automation
• Process engineering

Usage Coupling links are used for:

• Floating signal transmission
• Linking of different voltages (AC/DC) and currents
• Power gain
• Level adaptation
• Protection of the controller against EMC noise from the I/O
• Contact multiplication

Application example I/O Electronic Final control-

Devices controller ling element
110 VAC 110 VAC
24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC
230 VAC
In- Out-
put put M
Pushbutton Coupling Coup- Motor
Position link ling contactor
switch link

Figure 6-3: Application example, coupling links in box terminal format

6.3.2 Criteria for selection

Coupling links are selected on the basis of a number of criteria:

Technical specifications See Section 6.7:

• Rated control supply voltage Us
• Typical power input
• Output elements
• Rated operational currents Ie
• Permissible line length

SIRIUS System Manual

6-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

Mechanical require- • Construction type, width

ments • Mounting type
• Indicators
• Connection type
• Replaceability

Selection table The following table provides an overview of the main criteria for selection
from different device groups:

Device group Criteria for selection

Two-tier coupling links • Space-saving due to narrow housing width
• Test switches

Coupling links in box terminal • Low device height

format • For installation given narrow tier spacing

Contactor relays for switching • High switching currents

main and auxiliary circuits • Direct switching of motors up to 11 kW
• Up to 4 auxiliary contacts

Plug-in relay coupling links • High switching currents

• Quickly interchangeable
• Up to 4 changeover contacts

Coupling links for attachment • Attachable directly onto the contactor

to contactors • Technical specifications of the contactor to be con-
trolled
Table 6-4: Selection criteria for the 3RH, 3TX, and LZX coupling links

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-11
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.4 Accessories
6.4.1 Accessories for two-tier coupling links

Connecting lead The 24-pole connecting lead 3TX7004-8BA00 can be used for all two-tier
coupling links both with screw-type and Cage Clamp terminals:

Figure 6-4: 24-pole connection lead for two-tier coupling links

Connection comb The 24-pole connection comb 3TX7004-8AA00 can be used for the 6.2 mm
wide two-tier coupling links with screw-type terminals:

Figure 6-5: 24-pole connection comb for two-tier coupling links

SIRIUS System Manual

6-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

End holder The end holder 8WA2808 is snapped onto the rail (EN 50 022) without
screws.

Screwdriver for Cage The screwdriver 8WA2804 is suitable when wiring coupling links with Cage
Clamp terminal system Clamp terminals.

End plate In order to ensure shock protection in the case of the two-tier optocouplers
having a width of 6.2 mm and with a housing opening (e.g. 3TX7 004-
3AB04), the individual module or last module in a series must be fitted with
an end plate 3TX7004-8CE00.

Labeling strip Each coupling link has a labeling strip for the purpose of identification.

6.4.2 Accessories for LZX plug-in relay coupling links

Retainer In situations where there is increased mechanical stress, a retainer can be

fitted to plug-in relay coupling links to provide stability.

LED module An LED can be fitted as an individual plug-in module with the variants LZX:
RT and LZX:PT.

Module with flywheel- A flywheeling diode for surge suppression can be fitted as a module (for DC
ing diode voltages) with the variants LZX:RT and LZX:PT.

RC module For AC voltages, there is a plug-in RC module available with the series
LZX:RT and LZX:PT for surge suppression.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-13
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.5 Mounting and connection

6.5.1 Mounting

Snap-on attachment The coupling links are snapped onto 35 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 022.
With a vertical rail and tightly packed devices, the permissible ambient tem-
perature TU is 60° C.
Any installation position is possible.

6.5.2 Connection

The coupling links are available with the SIGUT  terminal system, with
screw-type terminals, or with Cage Clamp terminals.

Cage Clamp terminals Important

Risk of injury
When making connections using the Cage Clamp terminal system, you
should support your screwdriver with your finger to prevent the screwdriver
slipping.

Figure 6-6: Cage Clamp terminals, coupling links

SIRIUS System Manual

6-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

Conductor cross-sec- The following table shows the permissible conductor cross-sections for the
tions coupling links. The specifications apply to main and auxiliary connections.

3TX7004 3TX7005 LZX: 3RH1924

3TX7002 3TX7003 RT/ZT/MT 3TX7090
screw-type termi- Cage Clamp Screw-type termi-
nals terminals nals

M3 ------ ------ M3
∅ 5 to 6 mm / PZ2

1 x 0.25 to 4 mm² 1 x 0.08 to 2.5 mm² 2 x 2.5 mm² 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²

1 x 0.5 to 2.5 mm² 1 x 0.25 to 2.5 mm² 2 x 1.5 mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²

Table 6-5: Conductor cross-sections for the 3RH, 3TX, and LZX coupling links

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-15
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.5.3 Device circuit diagrams

The following circuit diagrams are examples:

3RH1924 L1 B1+ B2- N L1 L+ L- N

1
1 L1 B1+ B2- N

U A1 A2

2
A1
2
A2
NSB00184
NSB00182

3RH1924-1GP11 with surge suppressor

¿ coupling link
À contactor

Relay coupling modules A1 13 A1 11 A1 A1 13 23 A1 11 21

3TX7002/3TX7003

NSB00188 NSB00189 NSB00191

NSB00190
A2 14 A2 A2 12 14 A2 A2 14 24 A2 12 14 12 24

3TX7002-.A.00 -1B.00 -1CB00 -1FB00

-1AB00
-2AF00
3TX7003-1AB00

A1 11

NSB00192

A2 12 14

-2BF02

Semiconductor cou- A1 13 A1 13 A1 13 A1 13
pling modules 3TX7002

NSB00193
NSB00195 NSB00196
NSB00194
A2 14 A2 14 A2 14 A2 14

3TX7002-0AB00 -3AB01 -4AB00 4AG0.

SIRIUS System Manual

6-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

Relay coupling modules A

0
3TX7004/3TX7005 A1
M
A1
Output coupling links 14
A3
14

A2 14
A2
13
NSB00205 A2 13
NSB00206 13

3TX700.-1M.00 3TX700.-1AB10

A1
A1 12
A1 12
14
14
A2
A2
11
A2 11
NSB00208
NSB00207 11

3TX700.-1BB00 3TX700.-1L.0.

A11
A
114
0
M
A1 113
12
A21
A3 14
214
A2
A2
A2 11
213
NSB00209 11
A2 NSB00210

3TX700.-1BB10 3TX700.-1CB00

A11
A11
114 A11 112
114

113
A21
111
214 A21
111
A21 212
213 214
A31
314
A2

A2 A2 211
NSB00212 211
A2 313 A2
NSB00211
A2 A2

3TX700.-1HB00 3TX700.-1GB00

Relay coupling modules A1

3TX7004/3TX7005 14

Input coupling links A2

13
NSB00213

3TX700.-2M.02

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-17
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

Semiconductor cou- A1 A1
pling modules +13 +13 +
A2
3TX7004/3TX7005 A2
14
14
Output coupling links NSB00214
NSB00215 Last
_
Last 0V

3TX700.-3AB04 3TX700.-3PB54

A
A1 0
M

A1 +13 A1
+13
+13 + A3 +13 +
A2
A2
A2 14
A2 14
NSB00216 Last Last
0V _ NSB00217 0V _

3TX700.-3AC04 3TX700.-3AC14

A1
A1 ~13
~13
A2
A2 ~14
NSB00218
~14
Last

3TX700.-3AC03

Semiconductor cou- A1
pling modules +13

3TX7004/7005 A2
14
Input coupling links NSB00219
Last

3TX700.-4AB04

Relay couplers
LZX: RT/PT/MT
A1 12 11 14

A1 12 11 14
A2 22 21 24
NSB00248a
A2 22 21 24
NSB00247a

LZX: RT3, 1-pole LZX: RT4, 2-pole

SIRIUS System Manual

6-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4)

12 22 32 12 22 32 42
14 24 34 14 24 34 44
(4) (5) (6) (5) (6) (7) (8)

NSB00249a

NSB00250a
11(7) 21(8) 31(9) 11(9) 21(10) 31(11) 41(12)

(13)A1 A2(14) (13)A1 A2(14)

LZX: PT370, 3-pole LZX: PT570, 4-pole

(5) (6) (7)

22 21 24

(4)12 (8)32
(3)14 (9)34
NSB00251a

(2) (1) (11) (10)

A1 11 31 A2

LZX: MT32, 3-pole

Values in brackets: Plug-in base designations
Values without brackets: Contact/coil designations

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-19
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm)

Two-tier coupling links 3TX7 004/3TX7 005

NSB00274

79 1)
80 2)
NSB00271

NSB00273
NSB00272

6.2
6,2 12.5
12,5 17.5
17,5 22.5
22,5 84

Relay couplers Relay couplers Relay couplers Relay couplers

3TX7 00.-1MB00 3TX7 00.-1AB10 3TX7 00.-1HB00 3TX7 00.-1GB00
3TX7 00.-1MF00 3TX7 00.-1BB00
3TX7 00.-1L . 0 . 3TX7 00.-1BB10
3TX7 00.-2M... 3TX7 00.-1CB00
3TX7 00.-1BF05
Optocouplers Optocouplers
3TX7 00.-3AB04 3TX7 00.-3AC04
3TX7 00.-4AB04 3TX7 00.-3AC14 1) Dimension 3TX7 004 coupling links (screw-type terminals)
3TX7 00.-3PB.. 3TX7 00.-3AC03 2) Dimension 3TX7 005 coupling links (Cage Clamp terminals)
3TX7 00.-3PG74
3TX7 00.-3RB43
3TX7 00.-4P . 24

Coupling links in box terminal format 3TX7 002/3TX7 003

NSB00284
NSB00268

NSB00270
NSB00269

60
M3 M3 M3 M3
11.5
11,5 12.5
12,5 17.5
17,5 22.5
22,5 62
3TX7 00.-1AB.. 3TX7 002-3AB00 3TX7 00.-1BB00 3TX7 00.-1CB00
3TX7 00.-2A... 3TX7 002-4A... 3TX7 00.-1BF00 3TX7 002-1BF02
3TX7 002-3AB01 3TX7 002-2BF02

Plug-in relay coupling links LZX: RT

NSB00275a

Haltebügel
NSB00276
15,7
15.7

Printrelais

LED-Modul
2.6
2,6 12.7
12,7
3,8
3.8

29

60
Complete device LZX: RT3/RT4 Print relay LZX: RT3/RT4
NSB00278

NSB00277
75,5
75.5

75,5
75.5

15.5
15,5 4,5 22,2
22.2 15.5
15,5 4.5 22.2
4,5 22,2
43

Plug-in base LZX: RT78625 for print relays Plug-in base LZX: RT78626 with safe isolation for print relays

SIRIUS System Manual

6-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

Plug-in relay coupling links LZX: PT

Relais

NSB00279
Haltebügel
29

75
6

LED-
28 2.2
2,2 Modul
22.5
22,5

NSB00280
22.5
22,5 4.5
4,5 22.2
22,2
27 42.5
42,5
73.1
73,1

Industrial relay LZX: PT570 Plug-in base LZX: PT78703 for industrial relays

Plug-in relay coupling links LZX: MT/MR

1.5
1,5
35,5

100°
35.5

62
NSB00281

32,3
32.3
24,2
24.2

NSB00282
35.5
35,5 57
69
38 4 9.3
9,3
26

Industrial relay LZX: MT32 Plug-in base LZX: MR78750 for industrial relays

Coupling links 3RH/3TX

45 45

NSB00265
6 11 50
45
20

30,1
30.1
NSB00267

28
NSB00283
26

20

30,1
30.1
28

3RH1924-1GP11 3TX4090-0C 3TX4090-0D

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-21
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

6.7 Technical specifications

3TX70 relay coupling links
Load side
Rated currents 3TX7 00 .-1A/-1B/-1C/-1H/-1G 3TX7 00 .-. L/- .M
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6 6
Rated operational current Ie AC-15 DC-13 AC-15 DC-13
by utilization categories
At 24 V A 3 1.0 2 1.0
(DIN VDE 0660)
110 V A 3 0.2 2 0.2
230 V A 3 0.1 2 0.1
Current switched AC-12 DC-12 AC-12 DC-12

For resistive load At 24V A 6 6 6 6

In acc. with DIN VDE 0435 (relay standard) 110 V A 6 0.3 6 0.3
and DIN VDE 0660 A 6 0.2 6 0.2

Min. contact loading for 3TX7 00 . -1 . . 00 17 VAC/VDC, 5 mA 17 VAC/VDC, 5 mA

Min. contact loading for 3TX7 00 . -. . . 02 (hard gold-plating) 1 VAC/VDC, 0.1 mA 1 VAC/VDC, 0.1 mA
Performance limit/hard gold-plating 30 V/20 mA 30 V/20 mA
Switching voltage 17 to 250 VAC/VDC 17 to 250 VAC/VDC
Mechanical life 20 x 106 operating cycles 20 x 106 operating cycles
Electrical service life at Ie 1 x 105 operating cycles 0.5 x 105 operating cycles
Switching frequency 1/h 5000 operating cycles 5000 operating cycles
Table 6-6: Technical specifications, 3TX70 relay coupling links

3TX7004/3TX7005 semiconductor coupling links

Load side
Type 3TX7 004-/ 3AB04/ 3AC.4 3AC03 4AB04 3PB54
3TX7 005- 4AB04
Rated operating current Ie A 0,5 5 2 0,5 1.5
Short-term current carrying capacity A 1.5 Short circuit- 100 1.5 Short circuit-
ms 20 proof 20 20 proof
Contact elements 1 NO con- 1 NO con- 1 NO con- 1 NO con- 1 NO con-
tact tact tact tact tact
Transistor Transistor Triac Transistor Transistor
Switching voltage DC DC AC DC DC
(operating range) ≤ 48 V ≤ 30 V 50/60Hz ≤ 48 V ≤ 30 V
24 to 250 V
Minimum load current mA – – 50 – –
Voltage drop switched through V 1 0,5 1.6 1 0,5
Leakage current of the electronics (at 0 signal) mA < 0.1 < 0.1 <6 < 0.1 < 0.1
Switching frequency Hz 50 50 1 50 500
For resistive load
Table 6-7: Technical specifications, 3TX7004/3TX7005 semiconductor coupling links

3TX7002/3TX7003 semiconductor coupling links

Load side
Type 3TX7 002- 3AB00 3AB01 4AB00 4AG00
Rated operating current Ie A 1.8 1.5 0.1 0.1
(See derating
diagram)
Short-term current carrying capacity A 20 4 1 1
ms 20 0.2 20 20
Contact elements 1 NO contact 1 NO contact 1 NO contact 1 NO contact
Triac Transistor Transistor Transistor
Switching voltage Effective
(operating range) 50/60 Hz ≤ 60 VDC ≤ 30 VDC ≤ 60 VDC
48 to 264 VAC
Minimum load current mA 60 – – –
Voltage drop switched through V ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.1 ≤ 1.7 ≤ 0.3
Leakage current mA <5 <0.1 <0.1 0.001
of the electronic components (at 0 signal)
Switching frequency at Ie 1 Hz 1 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz

Table 6-8: Technical specifications, 3TX7002/3TX7003 semiconductor coupling links

SIRIUS System Manual

6-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

LZX: RT/PT
Relay type Print relay RT, 8-pole Industrial relay PT, 14-pole
(12.7 mm) 1 W/2 W (22.5 mm) 3 W/4 W
Load side

Switching voltage 24 to 250 VAC/VDC 24 to 250 VAC/VDC

Rated currents
Conventional free air thermal current Ith 16 A/8 A (1 W/2 W) 10 A/6 A (3 W/4 W)
Rated operating current Ie AC-15 DC-13 –
by utilization categories
at 24 V 6 A/3 A 2A –
(DIN VDE 0660)
230 V 6 A/3 A 0.27 A –

Short-circuit protection –
Fuse links, performance class gL/gG 10 A
DIAZED
Min. contact loading 12 VDC/10 mA –
(reliability: 1 ppm)
Mechanical life 30 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
operating cyc-
les
Electrical life 1 x 105 1 x 105 1 x 105
(resistive load at 250 VAC) operating cyc-
les
Table 6-9: Technical specifications, LZX: RT/PT

LZX: MT
Relay type Industrial relay MT, 11-pole
(35.5 mm) 3 W
Load side

Switching voltage 24 to 250 VAC/VDC

Rated currents
Conventional free air thermal current Ith
10A
Rated operating current Ie AC-15 AC-13
by utilization categories 5A 2A
at 24 V 5A 0.27 A
(DIN VDE 0660)
230 V
Short-circuit protection
Fuse links, performance class gL/gG 10A
DIAZED
Min. contact loading 12 VDC/10 mA
(reliability: 1 ppm)
Mechanical life 20 x 106
operating cycles
Electrical service life 4 x 105
(resistive load at 250 VAC) operating cycles
Table 6-10: Technical specifications, LZX: MT

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 6-23
3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links

3RH1924/3TX7090
Short-circuit protection
(unwelded fuse at Ik W 1 kA)
Fuse links, performance class gL/gG A 6
NH Type 3NA
DIAZED Type 5SB
NEOZED Type 5SE
Load side

Mechanical life Operat- 20 x 106

ing
cycles
Electrical service life at Ie Operat- 1 x 105
ing
cycles
Switching voltage V 24 to 250 VAC/VDC
Rated currents
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6
AC-15 DC-13
Rated operating current Ie At 24 V A 3 1.0
by utilization categories 110 V A 3 0.2
(DIN VDE 0660) 230 V A 3 0.1

Table 6-11: Technical specifications, 3RH1924/3TX7090

SIRIUS System Manual

6-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 7
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays
Section Subject Page

7.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 7-2

7.2 Device description 7-3

7.2.1 Device types 7-3

7.2.2 Installation 7-4

7.2.3 Special features 7-5

7.2.4 Notes on configuration 7-5

7.2.5 Explanation of terms 7-7

7.3 Applications and uses (types of function) 7-8

7.3.1 Multifunction (3RP10 00 solid-state time relay) 7-8

7.3.2 Multifunction (3RP15 05 solid-state time relay) 7-11

7.3.3 On-delay 7-16

7.3.4 Off-delay 7-17

7.3.5 Clock pulse generator (3RP15 55 solid-state time relay) 7-18

7.3.6 Star-delta function (3RP15 74/76 solid-state time relay) 7-19

7.3.7 Star-delta function with overtravel (3RP15 60 solid-state 7-19

time relay)

7.4 Accessories 7-20

7.4.1 Accessories for 3RP10 7-20

7.4.2 Accessories for 3RP15 05 7-20

7.5 Mounting and connection 7-22

7.5.1 Mounting 7-22

7.5.2 Connection 7-23

7.5.3 Circuit diagrams 7-24

7.6 Dimensioned drawings 7-25

7.7 Technical specifications 7-26

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-1
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals
Standards The time relays comply with the following standards:
• IEC 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 on electrical relays and time relays
• IEC 61000 on electromagnetic compatibility
• IEC 60947-5-1; DIN VDE 0660 Part 200 on low-voltage switchgear
• IEC 60721-3-1/-3 on environmental conditions
• IEC 60529 on degree of protection

Electromagnetic com- The time relays are tested in acc. with EN 50 081-1 (emission) and
patibility EN 50 082-2 (immunity) and are thus noise-free and surge-proof.

Switching capacity The switching capacity complies with IEC 60947-5-1

• In the case of utilization category AC-15 and 230 VAC: 3 A
• In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 24 VDC: 1 A
• In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 48 VDC: 0.45 A
• In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 60 VDC: 0.35 A
• In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 110 VDC: 0.2 A
• In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 230 VDC: 0.1 A

UL/CSA/marine The SIMIREL time relays are approved by UL and CSA for use worldwide
approval and tested by the GL, LRS, DM marine authorities.

Approvals/ Confirmation of approvals, test certificates, and the declaration of confor-

test reports mity can be obtained on the Internet/intranet.

SIRIUS System Manual

7-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.2 Device description

Time relays are used for different control tasks in automatic production lines
and for processing machines.
They are suitable for all time-delayed switching operations in control, star-
ting, protective, and regulating circuits and ensure high repeatability of the
set run times.

7.2.1 Device types

Device types The SIMIREL 3RP1 time relays are available in the following forms:
• Single-function devices, such as the on-delay function
• Multifunctional devices

Frame sizes The SIMIREL 3RP1 time relays are available in two widths:
• 3RP10: 45 mm
The width, height, and depth of time relays and contactors of frame size S00
(3RT/3RH10) are identical. The terminals are therefore on the same level,
and the tier spacing in the cubicle can be kept correspondingly low.
• 3RP15: 22.5 mm
Time relays with 1 changeover contact are 82 mm in height and have six
possible terminals
Time relays with 2 changeover contacts are 102 mm in height and have a
possible twelve terminals

View of the 3RP10

LED indicators 15C B3+ A3+ B1 A1

Time-range selector
3RP switch
1s
10 s
1 min
10 h 100 s
Coding plug 100 min
1 h 10 min
60
for function 40
80
selection 20
Runtime adjuster
5 100%

Device type plate 16NC 18NO A2-

Figure 7-1: 3RP1000 solid-state time relay, multifunctional

3RP10 features The features of the 3RP10 solid-state time relay:

• 1 changeover contact
• Eight selectable time ranges
• Adjustable runtime from 0.05 s to 10 hr
• Contact position and voltage indication by means of LED
• Safe isolation between the control and load sides in acc. with
DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
• Combination voltage 24 VAC/VDC / 200-240 VAC and 24 VAC/VDC /
100-127 VAC
• Single-function device for the on-delay function
• Multifunctional device with 7 functions

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-3
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

View of the 3RP15

A1 B1 15/17C

A3 B3 21/25/27C

LED indicators
Runtime adjuster
Time-range selector switch
Function selector switch A Function indicator window
Device type plate
22/26NC

24/28NO

16NC A2(-)
18NO
Figure 7-2: 3RP15 solid-state time relay, multifunctional with 2 changeover contacts

3RP15 features The features of the 3RP15 solid-state time relays are:
• 1 changeover contact (8 functions)
• 2 changeover contacts (16 functions)
• Single or up to 15 selectable time ranges
• Contact position and voltage indication by means of LEDs
• Combination voltage 24 VAC/VDC / 200-240 VAC, and 24 VAC/VDC /
100-127 VAC
• Wide-range voltage variant for 24-240 VAC/VDC
• Single-function devices for the following functions:
- On-delay with 1 or 2 changeover contacts
- Off-delay with auxiliary supply and 1 changeover contact
- Off-delay without auxiliary supply and 1 or 2 changeover contacts
- Clock pulse generator with 1 changeover contact
- Star-delta with 2 NO contacts
- 2-wire, on-delay with semiconductor output
• Multifunctional time relay with 8 (1 changeover contact) or 16 functions (2
changeover contacts)

Accessories 3RP10
Coding plug set for the multifunctional time relay with 7 functions

3RP15
• Label sets for the multifunctional time relay with 8 or 16 functions
• Sealable cap
• Push-in lugs for screw-type terminal

7.2.2 Installation

Attachment Snap-on attachment

All the time relays can be snapped onto 35 mm rails and removed without
tools in acc. with EN 50 022.
Screw-on attachment
3RP10: attachment openings are integrated in the device
3RP15: push-in lugs for screw-type attachment are available as accessories

SIRIUS System Manual

7-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Connection The terminals of the 3RP1 time relays are designed for connections of the
control cables with a maximum stripped length of 10 mm. Cross-sections of
2 x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (single-coil) and 2 x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 (single-coil) can be
clamped with a wire end ferrule.
Screw-type terminal (SIGUT® terminal)
The 3RP10 and 3RP15 time relays are available with plus-minus Pozidriv 2
screw-type connections.
Cage Clamp terminal
The 3RP10 and 3RP15 time relays are available with Cage Clamp terminals.

7.2.3 Special features

Operating temperature There are no restrictions on the control supply voltage, switching current, or
duty cycle for operation between -25 °C to +60 °C.

Time ranges There are up to 15 time settings, ranging from 0.05 s to 100 hr. The 3RP15
has additional time settings between the decade scales (1/10/100 s/min/h)
that make high setting accuracy possible.

Wide-range voltage There are multifunctional relays with a wide voltage range of 24 VAC/VDC to
240 VAC/VDC.

Electrical service life The electrical service life with contactor load (e.g. 3RT1016 contactor) is 10
million operating cycles.
The electrical service life at AC voltage of 230 V, utilization category AC-15/
3 A, and at DC voltage, utilization category DC-13/1 A, is 100,000 operating
cycles.

Start contact In the case of functions that require a continuous auxiliary supply to termi-
nals A1/A2 and A3/A2, the time function can be started by a control supply
voltage to terminal B1 or B3.

7.2.4 Notes on configuration

The following specifications must be complied with to ensure error-free

operation of the solid-state time relays:
Start input Only apply the control supply voltage from start input B1 or B3 once the
supply voltage has already been applied to A1/A2 or A3/A2.

Identical potential Identical potential must be applied to terminals A1 and B1 or A3 and B3.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-5
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Combination voltage In the case of combination voltage types, only one voltage range can be
connected. Never apply the two control supply voltages simultaneously.

Parallel load at the start The start contact is under voltage and rectified. There is a connection in the
contact time relay to the A1 and A2 terminals. The control of loads parallel to the
start input is therefore not permissible at AC 50/60 Hz control supply volt-
age.

The following information facilitates configuration of SIMIREL 3RP time

relays:
Combination/wide- 80% of the time relay types are combination and wide-range voltage types
range voltages because they are flexible in their uses:
– Combination voltage: two operating voltage ranges (e.g. 24 VAC/VDC and
200 to 240 VAC) at different terminals
– Wide-range voltage: one operating voltage range from 24 VAC/VDC to
240 VAC/VDC at the same terminals

Two-wire time relay Two-wire time relays have the following advantages over conventional time
relays in connection with contactors:
– Reduced wiring
– Bounce-free control
– The electronic output increases service life because no mechanical wear
occurs.
– Greater switching frequency

Special functions • Pulsing function: pulse and idle time can be set separately.
• Flashing: the pulse/break ratio is 1:1.
• The timing period starts with the "off-delay without auxiliary supply" func-
tion if the time relay is separated from the supply voltage.
• In the case of the 3RP15 time relay with 15 selectable time settings,
there is a ∞ switch position. This means an endless timing period. If this
setting is chosen for the on-delay function, the output relay never swit-
ches through after the supply voltage has been applied (off function). In
the case of the "making pulse contact" function, the output relay always
remains on (on function). This can be used for test purposes.
• In the case of the "additive on-delay with auxiliary supply" function, the
time is added for as long as the start contact is activated. If the start con-
tact is interrupted, the timing period stops and is then continued once the
start contact is closed again.
This function is not non-volatile and requires a continuous auxiliary power
supply.
• In the case of the "shaping pulse contact with auxiliary supply" function,
an activated start contact triggers a timing period that can be set. The
control signal for this can be shorter or longer than the desired runtime.

Cable ducts If you use cable ducts for wiring, the position and dimensions of the termi-
nal blocks must be taken into consideration (see pages 7-27).

SIRIUS System Manual

7-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.2.5 Explanation of terms

Setting accuracy Setting accuracy is the accuracy in relation to the end value of the scale in
line with the specified tolerance.

Repeatability Repeatability describes the accuracy with which the set value can be repro-
duced with the specified tolerance.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-7
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.3 Applications and uses (types of function)

7.3.1 Multifunction (3RP10 00 solid-state time relay)

The time relay contains a changeover contact.

Operating time adjust- Eight time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch.
ment The desired runtime can be set accurately by means of a potentiometer (ro-
tary switch for fine adjustment).

Important
Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergi-
zed state.

Example You want to set a duration of 5 seconds:

Step Procedure
1 1s
10 s

10 h
1 min
Rotate the time range selector switch to 10 s. This means
100 s
100 min
1h 10 min runtimes of up to 10 seconds can be set.
2
60
40 Rotate the potentiometer to 50% for fine adjustment. In
80
20 other words, 50% (= 5 seconds) of the maximum value (10
5 100% seconds) is set.
Table 7-1: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment

1s
10 s
1 min
15C B3+ A3+ B1 A1 10 h 100 s
100 min 10 min
1h
3RP 60
1s 5 s: 40
10 s 80
1 min
10 h 100 s
20
100 min
1 h 10 min 5 100%
60 1s
40 10 s
80 1 min
20
10 h 100 s
5 100%
100 min
1.5 min 1 h 10 min
60
16NC 18NO A2- (90 s): 40
80
20
5 100%

Figure 7-3: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment

Functions You can select 7 different functions with the coding plug set (7PX9904) pro-
vided.

Important
Changes to the function are only effective if they are made in a deenergized
state.
Without the coding plug the multifunctional time relay (3RP10 00) is pro-
grammed for the on-delay.

SIRIUS System Manual

7-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Function setting The connector with the function you want is removed from the coding plug
set and put on the time relay as shown in the following diagram:

Figure 7-4: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) function setting

The name of the function and the corresponding circuit diagram are printed
on the coding plugs in German and English.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-9
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Function diagrams The coding plug set contains the functions for the 3RP1000 solid-state time
relay listed in the following table:

Function Circuit diagram Function diagram

On-delay
A. 15 C
A./A2
A2 16 NC 18 NO 15/18
15/16
ansprechverzögert t
ON DELAY

Off-delay with aux- 15 C A./A2

A. B.
iliary supply ≥ 35 ms
A2
B./A2
16 NC 18 NO
rückfallverzögert
15/18
OFF DELAY
15/16
t

On-delay and off- 15 C A./A2

A. B.
delay with auxil- B./A2
iary supply A2 16 NC 18 NO 15/18
15/16
ansprech-/rückfallverzögert tan tab
ON/ OFF DELAY tan=tab

Flashing, 15 C
A. A./A2
start with break )

A2 16 NC 18 NO
15/18
15/16
Blinker t t
FLASHER

Making pulse con- 15 C

A.
tact A./A2
A2 15/18
16 NC 18 NO 15/16
Wischer Ein t
IMPULSE ON

Breaking pulse con- 15 C A./A2

A. B.
tact with auxiliary ≥ 35 ms
supply A2 B./A2
16 NC 18 NO
Wischer Aus
15/18
IMPULSE OFF 15/16
t

Shaping pulse con- A./A2

A. B. 15 C
tact with auxiliary ≥ 35 ms
A2 B./A2
supply 16 NC 18 NO
Impulsformung
15/18
PULSE SHAPING
15/16
t

Table 7-2: 3RP10 00 (multifunctional) circuit diagrams and function diagrams

Important
The same potential must be applied to terminals A and B.

A./A2 q A1/A2 or A3/A2, depending on the voltage level connected

B./A2 q B1/A2 or B3/A2, depending on the voltage level connected

SIRIUS System Manual

7-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.3.2 Multifunctional (3RP15 05 solid-state time relay)

Operating time adjust- Fifteen time ranges can be set using a rotary switch, ensuring very precise
ment adjustment. The set time range is displayed in a window next to the rotary
switch.
The desired runtime can be set accurately by means of a potentiometer
(rotary switch for fine adjustment).
In the time range position ∞ the function is executed with an endless time
period. This means, for example, that the output relay never switches
through when "on-delay" is set and the supply voltage is applied or that the
output relay remains continuously on when "making pulse contact" is set.

Important
Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergi-
zed state.

Example You want to set a 90 second period:

Step Procedure
1
100s
Rotate the time range selector switch until 100 s
appears in the adjacent window. This means runt-
imes of up to 100 seconds can be set.
2
60
40 Rotate the potentiometer to 90%. In other words 90% (=
80
20 90 seconds) of the maximum value (= 100 seconds) is set.
5 100%

Table 7-3: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment

A1 B1 15/17C

A3 B3 21/25/27C
60
40
80
20
5 s: 100%
5

10 s
60
40
80
20
A 1.5 min 5 100%
(90 s):
100
22/26NC

24/28NO

16NC A2(-)
18NO

Figure 7-5: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-11
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Functions The following can be set by means of a rotary switch.

• Time relay with 1 changeover contact: 8 functions
• Time relay with 2 changeover contacts: 16 functions

Important
Changes to the function are only effective if they are made in a deenergized
state.

Function setting The function is set using a rotary switch and is indicated by an identifying
letter in the adjacent window.
The set function can be labeled distinctly with an identification plate with
the corresponding function diagram. At the same time, a mechanical code
ensures that the correct function is set by ensuring that a label can only be
clipped on if the corresponding function is set using the rotary switch.
A label set with function diagrams of all the functions that can be set for the
time relay is available as an accessory.
Break the label of the set function out of the label set, and snap it firmly
onto the time relay as shown in the following diagram:

1
2

3RP19 01-0A (3RP15 05-1A)

3RP19 01-0B (3RP15 05-1B)

Figure 7-6: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) function identification

SIRIUS System Manual

7-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Identifying letters The following table lists the identifying letters for the 8 or 16 functions of
the solid-state multifunctional 3RP15 05 time relay:

Identifying letter Identifying letter

with time relay with time relay
Function with 1 with 2
changeover changeover
contact contacts
On-delay A A

Off-delay with auxiliary supply B B

On-delay and off-delay with auxiliary supply C C

Flashing, start with break D D

Making pulse contact E E

Breaking pulse contact with auxiliary supply F F

Shaping pulse contact with auxiliary supply G G

Additive on-delay with auxiliary supply (and H H•

immediate switching only H•)
On-delay and immediate switching A•

Off-delay with auxiliary supply B•

On-delay and off-delay with auxiliary supply C•

and immediate switching
Flashing, start with break, and immediate D•
switching
Making pulse contact and immediate switch- E•
ing
Breaking pulse contact with auxiliary supply F•
and immediate switching
Shaping pulse contact with auxiliary supply G•
and immediate switching
Star-delta function *d

Table 7-4: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) assignment of the identifying letters

The • after the identifying letter indicates that the second changeover con-
tact present reacts as an immediate switching contact (controlled by the
supply voltage or the start contact depending on the function). If this • is not
present, the second changeover contact reacts with a time delay like the
first changeover contact.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-13
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Function diagrams The following table explains the 8 or 16 functions of the solid-state multi-
Circuit diagrams functional 3RP15 05 time relay using circuit diagrams and function dia-
grams:
Device circuit
Identifying letter Function diagram
diagrams

A AC/DC24V
On-delay AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A./A2
15/18
15/16
A1 A3 15 25/28
25/26
*

NSB00897
A2 16 18

B
A./A2
Off-delay with auxiliary sup- AC100/127V
AC200/240V
B./A2
ply 15/18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15 15/16

NSB00898
25/28 *
25/26
A2 16 18

C AC/DC24V
A./A2
On-delay and off-delay with AC100/127V
AC200/240V
B./A2
auxiliary supply (t=ton=toff) 15/18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15 15/16

NSB00899
25/28
25/26
*
A2 16 18

D AC/DC24V
Flashing, start with break AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A./A2

(pulse/break 1:1) 15/18

15/16
A1 A3 15 25/28
25/26
*
NSB00900
~

A2 16 18

E AC/DC24V
Making pulse contact AC100/127V A./A2
AC200/240V 15/18
15/16
A1 A3 15 25/28 *
25/26
NSB00901

A2 16 18

F AC/DC24V
A./A2
Breaking pulse contact AC100/127V
AC200/240V B./A2
with auxiliary supply 15/18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15 15/16
25/28 *
NSB00902

25/26
A2 16 18

G AC/DC24V
A./A2
Shaping pulse contact with AC100/127V
AC200/240V
B./A2
auxiliary supply 15/18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15 15/16
(creates a pulse at the out- 25/28 *
NSB00903

25/26
put irrespective of the A2 16 18

length of excitation)
H• AC/DC24V
A./A2
Additive on-delay with aux- AC100/127V
AC200/240V
iliary supply and immediate B./A2
15/18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
switching 15/16
NSB00904

Σ 21/24
21/22
A2 16 18

* Only with devices with 2 changeover contacts

SIRIUS System Manual

7-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Table continued: Function diagrams (3RP15)

Device circuit
Identifying letter Function diagram
diagrams
A• AC/DC24V

On-delay and immediate AC100/127V

AC200/240V A./A2
switching 15/18
15/16
A1 A3 15 21

NSB00917
21/24
21/22
A2 16 18 22 24

B• AC/DC24V

Off-delay with auxiliary sup- AC100/127V

AC200/240V
A./A2

B./A2
ply and immediate switch- 15/18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21
ing 15/16

NSB00918
21/24
A2 16 18 22 24 21/22

C• AC/DC24V
On-delay and off-delay with AC100/127V
AC200/240V
A./A2

B./A2
auxiliary supply and imme- 15/18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21
diate switching 15/16

NSB00919
21/24
(t=ton=toff) A2 16 18 22 24 21/22

D• AC/DC24V

Flashing, start with break AC100/127V

AC200/240V A./A2
(pulse/break 1:1) and imme- 15/18
15/16
A1 A3 15 21
diate switching
NSB00920
21/24
~

21/22
A2 16 18 22 24

E• AC/DC24V
Making pulse contact and AC100/127V A./A2
AC200/240V
immediate switching 15/18
15/16
A1 A3 15 21
21/24
NSB00921

21/22
A2 16 18 22 24

F• AC/DC24V
Breaking pulse contact with AC100/127V
A./A2
AC200/240V
auxiliary supply and imme- B./A2
15/18
diate switching A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 15/16
NSB00922

21/24
A2 16 18 22 24
21/22

G•
AC/DC24V
Shaping pulse contact with AC100/127V
A./A2
AC200/240V
auxiliary supply and imme- B./A2
15/18
diate switching A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 15/16
NSB00923

(creates a pulse at the out- A2 16 18 22 24

21/24
21/22

put irrespective of the dura-

tion of excitation)
*d AC/DC24V

Star-delta function AC100/127V

AC200/240V A./A2
17/18
A1 A3 17 27
27/28
NSB00924

A2 Y18 d28

* Only with devices with 2 changeover contacts

Table 7-5: Function diagrams and circuit diagrams

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-15
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.3.3 On-delay

The 3RP10 20 solid-state time relay

The time relay contains 1 changeover contact.

Time ranges Eight time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch.

Important
Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergi-
zed state.

Function diagram
On-delay
ON DELAY
A./A2
15/18
15/16

Figure 7-7: 3RP10 function diagram

The 3RP15 11/12/13 solid-state time relay

The time relay contains 1 changeover contact.

Time ranges Fixed time ranges are offered: 10 s, 30 s, 100 s

Function diagram On-delay

ON DELAY
A./A2
15/18
15/16

Figure 7-8: 3RP15 1. function diagram

The 3RP15 25 solid-state time relay

The time relay is available with either 1 or 2 changeover contacts.

Time ranges Fifteen time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch.

Important
Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergi-
zed state.

SIRIUS System Manual

7-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

The function diagram for the time relay with 1 changeover contact and with
2 changeover contacts:
Function diagrams On-delay On-delay
ON DELAY ON DELAY
A./A2
15/18
A./A2 15/16
15/18 25/28
15/16 25/26

1 changeover contact 2 changeover contacts

Figure 7-9: 3RP15 25 function diagram

The 3RP15 27 solid-state time relay (two-wire time relay)

The two-wire time relay is connected in series with the load. The timing
period begins after the control supply voltage has been applied. The semi-
conductor output then becomes live, and voltage is applied to the load.
Time ranges Four time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch.

Important
Attention must be paid to the rated operational current, residual current with
unswitched output, and voltage drop in the case of a switched output.

Function diagram On-delay

ON DELAY

A1/A2

Figure 7-10: 3RP15 27 function diagram

7.3.4 Off-delay

The 3RP15 31/32/33 solid-state time relay with auxiliary supply

The time relay contains 1 changeover contact.

Time ranges Fixed time ranges are offered: 10 s, 30 s, 100 s

Function diagram Off-delay

OFF DELAY
A./A2

B./A2
15/18
15/16

Figure 7-11: 3RP15 3. function diagram

There is continuous auxiliary voltage (A./A2) at the time relay. If a control

supply voltage is applied to the start contact, the output relay switches over.
After the start contact is disconnected, the set runtime starts. The minimum
on-time of ≥ 35 ms must be adhered to.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-17
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

The 3RP15 40 solid-state time relay without auxiliary supply

The time relay is available with either 1 or 2 changeover contacts.

Time ranges Seven time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch. Times ranging
from 0.05 to 100 s are possible.

Important
Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergi-
zed state.

The function diagram for the time relay with 1 changeover contact and with
2 changeover contacts:
Function diagrams Off-delay Off-delay
OFF DELAY OFF DELAY
2
A1/A2
2
15/18
A1/A2 15/16
15/18 25/28
15/16 25/26

1 changeover contact 2 changeover contacts

Figure 7-12: 3RP15 40 function diagram

Mode of operation When the rated control supply voltage is applied, the time relay switches
over. After the rated control supply voltage has been disconnected, the runt-
ime t starts. After t has finished, the relay switches back to the quiet state.
If the minimum on-time is not adhered to, it is ensured that either the timing
period will not start or that a started timing period will always be properly
completed.
Intermediate states in the function process, such as the relay getting stuck,
are successfully prevented.

7.3.5 Clock pulse generator (3RP15 55 solid-state time relay)

Description The idle time and the pulse time of the clock pulse generator and the time
ranges must be set separately.
The pulsing function begins with the break.

The time relay contains a changeover contact.

Time ranges Fifteen time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch.

Important
Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergi-
zed state. A pulse, for example, can be output cyclically for 1 second after a
break of 1 hour.

SIRIUS System Manual

7-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Function diagram Clock pulse generator

CLOCK PULSE
A./A2
15/18
15/16
Idle time Pulse time
Interval time Pulse time
Figure 7-13: 3RP15 55 function diagram

7.3.6 Star-delta function (3RP15 74/76 solid-state time relay)

Description The instantaneous star contact and the time-delayed delta contact have a
shared contact root.
To avoid phase short circuits, the switchover break from star to delta is
50 ms.

Time ranges The time relay offers a fixed time range: 20 s, 60 s

Function diagram
Star/delta
STAR/DELTA
A./A2
17/18
17/28

Figure 7-14: 3RP15 7. function diagram

7.3.7 Star-delta function with overtravel (3RP15 60 solid-state time relay)

Description Supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and there is no control signal at B./A2.
This starts the *d timing period. By applying the control signal to B./A2,
the idling time (overtravel time) is started. When the set time tIdling (30 s to
600 s) is completed, the output relays (17/16 and 17/28) are reset. If the con-
trol signal is switched off at B./A2 (minimum off-time 270 ms), a new timing
period is started.

Time ranges Star-delta time 1 s to 20 s

Overtravel time: 30 s to 600 s

Function diagram
Star-delta with overtravel
STAR/DELTA with idling

A./A2
B./A2
17/18
50 ms
17/28
17/16
t t
* Idling

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-19
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.4 Accessories
7.4.1 Accessories for 3RP10

Coding plug set Included with the 3RP10 00 solid-state time relay is a coding plug set for 7
functions. The function is set by clipping on a label with that function on it.
The following diagrams show you how to affix the coding labels:

Figure 7-15: Coding plug set (3RP10 00)

This coding plug set is also available separately as 7PX9904.

7.4.2 Accessories for 3RP15 05

Label set Two label sets are available to the 3RP15 05 solid-state time relay, multi-
function device for labeling, depending on the version (8 functions with 1
changeover contact, 16 functions with 2 changeover contacts):
• 3RP19 01-0A for the 3RP15 05-1A electronic relay, 1 changeover contact
• 3RP19 01-0B for the 3RP15 05-1B electronic relay, 2 changeover contacts
The following table shows you how to set the function on the time relay and
put on the label:

Illustration Procedure
1 The desired function is set on
the potentiometer of the time
relay using a screwdriver.

2 The corresponding label iden-

tifying the set function is clipped
on.

1
2

3RP19 01-0A (3RP15 05-.A)

3RP19 01-0B (3RP15 05-.B)

Figure 7-16: Label set (3RP15)

SIRIUS System Manual

7-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Sealable cover All 3RP15 solid-state time relays can be secured against unauthorized
adjustment by means of a sealable cover (3RP19 02). The following table
and illustration explain how to do this:

Illustration Procedure
1Break off the key for interlocking from
the upper edge of the cover.

2Use the hook to put the cover in the

openings to the side of the device iden-
1 3 tification label.

3Move the cover toward the time relay.

2
3RP19 02

4Hook the key onto the time relay

through the slit in the cover to attach
the cover to the time relay.
5
5/6 Pull the seal through the opening of
the key.
4

Table 7-6: Sealable cover

Push-in lugs for screw- Push-in lugs (3RP19 03) are available for the screw-type attachment:
type attachment
3RP19 03

Figure 7-17: Screw-on attachment

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-21
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.5 Mounting and connection

7.5.1 Mounting

3RP10

Snap-on attachment The 3RP10 time relays can be snapped onto the 35 mm rails and removed
without tools in acc. with EN 50 022.
Place the time relay on the upper edge of the rail, and press it downward
until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. To remove the time relay, press
it downward to release the tension of the spring, and the time relay can be
removed.

Figure 7-18: 3RP10: mounting on and removal from a 35 mm rail

Screw-on attachment The following is required for screw-type attachment of the 3RP10 time relay:
• 2 M4 screws, diagonal
• Maximum tightening torque of 10.5 Nm
• Washers and spring lock washers must always be used
• The distance to grounded parts at the side must be more than 6 mm

3RP15

Snap-on attachment The 3RP15 time relays can be snapped onto the 35 mm rails and removed
without tools in acc. with EN 50 022.
Place the time relay on the upper edge of the rail, and press it downward
until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. To remove the time relay, press
it downward to release the tension of the spring, and the time relay can be
removed.

Figure 7-19: Rail mounting

SIRIUS System Manual

7-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

Screw-on attachment Screw-on attachment is possible by means of push-in lugs for M4 screws
(application, see under Section 7.4 Accessories)

7.5.2 Connection

The 3RP10 solid-state time relays are available with SIGUT terminals with
plus/minus Pozidriv 2 screws and also with Cage Clamp terminals.
The 3RP15 solid-state time relays are available:
• With SIGUT terminals with plus/minus Pozidriv 2 screws
• With Cage Clamp terminals

Conductor cross-sec- The following table lists the permissible conductor cross-sections for the
tions 3RP1 solid-state time relays. The specifications apply to control and load
current connections.

3RP10.0-1 3RP10.0-2 3RP15 3RP15..-2

(Cage Clamp) (Cage Clamp)
0.8 to 1.2 Nm 0.8 to 1.2 Nm
7 to 10.3 lb.in ------ 7 to 10.3 lb.in ------
∅ 5 to 6 mm / PZ2
10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm²) 1 x (0.5 to 4 mm²) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 4 mm²) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²)
10 1 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.25 to 1 mm²)
2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (0.25 to 1 mm²)
2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²)
10
------ 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²) ------ 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm²)

AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) 2 x (20 to 14) 2 x (24 to 16)

Table 7-7: Permissible conductor cross-sections for control and load current connections:

The following illustration shows you the Cage Clamp terminal:

2
1
3

Figure 7-20: Cage Clamp terminals

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-23
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.5.3 Circuit diagrams

3RP10
Us = AC 100/127 V
Us = AC/DC 24 V Us = AC 200/240 V
L1(+) L1

B3 A3 B1 A1 15 B3 A3 B1 A1 15

A2 16 18 A2 16 18
N(-) N

L1 L1

S1 K1 S1

A1 B1 A1 B1
(A3+) (B3+) (A3+) (B3+)
K1 K1
A2 A2
N N

3RP10 circuit diagrams

3RP15

Us = AC/DC 60 V
Us = AC 100 ... 127 V
Us = AC/DC 24 V Us = AC 200 ... 240 V
Us = AC/DC 42 ... 48 V Us = AC/DC 24 ... 240 V
L1(+) L1

B3 A3 B1 A1 B3 A3 B1 A1

A2 A2
N(-) N

L1 L1

K1 S1
S1

A1 B1 A1 B1
(A3+) (B3+) (A3+) (B3+)
K1
K1
A2 A2
N N

3RP15 circuit diagrams

SIRIUS System Manual

7-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm)

3RP1 time relay

8.6 67
5.3 5 51 35

5
2)
36
55
58

50
3)
4)

NSB00978
45 7.5

3RP10

1)
73.5
62
90

80

4)
NSB00980

15 5 approx. 65 (terminals)
22.5 86

3RP15, 1 changeover contact without auxiliary supply5) , clock pulse generator, star-delta function

1)
110

73.5
62
82

80

4)

approx. 37
NSB00981

15 (terminals)
22.5 5 approx. 65 (terminals)

3RP15 1 and 2 changeover contact devices with auxiliary supply

1) Push-in lug for screw-type attachment

3) Coding plug (with 3RP10) or identification label
4) Drilling pattern
5) Except 3RP15 05-1A.30 two-wire design
6) Identification label

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 7-25
3RP10, 3RP15 solid-state time relays

7.7 Technical specifications

Technical specifications in acc. with IEC 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021
Type 3RP10 00 3RP15 05 3RP15 11 3RP15 40 3RP15 60 3RP15 74 3RP15 27
3RP10 20 3RP15 31 3RP15 12 3RP15 76
3RP15 32 3RP15 13
3RP15 33 3RP15 25
3RP15 55
Rated insulation voltage VAC 300; 500 with 3RP1505-1BT20
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III in acc. with DIN VDE 0110
Excitation operating range 1) 0.85 to 1.1 x Us with AC; 0.8 to 1.25 x Us with DC
0.95 to 1.05 times the rated frequency
Rated power W 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
Power input at 230 VAC, 50 Hz VA 4 6 6 2 2) 6 6 1
Rated operational currents Ie
AC-15 at 230 VAC, 50 Hz A 33 ) –
AC-14; DC-13 – 0.01 to 0.6
DC-13 at 24 V 1 –
DC-13 at 48 V 0.45 –
DC-13 at 60 V 0.35 –
DC-13 at 110 V 0.2 –
DC-13 at 230 V 0.1 –
DIAZED fuse 4)
Performance class gL/gG A 4 –
Switching frequency
• Loaded with Ie 230 VAC 1/h 2500 5000
• Loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 VAC 1/h 5000 5000
Recovery time ms 150 5) 300 150 50
Minimum on-time ms 35 35 6) – 200 7) –
Residual current mA ≤5
With output not switched through
Voltage drop V ≤ 3.5
Switched through
Short-term current-carrying capa- A 10
city (to 10 ms)
Setting accuracy Typically ±5%
Related to the end of scale value
Repeatability ≤ ±1%
Mechanical service life Operating cycles 30 x 106 100 x 106
Permissible ambient temperature In operation °C -25 to +60
During storage °C -40 to +85
Degree of protection IP 40 lid
In acc. with EN 60 529 IP 20 terminals
Shock resistance g/ms 15/11
Half-sine in acc. with IEC 60 068-2-27
Vibration resistance in acc. with IEC 60 068-2-6 Hz/mm 10-55/0.35
EMC tests IEC 61 000-6-2/EN 50 081-1
In acc. with the basic specification
Table 7-8: Technical specifications for the time relay

1) If not specified otherwise

2) Maximum making current peak 1 A/100 ms
3) With 3RP15 05-.R: NC contact −> Ie = 1 A
4) Without any welding in acc. with IEC 60 947-5-1.
5) With RP15 05.-BW30/ .AW30/ .RW30 and 3RP15 25-.BW30 voltage-dependent 10 to 250 ms.
6) Minimum on-time with 3RP15 00-. BW30 150 ms until instantaneous contact is switched.
7) Adhere to minimum on-time for problem-free functioning.

SIRIUS System Manual

7-26 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 8

3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

(soft starter)

Section Subject Page

8.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 8-3

8.2 Device description 8-5

8.2.1 Physical principles 8-6

8.2.2 General device description 8-10

Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor cont-

8.2.3 rol unit (soft starter) with the SIKOSTART 3RW22 8-14
motor control units

Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor cont-

8.2.4 rol unit (soft starter) with the 3RA star-delta combina- 8-16
tion

8.2.5 Notes on configuration 8-16

8.3 Application and use 8-18

8.3.1 Areas of application and criteria for selection 8-18

8.3.2 Installation guidelines 8-18

8.3.3 Overview tables: correction factors 8-21

8.3.3.1 3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation 8-21

3RW30/31 soft starters in combination with the 3RV1

8.3.3.2 8-22
circuit breaker

Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RU1 thermal

8.3.3.3 overload 8-24
relay and 3RW3 soft starter

Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RB10 electro-

8.3.3.4 8-26
nic overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter
8.3.4 Circuit examples 8-29

8.3.5 Commissioning 8-30

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-1
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Section Subject Page

8.3.6 Event messages and diagnostics 8-32

8.3.7 Timing diagram 8-33

8.4 Accessories 8-35

8.5 Mounting and connection 8-37

8.5.1 Mounting 8-37

8.5.2 Connection 8-37

8.5.3 Circuit diagrams 8-38

8.6 Dimensioned drawings 8-41

8.7 Technical specifications 8-42

8.7.1 Control electronics/power electronics 8-42

8.7.2 Short-circuit protection and fuse coordination 8-45

8.7.3 Site altitude 8-50

8.7.4 Specifications in acc. with IEC 8-51

8.7.5 Specifications in acc. with NEMA 8-52

SIRIUS System Manual

8-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals
The 3RW3 semiconductor motor control units, referred to below more suc-
cinctly as soft starters, meet the UL and CSA requirements.

UL/CSA UL 508

Degrees of protection
EN
offered by housings

DIN standard rail EN 50 022

Electronic
IEC 60947 - 4-2
Motor control units

Shock protection IEC 60947 - 1 and DIN 40050

EMC IEC 60801 - 4 -2 (draft)

General specifications EN 602 69 - 1A1

Control devices and

EN 602 69 - 1A1
switching elements

Gost Approved by Gost

EMC compliance marking for Australia

CTic
(similar to CE marking)

Table 8-1: Standards, certificates, and approvals, 3RW3

Normal switching duty The 3RW3 soft starters can be used for normal switching duty in acc. with
DIN VDE 0100 Part 460:
A switch for normal switching duty must be provided for all circuits that are
to be switched independently of other parts. Switches for normal switching
duty do not necessarily all switch active conductors of a circuit.

Isolation The soft starters do not meet the requirements for isolation
in acc. with DIN VDE 0100 Part 460 and EN 60 947-1:
Every circuit must be capable of being isolated from the active conductors
of the power supply.
Circuit groups can be isolated by a common device if this is permitted by the
operating conditions. In the open position, devices with an isolating function
must have a corresponding isolating distance and an indicator showing the
positions of the moving contacts.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-3
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Warnings

Caution Important
The devices are all carefully tested at the The 3RW3...-1.B1. soft starter was built as
factory and are not shipped unless they a class A device. Using this product in res-
are found to be in proper working order. idential buildings could cause radio inter-
However, they may be subjected to ference.
stresses during transportation over which
we have no control.

Consequently, the impulse series relays in

the main circuit may be in an undefined
switching state.

In the interests of complete safety, the

following procedure should be used at
commissioning or after the replacement
of the SIRIUS soft starter:

First, apply the supply voltage in order to

put the impulse series relays in a defined
switching state.

Then, switch the main circuit on.

If you deviate from this procedure, the

motor can be switched on inadvertently
and cause damage to people or parts of
the system.

SIRIUS System Manual

8-4 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.2 Device description

The SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starters are part of the SIRIUS modular system. They
are compatible with the other SIRIUS switching devices.
The possible combinations are:
• 3RW3 soft starter + 3RV circuit breaker
• 3RW3 soft starter + 3RU/3RB overload relay + 3RT contactor
The link modules used for combinations of contactors and circuit breakers
are used for this (see Section 8.3.2, "Installation guidelines").

Figure 8-1: 3RW3 soft starter

3RW30/31 frame sizes The 3RW30 soft starter is available in four frame sizes: S00, S0, S2, and S3.
The 3RW31 soft starter is available in frame size S0.
The following table contains the power ranges of the various frame sizes (all
specifications apply to UN = 400 V and 40° C ambient temperature):

Frame size S00 Frame size S0 Frame size S2 Frame size S3

1.1 - 4 kW 5.5 - 11 kW 15 - 22 kW 30 - 55 kW

6-9A 12.5 - 25 A 32 - 45 A 63 - 100 A

(W x H x D) (mm) (W x H x D) (mm) (W x H x D) (mm) (W x H x D) (mm)

45 x 97.5 x 93 45x125x119 55 x 160 x 143 70x170x178

Table 8-2: 3RW3, frame sizes

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-5
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.2.1 Physical principles

Starting current Three-phase current asynchronous motors have a high inrush current I(star-
ting). This inrush current can be between three and fifteen times as high as
the rated operational current, depending on the type of motor. A figure bet-
ween seven and eight times the rated operational current can be postulated
as typical.

I
Istarting

Irated

I0 (no-load)

nrated nsyn n

Mcusp
M

Mmotor
Mstarting

Mload
Msaddle
Maccel
Mrated
Mmotor

Mload

nrated nsyn n
Figure 8-1: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor

Important
This starting current must be taken into consideration in the design of the
supply network, among other things by adapting the supply (high heat deve-
lopment) and the fusing (inadvertent tripping of the fuses).

Reducing the starting There are various ways of reducing the starting current:
current • By star-delta starter
• By frequency converter
• By soft starter

SIRIUS System Manual

8-6 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Star-delta starter After a delay, the motor windings are switched from a star to a delta config-
uration. The motor current for star starting is only about 1/3 of that required
for delta starting (motor torque, too, is reduced to approximately 1/3 of the
delta torque).
Disadvantages:
• 6 motor cables are necessary
• Switching surges occur (in the current and torque transients)
• The startup cannot be adapted to the system environment
• Installation is relatively complicated and time-consuming
• More space is needed in the cubicle

I Starting current for d M

IAd
M Ad Mmotor ford

Mload
Starting current
for */d-start
IA*=
1/3 IA d Mmotor for*
=1/3 MAd MA*

n n
n nsyn n nsyn
*nrated *nrated

Figure 8-2: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-7
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Frequency converter A frequency converter converts the AC voltage from the grid to direct volt-
age, which can then be converted to any voltage and frequency.
The illustration below shows how a frequency converter works:

0V

Figure 8-3: Method of operation of a frequency converter

Disadvantages:
• Relatively complicated wiring needed in order to meet radio interference
suppression requirements; filters are often essential
• Line capacitances limit the lengths of motor feeder cables; it may be nec-
essary to use chokes, sinus filters, or even dV/dt filters.
• Expensive
• System startup is complex and time-consuming on account of the multi-
plicity of operating parameters
• It can be necessary to use shielded motor feeder cables
Advantages:
• Motor speed is variable; speed can be accurately pegged at constant lev-
els.

The U/f ratio remains virtually constant. It is therefore possible to achieve

high torques at relatively low currents.

SIRIUS System Manual

8-8 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Soft starter With a soft starter, motor voltage is increased from a selectable starting
voltage to the rated voltage by phase firing within a defined starting time.
Motor current is proportional to the motor voltage, so the starting current is
reduced by the factor of the defined starting voltage.
The illustration below shows how the 3RW3 soft starter works:

UL1- L3

α α
α
α ϕ

L1
UL1- L3
M L2
3~
L3
G1

Figure 8-4: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the 3RW3 soft starter

Example:
Starting voltage 50% of Ue => starting current equals 50% of the motor
starting current for direct-on-line starting.
A soft starter also reduces motor torque. This is the reason why a soft-
started motor does not jerk into action.
The relationship is as follows: The motor torque is proportional to the square
of the motor voltage.
Example:
Starting voltage 50% of Ue => starting torque 25% of the starting torque for
direct-on-line starting.

Advantages:
• Less space needed in the cubicle
• No protective circuits (e.g. filters) necessary to comply with the radio
interference suppression specifications (class A; in UC 24 V control volt-
age version also class B)
• Lower installation costs
• Straightforward system startup
• Only 3 motor feeder cables, half as many as are needed for a star-delta
starter
• Adjustment options permit adaptation to the system.

Disadvantages:
• Long-term speed settings not possible.
• Lower torque at reduced voltage

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-9
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

I M
100% Ugrid
Istartingf
100% Ugrid
Istarting Mstarting
0.7 x 70% Ugrid
Istartingf 70% Ugrid
0.5 x 50% Ugrid
Mstarting
0.49 x 50% Ugrid

Mstarting
0.25 x

nsyn n nsyn n
Figure 8-5: Current and torque curves for a soft starter

8.2.2 General device description

The SIRIUS modular system offers a variety of alternatives for load feeders.
In addition to the star-delta starters (see Chapter 5, "3RA fuseless load feed-
ers"), the SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starters are also available.
The 3RW3 soft starters can be combined with the following SIRIUS devices:
• 3RT contactors
• 3RV circuit breakers
• 3RU thermal overload relays
• 3RB10 electronic overload relays
They are all mounted and connected up in the same way.
Please note the relevant guidelines in Section 8.3.2.

Functions of the load feeder

Normal switching Normal switching duty of a circuit can, according to the definitions of isola-
duty tion and normal switching data in DIN VDE 0100 (see Section 8.1), be imple-
mented with a contactor or a soft starter alone.

SIRIUS System Manual

8-10 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Isolation According to DIN VDE 0100, isolation from the supplying network cannot be
provided by a semiconductor element (i.e. soft starter, frequency converter,
contactor, or similar).
To implement isolation from the supplying network, a 3RV circuit breaker (or
another isolating device that fulfills the requirements of DIN VDE 0100)
must be used in addition to the contactor or soft starter. A contactor alone
in combination with the soft starter is not enough.
Both isolation and normal switching duty can be implemented quickly and
easily with the 3RW3 soft starter in combination with the modules from the
SIRIUS modular system.

Variants The electronic soft starters are available in two variants:

Standard 3RW30 variant
The standard 3RW30 variant is used for single-speed motors. This variant is
available in all four frame sizes. The starting voltage U s, starting time tRon,
and coasting-down time tRoff can be set independently of each other on the
device. The device is switched on by means of a cycling contact IN.

3RW31 special variant

The 3RW31 special variant cycles pole-changing motors (Dahlander wind-
ing). The following can be set independently of each other:
• Starting voltage Us
• Starting time of initial speed tR1
• Starting time of second speed tR2
The device does not have a coasting-down function. The set starting voltage
applies to both ramp times tR1 and tR2.
The ramp time is selected by means of two inputs, IN1 and IN2, that switch
the soft starter on.
The devices of the 3RW31 series are only available in frame size S0.

Settings The devices can be set as follows:

3RW30
By means of 3 potentiometers for setting:
• Starting time in the range from 0 to 20 seconds
• Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100% of the rated voltage
of the motor
• Coasting-down time in the range from 0 to 20 seconds

3RW31
By means of 3 potentiometers for setting:
• Starting time 1 in the range from 0 to 20 seconds
• Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100% of the rated voltage
of the motor
• Starting time 2 in the range from 0 to 20 seconds
A special software program ensures that progressive ramp times are set.
Short times of up to 5 seconds can thus be set very precisely.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-11
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Auxiliary contacts 3RW30

In the case of frame sizes S0 to S3, the following auxiliary contacts are inte-
grated:
• "ON": When triggered, the latching signal is used for locking by means of a
simple on/off pushbutton (contact designation 13/14).
• "BYPASSED": With the end-of-startup signal, control valves can be
addressed after soft starting of a pump, for example, in order to enable
pumping (contact designation 23/24).
The devices of frame size S00 do not have any auxiliary switches.

3RW31
The 3RW31 does not have any auxiliary contacts.

Soft starting function Torque-reduced start for three-phase asynchronous motors:

Triggering is two-phase, which means that the current is kept low through-
out the run-up phase. Current peaks such as those that occur in a star-delta
start at the changeover from star to delta are prevented by continuous volt-
age management.
Transient current peaks (inrush peaks) are automatically avoided in each
switch-on procedure by a special control function of the power semiconduc-
tors.

Soft coasting-down The integrated soft coasting-down function prevents the drive coming to an
function abrupt halt when the motor is switched off.

3RW30 time ramps The following graphics show the time ramp of the 3RW30 and the timing
diagram of the auxiliary contacts:

U
UN

ON 13/14
Us
BYPASSED 23/24
t tR off
tR on tR off tR on
3RW30: Time ramp Timing diagram of the auxiliary
contacts
Figure 8-6: Time ramp/timing diagram, 3RW30

The graphic below shows the time ramp of the 3RW3:

U
UN

Us

t
tR1 tR2
Figure 8-7: Time ramp, 3RW31

SIRIUS System Manual

8-12 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Accessories A fan can be snapped into the soft starter housing of frame sizes S0 to S3
from below. This brings the following benefits:
• Improved range of options for the installation position
• Increase in the switching frequency (see Section 8.3.2, "Installation guide-
lines")
In the case of frame sizes S0 and S2, extended terminal covers can be
mounted on the box covers in order to cover the cable ends and keep them
safe from fingers. These are identical to the extended terminal covers of the
SIRIUS 3RT contactors of the same frame sizes.
In the case of frame size S3, terminal covers are available for lug connection
or bar connection. These, too, are identical to the accessory parts of the cor-
responding SIRIUS contactor size.
See Section 8.4 for details of other accessories.

Mounting The devices are attached to the 3RV circuit breakers by means of a link mod-
ule and are thus connected mechanically and electrically. This link module is
identical to the one that is used for the corresponding contactor/circuit-
breaker combinations. This installation variant offers all the advantages of a
fuseless load feeder.

Link modules The following link modules are used to combine 3RW3 soft starters and
3RV1 circuit breakers:

Frame size Link module

S00 3RA1911-1A

S0 3RA1921-1A

S2 3RA1931-1A

S3 3RA1941-1A
Table 8-3: Link modules

Connection The 3RW3 electronic soft starters are available with screw-type terminals.
Plus-minus POZIDRIV 2 screws are used.
The SIGUT terminal system is used (captive screws, contacts open on deliv-
ery, etc.).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-13
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.2.3 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the
SIKOSTART 3RW22 and SIKOSTART 3RW34 motor control units

Soft starters are available for different applications.

The following graphic provides an overview of the different soft starters:

Functions

High
End SIKOSTART 3RW22

Low 2 phase SIKOSTART 3RW34

12/16/25A in-line only
End
S0 S2 S3
+ 575V+
auxiliary contacts SIRIUS
3RW30/31 soft starters
S00
6/9A

5.5 11 22 45 710 1000

Power in kW
at 400 V

Figure 8-8: Overview of soft starters

SIKOSTART 3RW22 The SIKOSTART 3RW22 is suitable for drives that place high demands on
the functionality of the starter. It covers a power range from 3 kW to 710 kW
(at 400 V).

SIKOSTART 3RW22 offers the following:

• Soft starting and soft coasting down
• Break-loose torque
• DC brakes
• Energy-saving operation
• Temperature monitoring
• Operation using a PC and an RS232 interface
• Selection and configuration program
• Current and voltage limitation
• Pump functionalities (e.g. pump coasting down)
• Startup detection
• Three parameter sets
• Different coasting-down types
• Electronic device overload protection

The SIKOSTART 3RW22 application manual presents the various application

areas and circuit variants (order no. E20001-P285-A484-V3).

SIRIUS System Manual

8-14 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

SIKOSTART 3RW34 The SIKOSTART 3RW34 is suitable for drives with low demands in terms of
the functionality of the soft starter. The SIKOSTART 3RW34 is very similar to
the SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starter in terms of its operation and configuration. It
covers a power range of up to 1000 kW (400 V).
The functions of the 3RW34 are as follows:
• Soft starting and soft coasting down
• 2 circuit variants: standard and root 3 circuits
• Three-phase control
• Optional AS-i bus control

You will find the technical specifications and a detailed description of the
3RW34 in the document describing SIKOSTART 3RW22/3RW34 solid-state
motor controllers (order no.: E20001-A200-P302).

SIRIUS 3RW3 soft The SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starter covers the power range from 1.5 kW to
starter 45 kW.
Power semiconductors always exhibit power loss. This manifests itself in
heat generation. In order to keep this power loss as low as possible, the
semiconductors are bypassed by relay contacts after the motor has started
up. The device's heat sink and its dimensions can thus be smaller than they
otherwise would be. In addition, it is necessary to use a bypass contactor,
which bypasses the line semiconductors in the conventional configuration.
For further processing in the system controller, the device offers two relay
outputs:
• "ON" contact (terminals 13/14), which can be used, for example, to control
the soft starter by button (locking)
• "BYPASSED" contact (terminals 23/24), which signals the completion of
startup (e.g. in order to switch a solenoid valve after a soft-started pump
has started up)

For drives in this power range, good motor startups can be achieved with a
two-phase controller.
In the case of a two-phase controller, semiconductor elements are only
used in two phases in order to reduce motor current and motor voltage in all
three phases. The third phase is bypassed internally in the soft starter.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-15
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.2.4 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter)
with the 3RA star-delta combination

The comparison of soft starter and star-delta combinations shows that the
3RW3 has the following advantages (example here 22 kW):

3RW3 soft starter 3RA star-delta starter

Width: 55 mm Width: 165 mm

Wiring: 3 motor supply leads Wiring: 6 motor supply leads

Selectable startup parameters None

Minimum current values at startup Fixed current ratios (I* = 1/3Id)

Switchover current peaks when switching

No dangerous switchover current peaks
from star to delta

Special variant for Dahlander motors -----

Soft coasting-down function -----

Table 8-4: Comparison of 3RW3/3RA

8.2.5 Notes on configuration

In order for a motor to reach its rated speed, motor torque at any given time
during startup must be greater than the torque needed by the load, since
otherwise a stable operating point would be reached before the motor
achieved its rated speed (the motor would "drag to a stop"). The difference
between motor torque and load torque is the accelerating torque that is
responsible for the increase in the speed of the drive. The lower the acceler-
ating torque, the longer the motor needs to run up to its operating speed.

Starting torque Reducing the terminal voltage of a three-phase asynchronous motor

reduces the motor's starting current and the starting torque.
Current is directly proportional to voltage, whereas voltage is proportional to
the square root of motor torque.

Example:
Motor = 55 kW, rated current = 100 A, starting current = 7 x rating current,
motor torque = 355 Nm, starting torque = 2.4 x rated torque
Settings for the soft starter: starting voltage 50% of rated voltage for motor
The reductions are thus as follows:
• The starting current is reduced to half the starting current for a direct
start: 50% of (7 x 100 A) = 350 A
• Starting torque is reduced to 0.5 x 0.5 = 25% of the starting torque for a
direct start: 25% of 2.4 x 355 Nm = 213 Nm

Note On account of the fact that the starting voltage is proportional to the square
root of the motor torque, it is important to ensure that the starting voltage is
not too low. This applies particularly for a pronounced saddle torque, the
lowest motor torque that occurs during run-up to rated speed.

SIRIUS System Manual

8-16 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Mmotor
M

Mstarting

Mmotor with Mload

SIRIUS3R soft starter

MB
MB = accelerating torque
of the motor
Mstarting
with
SIRIUS3R
Soft starter n

Ue

US

tR t
Figure 8-9: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter

Criteria for selection Note

In the case of the SIRIUS 3RW30/31 soft starters, the corresponding soft
starter must be selected on the basis of the rated current for the motor (the
rated current of the soft starter must be ≥ the rated current for the motor).

The 3 potentiometers on the starter are for setting the starting voltage, the
starting time, and the coasting-down time.
The soft starter is correctly set when the motor starts smoothly and runs up
rapidly to its rated speed.
Ramp times of up to 20 seconds can be set.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-17
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.3 Application and use

8.3.1 Areas of application and criteria for selection

The SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starters offer an alternative to star-delta starters (see
Section 8.2.4 for a comparison and the advantages).
The most important advantages are soft starting and soft coasting-down,
interruption-free switching without current spikes that could interfere with
the supply system, and compact dimensions.
Many drives that needed frequency converters in the past can be changed
to soft-start operation with the 3RW3, if the applications do not call for vari-
ations in speed.

Applications Typical applications include, for example:

Conveyor belts, conveyor systems:
• Smooth starting
• Smooth slowing
• Use of better-value conveyor material
Rotary pumps, piston-type pumps
• Avoidance of pressure surges
• Extended service life of the piping system
Agitators, mixers:
• Reduced starting current
Fans:
• Less strain on gearing and drive belts

Cooling time Note:

The cooling time must be taken into consideration in the starting frequency.

8.3.2 Installation guidelines

On account of the heat generated, certain installation guidelines must be

adhered to when combining 3RW30/31 soft starters with other SIRIUS
switching devices.

Stand-alone installa- Stand-alone installation is when minimum vertical and lateral clearances
tion between the mounted devices are not violated. This applies both to indivi-
dual devices and complete load feeders.
The following minimum clearances must be adhered to in stand-alone instal-
lation (these minimum clearances depend on the frame size):

SIRIUS System Manual

8-18 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Minimum clearance on
Frame size
both sides in mm
S00 15
S0 20
3RW30
S2 30
S3 40
Table 8-5: Stand-alone installation, minimum clearances at the side, 3RW3

a
Vertical Vertical
Frame size
clearance a clearance b
S00 50 50
S0 60 40
3RW30
S2 50 30
S3 60 30 b

Table 8-6: Stand-alone installation, minimum clearances at the side, 3RW3

Line lengths for the The control inputs for starting and stopping are not rated for longer dis-
drive circuit tances. This means:
• In the case of a drive circuit that goes beyond the control cubicle, cou-
pling relays must be used.
• The control cables in the cubicle should not be laid together with main cir-
cuit cables.
When electronic output modules are used in the drive circuit (e.g. Triac out-
puts at 230 VAC), RC elements (e.g. 3TX7462-3T or similar with C > 100 nF)
may be required at the control inputs under certain circumstances.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-19
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Correction factors If the minimum clearances are violated, in a combination of a soft starter
with a circuit breaker, fixed correction factors must be used to determine
the rated current for the device and the switching frequency.
The following variables can be modified by means of correction factors:
• Rated current for the device
• Switching frequency
• Current setting of the circuit breaker
• Current setting of the overload relay

Correction factor for the A factor is specified by which the device rated current of the soft starter is
rated current of the reduced.
device Example:
Correction factor for the rated current of the device = 0.9
Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14 (under normal conditions at 40 °C a
device rated current of 6 A)
This results in an actual device rated current of:
0.9 x 6 A = 5.4 A

Correction factor for The switching frequency is the maximum permissible number of starts per
switching frequency hour. This value must be adjusted by the specified correction factor. The
number of permissible starts per hour is given in Table 8.7.1, Control electro-
nics/power electronics, in Section 8.7, Technical specifications.
The specified correction factors refer to the following operating conditions:
S4 operation, 40 °C ambient temperature, 30% duty cycle

Example:
Correction factor for the switching frequency = 1.5
Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14 (has a maximum switching frequency of
30 starts per hour under the conditions specified above)
This results in a corrected switching frequency of:
1.5 x 30 = 45 starts per hour
To increase the switching frequency, it is also possible to use a larger
device.

Correction factor for the In combinations of a 3RW30 soft starter and a 3RV1 circuit breaker, the set
current setting of the value of the circuit breaker may have to be corrected appropriately. The cor-
circuit breaker rection factor specifies the extent of the change.
Example:
Correction for the current setting of the circuit breaker: 1.1
Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14
The connected motor has a motor rated current of 5 A.
The set value of the circuit breaker must be changed to:
1.1 x 5 A = 5.5 A

SIRIUS System Manual

8-20 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Correction factor for the In combinations of a 3RW30 soft starter + 3RU1 thermal overload relay or
current setting of the 3RW30 software starter + 3RB10 electronic overload relay, the set value of
overload relay the overload relay must be corrected appropriately. The correction factor
specifies the extent of the change.
Example:
Correction factor for the current setting of the overload relay 0.9
Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14
The connected motor has a motor rated current of 5 A.
The set value of the overload relay now has to be changed to:
0.9 x 5 A = 4.5 A

8.3.3 Overview tables: correction factors

The tables below give the correction factors for the circuit-breaker current
setting, the device rated current, and the switching frequency.
The values indicate the difference between use with a fan (accessory) and
use without a fan.
All correction fans apply throughout the entire temperature range (i.e. for
40 °C, 50 °C, and 60 °C).
The various tables specify the values in turn for the following:
3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation
3RW30/31 soft starter + 3RV1 circuit breaker
3RW30/31 soft starter + 3RT1 contactor + 3RU1 thermal overload relay
3RW30/31 soft starter + 3RT1 contactor + 3RB10 electronic overload relay

8.3.3.1 3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation

Minimum clearance In the case of frame size S00 (3RW301..), the following applies to stand-
alone, vertical installation without directly attached switching devices:
In order to maintain the required space above the arc chute, clearance of at
least 50 mm must be maintained to grounded parts above and below.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-21
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

3RW30/31 correction 3RW30/31 soft starters not combined with any other switching devices:
factors
Without fan With fan
Stand-alone installa-
Stand-alone installa- tion
tion Installed side by side or
side by side
Correction factor Correction factor Correction factor
Device Rated cur- Switching Rated cur- Switching Rated cur- Switching
Order number Frame rated cur- rent for frequency rent for frequency rent for frequency
size rent in A at the device the device the device
40 °C
3RW3014-1CB.. S00 6 1 1 1 0,75 - 1) - 1)
3RW3016-1CB.. S00 9 1 1 1 0.75 - 1) - 1)
3RW3.24-1AB.. S0 12.5 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8
3RW3.25-1AB.. S0 16 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8
3RW3.26-1AB.. S0 25 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8
3RW3034-1AB.. S2 32 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8
3RW3035-1AB.. S2 38 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8
3RW3036-1AB.. S2 45 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8
3RW3044-1AB.. S3 63 1 1 1 0.8 1 1.6
3RW3045-1AB.. S3 75 1 1 1 0.75 1 1.6
3RW3046-1AB.. S3 100 1 1 1 0.7 1 1.6
Table 8-7: Correction factors, 3RW30/31

1) The SIRIUS 3RW301.. soft starters cannot be operated

with a fan.

8.3.3.2 3RW30/31 soft starters in combination with the 3RV1 circuit breaker

3RV

Link module

3RW

3k
M

Figure 8-10: 3RW3 soft starter + 3RV1 circuit breaker

Dimensioning of the The frame size selected for the circuit breaker should be large enough so
circuit breaker that the current value calculated can just be set.
In the event of current values that are lower than can be set for the speci-
fied circuit breaker, the next smaller circuit breaker must be used.

SIRIUS System Manual

8-22 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 SIRIUS System Manual
3RV1 + 3RW30/31
Correction factors:

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b

Without fan Without fan With fan With fan
Stand-alone installation Installed side by side Stand-alone installation Installed side by side

Frame size

Order number
Order number
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor

Adjustment range
Switching frequency
Switching frequency
Switching frequency
Switching frequency

Device rated current in A

Rated current for the device
Rated current for the device
Rated current for the device
Rated current for the device

at an ambient temperature of 40 °C
Current setting of the circuit breaker
Current setting of the circuit breaker
Current setting of the circuit breaker
Current setting of the circuit breaker

3RW3014-1CB.. S00 6 3RV1011-1GA10 (4.5 - 6.3) A 1 0.9 1 1 0.5 1. - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1)

1) 1) 1) 1)
3RW3016-1CB.. S00 9 3RV1011-1JA10 (7 - 10) A 1 0.9 1 1 0.5 1. - - - 1) - - 1) -
3RW3.24-1AB.. S0 12. 3RV1021-1KA10 (9 - 12.) A 1 0.5 1 1 0.5 1. 1 1. 1 1 1.7 1.1
3RW3.25-1AB.. S0 16 3RV1021-4AA10 (11 - 16) A 1 0.5 1 1 0.5 1. 1 1. 1 1 1.7 1.1
3RW3.26-1AB.. S0 25 3RV1021-4DA10 (20 - 25) A 1 0.75 1 0. 0.5 1. 1 1. 1 1 1.7 1.1
3RW3034-1AB.. S2 32 3RV1031-4EA10 (22 - 32) A 1 0.65 1 0.9 0.45 1.1 1 2.2 1 1 1.9 1.1
3RW3035-1AB.. S2 38 3RV1031-4FA10 (28 - 40) A 1 0.85 1 0.95 0.35 1.1 1 1.8 1 1 1.7 1.1

Table 8-8: Correction factors: 3RV1 circuit breaker + 3RW3 soft starter
3RW3036-1AB.. S2 45 3RV1031-4GA10 (36 - 45) A 1 0.85 1 0.9 0.4 1.1 1 1.8 1 1 1.7 1.1
3RW3044-1AB.. S3 63 3RV1041-4JA10 (45 - 63) A 1 0.85 1 0.95 0.6 1.1 1 1.6 1 1 1.3 1.1
3RW3045-1AB.. S3 75 3RV1041-4KA10 (57 - 75) A 1 0.8 1 0.9 0.5 1.1 1 1.6 1 1 1.3 1.1
3RW3046-1AB.. S3 100 3RV1041-4MA10 (80 - 100) A 1 0.75 1 0.85 0.55 1.1 1 1.6 1 1 1.2 1.1
Combination of a 3RV1 circuit breaker + 3RW30/31 soft starter:

1) = SIRIUS 3RW301 .. soft starters cannot be used with a fan

8-23
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.3.3.3 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RU1 thermal overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter

Frame size of the The frame size selected for the overload relay should be large enough so
overload relay that it is just possible to set the current value calculated.
In the event of current values that are lower than can be set for the speci-
fied overload relay, the next smaller overload relay must be used.

Important
It is not permissible to mount the thermal overload relay under the contac-
tor/connecting lead/soft starter combination.
The overload relay must be integrated in the feeder before the contractor/
connecting lead/soft starter combination. The specified correction factors
apply only to this permissible mounting sequence.

Rail 1:
Combination of 3RT1 contac- 3RT 3RT
tor and 3RU1 thermal over-
load relay
3RU1

Connecting 3RW
lead
Rail 2:
3RW3 soft starter 3RW 3RU1

Figure 8-11: 3RT+3RU1+3RW3 combination

Minimum clearance For thermal reasons, a minimum clearance is necessary between the con-
tactor/overload relay combination and the soft starter, as is a minimum
length of the connecting leads.
The following table specifies the minimum clearances and minimum lengths
of the connecting leads for the various frame sizes:

Minimum clearance bet- Minimum length of the

Frame size ween rail 1 and rail 2 connecting lead
(center to center) in mm in mm

S00 160 100

S0 200 150

S2 240 200

S3 300 250
Table 8-9: 3RW3 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/lengths

SIRIUS System Manual

8-24 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 SIRIUS System Manual
GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
+ 3RU1 + 3RW30/31
Correction factors: 3RT

Without fan Without fan With fan With fan

Stand-alone installation Installed side by side Stand-alone installation Installed side by side

Frame size

Order number
Order number
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor
Correction factor

Therm. overload relay

Contactor order number

Device rated current in A

Rated current for the device
Rated current for the device
Rated current for the device
Rated current for the device

Set value for th. overload relay

Set value for th. overload relay
Set value for th. overload relay

Setting range of the overload relay

at an ambient temperature of 40 °C
Current setting of the circuit breaker

Correction factor for switching frequency

Correction factor for switching frequency
Correction factor for switching frequency
Correction factor for switching frequency

3RW3014-1CB.. S00 6 3RT1015-1A.. 3RU1116-1GBO (4.5 - 6.3) 0.95 1 1 0.9 0.75 1 - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1)

1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
3RW3016-1CB.. S00 9 3RT1016-1A.. 3RU1116-1JBO A 0.9 0.95 1 0.8 0.8 1 - - - - - -
relay/connecting lead/3RW30/31 soft starter:

(7 - 10) A
3RW3.24-1AB.. S0 12.5 3RT1024-1A.. 3RU1126-1KBO (9-12.5)A 0.95 0.9 1 0.9 0.55 1 1 1.8 0.95 1 1.7 0.95
3RW3.25-1AB.. S0 16 3RT1025-1A.. 3RU1126-4ABO (11-16)A 0.95 0.9 1 0.9 0.55 1 1 1.8 0.95 1 1.7 0.95
3RW3.26-1AB.. S0 25 3RT1026-1A.. 3RU1126-4DBO (22-25)A 0.9 0.8 1 0.8 0.55 1 1 1.8 0.95 1 1.7 0.95
3RW3034-1AB.. S2 32 3RT1034-1A.. 3RU1136-4EBO (22-32)A 0.95 0.7 1 0.9 0.45 1 1 2.2 0.92 1 1.9 0.92
3RW3035-1AB.. S2 38 3RT1035-1A.. 3RU1136-4FBO (28-40)A 0.95 0.9 1 0.9 0.35 1 1 1.8 0.92 1 1.7 0.92
3RW3036-1AB.. S2 45 3RT1036-1A.. 3RU1136-4HBO (36-45)A 0.9 0.95 1 0.8 0.45 1 1 1.8 0.92 1 1.7 0.92
3RW3044-1AB.. S3 63 3RT1044-1A.. 3RU1146-4JBO (45-63) A 0.95 0.9 1 0.9 0.65 1 1 1.6 0.92 1 1.5 0.92
3RW3045-1AB.. S3 75 3RT1045-1A.. 3RU1146-4KBO (57-75) A 0.95 0.85 1 0.9 0.5 1 1 1.6 0.92 1 1.5 0.92
3RW3046-1AB.. S3 100 3RT1046-1A.. 3RU1146-1MBO (80-100) 0.9 0.8 1 0.8 0.55 1 1 1.6 0.92 1 1.5 0.92
A

Table 8-10: Correction factors, 3RT contactor + 3RU therm. overload relay + 3RW soft starter
1) = SIRIUS 3RW301 .. soft starters cannot be used with a fan.
Combination of the 3RT1 contactor with an attached 3RU1 thermal overload

8-25
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.3.3.4 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RB10 electronic overload relay and 3RW3 soft
starter

The contactor, electronic overload relay, and soft starter can be connected in
two ways:
• Combining a 3RT1 contactor with an attached 3 RB10 electronic overload
relay, a connecting lead, and a 3RW30/31 soft starter
• Combining a 3RT1 contactor with a connecting lead and a combination of
a 3RW30/01 soft starter with an attached 3RB10 electronic overload relay

3RT + 3RB10 + connect-

ing lead + 3RW3 Rail 1:
Combination of a 3RT1 contactor and 3RT
a 3RB10 electronic overload relay

3RB10

Connecting
lead
Rail 2:
3RW30/31 soft starter 3RW

Figure 8-12: 3RT+3RB10+3RW3 combination

Minimum clearance For thermal reasons, a minimum clearance is necessary between the con-
tactor/overload relay combination and the soft starter, as is a minimum
length of the connecting leads.
The following table specifies the minimum clearances and minimum lengths
of the connecting leads for the various frame sizes:

Minimum clearance between Minimum length of the

Frame size rail 1 and rail 2 connecting lead
(center to center) in mm in mm

S00 160 100

S0 200 150

S2 240 200

S3 300 250
Table 8-11: 3RT + 3RB10 + 3RW3 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/minimum lengths

SIRIUS System Manual

8-26 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

3RT + connecting lead +

3RB10 + 3RW3 Rail 1:
3RT1 contactor 3RT

Rail 2:
3RW
Combination of 3RW30/31 soft
starter and 3RB10 electronic
overload relay 3RB10

Figure 8-13: 3RT+3RW3+3RB10 combination

Minimum clearances Minimum clearance between Minimum length of the

Frame size rail 1 and rail 2 connecting lead
(center to center) in mm in mm

S00 100 100

S0 140 150

S2 180 200

S3 240 250
Table 8-12: 3RT1 + 3RW30/31 + 3RB10 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/minimum
lengths

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-27
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Correction factors: 3RT Combining a 3RT1 contactor with an attached 3RB10 electronic overload
+ 3RB10 + 3RW3 relay, a connecting lead, and a 3RW30/31 soft starter
Correction factor

Stand-alone installation Installed side by side Stand-alone installation Installed side by side

1)
1)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Set value of the el. overload relay

-
-
With fan

1.7
1.7
1.7
1.9
1.7
1.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
1)
1)
Correction factor for switching frequency

-
-
Correction factor

1)
1)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rated current for the device

-
-
Correction factor

1)
1)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Current setting of the circuit breaker

-
-
With fan

2.2
1.8
1.8
1.8

1.8
1.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
1)
1)
Correction factor for switching frequency

-
-
Correction factor

1)
1)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rated current for the device

-
-
Correction factor

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Set value of the el. overload relay
Without fan

0.45

0.35
0.35

0.55
0.5
0.5

0.4

0.6
0.5
Correction factor for switching frequency

?
?
Correction factor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rated current for the device

Correction factor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Set value of the el. overload relay
Without fan

0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
0.75
0.65
0.85
0.85
0.85

0.75
0.8
Correction factor for switching frequency

1) = SIRIUS 3RW301 .. soft starters cannot be used with a fan.

Correction factor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rated current for the device 1
3RT1044-1A.. 3RB1046-1EBO (25-100)A
3RT1045-1A.. 3RB1046-1EBO (25-100)A
3RT1046-1A.. 3RB1046-1EBO (25-100)A
3RB1036-1UBO (15-50)A
3RB1036-1UBO (15-50)A
3RB1036-1UBO (15-50)A
3RB1026-1QBO (6-25)A
3RB1026-1QBO (6-25)A
3RB1026-1QBO (6-25)A
(3-12)A
(3-12)A

Setting range of the overload relay

3RB1016-1SBO
3RB1016-1SBO

Order number
of electronic overload relay
3RT1024-1A..
3RT1025-1A..
3RT1026-1A..
3RT1034-1A..
3RT1035-1A..
3RT1036-1A..
3RT1015-1A..
3RT1016-1A..

Contactor order number

Device rated current in A

12.5

100
25
32
38
45
63
75
16
6
9

at an ambient temperature of 40 °C
S00
S00

Frame size
S0
S0
S0
S2
S2
S2
S3
S3
S3
3RW3034-1AB..
3RW3035-1AB..
3RW3036-1AB..
3RW3044-1AB..
3RW3045-1AB..
3RW3046-1AB..
3RW3014-1CB..
3RW3016-1CB..
3RW3.24-1AB..
3RW3.25-1AB..
3RW3.26-1AB..

Order number

Table 8-13: Correction factors, 3RT contactor + 3RB10 electronic overload relay + 3RW soft starter

SIRIUS System Manual

8-28 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.3.4 Circuit example

Circuit example (variant with UC110-230 V):

L
N

L1 L2 L3 A2 A1
110...230V UC

IN1 End of startup

14/23
T1 T2 T3 13 24

On Off

13
ON G1
14

STO

1
IN A1
A2

Figure 8-14: Circuit example, 3RW3

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-29
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.3.5 Commissioning

Every SIRIUS 3RW soft starter comes with the following warning, which it is
imperative to heed:

Caution
This device has been tested carefully at the factory and found to be in wor-
king order.
During transportation, however, it may have been subject to stresses over
which we have no control. The bypass relays in the main circuit may be in an
undefined state.
In the interests of complete safety, the following procedure should be used
at commissioning or after the replacement of the SIRIUS soft starter:

First, apply the supply voltage to A1/A2 in order to put the impulse series
relays in a defined switching state.

Then, switch on the main circuit (L1/L2/L3).

If you do not do this, the motor can be switched on inadvertently and cause
damage to people or parts of the system.

Settings

3RW30 3RW31

t R on t R1

uS uS

t R off t R2

Figure 8-15: Settings, 3RW3

Note
At commissioning, the settings of the potentiometers for the ramp time and
the starting voltage should remain unchanged. These set values must be
obtained in a trial.

SIRIUS System Manual

8-30 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Changing settings The potentiometer settings are scanned before each switching operation
("ON" or "OFF").
If, for example, the setting of the potentiometer for starting time is changed
while the motor is running up, the change does not come into effect until
the next start.

Starting voltage The starting voltage should be set to a value at which the motor starts rap-
idly.

Ramp time The ramp time should be set such that the motor can run up within the time
defined in this way.
If the star time for star-delta starting is known, the ramp time can be set to
this value.

Coasting-down time The potentiometer for the coasting-down time is for setting the duration of
the voltage ramp for coasting down. This parameter can be used to make
the motor run-down longer than it would be if the motor were merely to
coast to a stop.
The motor coasts to a stop on its own if this potentiometer is set to a value
of 0.

Switching frequency To prevent thermal overloading of the devices, the maximum permissible
switching frequency must be adhered to and the correction factor tables
must be used (see the installation guidelines in Section 8.3.2).

Starting time In order to obtain optimum operating conditions for the 3RW3 soft starter,
the setting for the starting time should be approx. 1 second longer than the
resultant motor run-up time, in order to ensure that the internal jumpering
contacts do not have to carry the starting current. This protects the internal
jumpering contacts and increases their service life. Longer starting times
increase the thermal load on the devices and the motor unnecessarily and
lead to a reduction in the permissible switching frequency.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-31
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Position of the termi- 3RW30

nals The following graphic illustrates the position of the terminals and the poten-
tiometers for adjustment.
Frame size S00 Frame size S0 to S3
3RW301. 3RW302./303./304.
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3

1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 IN1 A1

A2 A1 1

3RW

5
5
10
10 0 20s

0 20s
min max
5
10
min max
5
0 20s
10

0 20s 13 14/23 24

2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 A2 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3

Figure 8-16: Position of the terminals and the potentiometers for adjustment

3RW31
The 3RW31 soft starters are available in frame size S0. Outwardly, they dif-
fer from the 3RW30 in the labeling of the contacts and the terminals:
• There is no BYPASSED auxiliary contact. The free contact is used to
enable the necessary drive contact IN2 to switch between the ramp
times tR1 and tR2.
• The 3RW31 does not have a coasting-down ramp. The potentiometer with
which the coasting-down time is adjusted on the 3RW30 is used here to
set the second ramp time tR2.
• There is no ON auxiliary contact.

Line length of the con- To eliminate problems with the cable coupler capacitances, the control cable
trol cable should be shorter than 15 m. (This is based on devices with a rated control
supply voltage of UC 24 V to 50 m.)
To eliminate problems in control cables that are fed out of the cubicle, cou-
pling links must be used.

8.3.6 Event messages and diagnostics

Event messages

Ready for operation

Continuous
READY LED while starting up or coasting
Flashing
down
BYPASSED LED Continuous Bypassed

Table 8-14: 3RW30/31 event messages

SIRIUS System Manual

8-32 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Diagnostics

Malfunction Possible cause Remedy

• Check and adapt the supply
READY LED off • Supply voltage too low
voltage at A1, A2
• No supply voltage • Check fuses/line contactor
• Check fuses/line contactor
No reaction to con- • Phase loss
• Check voltages at L1 to L3
trol input IN
(READY LED on) • Connect to IN as shown in the graphic
• Wrong cable connected to IN
of the terminals
• No load • Connect the motor
• The line voltage is switched off
Start the motor
and on in continuous operation • Always switch the line contactor off and
directly
without operation of the con- on in conjunction with control input IN
(BYPASSED LED on)
trol input IN
Table 8-15: 3RW30/31 diagnostics

8.3.7 Timing diagram

Starting and coasting- The following timing diagram shows the switchover times when the device
down behavior is switched on/off:

L1-L2-L3

A1-A2

IN

Bypass

T1-T2-T3
UN

US

Switchover delay approx. 30 ms

Switchover
Switchover delay
delay approx.
approx. 30
30 ms
ms
On-delay approx. 80 ms ON OFF
command command

ON
command

Figure 8-17: Starting and coasting-down behavior

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-33
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Supply interruption in If the load voltage is switched off in the bypassed state while the auxiliary
bypassed state supply continues to be applied at terminals A1/A2, the soft starter performs
a direct start of the motor after the load voltage is switched on again. To pre-
vent this, the "on" command must be removed in the event of the loss of the
main voltage.
The following graphic illustrates what happens when the supply is inter-
rupted in the bypassed state:

L1-L2-L3

A1-A2

IN
Bypass

T1-T2-T3
UN
Direct start
US

Control supply Startup completed

voltage on Bypass closes
To avoid a direct start after the return of
Main voltage Failure of the the main voltage, the ON command must
on main voltage
be removed in the event of the failure
failure of the main voltage (Toff>= xx ms)
Start command Main voltage
returns

Figure 8-18: Supply interruption in the bypassed state

SIRIUS System Manual

8-34 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.4 Accessories
The following accessories are available for the 3RW3 soft starters:

Description Order number

Fan for 3RW3.2.. 3RW3926-8A

Fan for 3RW303..

3RW3936-8A
and 3RW304..

Terminal covers for box covers for

3RT1936-4EA2
3RW303..

Terminal covers for box covers for

3RT1946-4EA2
3RW304..

Terminal cover for bar connection for

3RT1946-4EA1
3RW304..

Link modules for combination with 3RV1

3RA19.1-1A (frame sizes S00 to S3)
circuit breaker

RC element for control from PLC 3TX7462-3T

Table 8-16: Accessories, 3RW30/31

Control of the fan The fan is controlled by the control electronics of the soft starter.
It runs at the following times:
• When the fan is switched on: approx. 0.5 seconds after the bypass con-
tacts close (end-of-startup signal)
• When the fan is switched off: approx. 0.5 hours after the soft starter is
switched off

Attachment of the fan The fan is snapped into the recess provided on the underside of the soft
starter, and the plug-in cable is inserted in the corresponding connector. The
direction of installation is indicated on the fan by an arrow.
Additional parameter assignment is not necessary.
These fan modules mean that the starter can be installed in any position.
The only exception to this is when the fan cannot blow against the convec-
tion downward from above.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-35
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Attachment of the fan

Figure 8-19: Accessories: attachment of the fan

Terminal covers To provide additional finger protection, for frame sizes S2 and S3 the termi-
nal covers of the 3RT1 contactors of the same frame sizes can be used.
Installation on the soft starter is analogous to that on the contactors.

Link modules The same link modules are available for building fuseless feeders (soft
starter + 3RV circuit breaker) as are used for the 3RT contactor + 3RV circuit
breaker combinations.
Refer to the information and assignment tables in Section 8.3.2, "Installation
guidelines".

RC element If the 3RW30/31 soft starter is to be controlled from a PLC with a Triac or
thyristor output, malfunctioning can be avoided with an RC element. If there
is leakage current of more than 1 mA, without an RC element the soft
starter may interpret the drop in voltage that occurs at the input as an "ON"
command.

Connection example for

an RC element
Auxiliary supply

PLC control contact

RC element

A2 A1 IN1

3RW30/31...

Figure 8-20: Connection example with an RC element

SIRIUS System Manual

8-36 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.5 Mounting and connection

8.5.1 Mounting

Snap-on attachment

The 3RW30 soft starters are snapped onto 35 mm rails in acc. with
DIN EN 50 022 without a tool.
The starter is placed on the upper edge of the rail and pressed downward
until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail.
Frame sizes S00 and S0 can be removed just as easily: The starters are
pressed downward so that the tension of the attachment springs is loos-
ened, and the starters can be removed.
In the case of frame sizes S2 and S3, these attachment springs are released
by a lug on the underside of the starter that can be moved using a screw-
driver.

8.5.2 Connection

Screw-type terminals The 3RW3 electronic soft starters are available with the SIGUT‚ terminal sys-
tem and plus-minus POZIDRIV 2 screws.

Conductor cross-sec- The following table shows the permissible conductor cross-sections for the
tions 3RW30 electronic soft starters:

3RW301. 3RW302.
3RW303. 3RW304..
L1 L2 L3 3RW312.
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1/A2; NO/NC L1 L2 L3

min
0.8 to 1.2 Nm 2 to 2.5 Nm 3 to 4.5 Nm 22 4 to 6 Nm
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / 4
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb.in 18 to 22 lb.in 27 to 40 lb.in 35 to 53 lb.in
PZ2

10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm²) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²) 13 17

2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 16 mm²)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm²) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²)

10 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm²) 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm²) 17 2 x (2.5 to 35 mm²)

2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²)
2 x (2.5 to 6 mm²) 1 x (0.75 to 25 mm²) 1 x (2.5 to 50 mm²)

13 2 x (0.75 to 25 mm²) 17 2 x (10 to 50 mm²)

---- ---- ----
1 x (0.75 to 35 mm²) 1 x (10 to 70 mm²)

2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0)

AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) AWG 1 x (18 to 2) AWG 1 x (10 to 2/0)

Table 8-17: Conductor cross-sections, 3RW30/31

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-37
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.5.3 Circuit diagrams

There are two ways to connect up the 3RW3 soft starter:

• Control by button and locking of the ON button via the "ON" auxiliary con-
tact of the 3RW3
• Control by switch

N (L-) L1 (L+) ON/OFF L1 (L+)

K1
OFF

A2 A1 1 IN1 A1
K1
ON

K1

A2

N (L-)

Figure 8-21: Circuit diagrams, 3RW3

L3RW30
3RW302.
3RW303./3RW304

N (L-) L1 (L+)
F1
OFF
K1 3RT
A2 A1 1 3RV
3RU/3RB10
I>

3RW30 3RW30
13 14/23 24

ON
M M
3~ 3~

Figure 8-22: Circuit diagrams, 3RW30

SIRIUS System Manual

8-38 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

3RW31 N (L-) L1 (L+) N (L-) L1 (L+)

ON/OFF
Ramp 1 K1
ON/OFF
Ramp 2 K2
A2 A1 1 A2 A1 1

2 2

OFF
F1
F2
3RW31
F3

3RT K1 K2 3RT
ON K1 ON K2
Ramp 1 Ramp 2

3RU/3RB10 F2 F3 3RU/3RB10
K2 K1

K1 K2

M
3~
. /.P

Figure 8-23: Circuit diagrams, 3RW31

Automatic operation Direct starting of the soft starter is possible as long as the auxiliary supply is
applied at terminals A1 and A2. To this end, a jumper is required between
the auxiliary supply contact A1 and the control contact IN.
The following must be taken into consideration:
• An on delay of up to 4 seconds can occur, depending on the frame size.
• Soft coasting down is no longer possible after the auxiliary supply is
switched off.

Control via PLC The 3RW3 soft starter can be controlled by means of a programmable con-
troller (PLC). It is connected up in the same way as for control via switch.

Important
Always ensure that A1 and A2 are connected up correctly. Although polarity
reversal cannot damage the device, it can lead to malfunctioning.

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-39
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Control of a motor with An electromechanical brake with infeed from the main voltage (L1/L2/L3)
an electromechanical should not be connected directly to the output of the soft starter. An electro-
brake mechanical brake should be controlled by means of a separate contactor (K1
in the circuit diagram below):

L1
L2 Ue
L3

Q1
L+
I>> I>> I>> L- Us
F

K1 STO

L1 L2 L3 A2 A1 IN
G1 ON BYPASSED
3RW30
AN
T1 T2 T3 13 23 24
14
A1
K1 BR BR2 U V W K1
M A2
3k

Figure 8-24: Motor control with an electromechanical brake

SIRIUS System Manual

8-40 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.6 Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm)

g
k 5 f 5

i j a e d m

h
b n
c

mm a b c d e f g h i j k l m n
3RW301. 97.5 45 93 95 66 51 -- 7.5 76 -- 86 -- 90 35
3RW302./3RW312. 125 45 119 125 81 63 96 7 101 63 14 7 115 35
3RW303. 160 55 143 141 95 63 115 8 119 77 18 7 150 30
3RW304. 170 70 183 162 108 87 156 8 132 87 22.5 7 160 60

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-41
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.7 Technical specifications

8.7.1 Control electronics/power electronics

Control electronics
Type 3RW3. ..-1.B0. 3RW3. ..-1.B1.
Rated control supply voltage V UC 24 UC 110 to 230
Rated control supply current mA Approx. 50 Approx. 25 to
20
Rated frequency at AC Hz 50/60 ± 10%
Power electronics
Type 3RW3. ..-1.B.4 3RW3. ..-1.B.5 3RW30 ..-
1AA12
Voltage operating range V 200 AC to 460 AC, three-phase 460 AC to 575 AC, three phase 115 AC to
(± 10%) (± 10% - 15%) 240 AC, single-
phase
(±10%)
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10%
Permissible site altitude Reduction of IE
Up to 1000 m above sea level 100%
Up to 2000 m above sea level 92%
Up to 3000 m above sea level 85%
Up to 4000 m ab. sea level1) 78%
Installation position Without additional fan The soft starters are designed for operation when mounted in a vertical position.
With additional fan 3) Any installation position (except vertical rotated by 180 °)
Type 3RW30 1. 3RW3. 2. 3RW30 3. 3RW30 4.
Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3
Continuous operation (% of Ie) % 100
Minimum load2) (% of Ie); At 40 °C % 4
Permissible ambient temperature °C –25 to +60 (derating as of 40 °C, see below)
Switching capacity of the auxiliary 230 V/AC-15 A 4) 3 3 3
contacts 230 V/DC-13 A 4) 0.1 0.1 0.1
24 V/DC-13 A 4) 1 1 1
Type 3RW30 14 3RW30 16 3RW30 24 3RW30 25 3RW30 26
Current-carrying capacity
Rated operational current Ie
in acc. with IEC At 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A 6/5/4 9/8/7 12.5/11/9 16/14/12 25/21/18
Rated operational current Ie
in acc. with UL/CSA At 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A 4.8/4.8/4 7.8/7.8/7 11/11/9 17.5/14/12 25/21/18
Power loss at continuous rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 5 7 7 9 13
Power loss when the max. switching frequency is exploited W 5 6 7 8 9
Permissible starts per hour without the use of a fan
Given intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 °C 1/h 60 40 30 12
Duty cycle = 30%; stand-alone installation % 250 x Ie, 2 s 300 x Ie, 2 s
Permissible starts per hour with the use of a fan
Given intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 °C 1/h –3) 54 21
Duty cycle = 30%; stand-alone installation
Idle time after continuous opera- s 0 200
tion
With Ie before a new start
Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529 IP 20 (terminal housing IP 00)

SIRIUS System Manual

8-42 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Conductor cross-sections
Screw-type terminals Auxiliary conductors:
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) in acc. with IEC 60 947; max. 2 x (0.75 to 4)
for standard screwdrivers Finely stranded with wire end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
ferrule
size 2 and Pozidriv 2
AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 to 14)
single- or multi-core M 3, PZ2
- Terminal screws Nm 0.8 to 1.0 0.8 to 1.0
- Tightening torque lb.in 7.1 to 8.9 7.1 to 8.9

Main conductors:
Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (1 to 2.5)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6)
Finely stranded with wire end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5)
ferrule 2 x (2.5 to 6)
Multi-core mm2 – –
Type 3RW30 14 3RW30 16 3RW30 24 3RW30 25 3RW30 26
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10)
- Terminal screws M 3, PZ2 M 4, PZ2
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 2 to 2.2
lb.in 7 to 10.3 18 to 22
1)Over 4000 m on request
2)The rated current for the motor (specified on the motor's type plate) should amount at least to the specified percentage of the SIRIUS soft
starter's device rated current Ie.
3)In the case of frame size S00, it is not possible to install the fan provided as an accessory.
4)Frame size S00 does not have any auxiliary contacts.

Power electronics
Type 3RW30 34 3RW30 35 3RW30 36 3RW30 44 3RW30 45 3RW30 46
Current-carrying capacity
Rated operational current Ie
in acc. with IEC At 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A 32/27/23 38/32/27 45/38/32 63/54/46 75/64/54 100/85/72
Rated operational current Ie
in acc. with UL/CSA At 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A 27/27/23 34/32/27 42/38/32 62/54/46 68/64/54 99/85/72
Power loss at continuous rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 10 13 17 13 16 26
Permissible starts per hour
Given interm. duty S4, Tu = 40 °C 1/h 20 15 5 20 30 15
Duty cycle = 30% % 300 x Ie, 3 s 300 x Ie, 4s
Permissible starts per hour with the use of a fan
Given interm. duty S4, Tu = 40 °C 1/h 44 27 9 32 48 24
Duty cycle = 30%; stand-alone installation
Idle time after cont. operation s 0 400 0
with Ie before a new start
Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529 IP 20 (terminal housing IP 00) IP 201)

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-43
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Conductor cross-sections
Screw-type terminals Auxiliary conductors:
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) in acc. with IEC 60 947; max. 2 x (0.75 to 4)
for standard screwdrivers Finely stranded with wire mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
end ferrule
size 2 and Pozidriv 2 AWG cables,
single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14)
- Terminal screws M3
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.0
lb.in 7.1 to 8.9
Main conductors:
Single-core mm2 2 x (0.75 to 16)
Finely stranded with wire mm2 2 x (0.75 to 16)
end ferrule 1 x (0.75 to 25)

Multi-core mm2 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50)

1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70)
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0)
1 x (18 to 2) 1 x (10 to 2/0)
- Terminal screws M 6, box terminal, PZ2 M6 (Allan screw)
- Tightening torque Nm 3 to 4.5 4 to 6
lb.in 27 to 40 35 to 53

General specifications
Standard Parameters
EMC noise immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2, Severity 3: 6/8 kV
El. magn. RF fields IEC 1000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 to 1000 MHz with 80% at 1 kHz
Severity 3, 10 V/m
Conducted RF disturbance IEC 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 80 MHz to 1000 MHz with 80 %
EN 60 947-4-2 at 1 kHz
SN-IACS 10 V at 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz
3 V at 10 kHz to 80 MHz
Burst IEC 1000-4-4 Severity 3: 1/2 kV
Surge IEC 1000-4-5 Severity 3: 1/2 kV
EMC emitted interference
EMC radio interference intensity CISPR 11/09.1990 Limit value of class B at 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage CISPR 11/09.1990 (0.15 MHz to 30 MHz): device class A (industry)
EN 60 947-4-2

1) IP 20 only with attached box terminal (delivery state). Without box terminal IP 00.
2) Device class B (public power supply networks) is complied with only in the case of variants 3RW3.-1AB0. with control supply voltage UC
of 24 V. For the 3RW3.-1A.1. variants with a control supply voltage UC of 110 V to 230 V, single-stage filters (e.g. type B84143-A...) must be
connected upstream.

SIRIUS System Manual

8-44 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.7.2 Short-circuit protection and fuse coordination

IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 draws a distinction between two
coordination types, known as coordination type 1 and coordination type 2. In
both coordination types, the short circuit to be dealt with is reliably discon-
nected. The differences lie only in the degree to which the device is dam-
aged after a short circuit.

Coordination type 1 The motor feeder can be operable after each short-circuit disconnection.
Damage to the soft starter is possible. The circuit breaker itself always
attains coordination type 1.

Coordination type 2 After a short-circuit event there must be no damage to the soft starter or
any other switching device; only the backup fuse may be destroyed. The
actual motor feeder can be put into operation again immediately once the
short circuit fuse has been replaced.

Maximum short-circuit All the specified fuse configurations are designed for a maximum short-cir-
current cuit current of 50 kA. This ensures that short circuits of 50 kA can be dis-
connected without posing a threat to persons or the system.

Motor feeder: Note on configuration

coordination type 1 A fuseless configuration is recommended for motor feeders (i.e. the combi-
nation of a 3RV circuit breakers and a 3RW30 soft starter). Coordination type
1 is thus attained.

Motor feeder: To set up a motor feeder of coordination type 2, the feeder must be fused
coordination type 2 (i.e. the motor must be provided with overload protection).
The following can be used:
• The 3NE1 all-range fuse, which unifies line protection and semiconductor
protection
• The 3NE8 semiconductor protection fuse, in which case additional protec-
tion must be provided for the line

Comparison of coordi- The configuration variant on the basis of coordination type 2 is associated
nation types 1 and 2 with higher costs than that of coordination type 1, which is why the fuseless
configuration (coordination type 1) is recommended. The advantages are:
• Fewer components in the cubicle
• Less effort required for wiring
• Less cubicle space required
• Lower price

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-45
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Fuse configurations The following table specifies the fuse configuration (coordination type 2) for
with SITOR 3NE1..-0 3RW30/31 with SITOR fuses 3NE1..-0 (short-circuit and line protection);
max. short-circuit current 50 kA:

Order number Order number Rated current Frame size of

Soft starter of the fuse of the fuse the fuse
MLFB MLFB A
3RW3014 3NE1814-01) 20 000
1)
3RW3016 3NE1815-0 25 000
3RW3024/3RW3124 3NE1815-02) 25 000
2)
3RW3025/3RW3125 3NE1815-0 25 000
3RW3026/3RW3126 3NE1802-02) 40 000
2)
3RW3034 3NE1818-0 63 000
3RW3035 3NE1820-02) 80 000
2)
3RW3036 3NE1820-0 80 000
3RW3044 3NE1820-02) 80 000
2)
3RW3045 3NE1021-0 100 00
3RW3046 --3) -- --
Table 8-18: Fuse configurations (SITOR)

1)Fuse coordination for max. 400 V

2)Fuse coordination for max. 500 V
3)Fuse coordination with all-range fuses not possible;
pure semiconductor protection fuses plus circuit breakers
can be used instead (see following table)

SIRIUS System Manual

8-46 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Fuse configurations The following table specifies the fuse configuration (coordination type 2) for
with SITOR 3NE8 3RW30/31 with SITOR fuses 3NE8 (semiconductor protection is provided by
the fuse; line protection and overload protection are provided by the circuit
breaker); max. short-circuit current 50 kA/400 V:

Order
Order Rated cur- Frame
Order number number Link module
number rent of the size of
Soft starter of the circuit 3RW - 3RV
of the fuse fuse the fuse
breaker2)
MLFB MLFB A Size MLFB MLFB3)
3RW3014 3NE8003 35 00 3RV1011 3RA1911-1A
3RW3016 3NE8003 35 00 3RV1011 3RA1911-1A
3RW3024/3RW3124 3NE8003 35 00 3RV1021 3RA1921-1A
3RW3025/3RW3125 3NE8003 35 00 3RV1021 3RA1921-1A
1)
3RW3026/3RW3126 -- -- -- -- --
3RW3034 3NE8022 125 00 3RV1031 3RA1931-1A
3RW3035 3NE8024 160 00 3RV1031 3RA1931-1A
3RW3036 3NE8024 160 00 3RV1031 3RA1931-1A
3RW3044 3NE8024 160 00 3RV1041 3RA1941-1A
3RW3045 3NE8024 160 00 3RV1041 3RA1941-1A
3RW3046 3NE8024 160 00 3RV1041 3RA1941-1A
Table 8-19: Fuse configurations (SITOR)

1) Coordination with pure semiconductor protection fuses is not possible;

all-range fuses 3NE1..-0 can be used (see the table above)
2) The selection and setting of the circuit breaker is based on the rated cur-
rent for the motor
3) Note the unit of quantity
If the motor is to be configured to meet UL requirements, the order number
of the fuse must be specified (3NE80..-1).

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-47
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Fuseless configuration The following table specifies the components of the fuseless configuration
(coordination type 1) for 3RW30/31; short-circuit current of 50 kA/400 V:

Order number
Order number
of the circuit Link module
of the soft starter
breaker1)
MLFB MLFB MLFB3)
3RW3014 3RV10112) 3RA1911-1A
3RW3016 3RV10112) 3RA1911-1A
3RW3024/3RW3124 3RV1021 3RA1921-1A
3RW3025/3RW3125 3RV1021 3RA1921-1A
3RW3026/3RW3126 3RV1021 3RA1921-1A
3RW3034 3RV1031 3RA1931-1A
3RW3035 3RV1031 3RA1931-1A
3RW3036 3RV1031 3RA1931-1A
3RW3044 3RV1041 3RA1941-1A
3RW3045 3RV1041 3RA1941-1A
3RW3046 3RV1041 3RA1941-1A
Table 8-20: Motor feeder: fuseless configuration

1) The selection and setting of the circuit breaker is based on the rated cur-
rent for the motor
2) 50 mm clearance is required above and below between the 3RW and
grounded parts
3) Note the unit of quantity

SIRIUS System Manual

8-48 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

Fused configuration The following table specifies the components of the fused configuration
(coordination type 1) for 3RW30/31; short-circuit current of 50 kA/400 V:

Order
Order number Order
Order number Order Fuse rated number
of the therm. number
of the soft number current/ of the elec-
overload of the
starter of the fuse frame size 1) tron. over-
relay contactor
load relay1)
MLFB MLFB A / size MLFB MLFB MLFB
3RW3014 3NA3810 25 / 00 3RU1116 2)4) 3RB10162)4) 3RT1015
3RW3016 3NA3810 25 / 00 3RU1116 2)4) 3RB10162)4) 3RT1016
3RW3024/
3NA3822 63 / 00 3RU11263) 3RB10263) 3RT1024
3RW3124
3RW3025/
3NA3822 63 / 00 3RU11263) 3RB10263) 3RT1025
3RW3125
3RW3026/
3NA3824 80 / 00 3RU11263) 3RB10263) 3RT1026
3RW3126
3RW3034 3NA3830 100 / 00 3RU11363) 3RT1034
3)
3RW3035 3NA3830 100 / 00 3RU1136 3RT1035
3RW3036 3NA3830 100 / 00 3RU11363) 3RT1036
3)
3RW3044 3NA3144 250 / 1 3RU1146 3RT1044
3RW3045 3NA3144 250 / 1 3RU11463) 3RT1045
3)
3RW3046 3NA3144 250 / 1 3RU1146 3RT1046
Table 8-21: Motor feeder: fused configuration

1) The selection and setting of the overload relay is based on the rated cur-
rent for the motor
2) Short-circuit current of 50 kA to max. 400 V
3) Short-circuit current of 50 kA to max. 500 V
4) 50 mm clearance is required above and below between the 3RW and
grounded parts

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-49
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.7.3 Site altitude

If the site altitude is above 1000 m, the following are necessary:

• A reduction in the rated current for thermal reasons
• A reduction in the rated voltage on account of the diminished dielectric
strength

Reductions as a func- The diagram below plots the reductions in rated current and rated operating
tion of site altitude voltage as a function of site altitude:

105
100 Ue reduction
95 Ie reduction
90
85
80
75
70
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

Site altitude in m
Figure 8-25: Reductions as a function of site altitude

SIRIUS System Manual

8-50 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.7.4 Specifications in acc. with IEC

The specified motor ratings are guide values.

The soft starter must be selected on the basis of the rated current Ie.
The motor ratings are based on the values specified in DIN 42 973 (kW) and NEC 96 / UL 508 (hp).

Ambient temperature = 40 °C
230 V 400 V Ie Order number 500 V Ie Order number
Pe in kW Pe in kW In A MLFB Pe in kW In A MLFB
1.5 3 6 3RW3014-1CB.4 - - -
2.2 4 9 3RW3016-1CB.4 - - -
3 5.5 12.5 3RW3024-1AB.4 7.5 12.5 3RW3024-1AB.5
4 7.5 16 3RW3025-1AB.4 7.5 16 3RW3025-1AB.5
5.5 11 25 3RW3026-1AB.4 15 25 3RW3026-1AB.5
7.5 15 32 3RW3034-1AB.4 18.5 32 3RW3034-1AB.5
11 18.5 38 3RW3035-1AB.4 22 38 3RW3035-1AB.5
11 22 45 3RW3036-1AB.4 30 45 3RW3036-1AB.5
19 30 63 3RW3044-1AB.4 37 63 3RW3044-1AB.5
22 37 75 3RW3045-1AB.4 45 75 3RW3045-1AB.5
30 55 100 3RW3046-1AB.4 70 100 3RW3046-1AB.5
Table 8-22: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 40° C

Ambient temperature = 50 °C
230 V 400V Ie Order number 500 V Ie Order number
Pe in kW Pe in kW In A MLFB Pe in kW In A MLFB
1.1 2.2 5 3RW3014-1CB.4 - - -
1.5 4 8 3RW3016-1CB.4 - - -
3 5.5 11 3RW3024-1AB.4 5.5 11 3RW3024-1AB.5
4 5-5 14 3RW3025-1AB.4 7.5 14 3RW3025-1AB.5
5.5 11 21 3RW3026-1AB.4 11 21 3RW3026-1AB.5
7.5 11 27 3RW3034-1AB.4 15 27 3RW3034-1AB.5
7.5 15 32 3RW3035-1AB.4 18.5 32 3RW3035-1AB.5
11 18.5 38 3RW3036-1AB.4 22 38 3RW3036-1AB.5
15 22 54 3RW3044-1AB.4 30 54 3RW3044-1AB.5
18.5 30 64 3RW3045-1AB.4 37 64 3RW3045-1AB.5
22 45 85 3RW3046-1AB-4 55 85 3RW3046-1AB.5
Table 8-23: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 50° C

Ambient temperature = 60 °C
230 V 400 V Ie Order number 500 V Ie Order number
Pe in kW Pe in kW In A MLFB Pe in kW In A MLFB
0.75 1.5 4 3RW3014-1CB.4 - - -
1.5 3 7 3RW3016-1CB.4 - - -
2.2 4 9 3RW3024-1AB.4 5.5 9 3RW3024-1AB.5
3 5.5 12 3RW3025-1AB.4 7.5 12 3RW3025-1AB.5
4 7.5 18 3RW3026-1AB.4 11 18 3RW3026-1AB.5
5.5 11 23 3RW3034-1AB.4 15 23 3RW3034-1AB.5
7.5 11 27 3RW3035-1AB.4 15 27 3RW3035-1AB.5
7.5 15 32 3RW3036-1AB.4 18.45 32 3RW3036-1AB.5
11 22 46 3RW3044-1AB.4 30 46 3RW3044-1AB.5
15 22 54 3RW3045-1AB.4 30 54 3RW3045-1AB.5
18.5 37 72 3RW3046-1AB.4 45 72 3RW3046-1AB.5
Table 8-24: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 60° C

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b 8-51
3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit

8.7.5 Specifications in acc. with NEMA

The specified motor ratings are guide values.

The soft starter must be selected on the basis of the rated current Ie.
The motor ratings are based on the values specified in DIN 42 973 (kW) and NEC 96 / UL 508 (hp).

Ambient temperature = 40 °C
200V 230 V 460V Ie Order number 460V 575V Ie Order number
Pe in hp Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB
1 1 3 4.8 3RW3014-1CB.4 - - - -
2 2 5 7.8 3RW3016-1CB.4 - - - -
3 3 7.5 11 3RW3024-1AB.4 7.5 10 11 3RW3024-1AB.5
5 5 10 17.5 3RW3025-1AB.4 10 15 17.5 3RW3025-1AB.5
7.5 7.5 15 25.3 3RW3026-1AB.4 15 20 25.3 3RW3026-1AB.5
7.5 7.5 20 27 3RW3034-1AB.4 20 25 27 3RW3034-1AB.5
10 10 25 34 3RW3035-1AB.4 25 30 34 3RW3035-1AB.5
10 15 30 42 3RW3036-1AB.4 30 40 42 3RW3036-1AB.5
20 20 40 62.1 3RW3044-1AB.4 40 60 62.1 3RW3044-1AB.5
20 25 50 68 3RW3045-1AB.4 50 60 68 3RW3045-1AB.5
30 30 75 99 3RW3046-1AB.4 75 100 99 3RW3046-1AB.5
Table 8-25: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 40° C

Ambient temperature = 50 °C
200V 230 V 460V Ie Order number 460V 575V Ie Order number
Pe in hp Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB
1 1 3 4.8 3RW3014-1CB.4 - - - -
2 2 5 7.8 3RW3016-1CB.4 - - - -
3 3 7.5 11 3RW3024-1AB.4 7.5 10 11 3RW3024-1AB.5
3 3 10 14 3RW3025-1AB.4 10 10 14 3RW3025-1AB.5
5 5 15 21 3RW3026-1AB.4 15 15 21 3RW3026-1AB.5
7.5 7.5 20 27 3RW3034-1AB.4 20 25 27 3RW3034-1AB.5
7.5 10 20 32 3RW3035-1AB.4 20 30 32 3RW3035-1AB.5
10 10 25 38 3RW3036-1AB.4 25 30 38 3RW3036-1AB.5
15 20 40 54 3RW3044-1AB.4 40 50 54 3RW3044-1AB.5
20 20 40 64 3RW3045-1AB.4 40 60 64 3RW3045-1AB.5
25 30 60 85 3RW3046-1AB.4 60 75 85 3RW3046-1AB.5
Table 8-26: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 50° C

Ambient temperature = 60 °C
200 V 230 V 460 V Ie Order number 460 V 575 V Ie Order number
Pe in hp Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB
0.75 0.75 2 4 3RW3014-1CB.4 - - - -
1.5 1.5 3 7 3RW3016-1CB.4 - - - -
2 2 5 9 3RW3024-1AB.4 5 7.5 9 3RW3024-1AB.5
3 3 7.5 12 3RW3025-1AB-4 7.5 10 12 3RW3025-1AB.5
5 5 10 18 3RW3026-1AB.4 10 15 18 3RW3026-1AB.5
5 7.5 15 23 3RW3034-1AB.4 15 20 23 3RW3034-1AB.5
7.5 7.5 20 27 3RW3035-1AB.4 20 25 27 3RW3035-1AB.5
7.5 10 20 32 3RW3036-1AB.4 20 30 32 3RW3036-1AB.5
10 15 30 46 3RW3044-1AB.4 30 40 46 3RW3044-1AB.5
15 20 40 54 3RW3045-1AB.4 40 50 54 3RW3045-1AB.5
20 25 50 72 3RW3046-1AB.4 50 60 72 3RW3046-1AB.5
Table 8-27: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 60° C

SIRIUS System Manual

8-52 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
Index

Numerics Coding plug set 7-20

35 mm rail 6-14 Coding plug set (7PX9904) 7-8
3-phase busbars 2-41, 2-42 Coil repeat terminals 4-13
3-phase feed-in terminal 2-42 Combination and wide-range voltages 7-6
3RB10 electronic overload relay 4-11 Combination voltage 7-6
3RB12 electronic overload relay 4-11 Commissioning 8-30
3RU11 thermal overload relays 4-10 Components 1-11
3RW3 soft starter 8-15 Conductor cross-sections 5-21, 6-15
3RW31 special variant 8-11 Connecting lead 6-12
Connection comb 6-12
A Connection example, 3RU10 4-32
Adding to the auxiliary contacts 3-53 Connection example, 3RU11 4-32
Adjustment scale 4-16 Connection plans for single-phase motors 4-33
Automatic reset 4-20 Contactors with an extended operating range 3-26
Auxiliary conducting path, integrated 3-52 Control supply voltage, failure 4-20
Auxiliary contact, BYPASSED 8-32 Coordination type 1 5-2
Auxiliary contactors 3-29 Coordination type 2 5-2
Auxiliary contacts 4-16, 8-12 Correction factors 8-20
Auxiliary switch 2-19 Cover 7-21
Auxiliary switch blocks 3-52 Current gain 6-10
Auxiliary switch repetition terminal 4-13 Current setting 8-20
Auxiliary switch, at side 3-55
Auxiliary switch, at the front 3-54 D
DC feedback 2-15
B Device holder 2-40
Banks of capacitors 3-25 Diagnostics 8-33
Base plate 2-45 Dimension drawings for the 3RV1 2-49
Bay 2-32 Direct attachment 6-7
Bistable 4-20 Direct current loads 2-11
Box terminal construction type 6-5 Direct starters 5-14
Busbar adapter 2-37 Disconnecting module 2-26
Busbar mounting 5-14, 5-20 Disconnector specifications 2-3
Busbar systems 2-37
E
C Electrical isolation 6-9
Cable coupler capacitances 8-32 Electromagnetic compatibility 7-2
Cage Clamp terminal 1-18 Electromagnetic overcurrent release 2-12
Cage-type clamping unit 1-18 Electromechanical remote reset 4-23
Capacitor switching capacity 3-26 EMC suppression module 3-80
Capacitor-switching contactors 3-25 End holder 6-13
Circuit breaker 3RV1 2-5 End plate, coupling links 6-13
Circuit diagrams 4-31, 5-23, 7-24, 8-38 Event messages 8-32
Circuit example 8-29 Explosion-proof motors 2-4, 4-14
Clock pulse generator 7-18 Extended terminal covers 8-13
Coasting-down time 8-31 External current transformers 4-13

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b Index-1
F N
Fan 8-13, 8-35 No load 8-33
Feed-in terminal block 3-44 Normal switching duty 8-3, 8-11
Frequency converter 8-8 Number of auxiliary switches, maximum 3-55
Front plates 2-33, 2-34
Function diagrams 7-10, 7-14 O
Function setting 7-9, 7-12 Off-delay 7-17
Functions 7-12 On-delay 7-16
Fuse monitoring 2-14 Operating limits 4-2
Operating temperature 7-5
G Operating time adjustment 7-8, 7-11
Galvanic isolation 6-10 Outgoing terminal rail 2-40
Ground fault 4-20 Output modules 6-5
Overcurrent release 2-6
H Overload release 2-6
Heavy starting 4-10
Holder for stand-alone installation 4-27 P
Housing 2-32 Parallel connection 3-83
Housings 2-10 Phase firing 8-9
Phase loss 8-33
I Phase loss sensitivity 2-11, 2-13
Identifying letters 7-13 Plug-in relay coupling links 6-6
Indicator light installation 2-36 Pole-changing motors 8-11
Input modules 6-5 Potentiometers 8-17
Inrush current 2-10 Power gain 6-10
Inrush currents 2-13 Precharging resistors 3-25
Installation guidelines 8-18 Push-in lugs 7-21
Interface modules 6-3
Interference 6-10 R
Isolating distance 8-3 Railway vehicles 2-4
Isolation 8-11 Ramp time 8-31
Ramp times 8-17
K Rated current 4-16
KTA certificate 2-4 Recovery time 4-17, 4-19
Reduction in starting current 8-6
L Reductions 8-16
Label set 7-12, 7-20 Relay coupling modules 6-4
Level adaptation 6-10 Remote reset, mechanical 4-24
Line lengths 8-19 Remote-controlled mechanism 2-23
Link modules 5-8 Repeatability 7-7
Load control 7-6 RESET button 4-15
Locking during maintenance work 2-30 Reset, automatic 4-20
Response threshold 2-16
M Retainer, coupling links 6-13
Main and emergency stop switches 2-17 Rotary switch extension for door 2-28
Making/breaking capacity 3-83
Manual/auto RESET 4-15 S
Manual/automatic switchover 4-17 Safe isolation 6-9
Meshed networks 2-16 Screw-on attachment 5-19
Modular system 1-10 Screw-type terminal 7-5
Molded plastic 2-33 Screw-type terminals 6-8
Molded-plastic front plates 2-33 Sealing cover 4-16
Monostable 4-20 Second ramp time 8-32
Mounting kits 5-5 Self-monitoring 4-20
Mounting onto contactors 4-26 Semiconductor coupling modules 6-4
Mounting systems 5-4 Series resistor 3-27
Multifunction 7-8 Setting 8-41

SIRIUS System Manual

Index-2 GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b
Setting accuracy 7-7 Tripping characteristics 2-13
Setting ranges 4-10 Tripping classes 4-2, 4-14
Settings 8-11 Tripping times 4-21
Shipbuilding certificates 2-4 Two-conductor connection 3-90
Ships 4-3 Two-tier construction type 6-5
Ships' systems 4-3 Two-wire time relay 7-6, 7-17
Shock protection 2-3, 4-2
Short-circuit breaking capacity 2-10 U
Short-circuit release 2-11 Undervoltage release 2-19
Side module 2-40 Uniformity 1-10
Signal transmission 6-10 Utilization category 4-9
SIKOSTART 3RW22 8-14
SIKOSTART 3RW34 8-15 V
Single-phase loads 2-11 Vertical installation position 3-88
Snap-on attachment 3-87, 5-18, 6-7, 6-14, 8-37
Soft coasting-down function 8-12 W
Soft starting function 8-12 Wide-range voltage 7-5
Stand-alone installation 8-18 Wire release 4-25
Standard 3RW30 variant 8-11 Wiring kits 5-8
Standards 2-3, 4-2, 7-2
Star starting 8-7
Star-delta combinations 8-16
Star-delta function 7-19
Start contact 7-5
Starter circuit breakers 4-9
Starter combinations 2-13
Starting current 8-6
Starting time 8-31
Starting torque 8-16
Starting voltage 8-16, 8-31
Stop button 4-15
Supply interruption in the bypassed state 8-34
Supply voltage 8-33
Surface casing 2-32
Switching capacitive loads 6-8
Switching capacity 7-2
Switching direct current 2-16
Switching frequency 8-20
Switching inductive loads 6-8

T
Technical specifications 2-58, 4-37, 8-41
Terminal covers 3-84, 8-13
Terminals for contactor coils 3-44
Thermal overload release 2-11, 2-13
Thermistor detector 4-19
Thermistor motor protection 4-12
Three-phase current asynchronous motors 8-6
Three-phase induction motors 2-13
Three-pole load 2-11
Time ranges 7-16
Time-current characteristics 2-3, 4-17, 4-18, 4-21
Time-delayed overload release 4-2
Timing diagram 8-33
Transformer protection 2-13
Tripping characteristic 4-18

SIRIUS System Manual

GWA 4NEB 430 0999-02b Index-3